Tarbelaassessment PDF

TARBELA 4TH EXTENSION
HYDROPOWER PROJECT
Prepared by Independent Consultants

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL ASSESSMENT
August 2011
Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority

(WAPDA)
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

Environmental and Social Assessment
Contents
List of Acronyms .......................................................................................................... xi
1
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1
Background ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
The Proposed Project .................................................................................. 1-1
1.3
The Environmental and Social Assessment ................................................. 1-3
1.4
Composition of Study Team ....................................................................... 1-5
Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework................................................... 2-1

2.1
General ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Pakistan ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3
2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 2-1

2.2.2 Environmental Legislation .............................................................. 2-1
2.2.3 National Environmental Guidelines and Policies ............................. 2-6
2.2.4 National Environmental Quality Standards ...................................... 2-7
2.2.5 Environment Regulatory Authorities ............................................... 2-8
International Treaties and Conventions ....................................................... 2-9
2.4
World Bank .............................................................................................. 2-10
2.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 2-10

2.4.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines ........................ 2-10
2.4.3 Operational Policies (OPs) of the World Bank .............................. 2-10
2.4.4 Applicable World Bank Policies ................................................... 2-12
2.4.5 Compliance Status with Pakistani and World Bank Policies .......... 2-13
Project Description ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1
Tarbela Dam Project Overview ................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Objectives of 4th Extension Project ............................................................ 3-1
3.3
Salient Features .......................................................................................... 3-1
3.4
Project Components.................................................................................... 3-1
3.5
3.4.1 Intake Arrangement......................................................................... 3-4

3.4.2 Penstock Connection to Tunnel 4 .................................................... 3-6
3.4.3 Proposed Powerhouse ..................................................................... 3-8
3.4.4 Mechanical and Electrical Plant ...................................................... 3-8
3.4.5 Switchyard .................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.6 Transmission Lines ....................................................................... 3-11
3.4.7 Tailrace ......................................................................................... 3-11
Other Components .................................................................................... 3-11
3.5.1 Labor Camps................................................................................. 3-11
3.5.2 Construction Materials .................................................................. 3-12
WAPDA
August 2011
ii

3.6
3.5.3 Waste Generation and Disposal ..................................................... 3-13

Program for Development......................................................................... 3-14
3.7
3.6.1 Construction Method of Tunnel 4 Raised Intake ............................ 3-14

Summary of Project Cost .......................................................................... 3-18
Need for Project and Analysis of Alternatives................................................... 4-1

4.1
Need for Project ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
4.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.2 Regional Context ............................................................................ 4-1
4.1.3 National Context ............................................................................. 4-2
4.1.4 Demand Trends ............................................................................... 4-3
Assessment of Alternatives ......................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-9

4.2.2 Without Project Option ................................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 Site Alternatives.............................................................................. 4-9
4.2.4 Alternatives for the Powerhouse ...................................................... 4-9
4.2.5 Alternatives for the Intake ............................................................. 4-15
4.2.6 Coffer Dam Option ....................................................................... 4-17
4.2.7 Alternatives for the Switchyard ..................................................... 4-17
4.2.8 Alternatives for the Type of Cement.............................................. 4-18
4.2.9 Method of Excavation and Drilling ............................................... 4-18
Stakeholder Consultations ................................................................................. 5-1
5.1
Introduction ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2
Objectives .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3
Identification of Stakeholders ..................................................................... 5-1
5.4
5.3.1 Primary Stakeholders ...................................................................... 5-2

5.3.2 Secondary Stakeholders .................................................................. 5-2
Consultation Process................................................................................... 5-2
5.5
5.4.1 Stakeholder Consultation during the Scoping Phase ........................ 5-3

5.4.2 Stakeholder Consultation during Detailed Assessment .................... 5-3
5.4.3 Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders.................................... 5-4
5.4.4 Consultation with Community Representatives ............................... 5-4
5.4.5 Grass Roots Consultation ................................................................ 5-5
5.4.6 Consultation Workshops ................................................................. 5-5
Gender Consultations ................................................................................. 5-6
5.6
Consultations during Project Execution ...................................................... 5-8
5.7
Information Disclosure ............................................................................... 5-8
Environmental and Social Baseline.................................................................... 6-1

6.1
WAPDA
August 2011
Overview .................................................................................................... 6-1
iii

6.2
Physical Environment ................................................................................. 6-1
6.3
6.2.1 Physiography .................................................................................. 6-1

6.2.2 Land Use......................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Climate ........................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.4 Temperature .................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.5 Rainfall ........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.6 Humidity......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.7 Evaporation..................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.8 Geology .......................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.9 Seismology ..................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.10 Soil ................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.11 Soil Analysis ................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.12 Rock Stability and Landslides ....................................................... 6-10
6.2.13 Sedimentation ............................................................................... 6-10
6.2.14 Hydrology ..................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.15 Flooding ....................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.16 Surface Water Quality ................................................................... 6-14
6.2.17 Ground Water Quality ................................................................... 6-15
6.2.18 Air Quality .................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.19 Noise ............................................................................................ 6-16
6.2.20 Traffic and Transport .................................................................... 6-17
Biological Environment ............................................................................ 6-20
6.4
6.3.1 Wetlands and biodiversity ............................................................. 6-20

6.3.2 Significance of Tarbela Reservoir for Bird Migration .................... 6-20
6.3.3 Significance of Ghazi-Barotha Lake .............................................. 6-20
6.3.4 Protected Areas/ Game Reserves ................................................... 6-21
6.3.5 Hunting and Other Threats ............................................................ 6-21
6.3.6 Nature Conservation ..................................................................... 6-21
6.3.7 Terrestrial Flora ............................................................................ 6-21
6.3.8 Terrestrial Fauna ........................................................................... 6-23
6.3.9 Fish and Fisheries ......................................................................... 6-26
Social-economic Baseline ......................................................................... 6-27
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
WAPDA
August 2011
Overview ...................................................................................... 6-27

Administrative Setup..................................................................... 6-28
Demography and Population ......................................................... 6-28
Economic Conditions .................................................................... 6-29
Social Infrastructure and Services ................................................. 6-31
Grazing ......................................................................................... 6-39
Cultural Heritage........................................................................... 6-39
Tourism and Recreation ................................................................ 6-40
iv

6.4.9 Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Social

Organizations ................................................................................ 6-40
6.4.10 Poverty Status ............................................................................... 6-40
6.4.11 Gender Issues in the Project Area .................................................. 6-40
6.4.12 Tarbela Legacy ............................................................................. 6-44
Other Relevant Non-project Related Issues ...................................................... 7-1
7.1
Risk of Earthquakes .................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Risk of Flooding ......................................................................................... 7-1
7.3
Climate Change .......................................................................................... 7-2
Significant Environmental Impacts of the Project and their Mitigations ........ 8-1
8.1
General ....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Assessment of Effects and Significance ...................................................... 8-1
8.3
8.2.1 Magnitude ....................................................................................... 8-1

8.2.2 Sensitivity ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Assigning Significance.................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures ........................................... 8-3
8.2.5 Uncertainty ..................................................................................... 8-3
Summary of Assessed Impacts.................................................................... 8-4
8.4
Impacts during Pre-construction Stage ...................................................... 8-10
8.5
8.4.1 Land Use Change .......................................................................... 8-10

8.4.2 Preparation of Facilities for Contractor(s) and Labor Force ........... 8-10
8.4.3 Hindrance and Damages during Mobilization and Transport of
Materials ....................................................................................... 8-12
Impacts during Construction Stage ........................................................... 8-12
8.5.1 Changed Topography/Land Form .................................................. 8-12
8.5.2 Reduced Irrigation Releases due to closure of Tunnel 4
and Tunnel 3 ................................................................................. 8-13
8.5.3 Reduced Power Generation ........................................................... 8-14
8.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water Quality ................................................. 8-14
8.5.5 Impact of Noise on Workers and Residential Areas ....................... 8-15
8.5.6 Risk of Landslides and Collapse of Slope during Construction ...... 8-16
8.5.7 Hindrance and Road Damage by Transport of Materials
over Land ...................................................................................... 8-17
8.5.8 Disturbance of Fauna and Quality of Habitat by Increased
Human Activities .......................................................................... 8-18
8.5.9 Soil and Water Pollution by Solid and Hazardous Wastes
and Waste Effluents from Labor Camps and
Construction Yards ....................................................................... 8-18
8.5.10 Impacts of Emissions of Gasses and Dust on Air Quality .............. 8-19
8.5.11 Removal of Natural Vegetation ..................................................... 8-19
WAPDA
August 2011

8.6
Impacts during Operation and Maintenance .............................................. 8-20

8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
Potential Impacts on Irrigation Water Releases ............................. 8-20

Risks of Landslides during Extreme Weather Conditions .............. 8-20
Operational Noise from New Power Station .................................. 8-20
Bird Collision with Transmission Cables....................................... 8-20
Increased Maintenance Activities .................................................. 8-20
Reduced Power Generation during Closure of Low Level
Intake Tunnel 3 and 4.................................................................... 8-21
Potential Social Impacts and their Mitigations ................................................. 9-1
9.1
General ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Summary of Assessed Impacts.................................................................... 9-1
9.3
Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage ....................................................... 9-4
9.4
9.3.1 Land Impacts .................................................................................. 9-4

Impacts and Opportunities during Construction Stage ................................. 9-4
9.5
9.4.1 Employment Opportunities during Construction.............................. 9-4

9.4.2 Construction Workers Rights ......................................................... 9-5
9.4.3 Prevention of Social Conflicts and Environmental Degradation:
Development of Workers Code of Conduct .................................... 9-6
9.4.4 Increased Health and Safety Risks................................................... 9-7
9.4.5 Construction Disturbances and Possible Conflicts with Local
Population ....................................................................................... 9-8
Social Assistance Program .......................................................................... 9-9
9.5.1 Community Development Assistance .............................................. 9-9

9.5.2 Addressing the Social Legacy of Previous Projects ....................... 9-10
10 Cumulative and Induced Impacts .................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Cumulative Impact of Investments in the Indus Basin Water System ........ 10-1
10.2 Plans for Storage Reservoirs ..................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Impact Downstream and on Delta and Coastal Zone ................................. 10-2
10.4 Preparation of a Master Plan for the Left Bank of Indus,
Delta and Coastal Zone ............................................................................. 10-2
10.5 Sediment Management Plan for the Basin and Tarbela ............................. 10-3
10.6 Improving Irrigation Efficiencies .............................................................. 10-3
10.7 Role of Project in Cumulative Impacts...................................................... 10-3
10.8 Possible Induced Impact ........................................................................... 10-4
11 Environmental and Social Management Plan ................................................. 11-1
11.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 11-1
11.2 Objectives of ESMP ................................................................................. 11-1
11.3 Institutional Arrangements........................................................................ 11-1
WAPDA
August 2011
vi

11.3.1 Inclusion of ESMP in Contract Documents ................................... 11-1

11.3.2 Implementation Responsibility ...................................................... 11-2
11.3.3 Construction: Establishment of Environmental and Social
Management Unit ......................................................................... 11-2
11.3.4 Operation: The WAPDA Environment Cell .................................. 11-3
11.3.5 Consultants Environment and Social Monitor .............................. 11-4
11.3.6 Contractors Environment and Social Supervisor(s) ...................... 11-4
11.4 Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening .................................... 11-4
11.4.1 Training and Awareness ................................................................ 11-4
11.4.2 Strengthening of WEC .................................................................. 11-5
11.4.3 Additional Capacity Building ........................................................ 11-6
11.5 Panel of Experts ....................................................................................... 11-6
11.6 Communication ........................................................................................ 11-6
11.7 Management and Monitoring Activities .................................................... 11-7
11.7.1 Structure of the Mitigation Plans ................................................... 11-7
11.7.2 Compliance Monitoring .............................................................. 11-23
11.7.3 Monitoring Predicted Effects....................................................... 11-23
11.7.4 Internal Audits ............................................................................ 11-27
11.7.5 External Audits (Third Party Validation) ..................................... 11-27
11.7.6 Management Reviews ................................................................. 11-27
11.8 Record Keeping ...................................................................................... 11-27
11.8.1 Monitoring Records .................................................................... 11-27
11.8.2 Complaints Records .................................................................... 11-28
11.8.3 Information Sources .................................................................... 11-28
11.8.4 Non-Compliance Report ............................................................. 11-29
11.8.5 Monthly Internal Reports ............................................................ 11-29
11.9 Grievance Mechanism ............................................................................ 11-29
11.9.1 Grievance Logging...................................................................... 11-30
11.10 Adequacy of Environmental and Social Management ............................. 11-31
11.11 Cost Estimates for Environmental Management and Monitoring............. 11-35
Annexes
Annex A:
Consultation Details
Annex B:
List of Flora and Fauna
Annex C:
Environmental Code of Practice
Annex D:
IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines
WAPDA
August 2011
vii

List of Table
Table 2.1: Triggering the World Bank Policies ................................................... 2-12
Table 2.2: Compliance of Project with GoP Legislation and WB
Safeguard Policies ................................................................................ 2-13
Table 3.1: Salient Features of the Project .............................................................. 3-3
Table 3.2: Estimated Cost of the Project .............................................................. 3-19
Table 4.1: Predicted Growth in Electrical Demand (DISCO-WISE
Load Forecast (MW)) ............................................................................ 4-4
Table 4.2: Existing Installed Capacity of PEPCO System as of 30 June 2010 ...... 4-6
Table 4.3: Current Generating Capacity and Shortfall in Pakistan ..................... 4-9
Table 4.4: Criteria of the Alternative Site Locations ........................................... 4-12
Table 5.1: Main Activities during Consultation Process ....................................... 5-2
Table 5.2: Summary of Stakeholders Concerns/Recommendations .................... 5-7
Table 6.1: Average Monthly Relative Humidity (%) ............................................. 6-5
Table 6.2: Soil Analysis of Project Area ................................................................. 6-9
Table 6.3: Mean Monthly Flow Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3) ......... 6-11
Table 6.4: Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 4 (Mm3) ......................... 6-12
Table 6.5: Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 5 (Mm3) ......................... 6-13
Table 6.6: Surface Water Quality of Project Area .............................................. 6-15
Table 6.7: Standards Adopted by WAPDA.......................................................... 6-15
Table 6.8: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results ........................................... 6-16
Table 6.9: Baseline Noise Monitoring Results ...................................................... 6-17
Table 6.10: Average Daily Traffic in the Project Area .......................................... 6-19
Table 6.11: Game Reserves in Haripur district ..................................................... 6-21
Table 6.12: Ghazi Area Forest Statement .............................................................. 6-22
Table 6.13: Faunal Species at the Various Project Areas Surveyed ..................... 6-25
Table 6.14: Tarbela Dam Reservoir Characteristics ............................................. 6-26
Table 6.15: Estimated Numbers of Households and Population in
Project Area ......................................................................................... 6-28
Table 6.16: Livestock in the Swabi and Haripur district ...................................... 6-30
Table 6.17: Health Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts ......................... 6-34
Table 6.18: Availability of Health Facilities in the Project Area........................... 6-34
Table 6.19: Educational Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts................. 6-35
Table 6.20: Education Facilities available in the Project Area ............................. 6-36
Table 6.21: Source of Drinking Water by Locality (%) ........................................ 6-37
WAPDA
August 2011
viii

Table 6.22: Level of Formal Education of Literate Female Respondents ............. 6-41
Table 6.23: Occupational Status of Women Respondents ..................................... 6-42
Table 6.24: Health Facilities Availed by Women in Last Year ............................. 6-42
Table 6.25: Most Common Diseases Prevailing in the Project Area ..................... 6-43
Table 6.26: Pressing Needs of Women ................................................................... 6-43
Table 6.27: Womens Preference for Skill Development ....................................... 6-44
Table 8.1: Parameters for Determining Magnitude............................................... 8-2
Table 8.2: Criteria for Determining Sensitivity ..................................................... 8-2
Table 8.3: Assessment of Impact Significance........................................................ 8-3
Table 8.4: Significance of Environmental Impacts ................................................ 8-5
Table 9.1: Significance of Social Impacts ............................................................... 9-2
Table 11.1: Environmental and Social Trainings .................................................. 11-5
Table 11.2: Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Plan Construction
(and Decommissioning) ....................................................................... 11-8
Table 11.3: Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan Operation..... 11-22
Table 11.4: Monitoring of Predicted Effects ........................................................ 11-25
Table 11.5: Grievance Classification Criteria ...................................................... 11-30
Table 11.6: Stakeholders Concerns/Recommendations and their Redressal .... 11-31
Table 11.7: Cost Estimates for Management and Monitoring Activities ............ 11-35
List of Figures
Figure 1.1: Tarbela Location Map ........................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1.2: Project Area and Location of Main Project Components .................... 1-4
Figure 2.1: Pakistan EIA Process............................................................................. 2-3
Figure 3.1: Satellite View of Tarbela Dam .............................................................. 3-2
Figure 3.2: Hydro Scheme Schematic ...................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.3: Option 2 Section (a) ............................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3.4: Geologic Section along Centre-line of Tunnel 4.................................... 3-6
Figure 3.5: Penstock Connection and Powerhouse Location .................................. 3-7
Figure 3.6: Alternate Powerhouse Locations........................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.7: Transversal Section View of Powerhouse through Unit Axis .............. 3-9
Figure 3.8: Longitudinal Section View of Powerhouse with Three
450 MW Units ........................................................................................ 3-9
Figure 3.9: Excavation Sequence for Tunnel 4 Raised Intake .............................. 3-15
Figure 3.10: Construction Program of Intake Option 2.......................................... 3-16
WAPDA
August 2011
ix

Figure 3.11: Tentative Construction Program (Downstream Area)....................... 3-17

Figure 4.1: Breakdown of Hydropower Projects Within the Indus River Basin ... 4-1
Figure 4.2: Pakistan Energy Consumption per Capita ........................................... 4-2
Figure 4.3: Predicted Increase in System demand and Generating Capability ..... 4-7
Figure 4.4: Powerhouse Locations Considered ..................................................... 4-10
Figure 4.5: Powerhouse Locations Considered ..................................................... 4-11
Figure 4.6: Plan View of Intake Excavation Area for Tunnel 4 and
Possible Location for Tunnel 3 Intake ................................................ 4-16
Figure 4.7: Coffer Dam Plan .................................................................................. 4-17
Figure 6.1: The Project Area and Sampling / Survey Locations ............................ 6-2
Figure 6.2: 5 Year Average Monthly Temperatures (oC) in the Project
Area (2006-10)........................................................................................ 6-4
Figure 6.3: Mean Monthly Rainfall (2006-2010) in the Project Area ..................... 6-4
Figure 6.4: Mean Monthly Evaporation in the Project Area (cm) ......................... 6-5
Figure 6.5: Mean Monthly Flow Releases (2006-2010) from Tarbela
Reservoir (Mm3) .................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6.6: Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3) ............................................ 6-12
Figure 6.7: Location Map of Traffic Count Stations ............................................. 6-18
Figure 6.8: Social Survey Villages .......................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6.9: Social Infrastructure of the Project Area ........................................... 6-33
Figure 8.1: Project Construction Facilities ............................................................ 8-11
WAPDA
August 2011

List of Acronyms
AC
Alternating Current
AIS
Air Insulated Substation
asl
Above sea level
ASR
Alkali Silica Reaction
BCM
Billion cubic meters
BOD
Biological Oxygen Demand
BP
Bank Procedures (World Bank)
CITES
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species
CLO
Community Liaison Officer
cm
Centimeter
DC
Direct Current
DCO
District Coordination Officer
DISCOs
Distribution companies
EA
Environmental Assessment
ECA
Employment of Child Act
ECP
EHS
Environment, Health, and Safety
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP
Environmental Management Plan
EPA
Environment Protection Agency
EPD
Environmental Protection Department
ERP
Emergency Response Plan
ES
Environment Specialist
ESA
ESM
Environment and Social Monitor
ESMP
Environmental and Social Management Plan
ESMU
Environmental and Social Management Unit
ESS
Environment and Social Supervisor
FESCO
Faisalabad Electric Supply Company
WAPDA
August 2011
xi

FOS
Factor of Safety
GBHPP
Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project
GBTI
Ghazi Barotha Taraqiati Idara
GENCOs
Thermal power generation companies
GEPCO
Gujranwala Electric Power Company
GIKIEST
Ghulam Ishaq Khan Institute of Engineering, Science and

Technology
GIS
Gas Insulated Substation
GoP
Government of Pakistan
GT Road
Grand Trunk Road
Ha
Hectare
HESCO
Hyderabad Electric Supply Company
HLSZ
Hazara Lower Seismic Zone
HSE
Health Safety and Environment
HSES
Health Safety, Environment and Social
IEE
Initial Environmental Examination
IESCO
Islamabad Electric Supply Company
IFC
International Finance Corporation
IUCN
International Union for Conservation of Nature
KESC
Karachi Electric Supply Company
Km
Kilometer
KPI
Key Performance Indicator
KP
Khyber Pakhtunkhwa
LESCO
Lahore Electric Supply Company
LOS
Law of Seas (UN Convention)
Meter
MAF
Million acre feet
MCT
Main Central Thrust
MEA
Multilateral Environmental Agreements
MEPCO
Multan Electric Power Company
mm
millimeter
WAPDA
August 2011
xii

Mm3
Million cubic meters
MMP
Mott MacDonald Pakistan
MSDS
Material Safety Data Sheet
MW
Megawatt
NCS
National Conservation Strategy
NEQS
National Environmental Quality Standards
NGO
Non-Governmental Organization
NTDC
National Transmission and Dispatch Company
OPs
(World Bank) Operational Policies
OPC
Ordinary Portland Cement
Pak-EPA
Pakistan Environment Protection Agency
PAPs
Project Affected Persons
PEPA
Pakistan Environmental Protection Act
PEPC
Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
PEPCO
Pakistan Electric Power Company
PEPO
Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance
PKR
Pakistan Rupees
POPs
Persistent Organic Pollutants
PPE
Personal protective equipment
PPIB
Private Power and Infrastructure Board
ppm
parts per million
QESCO
Quetta Electric Supply Company
RAP
Resettlement Action Plan
RBC
Reinforced Brick Concrete
RCC
Reinforced Cement Concrete
Rpm
Rotations per minute
RSA
Rapid Social Appraisal
SA
Social Assessment
SCARP
Salinity Control and Reclamation Project
SIMF
Social Impact Management Framework
WAPDA
August 2011
xiii

SMO
Soil Monitoring Section
SS
Social Scientist
TDP
Tarbela Dam Project
TESCO
Tribal Electric Supply Company
TJV
Tarbela Joint Venture
TMP
Traffic Management Plan
T4CJV
Tarbela 4th Extension Joint Venture
T4HP
UNFCCC
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
VCC
Village Conservation Committees
WAPDA
Water and Power Development Authority
WB
World Bank
WBG
World Bank Group
WEC
WAPDA Environmental Cell
WHO
World Health Organization
WWF
World Wildlife Fund for Nature
WAPDA
August 2011
xiv

1 Introduction
1.1
Background
The Tarbela Dam is one of the largest earth-fill dam constructions in the world. The dam
is situated on the Indus River in the province of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP) at a distance
of about 70 kilometers (km) NW of Islamabad and about 50 km upstream of the city of
Attock (see Figure 1.1). The reservoir behind the dam is almost 100 km long and
measures 260 km when completely filled. The live storage capacity of the reservoir was
initially 11.9 billion m, but this has been reduced due to siltation during 35 years of
operation to 6.8 billion m. The Tarbela Dam is 2,743 m long, 143 m high above the
river bed and has two spillways cutting through the left bank and discharging into a side
valley. At the right bank there are four tunnels, each of about 900 m length as bypass for
irrigation releases and/or power generation. Tunnel 5 used for irrigation releases is
situated at the left bank. In three of the four tunnels on the right bank the water can be
used for both irrigation and for power generation. Tunnel 4 is exclusively designed for
irrigation supply.
The Tarbela Dam Project (TDP) was developed during the seventies of the last century in
the framework of the Indus Basin Water Master Plan. Initially the main purpose of TDP
was to supply irrigation water to the densely populated agricultural areas in Punjab and
Sindh. Then, starting in the mid-eighties power generation capacity was added in three
subsequent hydro-electrical project extensions, installing a total of 3,478 mega watts
(MW) generating capacity on respectively Tunnel 1 (four turbines), Tunnel 2 (six
turbines) and Tunnel 3 (four turbines). So far there is no allowance for power generation
on Tunnel 4, which is exclusively used for irrigation. For the project 120 villages along
the Indus were submerged and a total of 96,000 persons had to be resettled and 33,200
hectares (ha) of land acquired.
The Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project (GBHPP) is a run-of-river project situated
downstream and not far from Tarbela on the Indus. Near Ghazi town, which is situated
seven kilometers downstream of Tarbela, water is diverted through a 52 km long canal to
Barotha village (near Attock) where the power complex is located with a generating
capacity of 1,450 MW of electricity. After passing through the powerhouse, the diverted
water is returned to the Indus. The construction started in 1995 and the project was
completed in 2003. With the construction of GHBP the water level in the Indus below the
Tarbela dam has been raised and hence areas along the river have been flooded. A total of
4,770 ha of land were acquired for the construction of this project.
1.2
The Proposed Project
The Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project (T4HP) has been proposed to add
generating capacity on Tunnel 4. The demand for power in the country is rapidly
increasing with eight percent per year and there are frequent periods with load shedding
all over the country. Currently there is an estimated shortfall of 7,311 MW in winter and
3,347 MW in summer.
The construction of a new hydropower plant at Tarbela with 1,410 MW additional
generating capacity would enable maximum utilization of the available power potential
and make an important contribution to the overall power supply in the country.
WAPDA
August 2011
1-1

Figure 1.1:
WAPDA
August 2011
Tarbela Location Map
1-2

The project is considered to be very attractive and a low risk- high reward operation
aimed at providing over 3,871 GWh annually of least-cost low-carbon renewable energy.
This is so attractive because the dam, storage reservoir and tunnel are already constructed
and water supply is assured.
Another important advantage in development of T4HP is that it will be free of
resettlement and litigation problems, which are often major causes of delay in hydroelectric projects. Environmental and social issues are relatively minor, since most of the
infrastructure is already in place. Basic infrastructure and other facilities like offices,
labor camps and residential accommodation are largely available and only have to be
renovated and possibly expanded against modest cost. The installation of additional
generating capacity will not influence the irrigation release capacity of the dam.
1.3
The Environmental and Social Assessment
Potential adverse effects of the T4HP project are described in the present Environmental
and Social Assessment (ESA) report. Possible mitigating measures to offset, reduce or
compensate these impacts are included in the Environmental and Social Management
Plan. The project will be implemented on the right bank of the Indus River in a limited
area concentrated around the inlet and outlet of tunnel 4 of the Tarbela Dam. Direct and
indirect impacts of the project will mainly occur in the immediate surrounding (few km)
with the exception of some borrow areas and quarries for construction materials situated
at larger distance. For safety reasons an area of 5 km upstream and 10 km downstream of
the dam has been studied during the ESA (see Figure 1.2 for the Project Area and
location of various Project components). Most negative environmental and social
impacts of the project will be experienced during the period of construction, and will
mostly be temporary and reversible in nature.
Negative impacts during operation and maintenance of the project will be very limited.
Cumulative and induced impacts of the project are not expected since the water regime of
the Indus downstream of Tarbela will not change. Generally, during operation the
environmental and economic benefits will be very substantial through the production of
clean and cheap low-carbon hydro power. This is especially true when compared with
alternative means of generating electricity through thermal power stations (coal, oil, gas
fired). The direct adverse social impacts of the project are also expected to be relatively
minor. Most of these impacts will occur during construction and are associated with the
contractors operations and the interaction of the work force with the local communities.
The previous Tarbela project (1968-1976) and the Ghazi Barotha project (1995-2003)
involved huge land acquisition and resettlement operations. In a number of cases the
compensation and resettlement of affected families has not been solved for a variety of
reasons. The Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA) has
indicated that the current project offers an opportunity to address the so-called
resettlement legacy from the previous projects.
WAPDA
August 2011
1-3

Figure 1.2: Project Area and Location of Main Project Components
WAPDA
August 2011
1-4

1.4
Composition of Study Team
WAPDA engaged a team of two independent consultants - Mr. Reitse Koopmans and Mr.
Mohammad Omar Khalid to assess the environmental as well as social impacts of the
project, to prepare the environmental and social management plan, and to compile the
main ESA report as well as the present Summary ESA report.
The baseline data collection, project description compilation, stakeholder consultations,
and initial impact assessment was carried out by a team from the Design Consultants, led
by Mr. Azmat Beg (environment) and Dr. Ashraf Bodla (environment, ecology)
supported by Ms. Marina Maxwell (environment), Mr. Rana Mohammad Saleem
(sociology), Mr. Abdul Hafiz (sociology), Ms. Yasmeen Taher (gender), Mr. Zafar Iqbal
(economist), Mr. Omer Rasheed (environment), Mr. Mohammad Dawood Khan
(environment), Ms. Afia Hussain (environment), Ms. Ujala Saleem (environment), Dr.
Muhammad Aleem Chaudhry (wildlife), Mr. Waseem Ahmed Khan (wildlife), Dr.
Zaheer-ud-Din Khan (flora), Mr. Muhammad Ajaib (flora), Dr. Mohammad Sharif
Mughal (fisheries), and Mr. Tahir Omer (fisheries). The resettlement legacy has been
studied by a team composed of Mr. Zafar Iqbal, Mr. Omer Rasheed, Mr. Asif Iqbal, Mr.
Rana Mohammad Saleem, Dr. Ashraf Bodla, and Mr. M. Chaudhry and supported by Ms.
Marielle Rowan.
WAPDA
August 2011
1-5

2 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

2.1
General
This Chapter provides an overview of the legislative structure and environmental

assessment process in Pakistan as well as a list of key environmental legislation
applicable to hydro power projects. It also provides an overview of World Bank and
other relevant international requirements including identification of applicable World
Bank Operational Policies and applicable World Bank Group Environmental, Health and
Safety Guidelines.
2.2
Pakistan
2.2.1 Overview
The enactment of comprehensive legislation on the environment, covering multiple areas
of concern is an ongoing phenomenon in Pakistan. The basic policy and legislative
framework for the protection of the environment and overall biodiversity in the country is
now in place. The legislation contains many laws in the form of Acts and Ordinances
which have a direct or indirect relevance in the layout, design, construction and operation
of the Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project.
This summary of relevant Pakistan legislation is structured as follows:
Environmental Regulatory Authorities;
Environmental Legislation;
National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS); and
National Environmental Guidelines and Policies.
In accordance with the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (PEPA) 1997 and the
Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA) IEE/EIA Regulations 2000, an
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is required for hydroelectric power projects
exceeding a generation capacity of 50 MW and with transmission lines with a capacity of
more than 11 kV. The Project will generate 1,350 MW, therefore an EIA for this project
is mandatory.
2.2.2 Environmental Legislation

Environmental Protection Act, 1997
PEPA 1997 is the basic legislative tool empowering the government to frame regulations
for the protection of the environment. The Act is applicable to almost all environmental
parameters pertaining to air, water, soil and noise pollution, and handling of hazardous
wastes, as well as to the social and socioeconomic aspects.
The Act provides the framework for: protection and conservation of species, wildlife
habitats and biodiversity; conservation of renewable resources; establishment of
standards for the quality of the ambient air, water and land; establishment of
Environmental Tribunals; appointment of Environmental Magistrates; and Initial
Environmental Examination (IEE) and EIA approval. Penalties have been prescribed for
those who contravene the Act. The key features of the Act have a direct bearing on the
proposed project requirement for an IEE and EIA for development projects. The PakEPA has delegated the power of review and approval of environmental assessments to the
WAPDA
August 2011
2-1

provincial EPAs. The following are the key features of the Act that have a direct bearing
on the Project area:
Section 11 (Prohibition of Certain Discharges or Emissions) states that Subject to

the provisions of this Act and the rules and regulations made there under, no person
shall discharge or emit, or allow the discharge or emission of, any effluent or waste
or air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level which is in excess of the
NEQS.
Section 12-I (IEE and EIA) requires that No proponent of a project shall
commence construction or operation unless he has filed with the Federal Agency an
IEE or, where the project is likely to cause an adverse environmental effect, an EIA,
and has obtained from the Federal Agency approval in respect thereof.
Section 12-2b (Review of IEE and EIA). The Federal Agency shall review the EIA
report and accord its approval subject to such conditions as it may deem fit to
impose, or require that the EIA be re-submitted after such modifications as may be
stipulated or rejected, the project as being contrary to environmental objectives.
Section 14 (Handling of Hazardous Substances) requires that Subject to the

provisions of this Act, no person shall generate, collect, consign, transport, treat,
dispose off, store, handle, or import any hazardous substance except (a) under a
license issued by the Federal Agency and in such manner as may be prescribed; or
(b) in accordance with the provisions of any other law for the time being in force, or
of any international treaty, convention, protocol, code, standard, agreement, or other
Instrument to which Pakistan is a party. Enforcement of this clause requires the
EPA to issue regulations regarding licensing procedures and to define hazardous
substance.
Section 15 (Regulation of Motor Vehicles). Subject to provision of this clause of the

Act and the rules and regulations made there under, no person shall operate a motor
vehicle from which air pollutants or noise are being emitted in an amount,
concentration or level which is in excess of the NEQS, or where the applicable
standards established under clause (g) of subsection (1) of Section-6 of the Act.
Section 17 (Penalties). Whoever contravenes or fails to comply with the provisions

of section 11, 12, 13, or section 16 or any order issued there under shall be
punishable with fine which may extend to one million rupees, and in the case of a
continuing contravention or failure, with an additional fine which may extend to one
hundred thousand rupees for every day during which such contravention or failure
continues: Provided that if contravention of the provisions of section 11 also
constitutes contravention of the provisions of section 15, such contravention shall be
punishable under sub-section (2) only.
Section 18 (Offences by Bodies Corporate). Where any contravention of this Act has
been committed by a body corporate, and it is proved that such offence has been
committed with the consent or connivance or is attributed to any negligence on the
part of any director, partner, manager, secretary or other officer of the body
corporate, such director, partner, manager, secretary or other officer of the body
corporate, shall be deemed guilty of such contravention along with the body
corporate and shall be punished accordingly.
WAPDA
August 2011
2-2

PAK-EPA, IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000
The EPA prepared the regulations during 2000 for Review of IEE and EIA under the
powers conferred upon it by the PEPA. These Regulations categorize development
projects for IEE and EIA into two schedules: Schedules I and II. Projects are classified
on the basis of the expected degree and magnitude of environmental impacts. The
projects listed in Schedule-I include those where the range of environmental issues is
comparatively narrow and the issues can be understood and managed through less
extensive analysis in the form of an IEE, whereas the projects listed in Schedule-II are
those which are likely to cause significant adverse impacts and hence require extensive
analysis in the form of an EIA. Figure 2.1 below provides an outline of the EIA process
in Pakistan.
Figure 2.1:
Pakistan EIA Process

The EIA with PEPA (Reg.8 (2Xa) Schedule IV Application Form with receipt 30,000Rs)
10 Days
PEPA confirms
acceptability of EIA
PEPA publicises
EIA in national press
EIA displayed
in Public Place
Day 1
PEPA requests revision

of EIA Listing further
studies and discussion
required
PEPA requests
specified additional
information
Proponent submits revised

EIA or additional information
Where to
view EIA
Day 10
EIA circulated
in Government
Public Hearing
Location & time
(min 30 days hence)
DGs
Expert
Committee
Sector
Advisory
Committee
Site
Inspection
Committee
>Day 40
PEPA Review of EIA

PEPA collate tabulate &
consider all comments
PEPA Decision on EIA

(Schedule VI)
<Day 100
Proponent acceptance
Of decision conditions
Approval with
further conditions
Approval as
per EIA
Rejected
(Schedule VI)
30 months
No objection certificate
Construction
(under EIA conditions)
Prepare EMMP and

request
Compliance Certificate
PEPA
inspection
and CC
Operation (under EIA Conditions and EMMP)

Source:
David Green & Sayeeds Bushra Wahid Sept06
WAPDA
August 2011
2-3

Schedule-I projects require an IEE to be conducted, rather than a full-fledged EIA,

provided that the project is not located in an environmentally sensitive area. The projects
listed in Schedule-II are generally major projects and have the potential to affect a large
number of people in addition to significant adverse environmental impacts. For the
Schedule II projects, conducting an EIA is necessary. Dams and reservoirs with a
maximum storage volume greater than 50 million m3 (Mm3) or a surface area greater than
8 km2, in addition to hydroelectric power generation projects over 50 MW, fall under
Schedule-II of the IEE-EIA Regulations, 2000.
Pakistan Penal Code, 1860
The Pakistan Penal Code deals with offences where public or private property and/or
human lives are affected due to the intentional or accidental misconduct of an individual
or body of people. In the context of the environment, the Penal Code empowers local
authorities to control noise, toxic emissions and disposal of effluents.
Pakistan Explosives Act, 1884
This Act provides regulations for the handling, transportation and use of explosives
during quarrying, blasting and other purposes. The construction of the new power house
may require blasting at rocky areas making these regulations applicable for this project.
Land Acquisition Act, 1894
This Act is the primary law for acquisition of land and built-up properties for public
interest in Pakistan and also sets out the procedure and rules for acquisition and
compensating the land owners, including for any damage caused to their properties, crops
and trees by a project, however it lacks the mechanism to address the complex issues of
resettlement. The Act comprises 55 sections dealing with area notifications, surveys,
acquisition, compensation, appointment awards, disputes resolution, penalties and
exemptions. For the T4HP, ownership of the land required for project execution belongs
to the client (WAPDA), hence no land acquisition is likely to take place.
Forest Act, 1927
This Act authorizes provincial forest department to establish forest reserves and protected
forests. The Act prohibits any person from: setting fires in the forest; quarrying stone;
removal of any forest produce; or causing any damage to the forest by cutting trees or
clearing areas for cultivation or any other purpose.
KP Wildlife Protection, Preservation, Conservation and Management Act,
1975 (NWFP Act No. V of 1975)
This law was enacted to protect the provinces wildlife resources directly and other
natural resources indirectly. It classifies wildlife by degree of protection, i.e., animals
that may be hunted on a permit or special license, and species that are protected and
cannot be hunted under any circumstances. The Act specifies restrictions on hunting and
trade in animals, trophies, or meat. The Act also defines various categories of wildlife
protected areas, i.e., National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries, and Game Reserve. The project
activities will have to be carried out in accordance with this Act. In particular, no
activities will be carried out inside any protected areas defined under the Act.
Factories Act, 1934
The clauses relevant to the project are those which concern health, safety and welfare of
workers, disposal of solid wastes and effluents, and damage to private and public
WAPDA
August 2011
2-4

property. The Factories Act also provides regulations for handling and disposal of toxic
and hazardous materials. As construction activity is classified as industry, these
regulations will be applicable to the project construction contractors.
Protection of Trees Act, 1949
This Act prohibits cutting or lopping of trees along roads and canals planted by the Forest
Department, without permission of the Forest Department.
Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority Act, 1958
The Act provides for the unified and coordinated development of the water and power
resources of Pakistan. This Act authorizes WAPDA to develop water and power
resources in the country through construction and operation of water storages and power
houses and erecting electrical transmission lines. WAPDA also has the powers and
obligations of a licensee under the Telegraphy Act of 1910. This Act also establishes
policy for land acquisition and compensation, as well as the degree of liability of
WAPDA for damages sustained to landowners or others.
Motor Vehicle Ordinance, 1965
The Ordinance deals with the powers of the Motor Vehicle Licensing Authorities and
empowers other related agencies to regulate traffic rules, vehicle speed and weight limits,
vehicle use, to erect traffic signs, and to prescribe special duties for drivers in the case of
accidents. It also prescribes powers to police officers to check and penalize traffic
offenders. At the same time, the Ordinance empowers the regional transport authority to
operate as a quasi-judicial body at district level to monitor road transport, licensing
requirements, and compensations for deaths or injuries to passengers on public carriers.
Antiquity Act, 1975
The Antiquity Act of 1975 ensures the protection of cultural resources in Pakistan. This
Act is designed to protect antiquities from destruction, theft, negligence, unlawful
excavation, trade and export. Antiquities have been defined in this Act as Ancient
products of human activity, historical sites, sites of anthropological or cultural interest
and national monuments etc.
The law prohibits new construction in the proximity of a protected antiquity and
empowers the government of Pakistan to prohibit excavation in any area that may contain
articles of archaeological significance.
Under this Act, the proponents are obligated to:
Ensure that no activity is under taken in the proximity of a protected antiquity, and
Report any archaeological discovery made during the course of the project to the
Department of Archaeology, Government of Pakistan.
Labor Laws
Labor laws in Pakistan are governed by several legislative tools. However, the principal
labor rights are provided by the constitution of Pakistan. In addition to constitutional
rights, Acts and Ordinances have been enforced for limiting working hours, minimum
working age and conditions of employment. The laws will be applicable to the project
construction contractors.
WAPDA
August 2011
2-5

Employment of Child Act, 1977
Article 11(3) of the Constitution of Pakistan prohibits employment of children below the
age of 14 years in any factory, mines or any other hazardous employment. In accordance
with this Article, the Employment of Child Act (ECA) 1991 disallows the child labor in
the country. The ECA defines a child to mean a person who has not completed his/her
fourteenth years of age. The ECA states that no child shall be employed or permitted to
work in any of the occupation set forth in the ECA (such as transport sector, railways,
construction, and ports) or in any workshop wherein any of the processes defined in the
Act is carried out. The processes defined in the Act include carpet weaving, biri (kind of
a cigarette) making, cement manufacturing, textile, construction and others).
Highway Safety Ordinance, 2000
This Ordinance includes provisions for licensing and registration of vehicles and
construction equipment; maintenance of road vehicles; traffic control offences, penalties
and procedures; and the establishment of a police force for motorways and national
highways to regulate and control the traffic as well as keep the highways clear of
encroachments. This Ordinance will have an impact on the road network leading to the
Project area during the construction phase of the project.
Local Government Ordinance, 2001
This Act empowers the Government of Pakistan and provincial governments to enforce
laws for land use; conservation of natural vegetation; air, water, and land pollution;
disposal of solid waste and wastewater effluents; and public health and safety, including
some provisions for environmental protection. Section 93 of this Ordinance pertains to
environmental pollution, under which the local councils are authorized to restrict causing
pollution to air, water or land.
2.2.3 National Environmental Guidelines and Policies

National Conservation Strategy (NCS) 1992
The Pakistan NCS is the principal policy document for environmental issues in the
country, which was developed and approved by the Government of Pakistan on 1 March
1992. The NCS works on a ten-year planning and implementation cycle. It deals with
fourteen core areas, as follows:
Maintaining soils in cropland;
Increasing irrigation efficiency;
Protecting watersheds;
Supporting forestry and plantations;
Restoring rangelands and improving livestock;
Protecting water bodies and sustaining fisheries;
Conserving biodiversity;
Increasing energy efficiency;
Developing and deploying material and energy renewable;
Preventing and abating pollution;
Managing urban wastes;
WAPDA
August 2011
2-6

Supporting institutions for common resources;
Integrating population and environmental programs; and
Preserving the cultural heritage.
National Environment Policy
This policy was implemented in 2005 to provide an overarching framework for

addressing the environmental issues facing Pakistan. It gives directions for addressing
sectoral issues and provides means for promoting conservation and environmental
protection in water, air and waste management, forestry, and transport. The policy aims
to promote protection of the environment, the honoring of international obligations,
sustainable management of resources and economic growth.
Guidelines for the Preparation and Review of Environmental Reports, 1997
These guidelines on the preparation of environmental reports address project proponents,

and specify the:
Nature of the information to be included in environmental reports;
Minimum qualifications of the EIA consultant;
Need to incorporate suitable mitigation measures into every stage of project

implementation;
Need to specify monitoring procedures; and the
Terms of reference for the reports are to be prepared by the project proponents
themselves. The reports must contain baseline data on the Project area, a detailed
assessment thereof, and mitigation measures.
Policy and Procedures for Filing, Review and Approval of Environmental
Assessments, 2000
These policies and procedures define the policy context and the administrative
procedures that govern the environmental assessment process, from the project prefeasibility stage to the approval of the environmental report.
Guidelines for Public Consultation, 1997
The guidelines deal with approaches to public consultation and techniques for designing
an effective program of consultation that reaches out to all major stakeholders and
ensures the incorporation of their concerns in impact assessment.
Guidelines for Sensitive and Critical Areas, 1997
The guidelines identify officially notified protected areas in Pakistan, including critical
ecosystems, archaeological sites, etc., and present checklists for environmental
assessment procedures to be carried out within or near to such sites. Environmentally
sensitive areas include, among others, archaeological sites, biosphere reserves and natural
parks, and wildlife sanctuaries and preserves, none of which are relevant to the Project
area.
2.2.4 National Environmental Quality Standards

The NEQS promulgated under the PEPA 1997, specify the following standards:
Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from industrial

sources;
WAPDA
August 2011
2-7

Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in municipal and liquid industrial

effluents discharged to inland waters, sewage treatment and sea (three separate set of
numbers);
Maximum allowable emissions from motor vehicles;
Ambient air quality standards;
Drinking water standards; and
Noise standards.
The following NEQS will be relevant to the environmental aspects of the Tarbela 4th
Extension Project1:
Industrial and Municipal Effluents;
Waste Effluents;
Ambient Air;
Motor Vehicle Exhaust and Noise;
Noise; and
Drinking Water Quality Standards.
2.2.5 Environment Regulatory Authorities

The development of statutory and other instruments for environmental protection has
steadily gained priority in Pakistan since the late 1970s. The Pakistan Environmental
Protection Ordinance (PEPO) 1983 was the first legislation in Pakistan designed
specifically for the protection of the environment. The promulgation of this Ordinance
was followed in 1984 by the creation of Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
(PEPC).
Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
The PEPC is the highest inter-ministerial statutory body in the country headed by the
Chief Executive and is responsible for:
Formulating national environmental policy;
Enforcing PEPA 1997;
Approval of the NEQS;
Incorporation of environmental considerations into national development plans and

policies; and
Provision of guidelines for the protection and conservation of biodiversity in general

as well as conservation of renewable and non-renewable resources.
Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (PAK-EPA)
The PAK-EPA is headed by a Director General and has wide ranging functions as set out
in PEPA 1997. These include preparation and co-ordination of national environmental
policy for approval by PEPC, administering and implementing PEPA 1997 and
preparation, revision or establishment of NEQS. The PAK-EPA has issued regulations
These NEQS are available at the Pak-EPA website (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm).
WAPDA
August 2011
2-8

regarding the environmental assessment procedures known as Review of Initial

Environmental Examination (IEE) and EIA Regulations, 2000, these provide a firm legal
status to the IEEs and EIAs. The jurisdiction of the EPA is applicable to the following
projects:
On federal land;
Military projects;
Involving trans-country impacts; and
Bearing trans-province impacts.
Provincial/Regional Environment Protection Agencies
The four provinces, and two regions - Azad Jammu and Kashmir (AJK), and GilgitBaltistan - have their own Environmental Protection Department (EPD) and/or EPAs
which are the provincial/regional level counterparts of the PAK-EPA.
The
provincial/regional EPAs are formed by the respective provincial/regional governments
headed by a Director General who exercises powers delegated to him by the concerned
provincial government. The IEE and EIA reports pertaining to projects falling within the
different provincial/regional boundaries are submitted to the relevant provincial/regional
EPA for approval. For the proposed Project, KP-EPA is the relevant agency for the
approval of the EIA.
2.3
International Treaties and Conventions
Pakistan is a signatory to a number of Multilateral Environmental Agreements (MEAs).

These MEAs impose requirements and restrictions of varying degrees upon the member
countries, in order to meet the objectives of these agreements. However, the
implementation mechanism for most of these MEAs is weak in Pakistan and institutional
setup mostly nonexistent. The following are the relevant international treaties and
conventions that have been ratified by Pakistan, where relevant these will be discussed in
further detail within relevant chapters:
Basel Convention,
Convention on Biological Diversity, Convention on Wetlands (Ramsar),
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES),
UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC),
Kyoto Protocol,
Montreal Protocol,
UN Convention to Combat Desertification,
UN Convention on the Law of Seas (LOS),
Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs),
Convention concerning the Protection of World Culture and Natural Heritage (World
Heritage Convention), 1972; and
International Plant Protection Convention, 1951.
WAPDA
August 2011
2-9

2.4
World Bank
2.4.1 Overview
The World Bank (WB) categorizes development projects according to the type, location,
sensitivity, and scale of the project, as well as the nature and magnitude of its potential
adverse social and environmental impacts.
The environmental impacts of the original Tarbela dam were not separately assessed at
the time of preparation of that project (1965-1970). However, the resettlement issues
were assessed and a Resettlement program developed to resolve the resettlement and
compensation of the Project Affected Persons. There remain some resettlement issues of
the project pending in the courts, which will be addressed under the present project.
The Project has been categorized as Category A requiring a detailed environmental and
social assessment (ESA) and development and implementation of an environmental and
social management plan (ESMP) and a Social Impact Management Framework (SIMF).
For category A projects borrowers must consult with project-affected groups and local
non-governmental organizations about the projects environmental aspects and take their
views into account. Borrowers must (a) initiate consultations as early as possible; (b)
consult groups at least twice (before terms of reference for the assessment are finalized
and once a draft assessment report is prepared); and (c) consult affected groups
throughout project implementation as necessary to address related issues.
2.4.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines

The principal World Bank publications that contain environmental and social guidelines
are listed below;
Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook 1998: Towards Cleaner Production;
Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volume I: Policies, Procedures, and CrossSectoral Issues; and
Social Analysis Sourcebook.
2.4.3 Operational Policies (OPs) of the World Bank

Developers seeking financing from the World Bank are required to comply with the
applicable environmental and social safeguards, OPs and Bank Procedures (BPs). A
summary of the key objectives of the relevant safeguards policies considered for the
Project is provided below:
OP 4.01 (Environmental Assessment): provides the framework for World Bank
environmental safeguard policies and describes project screening and categorization to
determine the level of environmental assessment required. For category A and B projects
the policy requires public consultation and disclosure to be undertaken as part of the
Environmental Assessment process. If indigenous people are found to be affected, in
addition to consultation it is necessary to prepare a plan to avoid or mitigate adverse
impacts on such groups and ensure that they have access to project benefits to the extent
that they wish to. Finally the policy sets out requirement to comply and report on
implementation of any environmental management plans (i.e. mitigation measures,
monitoring program etc.
OP 4.04 (Natural Habitats): outlines the World Bank policy on biodiversity
conservation taking into account ecosystem services and natural resource management
WAPDA
August 2011
2-10

and use by project affected people. Projects must assess potential impacts on biodiversity
and the policy strictly limits circumstances under which conversion or degradation of
natural habitats can occur as well as prohibiting projects which are likely to result in
significant loss of critical natural habitats.
OP 4.09 (Pest Management): rural development and health sector projects have to avoid
using harmful pesticides. Other pesticides can be used, but only as an element of an
Integrated Pest Management Plan that emphasizes environmental and biological controls.
The policy encourages the use of Integrated Pest Management in the whole of the sectors
concerned.
OP 4.10 (Indigenous Peoples): recognizes that indigenous peoples may be exposed to
different types of risks and impacts from development projects. The policy requires
projects to identify whether indigenous peoples are affected by the project and, if so, to
undertake specific consultation activities and to avoid or mitigate impacts on this
potentially vulnerable group.
OP 4.11 (Physical Cultural Resources): sets out the World Bank requirement to avoid or
mitigate adverse impacts resulting from project developments on cultural resources.
There are no cultural or archaeological resources in the vicinity of the Project; hence this
OP will not trigger.
OP 4.12 (Involuntary Resettlement): the World Bank aims to avoid involuntary
resettlement where possible. Where necessary or acquisition of land or other assets is
necessary, the policy sets out requirements for participation in resettlement planning,
mandates compensation for assets at replacement cost, and expects the borrower to see
that incomes and standards of living of affected persons are improved or at least restored
to what they were prior to displacement. The document also identifies the need for a
Resettlement Plan, an abbreviated Resettlement Plan or otherwise.
OP 4.36 (Forests): this policy recognizes the need to reduce deforestation and promote
sustainable forest conservation and management in reducing poverty.
OP 4.37 (Safety on Dams): this policy requires that experienced and competent
professionals design and supervise construction, and that the borrower adopts and
implements dam safety measures through the project cycle. It recommends, where
appropriate, that Bank staff discuss with the borrowers any measures necessary to
strengthen the institutional, legislative, and regulatory frameworks for dam safety
programs in those countries. For large dams, the borrower must engage an independent
Dam Safety Panel.
OP 7.50 (Projects on International Waterways): Projects on International Waterways may affect the relations between the World Bank and its borrowers, and between riparian
states. Therefore, the Bank attaches great importance to the riparian making appropriate
agreements or arrangements for the entire waterway, or parts thereof, and stands ready to
assist in this regard. A borrower must notify other riparian of planned projects that could
affect water quality or quantity, sufficiently far in advance to allow them to review the
plans and raise any concerns or objections.
OP 7.60 (Projects in Disputed Areas): similarly, such projects may affect the relations
between the Bank and its borrowers, and between the claimants to the disputed area.
Therefore, the Bank will only finance projects in disputed areas when either there is no
objection from the other claimant to the disputed area, or when the special circumstances
of the case support Bank financing, notwithstanding the objection.
WAPDA
August 2011
2-11

BP 17.50 (Public Disclosure of Information): This BP deals with the World Bank policy
on disclosure of information. It is a mandatory procedure to be followed by the borrower
and Bank and supports public access to information on environmental and social aspects
of projects.
2.4.4 Applicable World Bank Policies

The status of the environmental and social safeguard policies of the World Bank are
provided below in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1:
Directive
Triggering the World Bank Policies

Policy
Triggered
Not
Comments
Triggered
Environmental
Assessment
OP/BP/GP 4.01
Natural Habitats
OP/BP 4.04
Not triggered as the Project will not

adversely impact natural habitats or
protected areas. Totalai Game Reserve,
located 20-25 km from Tarbela, is the
nearest protected area.
Pest
Management
OP 4.09
Not triggered as the Project will not use

or promote the use of pesticides.
Indigenous
Peoples
OP 4.20/OP 4.10
Not triggered as no Indigenous People or

ethnic minorities will be affected by the
Project.
Physical Cultural
Resources
OP 4.11
No known areas of cultural heritage will

be impacted by the Project. Procedures
will be in place to deal appropriately with
any chance finds.
Involuntary
Resettlement
OP/BP 4.12
No involuntary resettlement will take

place because of the Project
development. All project components and
temporary facilities will be located on
land already owned by WAPDA.
However, to prepare for the very unlikely
situations where off-site activities may
result in land acquisition or lease, a
Social Impact Management Framework
is developed in line with relevant
Pakistani laws and World Bank OP 4.12
to guide the planning and implementation
of necessary compensatory measures.
Forests
OP/BP 4.36
There will be no disruption to forests

associated with the Project works.
Safety of Dams
OP/BP 4.37
WAPDA
August 2011
As the Project falls into Category A, a full

assessment has to be carried out. It is
the basis of this ESA
The dam safety policy is triggered since

the construction works are implemented
on a large dam including associated
infrastructure situated upstream of a
densely populated area. Regular
inspections and assessments of the
Tarbela Dam show that the Dam and its
associated structures are safe. Dam
instrumentation and monitoring system is
in remarkably good conditions compared
to similar dams of the same age. In biannual meetings, an independent panel
of experts reviews the design and the
operational and maintenance aspects of
the project, particularly the safety and
early warning systems. The project
includes a component that would
2-12

Directive
Policy
Triggered
Not
Comments
Triggered
upgrade the monitoring system of the
Dam, the monitoring of the movement of
sediment delta in the reservoir, and
associated early warning system.
Projects in
International
Waterways
OP/BP/GP 7.50
Projects in
Disputed Areas
OP/BP/GP 7.60
Public Disclosure
of Information
BP 17.50
The Project is located on an international

waterway. However, the project
essentially involves the extension of
power generating facilities on an existing
dam and it does not involve works and
activities that would exceed the original
purpose of the scheme, change its
nature, or interfere with international
water distribution treaty between the
riparian states.

The Project is not located in or near any

disputed area.
Formal Public Hearing held. ESA and its
Urdu Summary would be made available
to public, and would be available on
WAPDA website. ESA and its Summary
would be sent to WB InfoShop.
2.4.5 Compliance Status with Pakistani and World Bank Policies

The present compliance status of the project with Pakistani legislation and World Bank
safeguard policies is indicated in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2: Compliance of Project with GoP Legislation and WB Safeguard Policies
Legislation /
Policy
Actions Taken to Comply
Government
Pakistan
of
Pakistan Environmental
(GoP)
Protection Act,
1997
WAPDA submitted application for ESA along with ESA

report to KP-EPA. KP EPA accorded its formal approval
of the ESA on 22 July 2011.
EIA guidelines
for Power
Projects
Provide safety measures and information on emergency

preparedness
International
treaties
Verification of protected sites, Red List and protection of

vulnerable habitats
Disclosure of
projects
Information to general public and notice for public

hearing.
Early screening
and Scoping
Scoping sessions held
Participatory
approach
Workshops, consultation meetings and focus group

discussions held in Ghazi, Topi, Islamabad and Peshawar
Integrate
environmental
Natural environment, human health, social aspects,

physical cultural resources are integrated in planning
World Bank
WAPDA
August 2011
Disclosure of ESA to general public and public hearing

organized
2-13

Legislation /
Policy
Actions Taken to Comply
assessment (EA)
and social
assessment (SA)
documents
Risk assessment
Labor, health and safety risks determined

Environmental Code of Practices (occupational health,
labor) in tender documents contractor
Emergency Response Plan will be prepared by contractor
before commencing the construction activities.
Climate Change
and floods
Impact of increased snow-melt and climate change and

effect on Indus floods studied. Regional and Strategic
cumulative impacts determined
Alternatives
Without project alternative studied

5 different sites of powerhouse studied
4 different alternatives for tunnel design studied
2 alternatives for inlet structures studied
Pollution
Baseline survey of environmental quality carried out

Stricter
Environmental
standards
applied
and
Environmental Code of Practices (ECPs) included in
contract documents
Physical and
Cultural
Resources
Verification
implemented
with
Department
of
Archaeology
Gender
Gender consultations carried out during ESA.
Public Health
Public Health aspects addressed in mitigation measures.
Consultation and
Information
Disclosure
Early consultations and participation of local

communities. Disclosure of ESA summary in Urdu and
English
Chance find procedure included in contract documents
Stakeholder consultation meetings, focus

discussions and formal public consultations held.
group
Formal Public Hearing held. ESA would be sent to WB

InfoShop.
WAPDA
August 2011
2-14

3 Project Description
3.1
Tarbela Dam Project Overview
The Tarbela Dam is located on the Indus River in the KP Province of Pakistan at a
distance of about 70 km from the capital Islamabad. Figure 3.1 shows a satellite
photograph from the Dam and the Project area. The construction of the dam was
completed in 1976. It has a reservoir area of approximately 260 km2 and approximately
33,200 ha of land was acquired for its construction. The main objectives of the Tarbela
Dam Project were to provide: regulated water supply for irrigation; substantial supplies
of hydroelectric power, and a measure of flood control by storing snowmelt and monsoon
flows of the Indus River. Releases from the Tarbela Reservoir are made primarily in
response to irrigation demand with power generation being a secondary benefit.
The 124 m high and approximately 2.4 km long dam was designed to impound
13,700 Mm3 of water and provide 11,500 Mm3 of live storage. Two spillways were
provided at the left abutment, with capacities sufficient to handle double the largest flood
volume on record. Four tunnels, each 13.73 m in diameter at the upstream end, were
excavated in the right abutment to divert the flow of the river. Three of these tunnels
were intended to serve as power intakes, each to serve a separate generating unit. The
fourth tunnel was to serve as a permanent irrigation outlet. Tunnel 5 was excavated
between the left abutment and the auxiliary dam as a further irrigation tunnel. The three
generating units presently have total installed capacity of 3,478 MW comprising
10 turbines of 175 MW each and four turbines of 432 MW each.
3.2
Objectives of 4th Extension Project
The main objective of the Project is to utilize the existing irrigation Tunnel 4 of the
Tarbela Dam Project to supply water to a new power station to augment the power supply
to the country. A main requirement of the Project is that the new scheme does not affect
the ability of the Tarbela Dam Project to provide water for irrigation or other purposes.
The subsequent sections present an overview of the key project elements, followed by a
description of the key project components and their associated activities. The project
description concludes with the project program.
3.3
Salient Features
The salient features of the Project are as detailed below in Table 3.1.
3.4
Project Components
In the following sub sections an overview is provided of the key components of the
Project including: (i) Intake Arrangements; (ii) Penstock Connection; (iii) Powerhouse;
(iv) Mechanical and Electrical Plant; (v) Switchyard; (vi) Transmission Lines; and (vii)
Tailrace. In Figure 3.2 a simple schematic of a hydro scheme is given to demonstrate
how each of the Project components fit together.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-1

Figure 3.1:
Source:
WAPDA
August 2011
Satellite View of Tarbela Dam
Google Earth
3-2

Table 3.1:
Salient Features of the Project
Parameter
Detail
Tunnel 4
Location
Tunnel 4 runs from the intake and through the right abutment of the
dam for approximately 900 m. The downstream control structure is
connected to the tunnel at the portal in the rock face. The control
structure is located between the foot of a steep slope to the west and
the Tunnel 3 control structure to the east.
Purpose
Type
Irrigation releases when reservoirs level falls below the spillway level
Concrete/Steel Lined
Cross Section
Length
Circular 13.7 m 11 m
914 m
Outlet Type
Flip Bucket
Intake Level
To be confirmed
Design Flow
A maximum of 2000 cubic meters per second (m3/s)
Proposed Powerhouse
Location
Location C has been chosen as the site for the powerhouse
Type of Turbine
Vertical Francis Turbine
Number of Units
Three
Unit Generator Rating

Total Generating Capacity
470 MW
1,410 MW
Type of Generator
Vertical Shaft
Generating Voltage
18 kV or 20 kV
Turbine Centre Line Level

Annual Energy
327.6 m
3,871 GWh
Tailrace Channel
Not applicable as water flows directly from turbines to Ghazi Barotha
Length
head pond
Type
Not applicable
Tailrace Water Level
Between EL 344.1 m and 335.3 m
Penstock Connection to Tunnel 4

Type of Penstock
Source:
Steel, probably concrete encased and buried
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
3-3

Figure 3.2:
Source:
Hydro Scheme Schematic
Mott MacDonald Limited
3.4.1 Intake Arrangement

A regular build up of sediments is currently experienced at the Tarbela Dam and this is
expected to continue until the reservoir is completely full. At the historical rate of
increase, the future sediment level at the intake area will be significantly higher than at
present and the potential for tunnel blockage will therefore increase. Part of the
requirements for Tarbela 4th Extension Consultant Joint Venture2 (T4CJV) is to:
Examine the possibility of providing a raised level of water entry for the intake at
Tunnel 4; and
Review and examine appropriate intake arrangements for Tunnel 4, this may include
possible modifications and/or recommendation at upstream structures or any other
arrangement from the existing intake of Tunnel 4 and installation of trash racks.
The Intake Options Report was issued in January 2011 and it presents a convincing case
for a raised shaft intake (Option 2) to be taken forward. Thorough analysis led to the
conclusions that it would provide more operational flexibility and better performance in
terms of head loss while being the most cost effective and having the shortest
construction period of all the options.
Intake Option 2
Intake Option 2 consists of a raised intake situated on the hillside over Tunnel 4 with a
shaft connection into the upstream part of the tunnel. The proposed level for the intake to
be constructed is 415 m, as shown in Figure 3.3.
A joint venture of Mott MacDonald, UK and Coyne et Bellier, France.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-4

Figure 3.3:
Option 2 Section (a)

Excavation
Volume
865,928 m3
Raised Intake
Existing Intake
WAPDA
August 2011
3-5

The low level intake would be retained and operated until such time as it is blocked with
sediment or until the minimum reservoir level has increased such that there is sufficient
submergence for operation of the raised intake. When the lower intake is no longer
viable a profiled concrete plug will be constructed in the tunnel to isolate the original
intake.
The proposed arrangement places the intake 5.5 m below the current lowest water level
and a cofferdam (formed by delaying excavation) can be used to control water inflow into
the shaft area during construction.
The depth of excavation and dewatering required during construction, as well as the
geology of the rock, will dictate the level at which the intake can be constructed.
Figure 3.4 shows the geological information along the centerline of Tunnel 4 and the
proposed raised intake would be located into the hillside and directly above Tunnel 4 so
the shaft can be formed within an area where tunneling conditions are expected to be
good.
Further Work
Further study is being carried out to finalize the elevation of the intake in order to
minimize the excavation and match the expected future sediment and operation levels.
The success of the proposed design is dependent upon the rock conditions and a
significant investigation is underway to ensure that the shaft will not fall within the poor
quality limestone that exists close to the proposed location.
Figure 3.4:
Source:
Geologic Section along Centre-line of Tunnel 4
WAPDA, Tarbela Dam Project Drawing Number 52PK1663 R1, Intake Area, Geologic Sections, Tunnel 3 and 4
Centerline
3.4.2 Penstock Connection to Tunnel 4

Tunnel 4 was originally designed to pass water from the reservoir to the Indus River for
downstream irrigation water uses. The flow of water in the tunnel can be controlled by
WAPDA
August 2011
3-6

two separate arrangements, the bulkhead gate (and its upstream stoplog) in the tunnel and
the radial gates in the Outlet Control Structure. The radial gates are used to regulate the
flow of irrigation water from the reservoir although they are only operated either fully
open or closed. When the radial gates are closed it has been normal practice to also close
the upstream bulkhead gate.
Tunnel 4 runs from the intake through the right abutment of the dam for approximately
2.7 km. The downstream control structure is connected to the tunnel at the portal in the
rock face. The control structure is located between the foot of a steep slope to the west
and the Tunnel 3 control structure to the east. There is limited space to locate a new
branch near this structure to connect it to the power house. In order to minimize
interference with the control structure the new branch arrangement would need to be
located upstream of the existing bifurcation. However, the available space is limited by
the slopes to the north and west. The tunnel portal could potentially be cut back onto the
slope, but this would need to be limited to avoid significant excavation that may affect
slope stability. Designs have been developed to minimize interference with the existing
control structure and where possible to minimize cutting back the slopes.
The Project will require water to be diverted from the existing irrigation tunnel to the new
powerhouse. This new arrangement will be designed so that the irrigation capacity of
Tunnel 4 will be unaffected. Several options were considered in the analysis; they are
discussed in Chapter 4. Figure 3.5 shows the selected arrangement of penstock
connection and the powerhouse location.
Figure 3.5:
Penstock Connection and Powerhouse Location
Source: T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
3-7

3.4.3 Proposed Powerhouse

Requirements of the Proposed Powerhouse
The primary requirements of the proposed powerhouse are that it has to be downstream
of the dam and connected to Tunnel 4 and to be out of the spray of water when the outlet
radial gates are in operation. From these requirements, the powerhouse would be
constrained to either upstream of the chutes from the outlet gates or far enough
downstream to be unaffected by spray during its operation. The short timescale of this
project means there were significant restrictions to the amount work that could be done to
find an optimum location for the powerhouse. The alternative sites considered and the
assessment process that led to the decision on final location are outlined in Section 4.2.4
and shown in Figure 3.6. Location C has finally been selected for the powerhouse.
Figure 3.6:
Alternate Powerhouse Locations
Source: T4CJV
3.4.4 Mechanical and Electrical Plant

Turbine Selection and Rating
The head level at Tarbela is 104.2 m with a flow of 1,450 m3/s, the proposed turbine type
is the vertical Francis, which is the most commonly used type of turbine and has high
head and flow operational ranges. Following optimization of the unit rating by cost
analysis, it was decided that three 470 MW turbines will offer the highest rate of return.
This rating is also similar to turbines at the 3rd Extension, with the notable difference
being the rotational speed.
The speed selected for the Project is 107.14 rotations per minute (rpm) which is higher
than the 90.9 rpm at the 3rd Extension. The higher speed for the Project means that
smaller components can be used for the turbine and the overall dimensions of the
powerhouse kept to a minimum. However with the increase in speed the submergence of
the turbine will be greater to ensure that there is no cavitation damage. Currently the
speed selected is a compromise between the excavation depth and the powerhouse
WAPDA
August 2011
3-8

dimensions. The centerline of the turbine will be at an elevation of 327.6 m to provide a

submergence of 7.7 m. Figures 3.7 and 3.8 provide drawings of the transversal and
longitudinal section views respectively.
Figure 3.7:
Transversal Section View of Powerhouse through Unit Axis
Figure 3.8:
Longitudinal Section View of Powerhouse with Three 450 MW Units
Powerhouse Loading Bay
Existing
Slope
Outlet Control
Source:
T4CJV
Turbine Components and Erosion Resistance
The largest component to be transported to site would be the turbine runner. The
diameter of this will be the same as the inlet diameter of the turbine at around 7 m. The
WAPDA
August 2011
3-9

runner and guide vanes will be fabricated using martensitic stainless steel. The guide
vanes will be supported on a bearing from the head cover and seals will be fitted to
prevent the ingress of water and solid materials into the bearings. The guide vanes will
be used in conjunction with a hydraulically governed regulating ring mounted on the
head cover of the turbine with tilting type guide bearing. A shaft seal will be installed
between the turbine/runner coupling and the turbine bearing and held in place by springs
or compressed air. The spiral casing is expected to be manufactured on site from rolled
plate components.
To date, the existing turbines at Tarbela have not been significantly affected by effects of
erosion from the passage of aggressive sediments. However, erosion is likely to be more
significant for these units due to the higher speed of the turbine and the increase of
sediment passing through the reservoir from the build-up. To mitigate for this, it is
proposed that hard coatings will be considered for the turbine parts that are more
susceptible to damage.
Inlet and Relief Valves
The installation of the main inlet valves will minimize water leakage when the turbines
are shut down and also facilitate for the dewatering of a single unit for maintenance
without effects on the operation of other generating units connected to the penstock. The
main inlet valves will be located outside the powerhouse structure to minimize the crane
span and powerhouse size. It is likely that the 7.5 m diameter valve will be transported in
parts and reassembled on site. For the proposed turbines the two types of valve have
been considered: a ring gate and a butterfly valve. It was thought that a ring gate would
have limited application in respect of the aspects of maintenance and inspection as well
as other disadvantages such as:
Larger spiral casing and potentially increase the size of the powerhouse; and
Separate relief valve isolation would be required.
It was for these reasons the butterfly valves were chosen. These valves would have a
double lattice structure and be operated by twin servomotors. Valve closing will be
accomplished either via counterweights or double acting servomotors.
In order to limit pressure rise in the penstock in the event of load reduction or unit/station
trips, Howell Bunger relief valves will be installed on each turbine with an extra one on a
common branch and independent of the turbines to allow one relief valve to act as a back
up to another. These valves will open to allow the rate of flow reduction in the penstock
to be minimized when load is thrown off.
3.4.5 Switchyard
The existing 500 kV switchyard is in breaker and a half formation which means that for
three generators two bays of switchgear are required, one bay with three circuit breakers
and the other with two. However due to the layout of the switchyard the area will have to
be extended by three bay widths in order to bring three connections in from the new
powerhouse. The switchyard will therefore be extended by bays 19, 20 and 21. This will
mean that the switchyard perimeter wall will have to be moved but at this stage a survey
of the existing available ground is required before it can be determined whether further
reclamation is required or not. It is however estimated that the length of the extension
will be approximately 75 m.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-10

Constructing a new switchyard on the Right Bank was also considered, assessment into
the feasibility of this alternative is discussed in Section 4.2.5.
3.4.6 Transmission Lines

Preliminary system studies have indicated that no additional 500 kV transmission lines
will be needed to evacuate the power from the Project development and currently system
studies are being carried out to confirm this. As a result, the switchyard extension will
only need to cater for three incoming generator connections and this can be achieved as
discussed above.
However the location of the new powerhouse does not allow direct single span access to
the existing switchyard. Therefore, intermediate towers or gantries will be required
downstream, on the Right Bank and possibly extra intermediate towers in the river
between the powerhouse and existing switchyard.
3.4.7 Tailrace
It will be necessary to excavate the existing plunge pool to provide a smooth discharge
path for the water leaving the turbines. It is expected that a cofferdam will be constructed
such that the excavation for the powerhouse and the tailrace can be undertaken, hopefully
within a single season.
3.5
Other Components
3.5.1 Labor Camps

Two options have been considered for labor camps, one on the Left Bank and the other
on the Right Bank. It is estimated that during peak construction the number of
construction workers may go up to 2,500.
Option 1 Left Bank
About 100 barracks are available for labor camp on the Left Bank but all of these need
major repair. These barracks were previously used during the original construction of the
Tarbela Dam project and are very derelict with doors, windows and roofs in need of
replacement. In addition, water supply lines, sewerage and electricity would need to be
installed and the area around the barracks cleared from the overgrowth and shrubbery.
There are however sufficient numbers of barracks available that could be used following
appropriate refurbishment.
Option 2 Right Bank
About twenty barracks are also available on the Right Bank Colony which were used as
labor camp during the construction of Ghazi Barotha Barrage. The condition of these
barracks is similar to those on the Left Bank.
In addition there are around 15 houses adjacent to these barracks, which are presently
residences of WAPDA employees. In order to use these barracks, the occupants of these
houses would have to be moved to 26 vacant houses available in Right Bank Colony.
The houses would require renovation and the surplus could be used as residences for the
consultants staff.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-11

Labor Camp Inputs and Outputs
There would be inputs of different types including food stuff, utility items and personal
belongings and outputs would include the solid and liquid wastes produced from the
camps.
Machinery and Vehicles
The following list outlines the major machinery and vehicles that are envisaged to be
required for the project construction works:
Machinery and vehicles needed for construction
Hydraulic excavators
Refueling car
Welding machine 30 kW
Dump trucks
Water tanker
Vibratory roller
Concrete batching plant
Water pump
Submersible pump
Motor grader
Tower crane
Fork lifter
Bulldozer
Mobile crane
Low bed trailer
Wheel loader
Air compressor
Diving Equipment
Self loading crane
Tractor
Work boat
Transit mixer
Generator 365 kW, 100kW Dredger

and 150 kW
Concrete pump car
3.5.2 Construction Materials

There are two potential sources for construction material in the project:
Material quarries used by contractors for previous projects could potentially be a suitable
source and yield sufficient quantities; and
New areas in the vicinity of the project could be identified for material.
Reuse of Major Quarries / Sites
The remnants of the main concrete mixing plant from the construction of Tarbela Dam
are still evident today. Spoil dumps are also visible on the terrace and along the river
bank cut face. The sources of aggregate for the concrete during construction are as
follows:
Coarse Aggregate procured from the river bed through dredging; and
Fine Aggregate sand can be obtained from the Left Bank quarry near the Sobra
Colony.
It is anticipated that both of these sources can provide the required materials in sufficient
quantities, the quantities required are still being calculated by the Design Team.
However, with the construction of Ghazi Barotha, the water level in the river valley has
been elevated therefore making excavation of coarse aggregate from the river bed more
difficult.
If required core material in particular silt and clay, can be procured from the Gandaf area
in the west/northwest of Tarbela Dam. The Gandaf area is about 15 to 20 km from
Tarbela and a tunnel across the ridge was built for the easy and quick transportation of
WAPDA
August 2011
3-12

the core material. Presently the Gandaf area has been developed into an industrial area;
however, the available terraces can be explored for this type of core material.
The rip rap/stone pitching material was previously obtained mainly through the required
excavations from tunnels and spillways. Limestone from spillways was used as rip rap in
the upstream slope, while the carbonaceous schist material of metamorphic nature was
used in the downstream side of the embankment.
Currently, it appears that these sources will not provide any material, however the nearby
areas can be studied for this purpose.
Potential Material Sources
As well as the major quarry areas discussed above, the following areas have been
identified as alternative sources for the aggregates for the concrete:
Coarse Aggregate potential suitable areas for sandy gravel material include the deltaic
and island areas that presently exist. The water bay area downstream of the Right Bank
has also been proposed and the quartzite rock crops along the road extending to the river
is deemed to be sound and durable in nature for use;
Fine Aggregate the sand from Qibla-Bandi and Lawrancepur, nearly 30 to 40 km
respectively from the Right Bank, can provide good sources that are well established,
recognized and well studied and have been used previously in the Ghazi Barotha
Hydropower Project;
Core Material some potential terraces for silt and clay are likely to be identified in the
Gandaf area industrial zone. The ultimate decision on the source will be determined by
the potential environmental and social impacts;
Rip Rap / Slope Protection and Pitching Material the required excavation for the
powerhouse and penstock construction will provide quartzite to be used as rip rap for the
upstream slope and the graphitic schist in the near vicinity can provide pitching stone on
the downstream side.
Alkali Silica Reaction (ASR) Potential
From the existing concrete structures, the coarse aggregate from the Indus River and the
fine aggregate (Lawrancepur sand) have proven to be as potentially reactive to Ordinary
Portland Cement (OPC). However, studies and testing can be done to determine the ratio
of OPC to slag cement to control the reactive nature of the aggregates.
Alternatively, the nearby cement factories can provide low alkali cement on demand,
while pozzolon sources have not been established thus far in Pakistan.
3.5.3 Waste Generation and Disposal

Areas identified for excavated material disposal are approximately 2 km from the
proposed new powerhouse site along the road leading to the Right Bank WAPDA
Colony. The proposed area is on the same river terrace adjacent to the site where old
TJV contractor had established their main concrete mixing plant.
It is estimated that 2.5 Mm3 of excavated material will be generated by the Project. In
addition, it is estimated that up to 1 ton of solid waste, may be generated per day at the
workers camps during the peak construction period as well as up to 1,000 liters per day of
sewage waste.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-13

3.6
Program for Development
The original program for the project assumed a construction period of four years
(48 months). This was for the 960 MW scheme proposed in the 1992 Inception Report
and possibly assumed that the project would be awarded as a variation to the 3rd
Extension project that was ongoing at the time the report was written. The project has
now been reviewed and the installed capacity will be larger with three instead of two
turbines.
Furthermore, it will be necessary to enter into a new set of contracts and complete a new
set of plant designs and this is likely to lead to some increase in construction time. The
preliminary construction schedules indicate the first turbine generator could be completed
within just over four years. The power station will now be completed between four and a
half to five years after.
3.6.1 Construction Method of Tunnel 4 Raised Intake

After the final location of the intake has been determined, initial excavation for Option 2
would be carried out to establish a level platform around the proposed location at an
elevation of 460 m on which the shaft construction can be carried out. It is envisaged
that at this elevation the need for forming a cofferdam, that would extend the construction
period for the shaft, would be minimized or avoided but grouting will be required.
Construction of the shaft would be by drill and blast methods. Cut slopes in the vicinity
of Tunnel 4 will be need to be undertaken using controlled blasting..
The excavation volume of the intake area is estimated as approximately 900,000 m3 and
it is expected that this excavation will be undertaken by dozing and ripping in the softer
materials and by blasting in the stronger diabase. Work has been phased over a period of
three years in periods of eight months when the water level is below 460 m, in order to
minimize excavation and protect slopes.
The sequence for the Tunnel 4 raised intake excavations and associated construction
program for intake option 2 have been provided in Figure 3.9 and Figure 3.10
respectively.
Tentative Construction Program for Mechanical and Electrical Plant
For the Project it is likely that the overall construction program (see Figure 3.11) will be
controlled by the mechanical and electrical works. An outline for construction periods
has been obtained from Alstom for a two unit station and they consider that the following
periods would be appropriate:
Supply Unit 1: 40 months;
Supply Unit 2: 43 months;
Install/Commission Unit 1: 13 months; and
Install/Commission Unit 2: 13 months.
This gives total time for operation of the first machine of 53 months and the second
machine of 56 months.
A third machine could be expected three months later i.e. 59 months following award of
contract. This implies that first generation will be some five months later than had
previously been envisaged with the last machine coming on line nearly five years
following the notice to proceed.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-14

Figure 3.9:
Source:
Excavation Sequence for Tunnel 4 Raised Intake
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
3-15

Figure 3.10:
Source:
Construction Program of Intake Option 2
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
3-16

Figure 3.11: Tentative Construction Program (Downstream Area)
Source:
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
3-17

Powerhouse Civil Works
The civil work program has been developed independently from the above and it is
estimated that the Power Station will be sufficiently advanced to start turbine erection
some 26 months after the issuing of the Notice to Proceed. This will tie in well with the
probable start of delivery of the first turbine components.
Once the first turbine draft tube is complete, it will be embedded and the concrete will
form a base for spiral casing erection. Once the spiral casing has been completed and
pressure tested the concrete works will continue upwards to form the generator
foundations and the area will then be returned to the Mechanical and Electrical
Contractors to allow them to erect the turbine internals and the generators. Each unit will
proceed at roughly 3 month intervals.
The program envisaged is similar to that followed in many other large hydroelectric
power stations and it is not expected to present any major difficulties. It might be
possible to save some time but it is almost certain that it will be necessary to perform a
full turbine model test and based upon previous experience it is considered that the
indicative program put forward by Alstom is not unreasonable.
Switchyard and 500 kV Connections Civil Works
Assuming the studies confirm that the best solution is to simply extend the existing
facilities it will be necessary to extend the 500 kV switchyard to accommodate the new
switchgear bays and the associated incoming lines from the power station. It is proposed
to use material from the powerhouse/intake excavation to extend the switchyard as this
will reduce the quantity of material that has to be disposed of elsewhere.
It is expected that the connection between the new powerhouse and the extended
switchyard will be by 500 kV transmission lines although alternative methods are being
considered. It will be necessary to construct transmission towers within the tailrace but it
is understood that the facilities exist in Pakistan for tower construction in rivers and
similar areas. Therefore no problem is expected with this work. The time available to
complete the switchyard civil works and the equipment installation is more than adequate
and these works are not expected to be on the critical path for the project.
Penstock and Associated Civil Works
Before the erection of the penstock can begin it will be necessary to excavate a very
significant trench to accommodate the pipeline. It will also be necessary to cut back the
rock face behind the existing portal and also to the west of the existing outlet control
structure. Significant slope support works are also expected to be required. It is proposed
that the civil contractor will complete the majority of these works in advance of penstock
construction. Construction of the penstock will proceed in sections leaving the
connection to the exit from Tunnel 4 as late as possible to allow it to remain in service to
release irrigation flows for the maximum period possible.
3.7
Summary of Project Cost
The total project cost is about US$ 909 million. The cost estimates include physical
contingencies, price contingencies based on international inflation, taxes and duties on
civil works on imported machines, turbines and generators, and Interest During
Construction (IDC) of US$83.5 million assuming IBRD and IDA terms for the loan.The
Project cost by component is provided in the Table 3-2.
WAPDA
August 2011
3-18

Table 3.2: Estimated Cost of the Project

Total Cos t Incl.
Continge ncie s
A. Powe r Hous e and Tunne l Works
A1 Power House
A2 Penstock
A3 Modification to intake
Sub-total A
B . Turbine s , ge ne rators and auxiliarie s
B1 Turbines generators and related equitment
B2 Transformers, switchyard electrical. connection
Sub-total B
C. Imple me ntaton of SAP and EMP, Dam Monitoring
C1. Social Action Plan (SAP) for legacy issues
C2. Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
C3. Dam saftey and montoring program
C4. Galcial Monitoring Program
Sub-Total C
D. Cons ultancie s for Supe rvis ion
D1 Construction Supervision consulting services
D2 M&E, supervision of EMP and SAP, Project
Sub-total D
E. Proje ct Manage me nt, TA, Training
E1 PMU support and audits, etc.
E2 Capacity building TA, POE, training
E3 Strategic studies and future project preparation
Sub-total E
B as e Cos t
Physical Contingencies
Price Contingencies
Fees and IDC
Total Proje ct Cos t
Tax contents 11%
WAPDA
August 2011
Bas e Cos t and

Continge ncie s
156.2
63.5
89.9
309.6
133.6
54.3
76.9
264.8
377.6
53.9
431.5
323.9
46.3
370.2
15.0
2.0
6.0
5.0
28.0
15.0
2.0
6.0
5.0
28.0
24.0
2.4
26.4
21.0
2.4
23.4
13.0
2.0
15.0
30.0
825.5
0.0
0.0
83.5
909.0
90.8
13.0
2.0
15.0
30.0
716.4
60.6
48.5
83.5
909.0
3-19

4 Need for Project and Analysis of

Alternatives
4.1
Need for Project
4.1.1 Overview
The waters of the Indus basin begin in the Himalayan Mountains and run a course
through the State of Jammu and Kashmir. The river enters Pakistan in the Karakorum
mountains in Gilgit-Baltistan (a self governed region of Pakistan) and after flowing in a
westerly direction turns southward through the entire length of the country, converging
and emptying into the Arabian Sea to the southeast of Karachi. Following the partition of
Pakistan and India, development over the last century has seen a series of barrages and
link canals built to transfer water from the Indus and Jhelum to supply the water to the
southern parts of the country. These barrages include Tarbela and Mangla Dams. This
system currently provides water for more than 26 million acres of land, representing the
largest irrigated area of any one river system in the world.
4.1.2 Regional Context

The northern highlands of Pakistan include fifty peaks that reach above 6,500 m with
more than a half of the summits over 4,500 m. The topography of the area makes it
attractive for hydro generation. Tarbela is situated in the southern part of the highlands
and close to the Indus plain on the Indus River, the longest river in Pakistan with a total
length of 3,180 km and vital to the economy and society.
In terms of hydropower potential, the Indus basin represents 77.2% of the 56,773 MW of
overall hydropower potential in Pakistan. A number of potential hydropower schemes
are currently under development to extract this vast power generation potential. Of these
57% are at the design and construction stage, as with the Project. The remainder
represents projects that have been identified as potential and those for which feasibility is
complete as demonstrated by Figure 4.1.
Figure 4.1:
Breakdown of Hydropower Projects Within the Indus River Basin
13%
17%
13%
Identified
Feasibility Study Completed
Design and Construction Stage
In Operation
57%
Source:
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
4-1

With the population of Pakistan continuing to increase, there is a strong incentive to

construct large storage reservoirs in the less populated northern region to sustain
Pakistans growing energy needs. As is demonstrated by Figure 4.2, since 1972 the
energy consumption per capita has increased by around 500% from under 100 kWh to
474 kWh in per capita in 2007.
Figure 4.2:
Source:
Pakistan Energy Consumption per Capita
World Bank, World Development Indicators
4.1.3 National Context

Overview
With a population in excess of 169 million as of 2009, the economy of Pakistan is the
27th largest in the world. Agriculture is one of the main sectors of the country and the
backbone of the economy and therefore a secure supply of water for irrigation purposes is
crucial. Snowmelt in the summer from the Himalayan and Karakorum glaciers provides
a high flow of water in the Indus and a small portion of this is stored in Tarbela and
Mangla for the winter release. This allows for two irrigated crops to be harvested
annually a winter/early spring crop (rabi season) and a summer crop (kharif or wet
season). The capacity of Tarbela Reservoir is decreasing as a result of continued
sedimentation although at a much lower rate than originally predicted.
The Kalabagh Dam to be constructed on the Indus River in western Punjab could provide
the much needed additional storage to ensure the continuation of a constant water supply.
However, so far this project has not been pursued despite the completion of designs. It is
clear that sediment management is an important issue to maintain the storage capacity of
the existing reservoirs in future. The proposed Diamer Basha Dam 315 km upstream of
Tarbela would significantly reduce the amount of sediment inflow as well as allowing
Tarbela to maintain a high reservoir level for longer periods of time, allowing for more
effective operation of the dam.
With increased urbanization and industrialization the shortage of power in the country is
growing. Extensive load shedding is felt by all communities in the country which results
in a slower rate of increase in consumption than most developed or developing countries.
Development Policy
In 1958, WAPDA was established to develop and operate the majority of the hydropower
in Pakistan while private hydro developments have been possible under the auspices of
the Private Power and Infrastructure Board (PPIB) since 1994. WAPDA however
remains the main body developing Pakistans hydropower resources.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-2

The current total hydropower generation capacity in Pakistan is around 6,500 MW with a
further 1,500 MW under construction. Schemes that are either under study, ready for
construction or identified as future projects represent a combined potential power
generation of 41,729 MW. There are currently 28 projects ongoing to either extend or
construct schemes to increase power generation capacity. These projects span until 2030
and would offer a combined total of 36,111 MW.
The Gross Domestic Product of Pakistan amounts to USD 162 billion as of 2009 with
USD 70.8 billion allocated as funds for all development programs in the country. With
large hydropower projects costing in the region of USD 1-2 billion per MW installed, the
28 projects would require USD 36-72 billion. Although the need for additional power
has been clearly demonstrated, it is also clear that the development of these schemes is
unlikely to proceed as quickly as the population may prefer. However, it can be
anticipated that if the Diamer Basha project moves ahead, and its implementation goes
smoothly, then it is likely that the next major scheme will follow within five to 10 years,
any earlier would put a huge strain on the local infrastructure and resources.
4.1.4 Demand Trends

Current Status of Generation in Pakistan
The need for additional generating capacity in Pakistan is clearly demonstrated by the
data provided in Table 4.1 and Table 4.2. In Figure 4.3 it is evident that that the current
generating capability is 16,804 MW in the summer and 12,840 MW in the winter, when
hydro capability is reduced. Table 4.1 shows that the current Pakistan Electric Power
Company (PEPCO) demand, including 700 MW exported to the Karachi Electric Supply
Company (KESC) is 20,151 MW. This data would indicate a current shortfall of
7,311 MW in the winter and 3,347 MW in the summer.
Demand Forecast Assumptions
Table 4.1 contains the predicted increase in demand for electrical power up until 2030.
These are based upon an approximate 8% per annum increase in demand by the
distribution companies (DISCOS).
No seasonal variations in the data are accounted for in Table 4.1 and it is clear that there
are significant variations in demand caused by the need for space heating and air
conditioning.
In Figure 4.3 the National Transmission and Dispatch Company (NTDC) data has been
adjusted to take account of the seasonal changes in generation capacity. These results
indicate that during the winter season there will be insufficient generation to fulfill
demand through the period considered. However, during the summer season generating
capacity should exceed demand in the period 2014-15. It should of course be borne in
mind that generation capability rarely meets the installed capacity as plant will be out of
service due to planned and forced outages and that the development of some of the plants
included in the planting program are behind schedule.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-3

Table 4.1:
Predicted Growth in Electrical Demand (DISCO-WISE Load Forecast (MW))
Name
2009-
2010-
2011-
2012-
2013-
2014-
2015-
2016-
2017-
2018-
2019-
2020-
2021-
2022-
2023-
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3970
4271
4609
4982
5466
5820
6224
6521
7006
7605
8253
8940
9668
10448
11268
1840
1985
2137
2300
2473
2654
2844
2980
3201
3475
3771
4085
4417
4774
5149
2608
2832
3061
3305
3603
3938
4296
4501
4836
5249
5696
6170
6673
7212
7778
2084
2290
2507
2719
2936
3153
3385
3547
3810
4136
4488
4862
5258
5683
6128
2622
2858
3116
3398
3706
4044
4412
4623
4966
5391
5850
6337
6853
7407
7988
PESCO
2372
2587
2832
3104
3406
3635
3881
4066
4368
4742
5146
5574
6028
6515
7026
Hyderabad Electric Supply
1855
1988
2131
2288
2461
2650
2959
2996
3218
3494
3791
4106
4441
4800
5176
1107
1173
1244
1319
1399
1483
1573
1648
1771
1922
2086
2259
2443
2641
2848
752
809
869
934
1004
1079
1160
1215
1306
1417
1538
1666
1802
1947
2100
19210
20793
22506
24349
26454
28456
30634
32098
34482
37433
40618
44000
47583
51426
55461
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
18105
19598
21214
22950
24935
26820
28875
30255
32502
35284
38286
41474
44851
48474
52276
665
720
779
843
916
985
1061
1112
1194
1296
1407
1524
1648
1781
1921
18770
20318
21993
23793
25851
27805
29936
31367
33696
36580
39693
42997
46498
50254
54197
Lahore Electric Supply Company

(LESCO )
Gujranwala Electric Power
Company (GEPCO)
Faisalabad Electric Supply
Company (FESCO)
Islamabad Electric Supply
Company (IESCO)
Multan Electric Power Company
(MEPCO)
Company (HESCO)
Quetta Electric Supply Company
(QESCO)
Tribal Electric Supply Company
(TESCO)
DISCOs Demand (undiversified)
Diversity Factor
DISCOs Demand (diversified)
T&T Losses (500 & 220kV)
NTDC Demand
WAPDA
August 2011
4-4

Name
Auxiliary Consumption
PEPCO Demand w/o Export to
2009-
2010-
2011-
2012-
2013-
2014-
2015-
2016-
2017-
2018-
2019-
2020-
2021-
2022-
2023-
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
681
737
798
863
938
1008
1086
1138
1222
1327
1440
1559
1686
1823
1966
19451
21055
22791
24656
26788
28813
31022
32504
34918
37907
41132
44557
48185
52077
56163
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
20151
21755
23491
25356
27488
29513
31722
33204
35618
38607
41832
45257
48885
52777
56863
Karachi Electricity Supply

Company (KESC)
Export to KESC
Peshawar Electric Power
Company (PEPCO) Demand
Source:
Provided by NTDC on 4 August 2010
WAPDA
August 2011
4-5

Table 4.2:
Existing Installed Capacity of PEPCO System as of 30 June 2010
Sr.
No.
Fuel
Summer
Winter
3478
3521
1101
Mangla
1000
1014
409
Ghazi Barotha
1450
1405
580
Warsak
243
171
145
Chashma Low Head
184
91
48
Small Hydro
69
64
20
6444
Gas/FO
850
700
GTPS Kotri #1-7
Gas
174
140
1024
840
TPS Guddu Steam #1-4
FO
640
270
10
TPS Guddu C C #5-13
Gas
1015
885
11
TPS Quetta
Gas
35
Thermal (GENCOs)
Sub Total GENCO-II
1180
TPS Muzaffargarh #1-6
Gas/FO
1350
1130
13
NGPS Multan #1&2
Gas/FO
195
60
14
GTPS Faisalabad #1-9
Gas/HSD
244
210
15
SPS Faisalabad #1&2
FO
132
100
Shandra GT
Gas
17
Nuc
25
1690
12
Sub Total GENCO-III
Hydel
2303
TPS Jamshoro #1-4
16
18
FBC Lakhra
Coal
44
30
1965
1530
150
30
Sub Total GENCO-IV
150
30
Sub Total GENCOs
4829
3580
Sub Total (WAPDA+GENCOs)
11273
Nuclear Plants
325
9846
5883
300
Chashma Nuclear (PAEC)

Total Capacity (Public)
11598
19
Jagran Hydro
30
30
20
Malakand-III Hydro
81
81
Sub Total (Hydel IPPs)
Thermal
6266
Sub Total GENCO4
Public Sector
Capability (MW)
(MW)
Sub Total (WAPDA Hydro)
Private Sector
Installed
Capacity)
Tarbela
Hydro
Name of Power Station
10146
6183
111
111
21
KAPCO
Gas/FO
1638
1386
22
Hub Power Project (HUBCO)
FO
1292
1200
23
Kohinoor Energy Ltd (KEL)
FO
131
124
24
AES Laipir Ltd
FO
362
350
25
Aes Pak Gen (Pvt) Ltd
FO
365
350
26
Southern Electric Power Co Ltd
FO
135
119
27
Habibullah Energy Ltd (HCPC)
Gas
140
129
28
Uch Power Project
Gas
586
551
(SEPCOL)
29
Rouch (Pak) Power Ltd
FO
450
395
30
Fauji Kabrwala (FKPCL)
Gas
157
151
31
Saba Power Company
FO
134
125
32
Japan Power Generation Ltd
FO
135
120
WAPDA
August 2011
4-6

Sr.
Installed
Capability (MW)
Name of Power Station
Fuel
33
Liberty Power Project
Gas
34
Altern Energy Ltd (AEL)
Gas
31
31
35
Attock Generation PP
FO
163
156
36
ATLAS Power
Gas
219
219
37
Engro PP Daharki Sindh
Gas
227
217
38
Saif PP Sahiwai Punjab
RFO/Gas
225
225
39
Orient PP Balloki Punjab
RFO/Gas
225
225
40
Nishat PP Near Lahore Punjab
RFO
200
200
7050
6484
41
Gulf Rental P.P Gujranwala Punj
No.
Capacity)
(MW)
Sub-Total (Thermal IPPs)

RFO
Summer
235
Winter
211
62
62
Sub Total (Rental)
62
Total Thermal (IPPs)
7112
6546
62
Total Capacity (Private)
7223
6657
Total Hydel (Public and Private)
6555
Total Thermal (Public and
12226
6377
2414
10426
Private)
Total (PEPCO System)
Source:
18821
16803
12840
Provided by NTDC on 4 August 2010
Figure 4.3:
Predicted Increase in System demand and Generating Capability
Climate Change
According to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC),

climate change is defined as a change of climate which is attributed directly or indirectly
to human activity that alters the composition of the global atmosphere and which is in
addition to natural climate variability observed over comparable time periods. In this
context, climate change is related to global warming. The scientific consensus, supported
WAPDA
August 2011
4-7

by a strong credible body of evidence, is that the climate is changing and that it is largely
down to human actions.
The current discussions are focused on stabilizing greenhouse gas concentrations in the
atmosphere at a level that would prevent dangerous anthropogenic interference with the
climate system. Carbon dioxide (CO2) is considered to be the most important of the
greenhouse gasses and accounts for the around 60% of the enhanced greenhouse effect.
The concentrations in the atmosphere increased from approximately 280 parts per million
(ppm) in pre-industrial times to 382 ppm in 2006, representing a 36% increase.
Production of electricity from fossil fuels is considered to be a major source of CO2
emissions. As of 2007, total installed power capacity in Pakistan was 19,505 MW, of
which 65% originates from fossil fuels, 2% from nuclear and the remaining 33% from
hydro.
To meet the increased demand for electricity as highlighted in Section 4.1.4, the potential
of hydropower and its inherent benefits cannot be neglected.
Advantages of Hydropower
Hydropower is already a major contributor for world electricity. A modern plant like
Tarbela is capable of converting the available energy in water to electricity with
efficiency in excess of 90%. Provided the environmental, ecological and social / political
effects are well understood, hydro schemes offer some very desirable characteristics for a
power plant.
Hydro schemes can supply electricity without unpredictable network input variations and
offer the potential for rapid response to changing energy demands because the water can
be released at short notice. The input of power can match the annual variations in
demand because water can be stored for a length of time.
Technologies associated with hydropower are well established and can be very reliable.
Of the capital costs for a hydro scheme, 80% is typically attributed to civil works. For a
scheme like Tarbela where the dam is already in existence, construction costs will be
comparatively very low and hence the rate of return very high particularly given the long
life expectancy that is typical for hydro schemes.
Needs Case and the Project Objectives
Presently in Pakistan only 65 70% of the population has access to electricity and the
Government is committed to provide electricity access to all households in the minimum
possible time. The country is currently facing extensive power shortages. The present
electricity demand-supply gap, coupled with consistent growth in demand (7-8% per
annum), clearly indicates the critical need for enhancing the countrys current power
generation capability.
The power shortfall situation is being tackled through load management by shedding and
supplying power to various areas and sectors on a rotation basis. Hence industries,
services and businesses are directly affected with some being shut down or running at far
less than optimum for periods of time.
The power generated from the Project will be supplied to the national grid for further
transmission to various load centers to augment existing supplies. The additional
generation will help to meet the existing demand for electricity. It may also support the
establishment of new enterprises, which could boost commercial and economic activities
WAPDA
August 2011
4-8

and enhance job opportunities in the country. The Project proposes to add 1,410 MW of
additional generation to the existing 3,478 MW capacity at Tarbela.
4.2
Assessment of Alternatives
4.2.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the alternative considerations that have been studied for the
Project. The analysis of alternatives compares feasible options to various sources and
designs that would have a similar outcome. The analysis includes consideration of the
no project option followed by a discussion on design alternatives.
4.2.2 Without Project Option

The without-project scenario is not acceptable since this will seriously deteriorate the
shortage in power production in the country. On the total generating capacity of
electricity there is currently a considerable shortfall as can be seen from the Table 4.3
below. In the coming years this shortfall will further increase since demand for electricity
is growing with an estimated eight percent per year. As a result more load shedding (in
some areas up to 12 hours in a day in summer) and power cuts will be experienced with
considerable social and economic impacts such as impeded economic growth, increased
unemployment, and poverty.
Table 4.3: Current Generating Capacity and Shortfall in Pakistan
Generating Capacity (MW)
Shortfall (MW)
Summer
16,804
3,347
Winter
12,840
7,311
With the production of an additional 1,410 MW the T4HP project will substantially
contribute in closing the gap between demand and supply of power in the country.
Moreover no other non-hydro alternatives exist which can provide electricity so low in
cost, clean and from renewable resources. Another advantage is that the project can be
completed within five years, since most of the infrastructure is already in place.
4.2.3 Site Alternatives

There is limited flexibility as to the siting of the Project as it is an extension to an existing
scheme and therefore significantly restricted by the existing infrastructure such as the
reinforced slopes, Tunnel 4 and the Outlet Control Structure. The small degree of
flexibility that can be afforded relate to a few specific components such as the
powerhouse, switchyard location and the intake. Sections 4.2.4, 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 aim to
describe the various alternatives considered.
4.2.4 Alternatives for the Powerhouse

Powerhouse Location
The Tarbela Hydropower 4th Extension Project Inception Report (1992) proposed
location for the powerhouse was downstream from the outlet gates on an area of waste
ground that had previously supported a concrete batching plant during construction of the
main project. During present studies further locations are considered as alternate sites for
powerhouse construction, including building the powerhouse underground. Locations of
all the above ground sites are shown in Figures 4.4 and 4.5.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-9

Figure 4.4:
Powerhouse Locations Considered
Source: T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
4-10

Figure 4.5:
Powerhouse Locations Considered
Location A1
Location A2
Location B1/B2
Location C
Final Location
Source: T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
4-11

Location C has been selected as the powerhouse location and a brief description of the
other potential powerhouse sites and the reasons for their non-selection is provided in the
following sub-sections.
Table 4.4 below provides a summary of the technical, economical and environmental
criteria for each of the alternative site locations.
Table 4.4:
Site
Location A1
Criteria of the Alternative Site Locations

Technical Criteria
Economical Criteria
Environmental Criteria
Provides a clear route out for
A long penstock would
Minimal excavation
would likely be needed.
connection of the transmission
be required with cost
line to the proposed switchyard
and head-loss
extension.
implications
Program of site investigations

needed to determine foundation
requirements
Location A2
The powerhouse would be
A shorter penstock
founded on rock
would be required than
Penstock may be too close to
that for A1.
Right
the discharge from the outlet

gates and therefore subject to
excessive spray
Location B1
Is located further away from the
length of the penstock
Extensive slope cutting
outlet gates in comparison to
between the Tunnel 4
and excavation
the other locations
outlet and the

powerhouse is
significantly shorter than
other locations
Location B2
Is located further away from the
length of the penstock
Extensive excavation in
outlet gates in comparison to
between the Tunnel 4
sedimentary rock
the other locations
outlet and the
Would have required the
powerhouse is
penstock to be run in a Tunnel
significantly shorter than
through sedimentary rocks that
other locations
had previously suffered from

instability
Location C
Is located where the tunnel
Minimizes length of the
No slope cutting or
outlet structure currently exists.
penstock. Reduced
excavation. no need to
Provides direct connection to
capital cost; reduced
relocate existing road.
Tunnel 4.
construction complexity
and risk associated with
slope cutting; additional
energy potential due to
lower head losses in
new penstock.
Source:
MML
WAPDA
August 2011
4-12

Location A1
This location is downstream of the outlet gates of Tunnel 4 and provides a relatively clear
route out for the transmission line connection to the proposed extension of the existing
500 kV switchyard. However, the location requires a long penstock with cost and headloss implications. It is likely that much of the powerhouse foundations would be located
on loose fill (from previous work of an old concrete batching plant and tunnel spoil)
located on alluvium generally below the water table, involving a significant amount of
dewatering. At this location ensuring the excavation remains dry and stable would be
significantly more difficult than for excavations at the other locations where the
foundations are rock.
Although there should be little difficulty in constructing the powerhouse in this location,
as the 3rd Extension location had enjoyed similar foundation conditions, T4CJV
considered that a location closer to the Tunnel 4 outlet would be economically more
feasible.
Location A2
Location A2 was considered to have two key advantages over location A1; the
powerhouse would be founded on rock and the penstock would be shorter than for A1.
There are some concerns however that it would be too close to the discharge from the
outlet gates and therefore subject to excessive spray.
Location B2
Locations B2 is relatively further away from the outlet gates. This location would
significantly shorten the length of the penstock between the Tunnel 4 outlet and the
powerhouse. Location B2 would have required the penstock to be run in a Tunnel
through sedimentary rocks that had previously suffered from instability.
Location B1 would require the shorter penstock compared to the locations mentioned
above. However, the penstock would be founded over existing concrete structures which
would require considerable excavation into the slope. It was for this reason that location
B2 was discarded.
Underground Powerhouse
An underground powerhouse would potentially have been feasible with the cavern
upstream of locations B1 and B2. Although such arrangements would have minimized
the impact upon the road it was not pursued further as there were no clear advantages and
it was considered that, following earlier stability issues, it was likely that the rock quality
was not adequate for such a large excavation.
Location C
Location C provides direct connection to the Tunnel 4, is the best option, and is selected
for the Project. Recent operational information has shown that Tunnel 4 is no longer
used to release significant water flows and this has been confirmed by flow routing
studies that have looked at future operation for nearly fifty years. The emergency
drawdown facility can be provided by Tunnel 5 that was not included in the original
design. It has therefore been concluded that the only remaining need for Tunnel 4 outlet
gates is to provide a flushing facility if the tunnel intakes should become blocked. There
will be overall cost saving (in the order of US$ 50 million) if the existing outlet structure
is demolished and a new set of gates constructed as part of the new powerhouse complex.
The benefits of this arrangement are: (a) reduced capital costs due to savings in
WAPDA
August 2011
4-13

excavation for penstock and powerhouse; (b) reduced construction risks as no need to
modify existing slopes; (c) additional energy potential due to lower head losses in new
penstock; (d) no need to relocate the existing road; (e) it will be possible to incorporate
isolating gates within the new release facility.
The only potential drawback is that it will be necessary to construct the powerhouse on
an area where the underlying poor quality rock had suffered damage during the period
when the power station was being commissioned. However, it is considered that is it
unlikely that the foundation will be unviable and the contract will include for all
necessary provisions to address issues that might be found.
Connection of Tunnel 4 to Powerhouse
Tunnel 4 runs from the intake through the right abutment of the dam for approximately
2.7 km. The downstream control structure is connected to the tunnel at the portal in the
rock face. The control structure is located between the foot of a steep slope to the west
and the Tunnel 3 control structure to the east. There is limited space to locate a new
branch near this structure to connect it to the power house. In order to minimize
interference with the control structure the new branch arrangement would need to be
located upstream of the existing bifurcation. However, the available space is limited by
the slopes to the north and west. The tunnel portal could potentially be cut back onto the
slope, but this would need to be limited to avoid significant excavation that may affect
slope stability. Designs have been developed to minimize interference with the existing
control structure and where possible to minimize cutting back the slopes.
Several options were considered in the analysis, including: (i) 90o T-off from the
downstream control structure; (ii) asymmetric Wye branch located downstream of tunnel
portal; (iii) tunneled asymmetric Wye branch into the rock; (iv) S-bend and branch
arrangements; and (v) straight connection to the power house and reconstructing the
outlet and flip bucket on the right side of the power house with capacity to discharge
water at the current capacity of the tunnel. This allows flow to pass from the lower level
outlet without operating the powerhouse for clearing the intake area of the tunnels in case
there is sudden inflow of sediment for any reason. Considering the location, geology and
minimizing excavation of rock outcrop and stabilization measures, head losses for
various arrangements and constructability the straight connection to the powerhouse
(option v above) is selected is the most suitable for the project. This is least cost and
provides about 4 percent more energy than S-bend arrangements and much more than
other options.
Power House Configuration
The proposed type of turbine is the vertical Francis, which is the most commonly used
type of turbine and has high head and flow operational ranges. To determine the optimal
size of the plant, reservoir operation studies have been carried out using flows over the
period of 1962-2009 and considering developments upstream and downstream. In these
studies priority has been given to meet water demand for irrigation according to the
requirement of the country and preferred peaking regime has also been followed. The
selected design exhibits a much lower head loss value than the design proposed in the
1992 Inception Report because the length of the penstock would be significantly shorter
as a result of the powerhouse location and the hydraulic performance of the straight
connection is better than the T-off. It is this improved hydraulic performance that
facilitated the increase of generation capacity from 950 MW to 1,410 MW.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-14

Following optimization of the unit rating by cost analysis, it was decided that three
470 MW turbines will offer the highest rate of return. This rating is also similar to
turbines at the 3rd Extension, with the notable difference being the rotational speed.
4.2.5 Alternatives for the Intake

On average about 200 million ton of sediment are entering the Tarbela reservoir every
year. At present some eight million ton of silt and clay annually pass through the intakes,
but this amount will certainly increase in future. However, sedimentation in the reservoir
and the advance of the sediment delta is lower than originally expected when Tarbela was
commissioned and this has prolonged the life of Tarbela considerably. The pivot point of
the sediment delta is now some 10 km from the dam, but has not advanced during the last
15 years. On average the sediment level (near the dam) raises with 1 m per year. This
means that in 20 years the level near the intake will be raised with 20 m and that regular
blockage of the inlet gates might be expected. A first incident with blockage happened in
1997 when Tunnel 3 was operated at a very low reservoir level and apparently a large
concentration of sediment caused blockage of the tunnel for a number of days. These
situations should be prevented and therefore the question was raised by WAPDA whether
it is feasible to modify and raise the intake or even to prepare a new intake for Tunnel 4
at a higher level in order to prolong the life of Tarbela considerably.
The design of a raised intake to mitigate for the potential effects of sediment build up
initially began with seven options of which three were taken forward for more detailed
analysis.
Option 1 existing intake (i.e. do nothing to modify the intake in parallel with
building the Project)
Option 2 raised intake on the slope above Tunnel 4 with shaft connection into
upstream part of the tunnel; and
Option 3 raised intake in front of the existing intake, prefabricated and installed at
depth.
Option 1: Do Nothing
Option 1 was do nothing and this is not discussed further as it was considered that the
advancing sediment delta, as presented in the Sedimentation Study performed by HR
Wallingford, had clearly demonstrated the need for the raised intake.
In addition, consideration was given to the raising of the Tunnel 3 intake during
construction of the raised intake for Tunnel 4.
Option 2: Raised Intake on Slope
The raising of the Tunnel 4 intake on the slope above Tunnel 4 is as previously described
in Section 3.4.1.
Option 3: Raised Intake in Front of Existing Intake
Option 3 proposes to construct a raised intake in front of existing intake, which would be
prefabricated and installed at depth. Hydrostatic, earthquake, and sediment flow loadings
were considered to be critical issues for Option 3 as these provide the design
requirements for the foundation conditions and stability analysis. The construction of
this option would require an underwater drill to accurately determine the foundation
conditions around the existing intake and onto which the prefabricated intake structures
WAPDA
August 2011
4-15

would be floated and sunk onto. This added complexity contributed to a high
construction cost estimated at USD 64 million, excluding the drilling platform cost.
Comparison of Options 2 and 3
Calculations indicate that Option 3 will have total head losses that are around three to
five times greater than that of Option 2, depending on whether the plug that forms the
lower bend is installed.
Cost, program and risk were also considered for the two options and the main
conclusions were that Option 3 would require five years construction time compared to
four years for Option 2, and will cost approximately double the expected price for Option
2.
In summary, Option 2 is favored over the other Options 1 and 3.
Tunnel 3 Raised Intake
The excavation area for the Tunnel 4 raised intake is illustrated in Figure 4.6 with the
possible location of Tunnel 3 hatched in red.
Construction of a raised intake at Tunnel 3 after completion of Tunnel 4 raised intake
would be much more difficult because of the steep slope that would be present directly
above Tunnel 3. Secondly, formation of a cofferdam by delayed excavation would not be
possible because the elevation of the desired location would already be at a level that
would be submerged for long periods of time during the year. The combination of these
two factors contributed to the decision to extend the scope of work to include the raising
of Tunnel 3 intake concurrently with the construction of the raised intake for Tunnel 4.
The principles of construction will essentially be the same if Tunnel 3 is included.
However, the excavation area would extend towards the left of the abutment. The
volume of excavation would therefore increase compared to the construction of the
Tunnel 4 raised intake alone but this would present better value than if the raised intakes
for the two tunnels were constructed separately.
Figure 4.6: Plan View of Intake Excavation Area for Tunnel 4 and Possible
Location for Tunnel 3 Intake
Source:
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
4-16

4.2.6 Coffer Dam Option

If a coffer dam is required, and this is not yet certain, then it will be of the cellular formed
from rings of sheet piles. A series of these rings will be constructed and filled each ring
will then be filled with rock and earth to provide the necessary water tightness and
stability. The process of driving the sheet piles into the river bed will cause a limited
amount of disturbance and clouding of the water but as the process will be completed in
stages over a period of time this is not expected to be significant. When the fill is in
place, probably by working from one end, as long as it is carried out carefully there
should be minimal disturbance to the surrounding water.
When the coffer dam is dismantled then care will be required to ensure that the
disturbance to the water is kept within the required limits. If necessary the fill can be
removed by excavators and then the sheet piles pulled out one by one. If such a
procedure is followed then, as for the filling, the disturbance to the surrounding water
will be limited. Figure 4.7 is a drawing of the coffer dam.
Figure 4.7:
Source:
Coffer Dam Plan
T4CJV
4.2.7 Alternatives for the Switchyard

In addition to the extension of the existing switchyard as described in Section 3.4.5,
construction of a new switchyard downstream on the Right Bank was also considered.
The extension was chosen over both the new air insulated substation (AIS) and gas
insulated substation (GIS) because it would be less complex and more cost effective.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-17

New AIS on the Right Bank
The establishment of a new AIS switchyard was considered to be a major undertaking as

this will not only require a new switchyard outdoor area but also a new switchyard
building to house relay, metering and control panels, batteries and charges for direct
current (DC) power supplies, switchboards and transformers for alternating current (AC)
power supplies.
New GIS above Transformers
The GIS option would provide a very compact arrangement and the new switchgear
would have the advantage of being able to use the powerhouse AC and DC auxiliary
power supplies. However, the switchgear would have to be located on a mezzanine floor
above the main transformers.
The GIS bus duct connections between the high voltage side of the transformers to the
switchgear above would need three bays of GIS for the three generator incomers and two
outgoing overhead lines to the existing switchyard. A transmission line gantry would be
mounted on the roof to provide direct connections to the existing switchyard.
4.2.8 Alternatives for the Type of Cement

From the existing concrete structures, the coarse aggregate from the Indus River and the
fine aggregate (Lawrancepur sand) have been proved as potentially reactive to Ordinary
Portland Cement (OPC). However, studies and testing can be done to determine the ratio
of OPC to slag cement to control the reactive nature of the aggregates.
Alternatively, the nearby cement factories can provide low alkali cement on demand,
while pozzolon sources have not been established thus far in Pakistan.
4.2.9 Method of Excavation and Drilling

Excavation will be carried out by dozing and ripping in the softer materials whilst
blasting will be carried out in the stronger diabase.
WAPDA
August 2011
4-18

5 Stakeholder Consultations
5.1
Introduction
The Government of Pakistan (GoP) as well as international donors (e.g. the World Bank)
place great importance on involving primary and secondary stakeholders for determining
the environmental and social impacts associated with project implementation. In order to
gather local knowledge for baseline, understand project affected persons perceptions
regarding impact significance, and propose meaningful mitigation measures, participation
of stakeholders has been part of the Project ESA process. An attempt has been made to
consult with a full range of stakeholders to obtain their views on project interventions.
The logic behind stakeholder consultation is that a project proponent has shared with all
stakeholders relevant information on the project interventions including potential
environmental and social, (positive and negative) impacts. The consultation process
consists of initiating dialogues among all the stakeholders. The process, starting from
awareness campaign to the identification, inclusion and participation of project affected
persons (PAPs) has been able to build on the existence of the Tarbela Dam which is now
a normal part of local communities lives. PAPs and stakeholders are generally able to
understand the implications of the Project activities.
The present ESA has been prepared after consulting with local communities, nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and concerned government departments/
organizations dealing particularly with related fields and to ensure that their views and
concerns have been taken into account in the study.
5.2
Objectives
The following consultative objectives have served as the moving force for the design,
implementation and fact findings for participation process:
To provide key project information and create awareness among various

stakeholders about project intervention;
To have interaction for primary and secondary data collection with project affectees
and other stakeholders;
To identify environmental and social issues such as displacement, safety hazards,

employment, and vulnerable persons;
To begin establishing communication and an evolving mechanism for the resolution

of social and environmental problems at local and project level;
To involve project stakeholders in an inclusive manner; and
To receive feedback from primary stakeholders on mitigation and enhancement

measures for environmental and social impacts.
5.3
Identification of Stakeholders
Stakeholders include all those who affect and are being affected by policies, decisions or
actions within a particular system. Stakeholders can be groups of people, organizations,
institutions and sometimes even individuals. Stakeholders can be divided into primary
and secondary stakeholder categories.
WAPDA
August 2011
5-1

5.3.1 Primary Stakeholders

Primary stakeholder(s) is a person or group of persons directly impacted by a certain
project intervention. In this case, people living within the geographical boundaries of
defined Project area of influence, namely five kilometers upstream of the existing dam,
ten kilometers downstream and two kilometers on the right and Left Banks of the Indus
River.
Primary stakeholders identified and consulted include project affected
communities, local leaders, community members and other local representatives
including Imams, and head masters or teachers of local schools. Project beneficiaries
include WAPDA and the Government of Pakistan.
5.3.2 Secondary Stakeholders

This category of stakeholders pertains to those who may not be directly affected but have
interests that could contribute to the study, play a role in implementation at some stage,
or affect decision making on Project aspects. In this project NGOs, concerned
government departments (federal/ provincial), and line agencies fall under this category.
Ghazi Barotha Taraqiati Idara, a local social development NGO, was initially established
and funded by WAPDA for a nearby downstream hydropower project and it is familiar
with the area. Sungi Development Foundation with a range of human development and
governance programs is active in Haripur District. Environmental NGOs such as WWF
and IUCN have been consulted regarding environmental aspects. Government
organizations dealing with water, energy, fisheries, and transport have also contributed
useful data and opinions regarding mitigation.
Stakeholder and public consultations were completed in two stages which are described
below.
5.4
Consultation Process
A series of comprehensive consultations were carried out with the project stakeholders at
various locations during the preparation of the scoping document and ESA. The
consultation and scoping sessions were designed specifically to provide project
information to the public. These sessions were informal to encourage a friendly social
environment in which participants were comfortable in raising questions, expressing their
opinions and concerns about the project besides seeking clarification regarding their
concerns. The participatory consultative approach was employed for data collection.
The focus group discussions were instrumental in the process, whereas one-to-one
meetings were held with the institutional stakeholders. These discussions were held with
project beneficiaries and other local communities at Tarbela, Ghazi, Topi, Hattian and
Haripur. The consultation process provided a meaningful understanding of local social
issues for the social impact analyses and preparation of a SIMF for the Project area. The
main activities are summarized in Table 5.1 below (details of the participants are
provided in Annex A).
Table 5.1:
Main Activities during Consultation Process
Activity
Initial awareness
campaign (Scoping
Date
Accomplishment
10 August 2010
Meeting with 25 stakeholder (female) in girls high school Right

Bank WAPDA Colony
stage)
WAPDA
August 2011
5-2

Activity
Initial awareness
Date
Accomplishment
10 August 2010
Meeting with 29 Stakeholders (male) in the conference hall at
campaign (Scoping
Tarbela Power House
stage)
Consultation
Meetings with
January 10, 2011 to
Meeting with officials of 25 different government departments
January 15, 2011.
and NGOs including GBTI, Sungi and community based local
Institutions
Scoping sessions
during preparation of
ESA
organizations at village level

January 10 to 15,
Meetings with 137 Stakeholders (male) at fourteen (14)
2011
different places in Project area
February 17 to 27,
2011
Consultation
February 24, 2011
Consultation workshops were held at Ghazi. Topi, Islamabad
workshops
February 26, 2011
and Peshawar.
March17, 2011
About 40 to 50 persons including former affectees of
March 30, 2011
Tarbela/Ghazi, NGOs, Press, local representatives

government officials, teachers, physicians and WAPDA
officers participated in each of these workshops
Gender consultation
January 10 to 15, 2011
Meetings with 96 Stakeholders (female) at ten (10) different
February 18 to 22,
places in Project area
2011
5.4.1 Stakeholder Consultation during the Scoping Phase

At the beginning of the scoping phase, stakeholder identification commenced. Two
brochures (English and Urdu) were prepared containing relevant preliminary information
about the project. These brochures were distributed to different stakeholders as
information disclosure instruments and to get feedback on environmental and social
issues of the project.
During the scoping stage, four public consultation sessions were conducted in the Project
area: one with male WAPDA employees working at the Tarbela Dam site second, a
second with female teaching staff and family members of WAPDA Girls High School,
Left Bank Colony, a third with the Community of Pehur Hamlet and fourth with
community of Ghazi Hamlet.
During scoping, a Project office was established in the Right Bank Colony by the
feasibility consulting team. A person responsible for community liaison was nominated.
5.4.2 Stakeholder Consultation during Detailed Assessment

The second stage of the consultation process included conducting social and
environmental focused group discussions with local community members for establishing
baseline situations, identification of positive and negative impacts, and needs assessment
for social enhancement. In addition to consultative workshops, in depth discussions /
consultative meetings were held with WAPDA officials, NGOs, government departments
and line agencies to get their response on the project interventions. The non-technical
summary of the project scoping document prepared in local language was distributed
among the stakeholders during consultation workshops.
WAPDA
August 2011
5-3

A variety of scientific techniques were administered including an interview guide,

focused group discussion, informal discussion and consultative workshops to collect
relevant and reliable facts (empirically verifiable observations) on the subject of ESA
study.
5.4.3 Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders

Meetings with institutional stakeholders like government departments, NGOs and line
agencies were organized to discuss project interventions and their potential impacts on
the local communities and environment. In these meetings, stakeholders were informed
about the salient features of the project, its location and activities. Institutional
stakeholders showed their concerns and gave suggestions / recommendations for the
implementation of the project. These are listed below:
WAPDA should fulfill the regulatory requirements of conducting ESA of proposed

project.
The project proponents should develop organizational structure for implementation

of SIMF to handle the environmental and social issues during the project
implementation.
Possible damage to flora and fauna particularly at proposed site for power house
should be addressed.
Construction related issues like excavated material, soil erosion and hazards for local
communities and labor force should be appropriately addressed during the
construction activities.
WAPDA will ensure free mobility of women and children, especially students of
girls and boys schools at WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Safe transportation of construction material
Health and safety measures for labor force
Rights of employment in Tarbela Project for local community
Settlements of pending issues of old affected persons of Tarbela project
5.4.4 Consultation with Community Representatives

Consultations at the following ten villages with members of the community and
representatives of communities were carried out to establish a baseline conditions in the
Project area.
Khabbal;
Pehur Hamlet;
Mohalla Zakoo (Topi);
Pontian;
Darra Mohat;
Kukar Chawa;
Ghari Mera;
Ghazi Hamlet;
Qazi Pur; and
WAPDA
August 2011
5-4

WAPDA Right and Left Bank Colonies.
5.4.5 Grass Roots Consultation

Grass roots consultation with primary stakeholders and local communities was carried
out at 14 different locations in study area. Communities main concerns were:
Pending issues of compensation on Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project

(GBHPP).
Lack of health and education facilities in Ghazi and Pehur Hamlets.
Rights of employments in Tarbela project
Problems in sewage and solid waste collection system
Seepage problem due to Ghazi Barrage pond
Polluted drinking water in the hamlets
5.4.6 Consultation Workshops

In addition to the above consultation, four workshops involving local and international
NGOs, concerned government officials, representatives of media, local leadership,
educationists, doctors and senior community representatives of Tarbela and Ghazi
Barotha projects were organized at Ghazi, Topi, Islamabad and Peshawar. The main
objective of these workshops was to get feedback on the Project from a wider range of
institutional stakeholders. Participants were briefed about the salient features of the
projects. The suggestions put forward by the participants of these workshops were
instrumental for designing of ESA and SIMF. The topics and issues discussed in these
workshops and suggestions and recommendations are given below:
Topics for Discussions
Expected impacts of project on natural environment;
Expected impacts of project on social environment;
Health and educational issues in the area;
Other social and economic issues in the area;
Social enhancement in Project area; and
SIMF for this project.
Issues Highlighted by the Participants
Settlement of compensation issues of old affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha;
Lack of health and educational facilities in the area, especially in the villages where
old affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha are residing;
Unemployment in the area;
Recruitment in Tarbela and GBHPP projects from other parts of the country;
Restoration of the source of livelihood of fishermen;
Polluted drinking water;
Solid waste and sewerage disposal problems;
Seepage and high water table at Right Bank in Topi area;
WAPDA
August 2011
5-5

Shortage of water and low water table in the areas downstream Ghazi barrage;
Provision of electricity at subsides rates in the Project area;
Fear of road accidents during construction phase of the project; and
Tree management plan.
Suggestions and Recommendations
WAPDA should fix a quota in employment for local peoples in TDP and GBHPP;
Establishment of emergency unit with ambulance for local communities;
WAPDA should arrange clean drinking water in Project area;
Establishment of vocational training centre for women;
WAPDA should help in the up gradation of educational and health facilities in the
Ghazi and Topi area;
Establishment of a heavy machinery training centre at Topi;
Civil department of WAPDA should work on proposal for the rehabilitation of

drainage system at Right Bank and replacement of old water supply pipelines;
WAPDA may rehabilitate the old road near Ghazi and use during construction phase
to avoid traffic hazards to local community;
WAPDA may establish recreational parks at Ghazi and Topi for local peoples; and
WAPDA may engage a NGO like GBTI to work with local communities for the
implementation of the project in environmentally and socially safe way.
5.5
Gender Consultations
Besides the public consultation, gender consultation was also carried out at ten different
locations in study area. During consultation sessions with women, they were briefed
about the project and its main features. Womens main concerns were:
Drinking water is contaminated with other particles and people have to use this
contaminated water;
Problems of proper disposal of solid waste and sewage issues at Right Bank Colony;
Needs to introduce computer as a subject in the schools;
Lack of cold drinking water in summer in the school;
Lack of health facilities, especially for women in Civil Hospital Topi;
Seepage problems in Topi area due to Ghazi Barrage pond;
Inadequate building structure, lack of furniture, lack of teaching staff in the Girls
Middle School at Pehur Hamlet; and
Needs of a vocational training centre for women in the area.
The summary of comments and recommendations received during the consultation

process is provided in Table 5.2. (The way these comments/recommendations have been
addressed is discussed in Chapter 11.)
WAPDA
August 2011
5-6

Table 5.2: Summary of Stakeholders Concerns/Recommendations

Suggestions from Institutional Stakeholders
1. WAPDA should fulfill the regulatory requirements of conducting ESA of proposed project.
2. The project proponents should develop organizational structure for implementation of
SIMF to handle the environmental and social issues during the project implementation.
3. Possible damage to flora and fauna particularly at proposed site for power house should be
addressed.
4. Construction related issues like excavated material, soil erosion and hazards for local
communities and labor force should be appropriately addressed during the construction
activities.
5. WAPDA will ensure free mobility of women and children, especially students of girls and
boys schools at WAPDA Right Bank Colony
6. Safe transportation of construction material
7. Health and safety measures for labor force
8. Rights of employment in Tarbela Project for local community
9. Settlements of pending issues of old affected persons of Tarbela project
Suggestions from Grass-root Stakeholders
10. Pending issues of compensation on Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project.
11. Lack of health and education facilities in Ghazi and Pehur Hamlets.
12. Rights of employments in Tarbela project
13. Problems in sewage and solid waste collection system
14. Seepage problem due to Ghazi Barrage pond
15. Polluted drinking water in the hamlets
Issues highlighted by the Consultation Workshop Participants
16. Settlement of compensation issues of old affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha;
17. Lack of health and educational facilities in the area, especially in the villages where old
affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha are residing;
18. Un employment in the area;
19. Recruitment in Tarbela and GBHP projects from other parts of the country;
20. Restoration of the source of livelihood of fishermen;
21. Polluted drinking water;
22. Solid waste and sewerage disposal problems;
23. Seepage and high water table at Right Bank in Topi area;
24. Shortage of water and low water table in the areas downstream Ghazi barrage;
25. provision of electricity at subsides rates in the Project area;
26. Fear of road accidents during construction phase of the project
27. Tree management plan.
Suggestions and Recommendations forwarded by Workshop Participants
28. WAPDA should fix a quota in employment for local peoples in TDP and GBHPP;
29. Establishment of emergency unit with ambulance for local communities;
30. WAPDA should arrange clean drinking water in Project area;
31. Establishment of vocational training centre for women;
32. WAPDA should help in the up gradation of educational and health facilities in the Ghazi
and Topi area;
33. Establishment of a heavy machinery training centre at Topi;
34. Civil department of WAPDA should work on proposal for the rehabilitation of drainage
system at Right Bank and replacement of old water supply pipelines;
35. WAPDA may rehabilitate the old road near Ghazi and use during construction phase to
avoid traffic hazards to local community;
36. WAPDA may establish recreational parks at Ghazi and Topi for local peoples;
WAPDA
August 2011
5-7

37. WAPDA may engage a NGO like GBTI to work with local communities for the
implementation of the project in environmentally and socially safe way.
Consultation with Women
38. Drinking water is contaminated with other particles and people have to use this
contaminated water;
39. Problems of proper disposal of solid waste and sewage issues at Right Bank Colony;
40. Needs to introduce computer as a subject in the schools;
41. Lack of cold drinking water in summer in the school;
42. Lack of health facilities, especially for women in Civil Hospital Topi;
43. Seepage problems in Topi area due to Ghazi Barrage pond;
44. Inadequate building structure, lack of furniture, lack of teaching staff in the Girls Middle
School at Pehur Hamlet;
45. Needs of a vocational training centre for women in the area.
5.6
Consultations during Project Execution
The proposed Environmental and Social Management Unit (ESMU), as described in

Chapter 10, will be responsible for developing a consultation framework to be
implemented by WAPDA during Project implementation.
5.7
Information Disclosure
A Public Hearing was held for the ESA in Tarbela on 23 June 2011, in accordance with
the ESA review and approval process in the Country defined by the IEE/EIA Regulations
(see Figure 2.1). Organized by the KP-EPA, the Hearing was attended by the WAPDA
officials, media, local representatives, and most importantly, local community members,
some of which were Tarbela and GBHPP affectees. During the Hearing, the WAPDA
officials presented the salient features of the project, while the ESA consultants presented
the key aspects and findings of the ESA. This was followed by a well-participated
question-answer session, during which the participants raised queries and provided
recommendations about the project. The participants highly appreciated the project,
however the community members expected WAPDA to allocate some of the project
funds for infrastructure development within their settlements. Their expectations
included construction/establishment of schools, vocational and technical training centers,
water supply schemes, and sewage disposal and treatment systems. In response,
WAPDA informed the participants that most of these development works were already
included in the Social Assistance Activities detailed in the SIMF.
Once finalized, the ESA report will be made available to the stakeholders at sites
designated by KP-EPA in accordance with PEPA-1997. In addition, a Non-Technical
Summary of the ESA will be translated into the Urdu language and made available to the
local communities in the Project area. This will ensure that local communities are aware
of projects key impacts, mitigation measures and implementation mechanism. This
summary will also be disclosed through the official websites of WAPDA and the World
Bank.
WAPDA
August 2011
5-8

6 Environmental and Social Baseline

6.1
Overview
The T4HP project activities cover a limited area located at the right bank of the Indus on
both sides of the Tarbela dam (see Figures 1.2 and 6.1). Direct and indirect impacts are
expected not to extend more than 5 km upstream and 10 km downstream of the dam and
2 km inland on both sides of the river. Some indirect impacts might be expected at larger
distance in quarries and borrow areas situated at some 20 40 km from Tarbela. Since no
cumulative and induced impacts of the project are expected both upstream and
downstream of the dam, the study area of the ESA has been restricted to the above
defined project sites and their surrounding areas.
6.2
Physical Environment
6.2.1 Physiography
Tarbela Dam and storage reservoir are located near to the end of a relatively narrow
valley of the Indus cutting through the Hazara hills. These hills form a part of the foot
slopes of the Western Himalayan Mountains. The river valley near the dam is up to 1.8
km wide and filled with alluvial deposits, which are submerged by the reservoir. The
northern part of the reservoir stretches about 100 km upstream and is situated between
much higher mountains with elevations over 2400 m. The hill sides near the dam are
generally steep and are rising to an altitude around 600 m asl.
The Ghazi- Barotha headpond is a small regulating reservoir immediately downstream of
the dam and belonging to the Ghazi-Barotha barrage. This barrage is situated at a
distance of ten kilometers from Tarbela nearby the cities of Topi (right bank) and Ghazi
(left bank). From here the topography slopes more gently via a transitional zone and
further down towards the agricultural plains of Punjab and those along the Kabul river.
Although the project is entirely located in Swabi district, the project area stretches over
two different administrative districts: The right bank is Swabi district, whereas the left
bank belongs to Haripur district. Swabi district lies between the Indus and Kabul Rivers.
The total area of Swabi district is 1,543 km2 with mostly hilly terrain (78%) and the
remaining part is flat. The northern part is predominantly hilly and is sloping towards the
agricultural plain in the south. The majority of the hills are found in the Gadoon area in
the north-east. They are a continuation of the Mahaban Hills. Other important hills, the
Naranji Hills are situated in the north-western corner of the district.
The heights of the Naranji Hills in the north vary between 750 to 1,400 m asl. In the
south, along the border of the Nowshera district there are hills forming part of the
Khattak Hills, north of the Kabul River. From the foot of these hills the southern plain
runs down, at first rather steep sloped and then gently down towards the Kabul River.
The lower southern half of the district slopes towards the Indus River.
The intake of the Tunnel 4 is located at the right abutment of the Dam, which consists of
rocks, that belong to the Salkhala formation. The rock formations are characterized by
intensive folding and faulting. The area between the intake and the outlet of the tunnel
has a steep gradient. Near the outlet the topography changes into a rugged plain situated
at the foot of the slopes towards the former riverbed of the Indus.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-1

Figure 6.1:
Source:
The Project Area and Sampling / Survey Locations
T4CJV
WAPDA
August 2011
6-2

The area where the powerhouse and the tail race channel will be constructed is a flat part
of the old riverbed, partly submerged by the Ghazi Barotha lake. On the embankment
runs the existing road between the dam and the Right Bank Colony. The potential
borrow areas identified are mostly found near to the project site: sand is found in the
riverbed near Sobra City and at a commercial site in Qibla Band while clay is available
at borrow sites in the Gandaf area. Sobra City is on hilly terrain with thick vegetation
and the Quibla Bandi site is on bare, flat land located in an old bed of the Indus River,
with very limited vegetation. The Gandaf area has large volumes of exposed clay which
is already exploited by the local people.
6.2.2 Land Use

The Swabi district can be divided into two parts, the northern hilly areas and the southern
plain. The major part of these hills is the Gadoon area in the north-east. The plain area
of the district is intersected by numerous streams and many smaller ravines. The
important stream is Narranji Khawar which flows from the Narranji Hills in a southwestern direction, joining the Kalapani Stream in the Mardan district. The Indus River
flows along the southern boundary of the Swabi district.
The Haripur district has four different regions:
Maidan-e-Hazara- consist of plains surrounded by the mountains of Tanawal;
Tanawal - which mainly consists of mountains;
Khanpur Punjkhata - a well watered plain lying in the south eastern corner of the
district; and
Chhachh - west of Haripur city, this entire tract is sub-merged under the Tarbela
Reservoir.
The notable minerals in the Haripur district are sandstone, limestone and dolomite, these
mines were explored in Ghazi tehsil.
The major land use of the Haripur and Swabi districts includes cultivated and
uncultivated land. The total land use area for Swabi is 148,689 ha and for Haripur is
75,345 ha of which respectively 59% and 42% are cultivated. The remainder consists of
wasteland, rangeland and forest
6.2.3 Climate
Two seasons prevail in the area: winter (October to March); and summer (April to
September). In general, the climate of the area is mildly hot in summer and cold in
winter.
6.2.4 Temperature
December to February are the coldest months and the minimum temperatures vary
between 2 and 11C in these months, whereas the maximum temperature during March to
July vary between 31 and 48C. Swabi district has more extremes in climates, with its
summer season being very hot. A steep rise of temperature is observed from May to June
and even July, August and September record quite high temperatures. There is a rapid
fall of temperature recorded from October onwards to the coldest month of January. The
maximum, minimum and mean temperature of the Project area for the last five years is
presented in Figure 6.2.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-3

Figure 6.2:
(2006-10)
5 Year Average Monthly Temperatures (oC) in the Project Area
Maximum Temperature
Minimum Temperature
Mean Temperature
50
46.4
44.4
42.8
5 year (2006-2010) average degrees centigrade
45
39.2
38.4
40
33
35
33.1
31.3
37.2
36.4
31.5
30.2
29.6
30
27.2
26.4
25.5
22.8
25
25.1
21.7
18.2
20
19.8
20.2
20.8
19.4
17.2
16.5
15.5
13.8
13.1
15
25
10.4
11.8
8.6
10
6.6
3.4
5
0
Jan
Source:
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Hydrology Directorate Tarbela, WAPDA
6.2.5 Rainfall
The average monthly rainfall in the Project area is 78.86 cm with most of the rainfall
occurring in the months of July and August. Towards the end of the cold weather in
January and February there are occasional thunder storms and hail storms. The mean
monthly rainfall for the Project area is provided graphically in Figure 6.3.
Figure 6.3:
Mean Monthly Rainfall (2006-2010) in the Project Area
Mean Monthly Rainfall (cm)

25
21.88
20
14.97
15
10
6.54
7.00
6.20
6.32
4.73
5
2.49
2.45
2.30
3.06
0.91
0
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
6.2.6 Humidity
Humidity is the amount of water vapor in the air and indicates the likelihood of
precipitation, dew or fog. The relative humidity in the Project area is quite high
throughout the year due to evaporation from the Tarbela Reservoir with maximum
WAPDA
August 2011
6-4

humidity recorded in the month of August. This increase in humidity is attributed to the
monsoon rains and consequent high evaporation rate. Average monthly humidity of the
Project area is provided in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1:
Y/M
Average Monthly Relative Humidity (%)

Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
81
79
72
65
57
66
81
86
78
72
80
84
monthly
mean
20062010
Source: Hydrology Directorate Tarbela, WAPDA
6.2.7 Evaporation
The evaporation data (2006-2010) in the Project area are presented in Figure 6.4. Total
annual evaporation over the last five years has ranged between 84.9 to 96.6 cm with an
overall average of 86.1 cm. Monthly data show that the maximum evaporation is
recorded during summer (April to September), with the highest evaporation in June.
Comparison of the yearly evaporation and rainfall data show that total evaporation
exceeds rainfall by about 9%.
Figure 6.4:
Mean Monthly Evaporation in the Project Area (cm)
Mean Monthly Evaporation (cm)
16
14.91
14
12
10.97
10.52
10
9.23
8.08
7.84
7.71
5.69
3.93
4
2.95
2.13
2.12
2
0
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
6.2.8 Geology
The Tarbela Dam and Reservoir is located in the Hazara Hills, part of the mountain group
known as the Lesser Himalayas. The Hazara Hills are composed of crystalline and
metamorphic rocks with non-fossiliferous sedimentary deposits and gabbroic intrusions,
ranging in age from Precambrian to Permian. The present geologic structure is the result
of extensive folding, shearing and faulting associated with regional crustal deformation
WAPDA
August 2011
6-5

arising from the northward subduction (under thrusting) of the Indian Sub Continental
Plate below the Eurasian Plate.
There are three distinct geological formations at the Tarbela site:
the Salkhala Formation - forming the Right Bank;
the Hazara Formation - forming the bedrock base of the Indus River; and
the Kingriali Formation, forming the Left Bank.
The general orientation of bedding indicates that the banks of the river are the limbs of an
anticline, the axis of which has been eroded by the Indus River. The geological
mismatch between the right and Left Banks is considered to be the result of displacement
along a near vertical fault that runs along the right side of the valley.
The right and Left Banks are separated by the 1.8 km wide flood plain of the Indus River.
In the past the river flowed in a braided stream pattern on alluvial deposits at an elevation
above sea level of approximately 338 m (El. 338 m). Above the flood plain the hillsides
are generally steep with slopes often controlled by the dip of bedding or joint systems.
T4CJV carried out a Geological and Geotechnical Assessment following a review of the
available literature on the existing scheme, the investigations undertaken by T4CJV and
an assessment of the geotechnical parameters used in the design.
6.2.9 Seismology
The Tarbela Dam Project is located in a seismically active region associated with the
convergence of the Indian and Eurasian crustal plates along the Himalayan mountain
ranges. The basement rocks of the northern margin of the Indian plate are moving
relatively northward and pushed below the Tethyan slab of the Eurasian plate. Plate
convergence is accommodated by two major thrust faults which align with two
approximately parallel belts of seismicity along the Himalayan Arc.
The two seismogenic fault zones are the shallow and steep portions of the northward
dipping Himalayan thrust. The shallow portion referred to as the Detachment dips very
gently and separates the early Precambrian basement of the Indian Shield from an
overlying wedge-shaped mass of sediments and metasediments. The steep portion,
designated the Basement Thrust, offsets basement rocks within the northern margin of the
shield. The Main Central Thrust (MCT) and the Main Boundary Fault (MBF) are
branches of the detachment and the basement thrust respectively. They are probably
active fault zones, but of secondary importance in the general tectonic regime of the
Himalayan front.
Some of the strongest earthquakes that have occurred in historic times have been
associated with movements along the Himalayan Thrust.
Seismic Risk at the Project Site
Based on the Seismic Hazard Assessment conducted by T4CJV where a review of the
structural geology and the seismicity of the Project area was carried out, the three faults
posing the greatest earthquake hazard to the dam site are the Darband (Indus), Panjal
(Tarnawai) and Regional Faults. The Darband Fault is one of the steeply dipping faults
in the Indus Valley System. It passes below the Tarbela Dam on the right side of the
valley and is believed to have caused 213 m near vertical buried rock escarpment in the
dam foundation. The Panjal Fault is at its closest point approximately 12 km from the
Tarbela Reservoir. It extends for at least 980 km southwest from the Western Himalayan
WAPDA
August 2011
6-6

Syntaxis, and may continue for another 50 km in the same general direction to the Attock
area. The Regional Fault is a name that refers to the parts of the detachment, Hazara
Lower Seismic Zone (HLSZ) and other possible basement thrusts passing below the dam
site. Any one of these faults has the potential to generate a major earthquake which could
cause severe shaking of the Project structures.
In October 2005 a large earthquake (7.6 on the Richter scale) occurred in Pakistan and
caused widespread damage. The epicentre was approximately 100 km north east of
Tarbela. Whilst the earthquake and aftershocks were felt at Tarbela there was no damage
to the dam, powerhouse, engineered slopes or any of the associated structures. The
ground acceleration experienced was in the range predicted by previous seismic analysis.
Micro-seismic Network
A micro-seismic network surrounding the Tarbela Reservoir site was put into operation
in August, 1973, one year before the first filling of the Reservoir. The system was
designed and installed by the Lamont-Doherty Geological Observatory of Columbia
University, New York, USA. In general the network was established to improve the
assessment of the seismic risk at the Project site; specific purposes for the monitoring
array were to investigate the activity of the Darband Fault and whether earthquakes
would be induced by the initial filling and subsequent annual fillings and drawdown of
the Reservoir.
6.2.10 Soil
Soils in the Project area are shallow and rocky on the hillsides, brown colored, calcareous
and low in organic matter with predominantly loamy textures. They are in use as grazing
land and covered with low scrubs. Near the river some alluvial soils can be found. Most
of these soils are uncultivated with scattered bushes or trees. Loamy or clay loam soils
have been developed in wind-blown deposits (loess and cover sand) found further down
in the plains situated South and West of the city of Topi. They are mostly in use for
agriculture and partly irrigated, a broad range of crops are grown on these lands. East of
Ghazi predominantly brown residual clay loam soils can be found developed on the hilly
slopes of the hinterland and footslopes of the Hazara hills. There is no irrigation but
partly cropped (barani) and partly in use as grazing area.
The arable soil of the Swabi district has developed either from river alluvium or loess
sediments. Texture of the river alluvium terraces ranges from sandy loam to loamy sand,
and loam approaching clay loam.
There are three main types of alluvial deposits on the valley bottom of the Indus River
(the lower terrace and riverbed):
Dense rounded to sub-rounded boulder gravel, which predominates at the site. The
coarse components of the boulder gravel are in grain to grain contact while the voids
are completely or almost completely filled with medium to fine sand. Coarse sand
and fine gravel sizes are almost entirely missing from this gap-graded material.
Open voided, highly pervious rounded boulder gravel, termed openwork, having
the same coarse component as the material described above. However, voids
between boulders are not filled or only partially filled with sand.
Sand, gravelly sand, silty sand and silt layers, found throughout the foundation. The
largest sand layers were located in the central portion of the main embankment
foundation where their thickness is as much as 1.32 m to 2.64 m. Sampling and
WAPDA
August 2011
6-7

testing proved that the sand is quite dense, with relative densities approaching 100%.
Consolidation testing established that alluvial silts are also very dense and relatively
incompressible, indicating that they were subjected to a considerable preconsolidation load.
Soils of the Sobra and Qibla Bandi areas are sandy in nature and the soil of the Gandaf
area is typically clay dominant. It is for these reasons that the areas have been selected
for borrow materials in the project construction. In the area of the proposed powerhouse
there is no soil present as the area is generally existing concrete structures or a steep rock
slope.
6.2.11 Soil Analysis

Samples of soil were sent to the Soil Monitoring Section (SMO) of WAPDA. Soil
sampling was conducted at following locations:
Topi Area - behind Topi house, Swabi District;
Topi Area - near Swabi Gandaf crossing;
Village Jammo, Ghazi; and
Village Qazipur, Ghazi.
Results of the soil analysis are provided in Table 6.2. As previously mentioned there is
virtually no soil present in the area where the project structures are proposed.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-8

Table 6.2:
Project
Area
Soil Analysis of Project Area

Saturation
%
Saturation
pH
EC(a) x
10 at
o
Location
Soluble Cations Meq/L(b)
Soluble Anions Meq/Litre(b)
SAR(a)
25 C
Ca+Mg
Na
CO3
HCO3
Cl
SO4
Organic
Matter
1.
30
7.9
0.65
5.0
1.25
0.27
4.0
1.2
1.32
0.79
0.4
2.
30
7.9
0.80
6.0
1.50
0.36
5.0
0.8
2.06
0.86
0.5
3.
28
8.0
1.10
9.5
1.50
0.30
5.5
4.8
1.00
0.68
0.5
4.
36
8.0
1.10
6.5
3.45
0.19
5.5
1.6
3.04
1.90
0.4
(a)
Soil Standard Limits: Electrical conductivity (EC) Less than 4 deci Siemens per meter ds/m, Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) Less than 18;
WAPDA
August 2011
(b)
Milliequivalent per Litre
6-9

6.2.12 Rock Stability and Landslides

The rocks of the Project site hills are of poor stability in places and protective measures
i.e. shotcrete through the cut-slopes with additional grouted rock bolts to provide
strengthen to the hills, were adopted during the construction of the Tarbela Dam to avoid
land-sliding. Despite these protective measures, during 1981 cracks were discovered on
the gunited (spray concreted) surface of the outlet slope outlining a large mass of moving
rock resulting in a failure involving approximately 76,500 m3 of material, extending
from El. 396 m to 536 m in the centre of the outlet slope, and forming a large cone of
talus at the base. Approximately 27,000 m3 of additional material fell from the slides and
the top of the slide scarp. This was subsequently repaired. Moreover small scale
landslides have been observed during the rainy season at different places in the Project
area although there are easily managed.
6.2.13 Sedimentation
The Indus River is one of the largest sediment producing rivers in the world. The main
source of sediment is from the glacial landscape and erosion from steep sided barren
slopes. The predicted rate of sediment inflow was 0.294 billion cubic meters (bcm) per
year meaning that the dam would silt up to 90% capacity in 50 years and thereafter
continue to provide only about 1.2 bcm of live storage (World Commission on Dams,
2000 Chapter on Tarbela). A number of sediment management measures were examined
at the time but considered not to be feasible.
In practice, the actual sediment inflow rate has been significantly lower than predicted,
with an average rate of 0.106 bcm, i.e. 36% of the predicted rate. However the
proportion of sediment inflow trapped in the reservoir (the trap efficiency) was slightly
higher than predicted. The useful life of the dam is now considered to be 85 years
although, as with the prediction, the usable storage will gradually decline over this
period. An unexpected aspect of the sediment deposition however, is the advancement of
the sediment delta, which is now located 14 km from the dam. There are concerns that
under earthquake loading, the sediment may liquefy and block all low-level outlets,
including power intakes.
Measures are being investigated to reduce the risk of liquefaction damage and also to
prolong the life of the reservoir. These include physical measures such as provision of an
underwater protection to the low level outlets, including power intakes and sluicing
tunnels to remove sediment, and management measures to reduce the proportion of
sediment deposited and its location. Reduction in sediment load entering the reservoir is
not possible due to the altitude and nature of the catchment. In terms of management
measures, the operating rule of the reservoir has been changed to raise the minimum
drawdown level from 396 m to 417 m and thereafter raise it gradually every year. This
would have the effect of depositing sediment in the upper reaches and would reduce the
advance of the sediment delta, but at the cost of reducing live storage with the trade off of
reducing water availability in the dry season.
6.2.14 Hydrology
Tarbela Reservoir was designed to store water from Indus River for irrigation purposes
and releases from the reservoir entirely depend upon irrigation indents from the
Provinces. The mean monthly water releases from the dam for the last five years (20062010) are provided in Table 6.3 and also depicted in Figure 6.5 and Figure 6.6. It is
WAPDA
August 2011
6-10

evident that monthly releases vary from 1,194 million cubic meters (Mm3) to
16,881 Mm3.
Presently the irrigation water demand downstream of Tarbela is met predominantly by
releases from Tunnels 1, 2 and 3. Additional demand is met by Tunnel 5 in the first
instance and Tunnel 4 is then used to make up any difference.
Historically Tunnel 4 mainly releases water during the months of May, June and July, as
demonstrated by the data in Table 6.4. Table 6.5 provides the irrigation releases of
Tunnel 5. It is evident from the discharge data for Tunnels 4 and 5 that there has
consistently been a significantly higher discharge from Tunnel 5. This results from
Tunnel 5 being given priority for water releases to meet the additional water requirement.
Mean Monthly Flow Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3)
Table 6.3:
Y/M
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Total
2006
1,543
2,246
2,251
1,959
7,643
11,022
12,631
18,811
8,314
4,909
5,008
2,097
78,433
2007
1,501
2,495
2,171
3,084
7,221
10,362
11,570
13,507
9,621
4,897
4,724
2,270
73,423
2008
963
2,241
1,930
2,045
5,668
10,910
13,568
11,965
9,263
3,577
4,330
1,776
68,237
2009
933
2,197
2,619
2,092
6,053
9,971
10,386
14,802
9,054
4,737
4,009
2,257
69,108
2010
1,032
2,222
2,398
2,487
5,339
9,098
16,492
25,323
9,535
4,441
4,737
3,281
86,383
Mean
1,194
2,280
2,274
2,333
6,384
10,273
12,929
16,881
9,157
4,512
4,561
2,336
75,116
Source: Hydrology Directorate Tarbela, WAPDA. Mean: 5 years monthly mean.
Figure 6.5:
Mean Monthly Flow Releases (2006-2010) from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3)
Mean Monthly Flow (Mm3)

2336
Nov
4561
4512
Sep
9157
16881
Jul
12929
10273
May
6384
2333
Mar
2274
2280
Jan
1194
0
WAPDA
August 2011
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
6-11
18000

Figure 6.6:
Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3)
Annual Outflow (Mm3)

95000
86383
90000
85000
78433
80000
73423
75000
68237
69108
2008
2009
70000
65000
60000
55000
50000
2006
2007
Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 4 (Mm3)
Table 6.4:
Year
Month
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
1974
1975
2010
342
687
Jun
Jul
Aug
1,206
1,740
699
4,954
3,173
Sep
Oct
919
1,533
4,118
173
102
639
93
124
945
1,125
1979
68
2,427
1980
502
4,053
3,477
4,052
666
1,674
863
1,726
752
1,940
1,776
64
1,498
1,011
247
49
284
1,660
1,134
37
469
919
1,977
555
107
232
493
492
2,473
1,208
1976
1977
1978
12
1981
173
25
12
Nov
Dec
342
222
74
382
1982
1983
1984
123
185
159
1985
1986
1987
542
1988
617
1989
999
7
123
542
617
1990
1991
1992
1993
WAPDA
August 2011
6-12

Year
Month
Jan
Feb
Mar
1994
Apr
May
Jun
23
1,819
247
1,962
394
1995
1996
218
1,829
31
1,946
3,358
1998
1,079
2,800
1,106
1999
530
3,603
2,327
2000
10
90
242
1997
14
2001
2002
37
2003
257
2004
524
2008
1,934
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
903
2,348
640
16
2010
422
Source: WAPDA.
Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 5 (Mm3)
Table 6.5:
Year
Month
Jan
Feb
Mar
1974
1975
1,155
3,341
4,463
Apr
May
Jun
703
5,828
1,126
2,898
895
3,452
2,472
86
4,062
1,378
1976
Jul
Aug
1977
2,561
1978
3,043
993
678
3,736
3,190
1,233
790
2,893
543
189
1979
1980
1,443
698
875
1,883
3,348
3,119
1981
248
85
1,514
2,177
3,692
1982
419
994
660
2,263
4,206
1,545
1983
560
263
942
3,578
2,314
1984
2,434
2,602
1985
745
1986
109
490
1,042
750
422
977
531
92
1,136
533
60
1,554
4,429
984
363
208
2,505
4,775
933
1,880
2,792
2,967
218
184
81
1988
134
1989
1,504
475
1990
1,504
1,327
4,213
1991
101
2,200
1,413
1987
WAPDA
August 2011
97
129
205
312
6-13

Year
Month
Jan
Feb
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
1992
20
3,482
3,690
303
1993
418
3,441
386
1994
835
4,087
1995
228
2,510
932
3,154
3,053
1997
158
2,274
1998
134
2,868
2,565
1999
208
2,484
1,256
1,743
4,276
1996
Mar
Apr
2000
2001
2002
1,155
3,341
4,463
703
5,828
1,126
2,898
895
3,452
2,472
86
4,062
1,378
2003
Sep
Oct
882
903
2,348
1,233
790
552
2,561
2008
3,043
993
3,736
3,190
678
Dec
182
2004
2010
Nov
Source: WAPDA.
6.2.15 Flooding
Flood management was not considered at the design stage of the dam and therefore no
predictions were made with regard to flood potential at that stage. It subsequently
became apparent that the impact of the Tarbela Dam Project on attenuation of actual high
flood peaks was significant during the filling period of June through to August, for
impounding approximately 12 bcm, or 19% out of the kharif inflow of 64 bcm.
Attenuation of peak Indus River flows is variable depending on the timing of the flood in
relation to the reservoir level that is drawn down prior to the wet season. The peak flows
in July 1988, July 1989 and August 1997 were reduced by 21%, 26% and 43%
respectively, whereas a peak flow of similar magnitude in September 1992 was
attenuated by only 2% as the reservoir levels were already considerably higher in
readiness for the forthcoming irrigation season3.
During the flooding in Pakistan of August 2010 there was a 28% reduction of the peak
flood (inflow reservoir 29,500 m3/sec and outflow 21,300 m3/sec) with a record discharge
of the spillway of Tarbela. However, this did not result in any damage.
6.2.16 Surface Water Quality

Surface water samples were collected and sent to the water quality laboratory section
Salinity Control and Reclamation Project (SCARP) Monitoring Organization (SMO),
WAPDA for analysis. The results of which are provided in Table 6.6 with the associated
World Commission on Large Dams case study report Tarbela Dam and related aspects of the Indus
River basin Pakistan November, 2000
WAPDA
August 2011
6-14

standards adopted by WAPDA shown in Table 6.7. These surface water samples were
collected from the following locations:
Tarbela Reservoir;
Ghazi Barrage Pond; and
Downstream of the Ghazi Barrage.
WAPDA has developed standards following detailed field investigation for surface and
ground water to be used for irrigation of crops, vegetables and orchards. As surface
water is not used for drinking in the project, the water samples were not tested for
drinking purposes and the results are not comparable to the World Health Organisation
(WHO) Guidelines.
Table 6.6:
Surface Water Quality of Project Area

Parameters Analyzed
Sample
Total
Point
Res
EC x
Na2CO3
106 at
Ca++
Mg++
Na+
K+
CO3--
HCO3-
Cl-
SO4--
Cations
Anions
SAR
Meq/L
25oC
1.
1.2
0.6
0.23
0.16
1.5
0.2
0.4
2.19
2.10
0.2
200
2.
1.4
0.5
0.26
0.17
1.6
0.3
0.4
2.33
2.30
0.3
220
3.
1.1
0.8
0.26
0.16
1.5
0.3
0.5
2.32
2.30
0.3
220
Table 6.7:
Standards Adopted by WAPDA
Parameter
Good
Marginal
Hazardous
RSC Meq/L
<2.5
2.5-5.0
>5.0
SAR
10
10-18
>18
Chloride Meq/L
<4
4-10
>10
< 1,500
1,500-3,000
>3,000
EC MicroSiemens/cm*
By comparing surface water quality results with the standards set by WAPDA it is
concluded that all parameters measured in these water samples fall within the required
water quality standards defined for the Project.
6.2.17 Ground Water Quality

Ground water is available in the entire project area although its depth varies i.e. it is
shallow upstream of the Ghazi Barrage and deep downstream of the Ghazi Barrage. This
difference is due to high surface water levels in the Ghazi barrage pond and the Tarbela
Dam reservoir which are the main source of seepage.
Ground Water samples were collected from various locations and sent to chemical and
microbiological laboratories of SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Limited for analysis. These samples
were collected from the following locations:
Right Bank (WAPDA) Colony;
Tubewell, Pehur Hamlet;
Ghazi City TMA Office; and
WAPDA
August 2011
6-15

Sobra City Tubewell #6 (WAPDA Left Bank Colony).
The water samples collected were analyzed for their suitability for drinking purpose and
all necessary physical, chemical and biological parameters. The test results show that all
samples are generally fit for drinking with two exceptions;
The sample from Ghazi city TMA office shows a slightly raised Arsenic value
(0.015 mg/L) against WHO standards of 0.01 mg/L. This is however within the
Pakistan NEQS of 0.05.
Total Bacterial Colony Count were exceeding permissible limit in all samples. (Total
Colony Count was too numerous to count).
6.2.18 Air Quality

As there is limited industry in the area air quality is generally good. Air emissions in the
area are generated by vehicle movement and are not very since the project area lies in a
remote area. However there is increased concentration of dust due to the poor condition
of some roads and tracks. At the site of the project there is no permanent monitoring
station, nor in the wider project area. In order to collect baseline information monitoring
of ambient air quality was carried out at following locations:
Ghazi Market;
Topi-By Pass; and
Outlet from Tunnel No.4 by Tarbela Powerhouse.
The ambient air quality was monitored at each of these locations continuously for 24
hours. During the monitoring priority pollutants i.e. carbon monoxide (CO), nitrogen
dioxide (NO2), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and particulate matter (PM10) were monitored and
the results are provided in Table 6.8. It is evident that concentrations of all ambient air
quality parameters are within the limit of NEQS and within the World Bank and World
Health Organization (WHO) standards.
Table 6.8:
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results

NO2 mg/m3
Sample
Point
24 hr
Avg.
SO2 ug/m3
NEQS
WHO(a)
24 hr
Avg.
NEQS
CO mg/m3
World
24 hr
Bank
Avg.
NEQS
PM10 ug/m3
World
24 hr
Bank
Avg.
NEQS
World
Bank
1.
8.42
80
150
0.67
120
20
4.00
47.89
250
50
2.
4.57
80
150
0.43
120
20
3.57
100.35
250
50
3.
5.15
80
150
0.44
120
20
3.46
85.78
250
50
(a)
WHO guidelines for Europe (1987)
6.2.19 Noise
Noise levels exceeding 85 dB are harmful to human health. Excessive noise level
damages the eardrum and very high noise levels damage human lungs. Continuous
exposure to excessive noise causes depression and can damage the nervous system.
Noise pollution in the project area is mainly attributable to traffic as there are no
industries or other noise sources present in the area. Traffic from vehicles plying in the
area is also very low. The sound levels were monitored at the same locations as the
WAPDA
August 2011
6-16

ambient air quality was monitored using a portable, digital sound meter. The daily
average monitoring results are provided Table 6.9 below.
The noise levels measured at different locations ranged from 45.2- 66.5 dB, the upper
reading being above the NEQS limits. The readings measured at relatively busy
locations are exceeding World Bank Standards. The maximum noise level monitored
was generated by vehicular traffic at the Ghazi market.
Table 6.9:
Sample
Baseline Noise Monitoring Results

NEQS (dB)
World Bank Standard (dB)
Residential(a)
Residential
Noise Monitoring Results (dB)
Point
Day
Day
Day
Night
Day (Avg)
Night (Avg)
65
55
55
45
61
51
65
55
55
45
57
51
65
55
55
45
62
52
Source: SGS Noise Monitoring Report

(a)
Effective from 1 July 2010 up to 30 June 2012, thereafter the NEQS will align with the World Bank Standards
6.2.20 Traffic and Transport

The Project is located in a remote area where traffic density is low. A considerable
increase in vehicular movement is expected during the Project. A traffic count survey
was conducted in the Project area at the locations shown in Figure 6.7 along with the
various access roads. The associated traffic count, including daily averages is shown in
Table 6.10.
The results of the survey concluded that:
Roads leading to Swabi, Topi, and the WAPDA Right Bank Colony are the busiest;
The Peak hours of traffic are between 08.00 and 10.00 hrs and 13.00 to 16.00 hrs;
and
Traffic on the roads between 22.00 and 08.00 hrs is extremely low.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-17

Figure 6.7:
WAPDA
August 2011
Location Map of Traffic Count Stations
6-18

Table 6.10:
Average Daily Traffic in the Project Area

Roads(b)
Mode of Transport
A
B(b)
G(a)
119
19
204
589
722
20
395
330
283
383
Motorcycle / Rickshaw
1,429
1,017
739
482
962
879
117
2,110
1,167
1,766
1,577
Cars / Pickups / Taxis
3,535
2,054
1,387
932
1,031
812
252
4,372
1,813
3,077
3,064
745
226
530
151
155
146
194
1,967
631
1,492
982
38
67
33
33
39
61
198
80
191
95
2 Axel
69
16
17
14
14
105
86
287
268
3 Axel
16
33
22
28
32
64
64
99
4 Axel
18
11
25
5 Axel
Tractor
60
11
16
96
127
81
123
122
11
14
15
116
147
168
195
28
25
40
48
Average Daily Traffic
6,134
3,389
2,739
1,872
2,832
2,627
649
9,431
4,492
7,464
6,861
Total PCUs(c)
7,322
3,201
2,879
3,004
5,625
6,085
922
12,943
7,553
11,023
10,947
Animal Drawn
Minibuses / wagons
Buses
Trucks
Trailers
Tractors
Tractor Trolley
Others
(b)
Traffic on roads B and G are counted on Tuesday and Thursday respectively as this traffic is assumed to be almost constant
(c)
PCU = Passenger Car Units
WAPDA
August 2011
6-19

6.3
Biological Environment
6.3.1 Wetlands and biodiversity

Part of the project area consists of wetlands. Wetlands cover approximately 9.7% or
7,800,000 ha of the total area of Pakistan. Wetlands in the country are mainly found
along the Indus River and some other rivers and in the floodplains. The Indus valley
forms the main wetland artery in the country. These include the Tarbela Reservoir, the
Ghazi Barotha pond, the Chashma barrage pond and further downstream other water
bodies and reedlands along the River Indus towards the Indus Delta.
Wetlands are characterized by a large biodiversity. Their significance is attributable to
the wide diversity of species that they support. In all, eighteen threatened species of
wetlands dependent mammals are found in the country, twenty threatened bird species
are supported by Pakistan's wetlands in addition to twelve reptiles and two endemic
species of amphibians. Pakistan's wetlands also support between 191-198 indigenous
freshwater fish species, including fifteen endemics and a total of 788 marine and
estuarine fish species.
6.3.2 Significance of Tarbela Reservoir for Bird Migration

Significance of the Tarbela and Ghazi-Barotha wetlands is not so much for its
exceptional biodiversity, since dam, reservoir and head pond downstream are man-made
structures constructed in a period with little attention for environmental protection and
ecology. However its location between the rich Indus delta and the mountain and alpine
eco-regions of Pakistan makes these wetlands a great attraction for migrating birds like
ducks, pelicans, cormorants, herons, egrets, bitterns, cranes, flamingo, teals, mallards,
gadwalls and pigeons.
Tarbela reservoir, although deep (average depth 64 m, maximum depth 137 m) with
comparative low diversity of primary producers, provides a resting place for a variety of
migratory fowls during their travel to Chashma and Taunsa (both Ramsar sites), the
Uchhali wetlands in the Salt Range and to other wetlands in Sindh and Balochistan.
The famous route for these birds from Siberia to various destinations in Pakistan over
Karakorum, Hindu Kush, and Suleiman Ranges along Indus River down to the delta is
known as International Migratory Bird Route Number 4; it is known as the Indus Flyway
and is one of the busiest routes in the world. According to estimates based on regular
counts between 700,000 and 1,200,000 birds arrive in Pakistan through Indus Flyway
every year. The birds start migration on this route in November; February is the peak
time and by March they start to fly back home. These periods may vary depending upon
weather conditions in Siberia and or Pakistan. Some extinguishing species like whiteheaded duck, houbara bustard and Siberian crane also travel on this route.
6.3.3 Significance of Ghazi-Barotha Lake

The Ghazi Barrage pond downstream of the Tarbela Dam is a shallow water body. Due to
high water velocity the lake does not support enough nutrition to attract water birds.
Human interference is another factor that detracts the avifauna from this water pond. The
creeks and pools, developed due to fluctuating water releases from Tarbela Reservoir,
down-stream of the Ghazi Barrage to Attock Gorge also provide resting and feeding
habitat to a variety of sedentary as well as migratory birds.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-20

6.3.4 Protected Areas/ Game Reserves

There are no protected areas designated in the Project site. The nearest protected area is
the Totalai Game Reserve in Buner district, located about 20-25 km from Tarbela. In
addition, there are however five game reserves in the Haripur district as shown in
Table 6.11. In order to hunt in these game reserves, a permit must be issued by the
relevant authorities of the Haripur district, as identified in Table 6.11. All of these are
located between 30 and 40 km from the Project site.
Table 6.11:
Game Reserves in Haripur district
Name
Declared by
Raqs-e-Sardaran
Chief Minister
Mang
Chief Minister
Bagra
Chief Conservator Wildlife
Village Hasham Khan
Kalinjer
Source: Forestry Department Haripur
6.3.5 Hunting and Other Threats

The Tarbela Reservoir up to 5 km upstream and the Ghazi Barrage Pond area is
prohibited for any hunting activity. However, the rest of the reservoir area is unprotected
and hunting is practiced during the migration season of water fowls, particularly near the
entry point of the Indus River i.e. in the Khalabut area. The other threat to this wetland is
from siltation, boating and fishing. The shallow wetlands downstream of the Ghazi
Barrage are also un-protected and easily accessible and consequently are under hunting
pressure during the winter season.
6.3.6 Nature Conservation

Five Village Conservation Committees (VCCs) have been established for the
conservation of floral and faunal species found around the Tarbela Reservoir by the
Wildlife Department of the Haripur District, these are found in:
Nara;
Khalabat;
Kag;
Dhenda; and
Beer.
6.3.7 Terrestrial Flora

The study area forms a part of the Centro-Asiatic Territory within the Nubo-Sindhian
geobotanical region. Physiognomically, the plant cover comprises four growth forms:
Annual Herbs;
Perennial Grasses;
Perennial Shrubs; and
Perennial Trees.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-21

Annual Herbs
Herbs including short grasses and short leaved forbs appear in the spring after the rains.
Their growth activity is restricted to the brief moist period which lasts for about 48 weeks during which they complete their life cycle and set seeds before the dry period
starts. These have high ecological amplitude and grow on a variety of ecologically
different sites. Both the grasses and herbs grow in abundance in the spring season.
Perennial Grasses
Perennial grasses grow in monsoon season. Most of them are non-palatable to livestock,
only few including Cynodon dactylon, and Cenchrus ciliaris are palatable.
Perennial Shrubs
Perennial shrubs generally form the cover of hill slopes. They include Zizyphus
nummularia, Lantana camara, Justicia adhatoda, and Cannabis sativa. The shrubs of
Zizyphus nummularia provide browse for the goats in all seasons, while others are nonpalatable.
Perennial Trees
The important perennial trees are Acacia nilotica, Acacia modesta, and Zizyphus
mauritiana. The former is used for timber whereas the latter two species provide browse
and fuel wood.
The vegetation pattern of the Project area is closely related to the topographic features of
the area. This is derived from the fact that both vegetation and soil overtime have largely
been influenced by the nature of the sediments, drainage characteristics as well as the
prevailing climatic conditions of the region. Due to varied geographical features, the
Project area is rich in variety of flora but has no orchard, game reserves and other
environmentally sensitive places. The land use pattern of the Ghazi Forest Sub-division
is provided in Table 6.12 which reveals that terrestrial flora is mainly composed of
grasses (range land) and scrub (shrubs and scattered tress). This land use pattern is
representative of areas surrounding the project.
Table 6.12:
Ghazi Area Forest Statement
Description
Forest
Area (acres)
3,163.15
Shrubs and Bushes
18,938.45
Range Land
42,991.25
River beds
Water bodies
Total
3.37
16,591.11
114,405.05
Source: Sub-division Forestry Department, Ghazi
Vegetation Sampling
Depending on the species composition and habitat characteristics, Quadrat or Belt

Transect Methods were used for vegetation sampling in addition to species assessment on
a visual basis. In addition to gathering the secondary data, collected with reference to
Swabi and Haripur Districts and GBHHP, a vegetation survey was carried out during
February to March 2011.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-22

The sampling was carried out in the following locations:

Powerhouse (slopes);
Downstream end point (Topi);
Labor area downstream;
Upstream: Main Tarbela spill way (harbor area);
Vegetation at upstream end point;
Borrow area (Gandaf);
Borrow area (Dara);
Downstream near WAPDA rest house; and
Vegetation of agriculture lands villages and road sides.
Vegetation Analysis
The survey recorded 133 plant species among which 31 are trees, 6 climbers, 25 shrubs,
63 herbs and 8 grasses. An overall species list is provided in Annex B. The most
dominant plants growing in the study area are: Dalbergia sissoo (Shesham), Acacia
modesta (Phulai), Leucaena leucocephala (Velati Kikar), Grewia villosa (Dhaman),
Dodonaea viscose(Sanatha) , Justicia adhatoda (Bakar), Lantana camara (Punchphulai),
Buddleja asiatica (Banna), Themeda anathera(Bahari ghass), Erioscirpus comosus
(babya).
The Project area is well known for production of natural medicinal plants. The plants
and their medicinal uses are presented in Annex B. There were no endangered, rare or
vulnerable plant species, as per IUCN Red-List, found in the Project area. The vegetation
patterns observed at different localities is outlined in Annex B, in addition to the planted
species found in the Project area.
The aesthetic value of the Project area can be further enhanced by cultivation of a variety
of shade, ornamental and fragrant plant species. In Annex B lists some of the plant
species recommended for planting in the Project area locations.
6.3.8 Terrestrial Fauna

Previous field surveys
The wildlife areas in the Project comprise of the riverine and dry sub-tropical, semievergreen scrub forests. Terrestrial fauna of the area have also been studied previously
during execution of the GBHPP. The study areas for the Project and the GBHPP are
quite different. The area of influence for the Project is much smaller in extent than the
study areas for the GBHPP.
During the two field surveys conducted for GBHPP during 1990 and 1991, 63 species of
birds and three species of mammals were recorded inhabiting the Project area from Ghazi
downstream up to the Haro River, the site of the power station close to the Barotha
village. The third study (November 2002 to May 2003) was confined to the floodplains
only, including the islands and open river water starting from Ghazi and downstream up
to the confluence of Indus with River Kabul near the Attock Bridge, excluding the Attock
Gorge. During the monthly surveys of the riverine forests (belas) on the islands and
along the river banks 63 birds (including resident and migratory) were recorded while the
presence of 12 mammals and a few reptiles were confirmed by analysis of their different
WAPDA
August 2011
6-23

signs including footprints, faecal material, burrows/dens and also by interviewing the
locals.
Only three mammals were recorded during 1990 and 1991 whilst 12 species were
identified during 2002-2003. Neither the smooth-coated Otter (Lutrogaleperspicillata) or
Common Otter (Lutralutra ) were reported for the area. The Wild Boar and Asiatic Jackal
were the most common among the mammals, being widely distributed in the belas where
enough cover was available to provide shelter. Among the reptiles, at a few places the
presence of freshwater turtles was evident although they were only observed once.
Similarly, the presence of snakes was also reported but none was observed or recorded.
Indian Monitor Lizards were recorded twice although these would usually be more
prevalent.
Study from Literature
In addition to the birds recorded from the Project area (floodplains only), a number of
species are reported from the literature (TJ Roberts, Birds of Pakistan, Vol.1 & 2.1991,
1992) which can be expected in this area or they use the Indus River for passage
migration. A complete listing of the species recorded during these previous studies and
other expected species is contained in Annex B. From all the birds on this list, only one
species i.e. White-eyed Pochard (Aythyanyroca) is listed on the IUCN Red List in the
Lower Risk category, near threatened (LR/nt). This species was not however reported in
any of the surveys conducted for the project, but reportedly use the same Indus Flyway
Route for migration.
The common birds include the House Crow, House Sparrow, Common Myna and Bank
Myna. These species are associated with the belas, which have enough tree cover. The
other species of such belas are Spotted Little Owlet, Common Cuckoo, Black Winged
Kite, Black Kite, Red Vented Bulbul, White Cheeked Bulbul, Hoopoe, Collard Dove,
Little Brown Dove, Red Turtle Dove and Common Starling. Similarly, the belas
occupied with the Saccharumgrass, are the habitat for Warblers, Black Drongo, Grey and
Black Partridges, Indian Silver Bill, Bee-eaters, Indian Tailor Bird, Indian Baya, Pied
Bush Chat, Rose-ringed Parakeet, Black Redstart, Indian Tree-pie and Jungle Babbler.
The oxbow lakes, seasonal marshes, river channels and stony belas with less vegetative
cover are the main habitat for the migratory waterfowl which spend winter in this habitat
or are the passage migrants in such areas. These include different species of Anatidae,
Herons, Egrets, Gulls, Cormorants, Terns, Grebes, and many species of waders. White
Breasted Kingfisher and Pied Kingfisher are the species of such habitats. The preference
of birds in these different habitats is because of their life style and food habits.
Results of present field surveys
During the present study in the Project area 12 mammal, 52 bird and 12 herp species
were recorded as compared to the 12 mammal species, 121 bird species expected and
only a small number of herp species reported from the areas surveyed for the GBHPP in
the years 1990-1991 and 2002-2003.
None of the species recorded during the surveys are included in the IUCN Red Data
Book. The Ferruginous duck (near threatened) was however reported to pass through the
Indus River corridor during surveys for the GBHPP, although this species was not
observed in the surveys.
The wildlife and wildlife habitat studies conducted for the Project were undertaken in the
following areas:
WAPDA
August 2011
6-24

Proposed powerhouse site;
Up to five km upstream of Tarbela Dam structure;
Up to 10 km downstream of Tarbela Dam structure;
Up to two km on the left and right side along the Indus River; and
Borrow areas near Gandaf
Wildlife data was collected on the basis of:

Wildlife areas stated above and ecosystem functions;
Large and small mammals;
Birds; and
Herps (Reptiles and Amphibians).
Table 6.13 describes the faunal species identified at different Project areas during the
survey.
Table 6.13:
Faunal Species at the Various Project Areas Surveyed
Location
Faunal Species
Large mammals: Asiatic jackal, common red fox, grey mongoose, jungle cat and wild
boar;
Powerhouse area
Small mammals: long-eared hedgehog, house bat, house rat, house mouse, northern
palm squirrel; and
Herps: Indus Valley toad, common tree lizard, spotted barn gecko, common house
gecko, Agrore Valley agama, rugose spectacled lacerta.
Large mammals: jungle cat and grey mongoose, wild boar;
Downstream of the dam
Small mammals: house rat, house mouse, crested porcupine; and
site
Herps: Indus Valley toad, Agrore Valley agama, black rock agama, spotted barn gecko,
fat-tailed gecko, common house gecko, common tree lizard.
Mallards and dabbling duck.
Reservoir
Large mammals: jungle cat, grey mongoose and wild boar;
Upstream slopes
Small mammals: Indian gerbil, house rat, house mouse; and

Herps: Agrore Valley agama, black rock agama, rugose spectacled lacerta, Bengal
monitor lizard.
Large mammals: grey mongoose and wild boar;
Borrow areas
Small mammals: desert hare and northern palm squirrel, Indian gerbil, house rat,
house mouse; and
Herps: fat-tailed gecko, spotted barn gecko, Bengal monitor lizard, common tree Lizard,
rugose spectacled lacerta.
A full listing of the faunal species found in the Project area is provided in Annex B.
There were no endangered, threatened or vulnerable faunal species, as per IUCN Red
List, found in Project area. Bird species identified are also included in Annex B. No
endangered, rare or vulnerable bird species were observed in the Project area.
Bird Nesting Habitat
While surveying the area it was evident that there was no shortage of nesting habitat
available. The areas of impact are almost identical and provide all type of nesting and
feeding areas for the birds recorded in the area that are considered to have migrated to the
area.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-25

The bird nesting areas in the Project area include:

Trees and shrubs;
Barren stony slopes, boulders, fissures or hollows in boulders and the foot of steeper
cliffs;
Rock edges, rock clefts or cavities;
Logs and eroded roots of trees;
Rodent burrows;
Crevices in the ground;
Ground scrapes in the lee of a bush or grass clumps; and
Brood parasites - some birds, e.g cuckoos, are known as brood parasites and infiltrate
the nests of crows and other birds to lay their eggs. The crows hatch the cuckoos
eggs and feed the babies until they fledge from the nests.
6.3.9 Fish and Fisheries

Aquatic Life:
The prominent aquatic life of Indus at Tarbela includes fish, phytoplanktons (e.g
spirogyra) and zooplanktons (e.g paramecium) benthic insects, larvae of mayfly, caddis
fly mosquito larvae, dragon fly, stone fly and water mite.
Fish
According to the Fisheries department of KP, the dominant specie is Cepanous Corpio,
this is a self breeding fish and a multi breeder. It breeds three times a year and has many
newborn which survive easily. Raho, Grass carp, Silver carp, Mori and Thela breed in
months of April to July. Mallah and Masher are decreasing day by day due to their
feeding habits. These species live in flowing water but now the water is stagnant due to
construction of dam.
Trout does not breed in the Tarbela Reservoir as it is only present due to flooding from
snowy peaks and is found rarely. Cat fish like singhara, malhi, soul and snake head are
all carnivore species of the Indus River. Some important characteristics of Tarbela
Reservoir are provided in Table 6.14. A list of common fish species found in the
reservoir is given in Annex B.
Table 6.14:
Tarbela Dam Reservoir Characteristics
Parameter
Description
Water area at maximum reservoir level
25,900 ha
Reservoir level
Storage at maximum (Mm3)
3
Storage at minimum (Mm )

Maximum Depth (m)
Drawdown (m)
Type of Reservoir
Type of water
WAPDA
August 2011
10,762
4,770
137.00
76.00
V-Shaped
Melted snow
6-26

Parameter
Water temperature (C)
pH
Description
11-28
7.0-9.5
Conductivity (MicroSiemens /cm)

Habitual type
180-280
Oligotrophic
Fisheries
No fisheries activity in the private sector was found within or in the nearby vicinity of the
Project area. However WAPDA developed fish cultivation in the Tarbela Reservoir to
produce fish protein to meet the increasing demands of the growing population of
Pakistan. The fisheries are now managed by the fisheries department of the KP.
The principle of reservoir fishery management at Tarbela was to stock fish seed
hatcheries in order to rear fish up to a marketable size. Presently fishing rights for the
Tarbela Reservoir lie with the KP Province and revenue generated from the fisheries
sector is about PKR 0.5 million per year. Furthermore there are hundreds of fishermen
being employed by fishing contractors in the fishery business. Around 13,000 anglers
visit these reservoirs for recreation per annum.
In July 1997 the WAPDA Fisheries Department introduced Chinese Carp into the
Tarbela Reservoir for the following reasons:
Its reproduction rate is high (almost throughout the year);
It has a wide ranging diet (such as detritus, phytoplanktons, and zooplanktons); and
The existing natural fish species in the reservoir are minor and of less commercial
value although they do represent a good ecosystem.
In Annex B, more detail of the endemic and exotic species of the Tarbela and Ghazi
Barrage Reservoirs is given.
There have also been cases of Chinese Carp escaping into the Sirhin River from the
Ponds in Sirhin valley, ending up in Tarbela Reservoir. The introduction of Chinese
Carp, Sole and Toffee was to utilize the resources of the Tarbela Reservoir and also
because most of the endemic species are small and of no commercial importance, apart
from the Mahasher.
July and August are the close season for catching fish. The annual production of fish
during 2009-2010 was 67 metric tons. Any fishing is prohibited from 5 km upstream to
3 km downstream of the dam as there are security issues.
6.4
Social-economic Baseline
6.4.1 Overview
The social baseline describes the existing situation in the Project area and the potential
population that will be affected by the Project. As this is an extension of the original
Tarbela Project, there will not be resettlement and social issues directly associated with
the Project. However, there are some legacy issues around resettlement that are
attributable to the original Tarbela Project and this has therefore been included in the
social baseline. The direct Project area is already owned by WAPDA. The indirect
WAPDA
August 2011
6-27

Project area falls between the districts of Haripur and Swabi of the KP Province of
Pakistan. To establish a socio economic baseline, primary and secondary data was
collected on the prevailing socio-economic conditions including social and physical
infrastructure in Project area.
6.4.2 Administrative Setup

The administrative setup of the Swabi and Haripur districts is similar to the other districts
of the province. District administration is headed by the District Coordination Officer
(DCO) who is assisted by District heads of other departments in his / her pursuits.
The main District departments include: administration; judiciary; police; education;
health; communication and works; agriculture; forest; irrigation; telecommunication; and
livestock and fisheries. The head of each District department is responsible for the
performance of his department and is generally designated as the Deputy Director or
District Officer.
6.4.3 Demography and Population

Population
The District Population Census Reports, 1998 stated that population of the Swabi District
was 1.027 million while, that of Haripur district was 0.692 million with average annual
growth rate of 2.96 and 2.08 respectively. The estimated present population of the Swabi
and Haripur districts, is 1.47 million and 0.91 million respectively representing an annual
average growth rate of 2.8 and 2.2 respectively.
Main construction activities for the Project will remain confined to the Right Bank of the
Indus River. Table 6.15 presents basic characteristics of the population in Project area.
This shows that the estimated total population of the Project area is 36,250 with 4,387
households hence the average household size is 8.26.
Table 6.15:
Estimated Numbers of Households and Population in Project Area
Settlements
Households (No.)
Estimated Population (No.)
16
150
WAPDA Right Bank Colony
750
5,000
Mohallah Zakoo, Topi
300
2,100
1,200
13,000
170
1,200
Darra Mohat
160
1000
Kukar Chawa
35
250
Ghari Meera
456
4000
Sobra City
150
1050
Ghazi Hamlet, Ghazi
600
3500
Qazi pur
550
5000
4,387
36,250
Right Bank
Burj (Khabbal)
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi

Pontian
Left Bank
Totals
Source:
ESA survey 2011
WAPDA
August 2011
6-28

Ethnicity and Tribes of the Districts
Being on the route of the conquerors of Central India, the tribes and castes of the districts
are a multitude of various races from the north. The key tribe in the Swabi district is
Yousaf zai, an off-shoot of Pathans. Resident in the District Razars are: Rajars; Utman;
Jadoon; Gadoon; and Khatak. In the Haripur district the Punjabis and Kashmiris are in
the majority as compared to Pathans. The key tribes and castes include: Tareen;
Dilazak;Tarkheli; Gujar; Awan; Mishwani; Pathan; Gakhar; Jdoon; Sayyed; Tanoli; and
Turks.
The majority of the people in the Project area are Pakhtun with the other key tribes,
baradaries or castes in the Project area being: Awan; Yousaf Zai; Syed; Mughal;
Mashwani; Bafanda; and some working classes (artisans).
In addition in the Hazara region there are three main districts: Mansehra; Abbotabad; and
Hari Pur. Generally the residents of these districts are called Hazrawal.
Language
Pushto is the dominant language spoken in the Swabi district by 96% of the population.
Punjabi, Sraiki and Urdu are the other, minor languages spoken. The mother tongue
spoken in the Haripur district is predominately Hindko with the other languages spoken
being similar to the Swabi district.
Within the Project area, the majority of the people speak Pashto and Hindko
however, in the Right Bank Colony people also speak Urdu and Saraiki.
Religion
According to the Population Census of 1998, about 97% of the population of the Swabi
and Haripur districts is Muslim, while the remaining 3% of the population consist of
minorities such as Ahmadis, Christians, Hindus and other scheduled castes. Scheduled
castes are the depressed and low rank classes as declared by the Scheduled Castes
(Declaration) Ordinance, 1957.
All people belong to the Muslim Sunni school of thought. There are many religious
institutions in Swabi where students from all over the province are seeking religious
education.
6.4.4
Economic Conditions
Occupation / Livelihood
The main occupation of the inhabitants of the Swabi district is agriculture and people are
mostly landless tenants. However, a few educated people are engaged in Government or
private service. The livelihood of the local population of the district mainly depends on
agriculture and livestock rearing. The livestock serves as an income source which they
sell to meet their needs. The people of the district live a simple life including the
standard of their clothing and their diet. Unemployment, lack of potable water, basic
health and education facilities, electricity and roads are the major issues for the people of
the district. Similarly, in Haripur district agriculture remains the main occupation of its
inhabitants. The proportion of people serving in the Government sector is higher due to
the existence of the Pakistan Telecommunication Industry in Haripur as well as the
Hazara Fertilizer Factory. There are also a large number of people serving in the Armed
Forces.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-29

Most of the people in the Project area are dependant upon labor. They work in nearby
cities, Gadoon industrial estate, Karachi and abroad. As there is no agricultural land
available within the hamlets of the Right Bank Colony, small businesses, shop keeping
and private or government service are the other occupations of the people in the Project
area.
Income
Under the prevailing socio-economic conditions in the districts, the income of an average
household is very low. However, a small number of the people had larger incomes.
According to the social impact assessment survey, the majority of the people in the
Project area belong to the low income group. The average monthly income ranged
between PKR 5,000 to PKR 7,000. This implies that the majority of people in the Project
area live below poverty line although residents of the Right Bank Colony have a better
living standard as many are WAPDA employees.
Livestock
Livestock is a prestigious symbol and an additional source of income for the farming
community, besides providing milk, ghee and meat. Information relating to livestock in
the Swabi and Haripur districts is presented in Table 6.16 below and indicates that,
among dairy animals, cattle and sheep are more prevalent in the Swabi district. In the
Haripur district, there are more buffalo and goats than in the Swabi district. Among load
carrying animals, donkeys are the highest in number (53,837), followed by horses,
(3,928) and mules (485) with load carrying animals higher in number in the Swabi
district when compared to the Haripur district.
Table 6.16:
Livestock in the Swabi and Haripur district

District
Item
Swabi
Haripur
Total
Cattle
170,507
96,388
266,895
Buffalo
71,118
93,799
16,491
Sheep
15,660
10,327
25,987
Goat
93,302
149,982
243,284
Camel
821
423
1,244
Horse
2,658
1,270
3,928
265
221
485
34,754
19,083
53,837
813,820
596,471
1,410,291
Mule
Donkey
Poultry
Source:
Livestock Census, 1998, Agricultural Census Organization, NWFP
Industry
An industrial estate established in 1988 is situated at Gadoon in the Swabi district.

However, with the withdrawal of incentives available to the industrial estate, a large
number of industries have been abandoned. The main industries remaining are cement,
cigarette, tanneries and flour mills. There are no industries of major importance within
the Project area.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-30

In the Haripur district, Hattian Industrial Estate was established in 1985.

Industrialization has mostly brought structural, positive changes in the socio-economic
conditions of the district, including the establishment of a large number of chemical
industries, cotton, fiber, textiles, telephone Industries of Pakistan and brick plants which
are functioning now in the district.
Credit Availability
Credit plays important role in the lives of the poor and lower middle class families in
Project area. There are two major source of credit, institutional and non institutional.
The availability of institutional credit is very limited in the Project area mainly due to a
lack of knowledge and also the high rate of interest charged on loans. The main users of
non institutional credit are shop keepers and relatives of well-off families in the
settlements. These loans are mainly used for domestic and social needs such as
marriages, birth ceremonies, funerals, health and education.
Banking
Banking services are available in the Tarbela colonies on the Left Bank for WAPDA
employees. The residents of the surrounding areas have to go to Topi and Ghazi for
banking services although it is considered that sufficient banking facilities are available
at these places.
6.4.5 Social Infrastructure and Services

Overview
The baseline data provided in the following sections mainly represent data collated from
the District Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998. Any other data for the Project
area has been collected during field survey work.
The villages for which social survey work was undertaken are shown below in Figure 6.8
whilst the social infrastructure of the Project Area is depicted in Figure 6.9.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-31

Figure 6.8:
WAPDA
August 2011
Social Survey Villages
6-32

Figure 6.9:
WAPDA
August 2011
Social Infrastructure of the Project Area
6-33

Health Facilities
The health facilities available within the jurisdiction of the Districts Swabi and Haripur
are shown in Table 6.17 below.
Table 6.17:
Health Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts

District
Health Facility
Swabi
Hospitals
Haripur
3
41
39
Dispensaries
12
Rural Health Centers
Mother and Child Health Centers
Basic Health Unit
Source:
District Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998
The above table shows that health facilities available in both Districts are more or less
similar with minor variation depending on the distance to the source of service. Swabi
district has a greater number of basic health centers whilst Haripur district has a greater
number of dispensaries and rural health centers. It is evident from the above information
that hospitalization, rural health centers and mother/child centers are rare in both the
Districts.
The health facilities for the Project area are provided below in Table 6.18.
Due to the poor living conditions of the population, particularly in Project areas where
there are unhygienic living conditions and lack of potable water, there are many diseases,
the most common diseases prevalent in the area are malaria, diarrhea, hepatitis and skin
diseases.
Table 6.18:
Availability of Health Facilities in the Project Area
Village
Facility
Status
Right Bank
Burj (Khabbal)
Nil
Nil
WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Hospital
Lack of x-Ray and Laboratory

facilities. Lack of medical staff.
Mohallah Zakoo, Topi
Civil Hospital
Lack of x-Ray and Laboratory

facilities. Lack of medical staff
and Medicines.
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi
Dispensary
Lack of medical staff and

Medicines.
Pontian
Nil
Nil
Darra Mohat
Nil
Nil
Kukar Chawa
Nil
Nil
Ghari Meera
Nil
Nil
Sobra City
Hospital
Adequate
Left Bank
WAPDA
August 2011
facilities
are
6-34

Village
Facility
Status
available in the hospital
Ghazi Hamlet
Dispensary
Medicines.
Qazipur
Dispensary
Medicines.
Source: ESA survey 2011.
Education Facilities
The Swabi district is blessed with a higher standard institution named the Ghulam Ishaq
Khan Institute of Engineering, Science and Technology (GIKIEST) situated at Topi.
Apart from this institute, there is also a Polytechnique Institute and a Commerce College
in the district. In the Haripur district there is a Post Graduate College, a Poly Technique
Institute and a Commerce College. All of these facilities are mainly for males, the details
of those attending these educational facilities who are inhabitants of the districts are
provided in Table 6.19. This data has been taken from the 1998 census data and not all
data was available for both districts, there are therefore some gaps in the table.
Table 6.19:
Educational Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts
Institute
Swabi District
Haripur District
Male
Female
Total
Male
Female
Total
Degree College
Inter College
Elementary College
Higher Secondary
High School
65
21
86
63
15
78
Middle School
51
25
76
56
27
83
Primary School
496
388
864
656
251
907
20
20
Mosque School
76
Community and
14
School
Elementary Primary
School
Japan International
Cooperation Agency
(JICA) Model School
Source: Dis1rict Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998.
Like health facilities, education facilities in the Project area are not considered
satisfactory. The overall picture of educational facilities in Project area is provided in
Table 6.20 and it can be concluded that better education facilities are available at the
WAPDA
August 2011
6-35

Right Bank Colony. There are high schools for girls and boys with qualified staff and a
proper building. Science and computer laboratories are also available in the schools.
Although a high school for boys and girls exists at both the hamlets and in the Topi area,
there is a shortage of proper staff, furniture, science and computer laboratories.
Buildings are old and are insufficient for the existing number of students.
A degree level education facility is available in both the Ghazi and Topi areas.
Table 6.20:
Education Facilities available in the Project Area
Village
Facility
Gender
Remarks
Primary school
Boys
Lack of Teachers staff.
Right Bank
Burj (Khabbal)
Teachers often remained absent

WAPDA Right Bank
Colony
High school
Boys
Lack of computer facilities
High school
Girls
Mohallah Zakoo,
Primary school
Boys
Topi
Primary school
Girls
High school
Boys
Lack of Science Teachers staff,
High school
Girls
building, furniture and computers
Pontian
Primary school
Boys
Darra Mohat
Primary school
Boys and Girls
Upgrade of school to Middle
Primary school
Boys and Girls
Upgrade of school to Middle
High school
Boys and Girls
Lack of Science Teachers staff,
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi
Left Bank
Kukar Chawa
Ghari Meera
Ghazi Hamlet
Nil
Furniture and computers

Qazipur
Primary school
Boys and Girls
High school
Source:
ESA survey 2011.
Literacy
A person who can read and write statements with an understanding, in any language
prevalent in Pakistan, is considered as literate. The literacy ratio is measured as the
number of literate people compared to the population of the age of 10 years and above.
According to the population Census of1998, in the Swabi district 36% of the population
are literate whereas in the Haripur district a much higher percentage of the population is
literate at 53.7%. The literacy rate in the Project area is therefore lower than the national
level of 57%.
Housing
It is evident from the 1998 Census that in the Swabi district around two thirds (65.4%) of
the households use wood as the construction material in the roofs of their buildings, while
22.6% use reinforced cement, concrete or bricks. Approximately 10% of all houses use
WAPDA
August 2011
6-36

cement or iron sheets in the roofs. The remaining 12% of households use other materials.
Separate kitchens, bathrooms and latrines are available in 58.3% of all housing units.
In the Haripur district the situation was different, Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) /
Reinforced Brick Concrete (RBC) was the main (45.3 %) roofing material of the
households. Wood and bamboo were utilized in 39.4% with cement and bricks used in
11.7% and the remaining 3.7% using other materials. Separate kitchens, bathrooms and
latrines are available for households with 48.4%, 46.1% and 41.0% respectively in the
Haripur district.
There is a mixture of Pacca (permanent structure with concrete roofing), Semi Pacca
(brick walls but corrugated galvanized iron roofing) and Kacha (grass-thatched/mud
covered) houses in the Project area apart from the Right Bank Colony where all the
houses were Pacca. In total there were 80% of Pacca houses in Project area with the
remaining 20% falling into the Kacha and Semi Pacca category. It was observed that all
the people were living in self owned houses except on the Right Bank Colony, which is
property of WAPDA.
Sources of Drinking Water
The following data has been collated from the District Census Reports of Swabi and
Haripur, 1998.
Residents of the districts of Swabi and Haripur have access to two types of drinking
water, within the house and outwith house. On an overall basis, 79.4% of households had
access to a drinking water facility within the house with the remaining 20.6% having to
fetch water from outwith the house.
The proportion of households fetching water was higher in rural areas as compared to
urban localities (22.2% versus 13.0 %). It is important to note that 61.3% of households
rely on wells for drinking water and this percentage was higher (70.7%) in urban
settlements when compared to rural areas (59.3%). A higher proportion of resident
(55.2%) of the Haripur district had access to water within their houses as compared to
outwith the house (44.8%). However, the trend is similar to that of the Swabi district.
A significantly higher proportion of households in the Haripur district have access to tap
water is in both urban and rural localities (91.3% and 44.1% respectively) when
compared to the households of the Swabi district. Only 15.3% of households in the
Swabi district had access to piped water which is considered relatively safe quality. A
nominal proportion of urban households and all households in rural areas were getting
drinking water from village ponds in both districts which is the most dangerous quality of
water. More detail on the above information is provided below in Table 6.21.
Table 6.21:
Source of Drinking Water by Locality (%)

Swabi
Source
Haripur
Rural
Urban
All
Rural
Urban
All
Inside
77.8
87.0
79.4
50.4
92.2
55.2
Pipe (Nul)
11.0
10.5
10.9
44.1
91.3
49.6
Hand Pump
18.1
13.1
17,2
0.3
0.4
0.3
Well
48,7
63.4
51.3
6.0
0.5
5.3
Outwith
22.2
13.0
20.6
49.6
7.8
44.8
WAPDA
August 2011
6-37

Swabi
Source
Haripur
Rural
Urban
All
Rural
Urban
All
Pipe (Nul)
4.9
2.,1
4.4
16.9
5.3
15.6
Hand Pump
1.3
0.8
1.3
0.6
0,4
0.6
Well
10.6
7.3
10.0
14.4
0.9
12.8
Pond
0.8
0.6
2.1
1.8
Others
4.6
2.8
4.3
15.6
1.2
14.0
Source: District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998.
A tapped water supply is considered to be the most hygienic source of drinking water,
which is available only in the WAPDA colonies and to a limited number of people in
Project area. A water supply system is partially available in the hamlets but was
dysfunctional at the time of ESA survey. At the Right Bank Topi area, the drinking
water is polluted due to severe seepage problems and most of the people in the Project
area use untreated water. The ground water is contaminated by sewage, especially in the
Topi area.
In the WAPDA Colonies drinking water is sourced by ground water pumped through
deep tubewells. As described earlier, the drinking water quality sampling and analysis by
SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Limited at the WAPDA showed a Total Bacterial Colony Count that
exceeded permissible limits.
Sanitation
The sanitation conditions of the Haripur district are relatively better than those in the
Swabi district, especially in the rural areas. Urban settlements have drainage facilities
and in the WAPDA Colonies there is an improperly functioning sanitation system which
limited its proper and environmentally safe use. In the hamlets and the Topi area, an
open drainage system is available but there are no arrangement for the disposal of
domestic solid waste and sewage. People drain out used water in open places, similarly
the open dumping of solid waste is normal practice in the Project area.
Electricity
According to the District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998, the majority of
houses (83.4%) are equipped with the electricity as the source of lighting, both in urban
and rural areas. The Project area is connected with a nearby national grid system
however, shortage of electricity and load shedding is normal practice in the area as with
other parts of the country.
Tele Communication
The District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998 disclose that there are 22
telephone exchanges functioning in the Swabi district as well as one Head Post Office, 27
Sub Post Offices and 65 Branch Post Offices. In the Haripur district there are 18
telephone exchanges in operation while and one Head Post Office, 26 Sub Post Offices
and 74 Branch Post Offices functioning in the district. The comparative analysis of the
situation reveals that telecommunication facilities in both districts have a nominal
variation.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-38

The telecommunication services are available in and around the Project area. The
services of all the mobile providers are available in the Project area. Pakistan
Telecommunication Company Ltd. is also providing land lines and wireless telephone
services in the area.
Road Network
There is a chain of national, district and rural roads available in the Swabi district. Farms
are linked to markets by a roads network. Completion of the M1 project (Motorway
between Peshawar and Islamabad) has also improved links from and to the district with
other cities. According to the Census of 1998 the total length of roads in the district was
335 km whereas the Haripur district is linked with the famous Shahr-e-Resham
(Karakoram Highway) through Hazro road. Haripur is also linked with Taxila (Punjab)
via Khanpur. A road from Haripur city leads to Ghazi and there is also a network of
farms to market roads. The total length of the roads in the Haripur district is 260 km.
The Tarbela Dam is approximately 110 km away from Islamabad. The Project area is
linked by road directly with Islamabad and Peshawar via Motorway and Grand Trunk
(GT) Roads. One can use Burhan and Swabi interchanges on the Motorway to reach
Tarbela. A link road from the Grand Trunk (GT) Road leads to Tarbela. These routes
can be used for the transportation of construction material. The village of Darra Mohat,
located 1 km upstream of the dam site as shown in the various maps and figures
contained in this report, is divided into two parts in the months of July to October every
year due to rise of water in the reservoir which submerges the connecting road and people
cross the river by boat.
6.4.6 Grazing
The Project site is restricted and fenced to prevent grazing animals from penetrating the
area. However the families living in the Right Bank Colony use the Right Bank Colony
barracks as animal sheds. As these barracks are one of the options being considered for
the new labor camps, so these animals may be disturbed. People living in other villages
within the Project area of influence also have domestic animals but these villages are
further away from the Project site. Similarly, on the Left Bank a limited number of
animals are reared that graze on the open areas within the colonies. Overall there is
limited grazing pressure on the wild flora growing in the Project area therefore no
disturbance is expected to the grazing activity of these animals.
6.4.7 Cultural Heritage

A team from the Archaeology and Museums Department of the Government of KP,
Peshawar has visited the Project site and surrounding areas. They established that there
are no known cultural and archaeological located in the Project area. A certificate of
non-existence of any known archaeology site or objects has been issued by the concerned
department. However the area has a rich cultural and historical background. Not far from
Tarbela, opposite the village of Darband there is the site (Aornos or Pir Sar) where
Alexander the Great and his army fought his last battle with an army of barbarians
before returning downstream along the Indus to return to Greece. Somewhat later in time
numerous Buddhist stupas were built along the Indus valley, some of them probably near
Tarbela.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-39

6.4.8 Tourism and Recreation

The scenic beauty of the area including the Tarbela Dam and Reservoir has attracted a
large number of both local and foreign tourists in the past and WAPDA developed
viewpoints for visitors to the dam site. However, tourist activities in the Project area are
now very limited due to the high security requirements as the project is considered a
potential terrorist target.
WAPDA has provided recreation facilities to its employees in the residential colonies.
These include play grounds, sports gymnasium, ladies and gents club and a community
centre in the Right Bank Colony. There is no cinema or club in Project area, as the
majority of the people are religiously minded. Play grounds and others sports facilities
are very limited in the Ghazi and Topi areas and people are keen to see recreational
facilities for the masses of these areas, particularly for women and children.
6.4.9
Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Social

Organizations
NGOs
The NGO sector has made enormous contributions to the economic development in
Pakistan. The Ghazi Barotha Taraqiati Idara (GBTI) and Sungi Development Foundation
are of note and are mentioned as they work actively in Tarbela Project area. GBTI was
the project NGO for Ghazi Barotha Hydro Power project; in addition they are working
with communities in the health and education sectors. Pakistan and provincial KP Rural
Support Programs are also working in the Haripur and Swabi districts.
Mechanism for resolving disputes
According to the ESA Survey, people have various disputes and conflicts on different
issues, like other parts of the country. However, they resolve their minor disputes
through the heads of families while major disputes are resolved through the Jirga (a tribal
assembly of elders that make decisions by consensus). In case of serious matters, local
influential politicians intervene to settle the dispute. Police and the court of law is the
last option.
6.4.10 Poverty Status

Taking into consideration the nature and scope of the sources of income from barani
(rain fed) agriculture, livestock, employment status, investment profit, remittances from
main metropolitan cities of Pakistan as well as abroad, most importantly from the
analysis data gathered from the focused groups and separate discussions with men and
women of the Project area; it would be safe to conclude that every second person in the
Project area was living below the poverty line and earning less than $1.50 per day, per
person.
6.4.11 Gender Issues in the Project Area

Overview
Gender issues are gaining importance in development projects because female members
of the community are generally neglected while designing, assessing and implementing
such projects. Females are generally more vulnerable than male members of the society
and the Project is no exception to this.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-40

The following information was collected through Rapid Social Appraisal (RSA) and
Focused Group Discussion (FGD) at village level. The RSA and FGDs were not
undertaken with the male community however the overall demand chart is provided in
the SIMF where the most expressed pressing needs of the male population was identified
as:
Employment;
Technical education; and
Recreation activities.
Basic Sociological Characteristics of Women
All women consulted fall within the age group of 20 to 60 years old with an average age
of 40 years. Of the total women consulted, 77% were married, 17% unmarried and the
remaining 4% were widowed. On average a married women had 3.7 children.
Literacy Status
Of the participating women, 46% were literate having received formal and/or informal
education. Table 6.22 below shows that around 25.5% of literate women held a
graduation degree (i.e. 4 years of schooling), whereas around 18.6% held the degree of
Fellow of Arts (FA) 12 years education) and the same applied to the Master of Arts (MA)
16 years of education). This shows an overall higher level of education achievement and
propensity of gaining an education among the literate women of the Project area.
Table 6.22:
Level of Formal Education of Literate Female Respondents
Education Level
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
Primary
4.6
Middle
14.1
Matriculation
18.6
FA
18.6
11
25.5
18.6
46
100
Bachelor of Arts (BA)

MA
Total
Source:
ESA Consultation
Occupational Status
Table 6.23 below shows that around 65.6% of the women consulted are housewives and
remain engaged on a full time basis in household chores including food preparation,
cleaning, housekeeping, caring and rearing of children and taking care of old and sick
members of the family. About 18% of the women were contributing to the household
income through both indoor and outdoor activities such as teaching, dress making and
shop keeping. Women are also engaged in undocumented and informal rural economy
such as the raring of animals.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-41

Table 6.23:
Occupational Status of Women Respondents
Occupation
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
House Wife
63
65.6
Teacher
12
12.5
Student
11
11.4
Dress Maker
3.2
Shopkeeper
2.1
Nothing
5.2
96
100.0
Total
Note: few women (2.1%) of the Right Bank Colony were members of the womens club.
Role in Decision Making
Off the total participating women, 51.2% were involved in the decision making process
relating to important issues such as the sale and purchase of property and the schooling
and marriages of their children. However, a vast majority of women (83.3%) were of the
view that, despite all the discussions around making a decision, the final decision power
lies with the male head of the family. A small number of respondents (5.2%) had the
right of ownership of the property.
Skills
Some 41% of the participating women possessed different skills e.g. embroidery and
stitching, which provided a minor source of income generation.
Health Status
Table 6.24 below indicates that 49.6% of the responses received were for availing health
facilities at the government health centers which include indoor hospitalization facilities.
However, the availability of professional, semi-professional and occupational medical
staff and the quality of related services remained an open question. There were 24% of
the responses in favour of relying on private medical facilities, including paramedical
practitioners. It is worth noting that the villages named as Khabbal, Darra Mohat and
Kukar Chawa did not have any access to either medical practitioners or any basic health
unit.
Table 6.24:
Health Facilities Availed by Women in Last Year
Health Centre
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
3.5
Dispensary
24
17
Private Doctor
34
24.3
Hospital
70
49.6
5.6
141
100
Basic Health Unit (BHU)
Hakeem / Practitioner
Total
WAPDA
August 2011
6-42

Most Common Prevailing Diseases
Women were asked about the most common diseases prevalent in the Project area.
According Table 6.25 below, the common most diseases prevalent in the Project area
were: Diarrhea (32.7%); Typhoid (27.3%); Hepatitis (9.2%); Measles (6.4%); and
Malaria (5%).
Table 6.25:
Most Common Diseases Prevailing in the Project Area
Disease
Response (No.)
Percentage (%)
Diarrhea
72
32.7
Measles
14
6.4
3.6
Hepatitis
20
9.2
Typhoid
60
27.3
Tuberculosis
4.0
Skin Diseases
4.1
Eye diseases
2.7
Chickenpox
2.7
11
5.0
220
100.0
Pneumonia
Malaria
Total
Pressing Needs of Women
Data was collected from the women on their pressing needs to disseminate the benefits
of the Project to the surrounding communities. The most important needs felt by the
women folk were: provision of vocational/ training facilities (25.5%); access to health
facilities (24.4%); improved educational facilities (19%); and some felt their needs were
comprised on basic necessities such as gas, electricity and drinking water, as depicted in
Table 6.26.
Table 6.26:
Pressing Needs of Women
Needs
Response* (No.)
Percentage (%)
Improvement in health facilities
44
24.4
Improvement in educational facilities
34
19.0
Vocational Training Centers
46
25.5
Lady Doctors / Maternity homes
12
6.7
Others (Gas, electricity and drinking water)
44
24.4
180
100.0
Total
* There were multiple responses received
Skill Development
A majority of the women (72%) were interested in receiving training in different skill
types. The skill development training required most by women is sewing (34%) followed
by embroidery (29%) and handicrafts (21%). Such training could provide opportunities
for income generation. Some 16% of the literate women were interested in receiving
computer training. Women preference for development in their skills is given below.
Table 6.27 provides the source data.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-43

Table 6.27:
Womens Preference for Skill Development
Skill / Training
Response* (No.)
Percentage (%)
Sewing
55
34
Embroidery
47
29
Handicrafts
34
21
Computer Course
26
16
162
100
Total
6.4.12 Tarbela Legacy

The original Tarbela Dam Project acquired approximately 82,000 acres of land for
construction and the large reservoir submerged 120 villages and created an
unprecedented 96,000 project displaced affectees spread over a vast geographical area.
Resettlement planning for the Tarbela Dam Project was based on the Pakistan Land
Acquisition Act (1894 and its subsequent amendments), before the existence of
international guidance, donor safeguards or Pakistans 2002 draft resettlement policy. In
the mid 1990s, the World Bank and the Asian Development Bank made the settlement of
the Tarbela Projects outstanding social issues a pre-condition for the loan requested by
the Government of Pakistan for the GBHPP.
As of mid July 2010, according to WAPDA there were 40 existing, outstanding claims
related to the Tarbela Dam Reservoir Project. The 40 claims include:
27 with District Courts;
10 pending with the High Court Peshawar Circuit Bench at Abbotabad; and
Three under trial at the Supreme Court/ Shariah Court in Islamabad.
Of the 40 cases, 26 were submitted by PAPs, 11 were filed by WAPDA and three related
to land possession and were filed by PAP versus PAP. The total disputed amount from
the Tarbela resettlement claims and related issues was PKR 182,437,263 as of June 2010,
of this, PKR 13,621,218 was claimed by WAPDA in respect of recovery for over
payment, an amount of PKR 168,816,045 was claimed by PAPs for compensation
package enhancement, interest and compensation against land. In 2003, WAPDA
deposited its share for potential compensation payments with the Government of Pakistan
treasuries in various national investment schemes.
The World Commission on Dams 1999 case study on Tarbela identified three main
factors as to why resettlement impacts and claims were not closed out for Tarbela as
follows:
Abnormal delays in the announcement of decrees in judicial cases;
The refusal of the Sindh Government to provide the balance of the 7,800 ha out of
12,000 ha which it had committed to provide to PAPs; and
WAPDA also developed 311 residential and commercial plots for allotment to
eligible PAPs of Kala Dhaka in the New Darbad Township Extension Scheme.
However, Kala Dhaka affectees refused to accept allotment of these plots on the plea
that all 1,280 PAPs may be provided residential plots grouped in one
hamlet/township. Therefore this issue remains unsettled because of non-availability
of the desired number of plots. Previously the Kala Dhaka PAPs had refused to
accept agricultural land in Sindh.
WAPDA
August 2011
6-44

7 Other Relevant Non-project Related Issues

7.1
Risk of Earthquakes
The Project area is located in a part of Pakistan where earthquakes frequently occur,
though usually these are not of an exceptional magnitude. Tarbela is situated in the
foothills of the Himalaya and Karakorum mountains. These mountain ranges were
uplifted through the collision of the Indian and Eurasian tectonic plates. The zone of the
main trust between the plates is located northeast of the project site at a distance 100- 200
km in Kohistan and Kashmir. However, the influence of associated local tectonic fault
breaks can continue until the project area as far as the Potwar (or Potohar) plateau, which
is situated south of the project area. High incidence of seismic activity through tectonical
movements of local faults can be responsible for rupture of ground surface, ground
acceleration, failures of natural slopes, and ground liquefaction.
The largest recent earthquake in the area was the 2005 NWFP/Kashmir earthquake with a
magnitude of 7.6 on the Richter scale. More than 73,000 people were killed through this
earthquake and 450,000 people made homeless. The epicenter was located at a distance
of about 100 km northeast from Tarbela. The major earthquake was followed by a large
number of aftershocks. The magnitude of 7.6 is exceptional (calculated frequency of once
every 330 years). Most earthquakes in the area have a magnitude up to 6.4. As long as the
process of mountain uplifting continues in the northern areas the project should be spared
from major earthquakes with magnitudes in excess of 7. However, there is no guarantee
that a local fault does not break and causes an earthquake. There is an active tectonic
fault (the Darband fault) at the site which may displace by about 1.2 m. This makes the
risk of failure of slopes and liquefaction of near-surface soil quite high, unless
appropriate engineering measures are implemented to reduce these risks.
7.2
Risk of Flooding
Since its creation, Pakistan has faced eight severe floods. The floods of 1950, 1988, 1992
and 1998 resulted in a large number of deaths and severe loss of property, while the July
2010 floods have been described as the worst in the last eighty years. In July and August
2010 heavy monsoon rainfall in the northwest of the country caused flash and heavy
riverine floods. Starting in the valleys of the Swat and Kabul rivers the flood peak after
flooding large areas in KP province joined the Indus waters at Attock and travelled
downstream through the densely populated irrigation areas in Punjab and Sindh and
flooding large areas with around 8,000 deaths and nearly 20 million people being
significantly affected through loss of housing, property, crops, and income.
During these floods the Tarbela reservoir experienced a historically high peak discharge
of the Indus of 23,650 m/sec, but this was considerably below the design discharge of
42,400 m/sec. Reservoir and dam could therefore relatively easily cope with these high
floods. Through operation of the reservoir the peak outflow at Tarbela even could be
reduced with some 28 percent. There was no damage at Tarbela or surrounding areas.
The conclusion is that although the risk of flooding in the Indus Basin might increase in
the coming years due to rising air temperature, shift in rainfall pattern and increased
melting of glaciers in the upstream regions (see Section 6.3) the risk of flooding and
related damage in the Tarbela area is very low.
WAPDA
August 2011
7-1

Floods in the northern areas of Pakistan, including the upper part of the Indus catchment
are not only associated with extreme rainfall events, but they can also occur after
landslides and creation of river-dams and subsequent flood waves. However these
flooding events are usually restricted to tributary areas and may have impacts on the
upper Indus valley, but not on Tarbela.
7.3
Climate Change
Climate change is being considered as a critical factor behind changing rainfall patterns,
the visible increase in precipitation during monsoon seasons, and more frequent
extremely dry periods. Also the influence of climate change on air temperature such as
minimum and maximum averages and the frequency of heat waves is often mentioned.
More than 13 percent of the Upper Indus Basin consists of glaciers and the melting of ice
caps and retreat of glaciers is attributed to climate change. All these results have a
considerable influence on the hydrology of the Indus Basin, the water availability and on
the occurrence of floods and droughts.
During the last decade a lot of research is carried out to study the effects of long-term
climate change on precipitation, air temperatures, and droughts. Some of the main
conclusions of these studies are the following:
between 1980 and 2005 the frequency of heat waves (T> 40 C) has been increased
in north-western Pakistan. It is expected that there will be more frequent periods with
extreme drought;
based on predictions of the International Panel on Climate Change (IPCC)

scenarios estimates have been made by the Pakistan Meteorological Service from
the increase in maximum daily temperatures, which ranges from 2.8 C to 4.2 C in
the year 2080 for northern Pakistan;
more heavy rainfall events during monsoon season will occur over north-western
Pakistan instead of the north-east of the country. Some models calculate 25 percent
more rainfall during monsoon. As a result, areas along the western rivers of the
country (Indus and Kabul) will be more vulnerable to flood episodes similar to the
one experienced during 2010;
water availability might increase considerably (during kharif) but not when it is
required for agriculture (rabi season);
a shift has been observed in the rainfall pattern with monsoons starting 1-2 weeks
earlier and winter rains confined towards February;
Recent studies have been concentrated on the effects of glacial melt. Major issues to
be investigated are amongst others:
the importance of the contribution of snow and glacial melt on the hydrology of the
Indus;
the observed changes in the extent of the glaciers;
the effects of climate changes on the amount of melt-water.
From these studies it has been concluded that glaciers in the Himalaya and Karakorum
are receding faster than happens in any other part of the world. From digital terrain
models and satellite observations it might be concluded that the reduction of the thickness
of ice in the Western Himalayan glaciers ranges between 0.50 to 0.90 m per year,
WAPDA
August 2011
7-2

although in some areas in the Karakorum an extension and increase of glaciers has also
been reported. A recent study (Immerzeel et al, 2010) suggests that 60 percent of the
discharge in the Indus catchment is fed by melting of glaciers and snow. This is a very
high percentage as compared to other major rivers originating in the Himalayas, such as
Brahmaputra, Ganges and Yellow River. In a likely scenario of global warming based on
IPPC predictions the reduction of the share of melt-water in the Indus discharge has been
estimated at 8.4 percent. However this could be (over)compensated by an expected
increase of the precipitation during monsoon in the area of 25 percent.
The relation between climate change and hydrology is extremely complex. This is
because the high variability in data on climate and hydrology, requiring long time series
and proper monitoring. Moreover regional circumstances might vary considerably,
especially in high mountain areas. This often leads to conflicting data. More studies and
more reliable data should be collected in the coming years. In view of the importance of
these data for developing reliable and accurate knowledge of the basin hydrology and on
future water availability of the Indus River it is recommended that the current project
contributes to these studies with a Glacial Monitoring Program (Component C4: US$ 6
million). In the ESMP more details of such a study are presented and a cost estimate is
given. This program includes extensive glacial studies, including satellite monitoring and
studies into the effects of glacial outbursts.
WAPDA
August 2011
7-3

8 Significant Environmental Impacts of the

Project and their Mitigations
8.1
General
Potential adverse effects of the T4HP project on ecosystems and their inhabitants,
humans, animals and plants are described in this chapter. The impacts of the project on
social structures and relations will be dealt with in Chapter 9. Adverse environmental
impacts under the project are expected to be rather limited mainly because dam,
reservoir, and power generating facilities are already in place. Construction operations
will be concentrated on a limited project area concentrated around the inlet gates of
Tunnels 3 and 4, the outlet of Tunnel 4, the site and steep slope above the new power
house to be constructed and the existing switch yard which will be extended further
downstream. The area of influence of the project is larger and covers some 5 km
upstream in the Reservoir including its embankments and 10 km downstream of the dam
until the two cities of Ghazi and Topi at respectively the left and the right bank. Also
included are the borrow and disposal areas in the vicinity of the project and the access
roads to the project.
8.2 Assessment of Effects and Significance

The assessment of effects and identification of residual significance takes account of any
incorporated mitigation measures adopted due to any impact of Project activities, and is
largely dependent on the extent and duration of change, the number of people or size of
the resource affected and their sensitivity to the change. Impacts can be both adverse and
beneficial and the methodology defined below has been applied to define both beneficial
and adverse impacts of the project.
The criteria for determining significance are generally specific for each environmental
and social aspect but generally the magnitude of each impact is defined along with the
sensitivity of the receptor. Generic criteria for defining magnitude and sensitivity are
summarized below:
8.2.1 Magnitude
The assessment of magnitude will be undertaken in two steps. Firstly the key issues
associated with the Project are categorized as beneficial or adverse. Secondly, impacts
will be categorized as major, moderate, minor or negligible based on consideration of the
parameters such as:
Duration of the impact;
Spatial extent of the impact;
Reversibility;
Likelihood; and
Legal standards and established professional criteria.
The magnitude of impacts will generally be identified according to the categories

outlined in Table 8.1.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-1

Table 8.1:
Parameters for Determining Magnitude
Parameter
Major
Duration of
impact
Moderate
Long term
Medium Term
(more than 35
years)
Lifespan of the
project
Minor
Negligible
Less than project

lifespan
Temporary with
no detectable
impact
(5 to 15 years)
Spatial extent of
the impact
Widespread far
beyond project
component site
boundaries
Beyond immediate
project components,
site boundaries or
local area
Within project
components and
site boundary
Specific location
within project
component or
site boundaries
with no
detectable
impact
Reversibility of
impacts
Impact is
effectively
permanent,
requiring
considerable
intervention to
return to baseline
Baseline requires a
year or so with some
interventions to
return to baseline
Baseline returns
naturally or with
limited
intervention within
a few months
Baseline remains
constant
Legal standards
and established
professional
Breaches national
limits and or
international
guidelines
Complies with limits

given in national
standards but
breaches
international lender
guidelines in one or
more parameters
Meets minimum
national standard
limits or
international
guidelines
Not applicable
Occurs under
typical operating or
construction
conditions
Occurs under worst

case (negative
impact) or best case
(positive impact)
operating conditions
Occurs under
abnormal,
exceptional or
emergency
conditions
Unlikely to occur
criteria
Likelihood of
impacts
occurring
Source:
Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Volume II, Judith Petts, 1999. Blackwell Science Ltd.
8.2.2 Sensitivity
The sensitivity of a receptor will be determined based on review of the population
(including proximity / numbers / vulnerability) and presence of features on the site or the
surrounding area. Criteria for determining sensitivity of receptors are outlined in
Table 8.2 below. Each assessment will define sensitivity in relation to their topic.
Table 8.2:
Criteria for Determining Sensitivity
Sensitivity Determination
Definition
Very High
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with little or no capacity to

absorb proposed changes or minimal opportunities for mitigation.
High
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with little or no capacity to

absorb proposed changes or limited opportunities for mitigation.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-2

Sensitivity Determination
Definition
Medium
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with some capacity to

absorb proposed changes or moderate opportunities for mitigation
Low / Negligible
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with good capacity to

absorb proposed changes or/and good opportunities for mitigation
Source: Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Volume II, Judith Petts, 1999. Blackwell Science ltd.
8.2.3 Assigning Significance

Following the assessment of magnitude, the quality and sensitivity of the receiving
environment or potential receptor was determined and the significance of each potential
impact was established using the impact significance matrix shown below in Table 8.3.
Table 8.3:
Assessment of Impact Significance

Sensitivity of Receptors
Very High
High
Medium
Low /
Negligible
Major
Critical
Major
Moderate
Negligible
Moderate
Major
Major
Moderate
Negligible
Minor
Moderate
Moderate
Low
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Magnitude of Impact
A great number of potential impacts can either be avoided or reduced through mitigation;
however some residual environmental impacts may be unavoidable. The ESA has
assessed whether residual impacts, either beneficial or adverse, remain after mitigation.
8.2.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures

Mitigation measures are identified to address negative impacts. The following hierarchy
of mitigation measures will be applied:
Mitigation / elimination through design (embedded mitigation);
Site / technology choice; and
Application of best practice.
Where appropriate, enhancement measures are identified to create new positive impacts
or benefits, increase the reach of positive impacts or benefits, or distribute them more
equitably.
8.2.5 Uncertainty
An ESA involves prediction and thus uncertainty is an integral part. The main types of
uncertainty and the ways in which they can be minimized are summarized as follows:
Uncertainty of prediction: this is important at the data collection stage and the final
certainty will only be resolved once implementation commences. Research can
reduce the uncertainty;
WAPDA
August 2011
8-3

Uncertainty of values: this reflects the approach taken in the ESA process. Final
certainty will be determined at the time decisions are made.
Improved
communications and extensive negotiations would reduce this uncertainty;
Uncertainty of related decision: this affects the decision making element of the ESA
process and final certainty will be determined by post evaluation. Improved
coordination will reduce uncertainty.
8.3
Summary of Assessed Impacts
The projects potential environmental impacts and their significance have been assessed
using the methodology described in Section 8.2 above. A summary of these impacts and
their significance is presented in Table 8.4.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-4

Table 8.4:
Significance of Environmental Impacts
Impacts
Land Acquisition and Land Use
Phase
Pre-construction
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Low
Minor
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Enhancement
Low Adverse
Change; preparation of
Construction camps and other construction facilities to

be established on WAPDA owned land.
Residual
Significance
Negligible
Re-plantation plan to be prepared and implemented.
construction facilities
Contractor mobilization
Pre-construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Contractor to prepare and implement a traffic

management plan. Temporary by-pass routes.
Community awareness.
Low Adverse
Topography:
Construction and
Medium
Major
Moderate Adverse
no excessive excavation; and
Negligible
blasting and cutting for

powerhouse;
use of alternative excavation methods wherever

possible.
Decommissioning
blasting and cutting at borrow

sites;
dumping of excavation
materials.
Geology and Seismology:
All Phases
High
Major
Major Adverse
risk of seismic activity.
foundation design of the powerhouse to consider

probability of earthquake at the earliest design stage;
Low Adverse
Method Statements and Risk Assessments with

particular attention to blasting material and blasting
techniques; and
Emergency Preparedness Plan.
Irrigation Releases and power

generation:
construction temporary
closure of existing Tunnel 4 to
join with the new tunnel and for
constructing the raised intake
will result in the interruption of
irrigation releases through
tunnel 4; and
operation the Tunnel 4
capacity will be reduced by
WAPDA
August 2011
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
connection tunnels will be carried out during the annual

canal closure and periods of low demand; and
Negligible
Releases from tunnels 1-3 and 5 will be adjusted to

meet the irrigation water demands and power
generation.
the reservoir will continue to be operated to ensure

meeting the irrigation water demand.
8-5

Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Enhancement
Residual
Significance
around 5%.
Operation:
High
Moderate
Major Adverse
Negligible
Surface Water Quality:
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
many sources of discharge and

effluents.
De-
Select access roads to avoid run off to river;
commissioning
pre-treated sewage prior to discharge;
Surface Water Monitoring Program;
Low adverse
Wastewater Treatment Plan;

Oil and Chemical Spill Response Plan;
Operation
Low
Minor
Negligible
Waste Management Plans;
Negligible
Store and handle all hazardous substances in

accordance with their MSDS;
Install oil and water separators and settling ponds; and
Upon completion of decommissioning, disturbed areas
will be contoured and revegetated to minimize the
potential for soil erosion and water quality related
impacts.
Ground Water Quality:
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Ground Water Monitoring Program;
Negligible
work within the requirements of the management plans

contained within the EMMP;
piling for foundations;

accidental spills and leakage;
and
De-
worker camp wastewater.
commissioning:
Medium
Minor
Low Adverse
staff training;
all sanitary effluent will be treated prior to discharge;
treatment plant will conform to international standards;
drainage system will be designed so that all spills will be
drained and collected in a sump for further appropriate
disposal; and
Oil and chemical storage and vehicle wash and oil
change facilities will be on an impermeable surface to
avoid percolation.
reduce volume of material requiring disposal;
Wastes:
Construction and
large volume of spoil;
De-
re-use where possible;
possible risk of erosion into the

Indus River;
commissioning:
disposal of spoil at designated depressed area;
WAPDA
August 2011
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Negligible
only remove equipment and machinery leaving
8-6

Impacts
leakage, spillage from other

wastes (domestic and
hazardous); and
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Enhancement
Waste Management Plans; and
Low
Minor
Negligible
Excavated Material Disposal Plan.

Demolition material disposal plan
disposal of demolition material.
Risk of landslide resulting from

excavation and blasting
activities.
Residual
Significance
infrastructure in place for re-use for other purposes;

Operation:
camp wastes
Landslides:
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
slope stabilization;
Low Adverse
extraction from top down;

use of pre-designed support systems;
De-
Low
Minor
Negligible
commissioning:
use cushion blasting in confined areas;

Method Statements and Risk Assessments with
particular attention to blasting material and blasting
techniques; and
include in Emergency Preparedness Plan.
Soil and Erosion:
Construction:
Medium
Minor
Low Adverse
loss of topsoil from land

clearance;
soil contamination from
hazardous construction
materials; and
Negligible/
re-vegetation, especially of slopes, of fast-growing

indigenous species;
Positive
road edge buffer replanting;
Decommissioning
storage and use of hazardous materials;
Low
Minor
Negligible
Beneficial
Tree Plantation Plan; and

decommissioning would be followed by contouring and
re-vegetation.
fish mortality from river turbidity

surface disturbance from
machinery and demolition.
Air Quality:
Construction and
dust on site from site works and

vehicle movements.
De-
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
covering standing material and transported material to

prevent dust blows;
Negligible
washing of construction vehicles;
commissioning
specific and agreed routes for traffic;

speed limits; and
turn off engines when idle.
Noise:
Construction and
vehicle movement;
De-
restricting / limiting timing of blasting activity;
operating machinery;
commissioning
fitting applicable construction machinery with mufflers;
WAPDA
August 2011
Medium
Major
Moderate Adverse
Ambient noise:
Low Adverse
8-7

Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Enhancement
Residual
Significance
maintaining and powering down all plant items when not

in use;
blasting
avoid unnecessary revving of vehicle engines;

use quietest work methods and plant items where
practicable;
power plant operation

Operation
Low
Minor
Negligible
provision of noise barriers at excessive noise producing

areas (such as blasting sites); and
informing the communities of activities taking place such
as blasting.
provision of PPE i.e. ear muffs and plugs;
provision of vibration absorbing gloves;
instruction in the proper use of equipment;
frequent breaks;. 10 minutes per hour; and
manage and properly design all blasting activities.
Landscape and Visual Intrusion:
Construction and
Construction:
De-
excavation works;
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Landscape Plan.
Positive
Beneficial
commissioning
new buildings; and

new roads.
Operation:
Operation
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Beneficial
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
new planting and landscape

restoration.
Traffic and Transport:

delivery of construction
materials, particularly for the
powerhouse;
Negligible/low
De-
Provision of by pass routes
adverse
commissioning
Minimizing the duration of right bank road closure
construction of temporary
access roads;
transport of construction labor;
WAPDA
August 2011
8-8

Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Enhancement
Residual
Significance
closure of right bank road

additional traffic to remove
demolished material; and
transport of decommissioning
labor.
Increased activities affecting
Fauna / Wildlife / Vegetation:
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
avoid positioning spoil in areas used by fauna;
Negligible
provide corridors for animal movement;
disruption to areas that are

currently used by wild fauna
including birds/migratory birds.
relocation of species; and

no illegal hunting or poaching.
Flora / Vegetation:
Construction and
loss of vegetation leads to soil

erosion.
De-
Medium
Major
Major Adverse
commissioning
avoid dumping material in vegetated areas;
Positive
re-provide plantations in open spaces and practice

watershed management;
Beneficial
enhance flora environment by planting fruit trees and

ornamental shrubs;
use fast-growing species; and
use grasses to assist slope and soil stability
Fish:
Potentially All
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
during Monsoon runoff will be diverted to adjacent

depressions and from there to river after settling.
Negligible
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
attaching markers/balls with the cables
Negligible
monsoon increases turbidity

which affect fish growth and
survival
Bird collision with transmission
cables
Operation
WAPDA
August 2011
8-9

8.4
Impacts during Pre-construction Stage
8.4.1 Land Use Change

The power plant and auxiliary infrastructure will be built entirely on WAPDA-owned
land that is uninhabited and exclusively used by WAPDA. The area is characterized by
restricted access and is not open for the general public. Hence no land acquisition or
resettlement of affected persons is expected for the project. However it would be possible
that some land may have to be leased on temporary bases (e.g. five years) for the erection
of batching plant, workshops and stores, for borrow and disposal areas and for the
accommodation of the construction force. There will be no significant change to the
present land use of the area. Areas that will change include the new powerhouse, the
extended switchyard, a temporary batching plant and disposal areas, as shown in
Figures 1.2 and 8.1, for excavated material that is not reused in construction for the
project. Also a part of the road to Right Bank Colony may have to be realigned.
Mitigation
Attempts will be made to establish all these facilities within the area owned by WAPDA.
In the unlikely event that land or property is required for temporary facilities, it will be
purchased or leased on commercial basis.
8.4.2 Preparation of Facilities for Contractor(s) and Labor Force

Some minor adverse impacts might be associated with the preparation and refurbishing of
the project offices, labor camps, construction yards, and stores. As much as possible
existing structures such as barracks used in earlier projects will be used. Most of these
facilities will require some reconstruction and refurbishing activities. Access roads will
have to be upgraded and vegetation around these buildings will have to be cleared to
create sufficient space. Also land has to be cleared and prepared for a batching plant,
workshops and stores for materials and equipment.
Mitigation
The removal of vegetation and trees would be mitigated by preparing a proper
landscaping plan and a budget for future tree planting and landscaping measures to be
implemented after completion of the project. The plan will be prepared during the first
year of the construction, and will be provided to the Supervision
Consultants/environmental monitoring unit for review and approval. These activities
would be monitored by the Environmental and Social Monitoring Unit (ESMU)
(discussed later in the document).
WAPDA
August 2011
8-10

Figure 8.1:
WAPDA
August 2011
Project Construction Facilities
8-11

8.4.3
Hindrance and Damages during Mobilization and

Transport of Materials
Traffic and transportation impacts will start during the mobilization of the contractor and
will continue during the entire construction period. The Project is implemented in a
remote area and existing traffic density and volume is not high however, when
mobilization and construction commences, traffic intensity will rise significantly as a
result of the following activities:
The construction of the powerhouse and related infrastructure;
The construction of temporary access roads as the main Right Bank Colony road
runs through where the powerhouse construction site is likely to be;
Delivery of resources (materials, plant and labor) to the work site; and
Transfer of borrowed materials from the source to the Project area.
It is estimated that during construction traffic volume on the roads leading to the Project
area will increase by more than 200 additional vehicles (including trucks) per day. Heavy
transport of materials will cause congestions in urban areas and along access roads to the
project. Especially local roads are not designed for carrying heavy traffic and this may
result in considerable damage to local roads. The impact on road safety and increased
risk of accidents will be dealt with in the next chapter.
Mitigation
Prevention and mitigation can be achieved by preparing a traffic management plan which
indicates the designated areas and access roads for vehicles and moving equipment to be
used, speed limits to be applied, the possible bypass in urban centers and the
responsibilities in case of repair of damages to roads. This plan would be prepared by the
Contractor prior to mobilization. The need for temporary bypass road and/or access roads
and traffic measures in urban centers would be established and agreed with WAPDA and
local authorities. The contractor will be required to submit the TMP to the Supervision
Consultants/ESMU/WAPDA Environmental Cell (WEC) for their review and approval
before the plan is implemented.
8.5
Impacts during Construction Stage
8.5.1
Changed Topography/Land Form
The potential areas where topography will change as a result of blasting, cutting,
excavation and dumping activities include the new powerhouse site, penstock route,
intake area, part of the road connecting the existing powerhouse with Right Bank Colony,
borrow sites and dumping sites for excavated material.
Different types of construction materials will be required in implementing the project.
Some of these can be obtained by dredging or excavating material (e.g. fine and coarse
sands) from the Indus river bed and sand banks at suitable locations. Other materials will
be taken from quarries and borrow pits (e.g. rip rap, material for stone pitching and rock).
Borrow materials would be obtained (as much as possible) from licensed quarries and
borrow areas. Where necessary, appropriate restoration of the borrow area such as recontouring would be carried out, and no deep ditches would be left behind. Material
excavated by the project, and of suitable grade can also qualify as a source of
construction material to be (re)used in the project (e.g. quartzites and other durable
WAPDA
August 2011
8-12

rocks). Other excavated materials of poor construction quality estimated at 1.5 million m
will have to be disposed at suitable sites, e.g. in nearby disused quarries or borrow pits.
The total quantity of material to be excavated from the powerhouse site, the intakes and
slope excavations is estimated at 900,000 m3. The Project has been designed to use most
of the excavated material in the construction of a raised platform for the switchyard in the
Ghazi-Barotha lake bed. Any remaining spoil will be deposited in a depression not far
from the powerhouse on the Right Bank. Disposal of these materials may create
environmental impacts such as an increase in dust pollution, landscape degradation,
erosion and an increase in sedimentation of the Ghazi barrage pond and the Barotha
powerhouse head pond.
Mitigation
To reduce the adverse impacts of deposition of excavated material the emphasis will be
on reducing the volume of material requiring disposal as far as possible. Remaining
material will be disposed in an environmentally sound manner. Disposal sites will be
properly filled, shaped and reworked and where feasible planted with trees. Borrow
materials would be obtained (as much as possible) from licensed quarries and borrow
areas. Where necessary, appropriate restoration of the borrow area such as re-contouring
would be carried out, and no deep ditches would be left behind. Contractors would
follow the guidelines presented in the ECP 7, Borrow Areas Development and Operation.
8.5.2
Reduced Irrigation Releases due to closure of Tunnel 4

and Tunnel 3
There will be no impact on water availability for downstream areas, since the other
tunnels can easily supply the water needed for irrigation. During construction, Tunnel 4
will be out of use in three different periods. The longest closure will be when at the
downstream end of Tunnel 4 the power branch has to be connected to the tunnel. During
construction of the power off take the tunnel will be out of use for an estimated period of
about 12 months. Potential impact of insufficient release of irrigation water, especially
during the critical period of May- June could be shortages of irrigation water in
agriculture further downstream with reduced crop yields and risk of soil salinity and other
problems.
Two closures of each three months will be needed during construction of the raised
intakes for respectively Tunnel 4 and Tunnel 3. During most of the construction time of
these inlets the lower intake can be used, provided that there are no ongoing construction
works at the outlet site of the tunnel. Once the raised inlets are completed both tunnels
will be taken out of use in order to connect the shaft of the inlet to the tunnel. For each
inlet there will be a closure needed of three months. But this will happen in two
consecutive years. First the connection of the inlet of Tunnel 4 will be made and in the
next winter the new inlet of Tunnel 3 will be connected. After connection it is possible to
operate both inlets (the low and the raised) independently, depending of the level of the
reservoir.
Mitigation
It is expected that with proper management during the closure period the irrigation
releases from tunnel 4 entirely could be taken over by the other Tunnels 1, 2, 3, and 5.
This can be done by increasing the operating hours from these tunnels as required. From
historic discharge data over the period 2000- 2010 it appeared that Tunnel 4 is used only
for limited periods (5-80 hours/month) in the period May July. Tunnel 5 operates only
WAPDA
August 2011
8-13

during part of the months and has sufficient extra capacity to releases more water for
irrigation. The same might be concluded for the other tunnels. This also can be shown by
comparing the maximum release capacity of the Tunnels 1, 2, 3 and 5 which is together
over 4900 m/s against a peak demand for irrigation which lies between 3000- 4000 m/s
in the months of June- July. Then, with a fully filled reservoir also water is spilled from
the spillway, which becomes available for irrigation.
The closure of the tunnel 3 and 4 during construction of the raised intakes could be
carried out in a period when the demand for irrigation water is low, which is during
winter. In this way the impact on irrigation releases will be minimal. The conclusion is
that all three closures will have no effect on the overall irrigation releases of the Tarbela
Reservoir. There will be no difference in water availability for agriculture.
8.5.3 Reduced Power Generation

Power generation will not directly be influenced by the construction works, unless
priority has to be given to irrigation releases though the other tunnels in view of the fact
that Tunnel 4 cannot be used for irrigation releases. It is not expected that there will be a
major reduction of power generation during construction. However during the closure of
Tunnel 3 for a period of three months there will be no power generation possible through
this tunnel. It is possible that there might be some relatively small impact on total power
production when Tunnels 1 and 2 have insufficient capacity to make up for the
difference.
Mitigation
Mitigation is possible by increasing power production in other tunnels.
8.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water Quality

During construction water quality and flow in the areas immediately upstream and
downstream of the inlet and outlet gates might change. Chemicals, cement, and solids
used in construction activities in the tunnels might accidentally be spilled in the reservoir
and/or the water downstream of the dam and affect aquatic flora and fauna, including fish
and turtles.
The construction activities themselves could also have an impact on the quality of the
surface water, especially on water from the Tarbela Reservoir and the Ghazi Barotha
lake. The most important potential causes are the following:
Increased water turbidity as a result of construction/dismantling of coffer dams

and/or dredging;
Runoff from crushed and ground rock material from drilling and blasting;
Run off from dampening systems to control dust emissions;
Waste water effluents and sewage water from workshops and construction workers
camps;
Accidental spillage of hazardous and toxic materials such as: batteries, explosives,
acids, paints, fuel, oil, lubricants and chemicals;
Dumping of spoil material;
Contamination through polluted drainage water emissions in the river during

monsoon.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-14

Construction of coffer dams (one or two are envisaged) can potentially cause increased
water turbidity adversely affecting the aquatic life particularly fish. Contamination of the
surface water of the River would need to be avoided since this could have an impact on
fish and aquatic life, but also on water quality of a number of tubewells used for the
domestic water supply of the residential areas of the WAPDA colonies as well as by the
nearby communities of Topi and Ghazi.
Mitigation
Detailed instructions and guidelines are given in the Environmental Code of Practices
(ECP) for the Contractor (see Annex C), which will be part of the general conditions of
all the contracts for the T4HP project.
Work sites and access roads will be carefully selected so that surface runoff does not
enter the river. At construction camps sewage will be pre-treated prior to discharge by
installation of septic tanks or a pilot activated treatment plant at sewage generating
sources. A sewage collection system is also envisaged to avoid the spillage of sewage in
open areas. These will be included within the Wastewater Treatment Plan (which will be
submitted to the ESMU/WEC for their review and approval). In order to mitigate water
quality impacts in line with Pakistani and World Bank Standards, pre-treatment will be
required to maintain net biological oxygen demand (BOD) levels, nutrients (phosphates
and nitrates) and pathogens (faecal coliforms) below the standards for effluent discharges
to surface waters.
Accidental spills and leakages that may occur during construction at both ends of Tunnel
4 would be avoided by taking proper safety measures, such as the construction of bunds
around oil tanks and storages of chemicals. The contractor(s) will be required to take
appropriate measures according to the ECP 2, Fuels and Hazardous Goods Management,
ECP 3, Water Resources Management and ECP 4, Drainage Management to avoid and
contain any spillage and pollution of the water resources both upstream and downstream
of the dam. Strict monitoring of the water quality is required (ECPs are provided in
Annex C).
8.5.5 Impact of Noise on Workers and Residential Areas

The construction of the new powerhouse and the associated works at the right bank will
require blasting, excavation and reshaping of the steep river terrace slope behind the new
powerhouse. Space for a new road alignment has to be found and this requires the
removal of at least a layer of rock of about 40 meter. Noise from blasting with explosives
and drilling will be resonated between the valley slopes and the dam and spread over the
Ghazi-Barotha reservoir during excavation and construction works with predominant
northerly winds and will reach the residential areas, including right bank and left bank
WAPDA colonies, which are both situated at a distance within 2- 3 km from the
construction site.
Noise will also be generated from activities such as vehicular movement, excavation
machinery, and concrete mixing during construction. With regards occupational
exposure, construction site workers are the most likely to be exposed to the potential
impact of high noise levels (85 dBA or more) and / or vibration impacts associated with
the use of some construction equipment.
Noise and vibration from construction activity may also disturb any wildlife in the area.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-15

Blasting with explosive is the most significant source of vibration as it can trigger
landslides. Use of explosives may also disturb local population as vibration may be
transplanted towards residential areas. Vibration levels during blasting are however
expected to be low and within safe limits and are not expected to cause any structural
damage to buildings.
Mitigation
Noise pollution would be restricted to day time periods and levels would be properly
monitored. Workers in drilling areas would wear suitable ear protection. Noise
monitoring at the residential colonies will be required, and if the noise levels at these
locations are beyond the acceptable limits (WB Guidelines and NEQS), appropriate
mitigation measures such as noise barriers will need to be employed. Workers will be
instructed in the proper use of equipment and all blasting activities will be properly
designed and managed. Noise reduction measures will be applied such as: enclosing the
powerhouse within a solid structure; acoustic screening of noisy equipment; and a
maintenance program for all equipment and machinery. Detailed guidelines are given in
ECP 9 for Noise and Vibration management. Mitigation measures for operational noise
impacts on workers will include standard occupational health and safety practices such as
hearing protection.
8.5.6 Risk of Landslides and Collapse of Slope during

Construction
The new powerhouse to be constructed is designed between the toe of the steep slope of
the river terrace and the existing infrastructure of the project. Slope stability is a critical
issue in this part of the river valley as some of these slopes have collapsed in the past.
The rock cut slopes of the outlet area consist of numerous benches or berms over a height
of about 150 m. These slopes have posed problems in the past, when during 1981-82,
large slides occurred and repair works were continued up to 1984. Currently the upper
part of these slopes has developed numerous cracks indicated by the growing of grass.
However, these cracks do not seem to pose an immediate threat to the existing slopes,
which seem to have been stabilized. Precautionary measures shall however be required
while dealing with or disturbing these cut slopes.
Detailed geological rock sampling has revealed that the resistance against slope failure at
the powerhouse site is somewhat better than at other places along the valley slope where
the collapse occurred. The intake area has even better quality rock but also involves
creating some large cut rock slopes that could be susceptible to slope failure. Extreme
care needs to be exercised to protect workers and the public from the dangers of sudden
landslides, which may occur during excavation and blasting works. Particularly during
monsoon periods and during earthquakes there might be increased risk of such incidents.
Mitigation
Slope protection measures, such as rock bolts, rock anchors, safety nets and other
protection measures may have to be applied including proper terracing to reduce the risk
of slope failures. The penstock will be buried in a 15 m deep trench and the powerhouse
has been designed with sufficient space between it and the slopes. Access would be
restricted during the periods that slope stability is not yet entirely secured and guaranteed
by proper safety measures. The contractor is required to include safety measures in a
Health, Safety, Environment and Social (HSES) Plan. The Plan will need to be prepared
before/during mobilization, and submitted to ESMU/WEC for their review and approval.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-16

Prior to the construction the Contractor will submit Method Statements, conduct a Risk
Assessment, and prepare an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) to ensure that all existing
project infrastructures have been adequately assessed prior to any excavation activity
(ERP will need to be submitted to the Supervision Consultants/ESMU for their review
and approval). In particular, attention will be paid to the safety of the existing dam,
tunnels and powerhouse. Use of heavy machinery, blasting material and blasting
technique will be carefully considered and the methodology will contain a stability
analysis for a suitable factor of safety (FOS).
During excavations the concerned slopes will be stabilized and excavation started from
the top then gradually working down the slope. After blasting a riser, it will be stabilized
by pre-designed support systems such as shotcrete, mesh and rock bolts prior to drilling
the next riser for excavation. Where there are confinement issues, cushion blasting will
be the method applied. Extreme care will be taken in designing the blasting pattern and
blasting will be controlled so as to avoid disturbance of nearby slopes where stability is in
a critical condition.
Early warning systems will be introduced that will indicate when cracks appear and allow
any widening to be monitored. This system will not be of use in unpredictable scenarios,
such as earthquakes. The system will use numbered, glass strips positioned strategically
across key areas. These will be monitored on a weekly basis for any breakage. Should a
breakage occur, the gap will be measured and monitored for any widening that will
provide an early warning of a potential landslide. During the monsoon season there will
be extra vigilance during excessive rainfalls to identify any potential risk of rock stability
or landslide in the borrow areas.
8.5.7
Hindrance and Road Damage by Transport of Materials

over Land
The powerhouse components and other equipment to be installed will be transported to

the site. In addition, large quantities of concrete, sand, steel and rock and other building
materials will have to be transported during construction. These transports will cause
traffic congestions and hindrance on the narrow roads towards and in the project area.
Many of the local roads are not designed for carrying heavy traffic and this may result in
considerable damage to local roads.
Closure of road between dam and WAPDA right bank colony due to excavation and
construction of the powerhouse can seriously affect commuting traffic along the right
bank of the Ghazi Barotha lake, which is used by WAPDA staff, workers and their
families.
Mitigation
Guidelines to minimize and avoid hindrance and to improve safety on roads are given in
ECP 13 on Road Transport and Road Traffic Management. Damage to local roads would
be repaired by the contractor and where feasible bypasses will have to be used or
constructed. Also associated safety hazards have to be considered, especially in the busy
commercial centers of the cities of Topi and Ghazi. These impacts would be partly
mitigated by preparing and implementing an adequate traffic management plan. Regular
monitoring and updating of the traffic plan is required.
When the road between dam and right bank colony is closed, a safe and well protected
bypass would be provided and alternative transportation would be offered free of charge
along the other embankment (detour of approximately 12 km).
WAPDA
August 2011
8-17

8.5.8
Disturbance of Fauna and Quality of Habitat by Increased

Human Activities
Movement of people and equipment, building and construction activities is likely to

disturb faunal population, especially birds, reducing the quality of habitat for wildlife.
Migrating birds, especially waders will avoid the staging places, such as shallow mud
flats in the Ghazi-Barotha reservoir during construction periods. Other migrating birds
will react on sudden noise by flying up and away. However it is expected that they will
return to the shallow banks in the river after construction works are completed. No
permanent impact is expected provided their staging places are kept intact and no
dredging activities are carried out downstream of the dam. Fish and aquatic fauna such as
turtles will also be affected by noise during construction. Both are very sensitive for
vibrations and loud noise. All fish is expected to move away from the construction areas.
Mitigation
Dumping of construction material would be avoided in areas which have dense
vegetation. It is preferable to select suitable dumping areas in consideration of those
locations which are not preferred for faunal habitation. Species will shift temporarily
into the surrounding areas during project interventions and will progressively return
following construction. Guidelines to be followed by the Contactor are given in ECP 10,
Protection of flora, ECP 11, Protection of Fauna and ECP 12 Protection of fisheries. The
Contractor would provide adequate knowledge to the workers regarding protection of
flora and fauna and the ban on illegal poaching and undertaking any other hunting
activity. The contractor will be responsible to control hunting and poaching by the
workers.
8.5.9
Soil and Water Pollution by Solid and Hazardous Wastes

and Waste effluents from Labor Camps and Construction
Yards
With an expected influx of 2500 workers for implementation of the project there is a need
for a proper infrastructure for solid waste management and handling and treatment of
waste and sewage water. Without adequate provisions there will be a high risk of severe
soil and water pollution by organic, chemical and hazardous wastes and untreated sewage
water with serious health risks. Site offices, labor camps and barracks would be provided
with adequate infrastructure and services in order to prevent pollution by solid waste and
waste effluents. Management and disposal of all kind of wastes and waste water would
need to be well organized, also to prevent conflicts with resident population
accommodated in the nearby colonies. Also in the construction yards and workshops
management of wastes, especially from fuels and hazardous goods is crucial to minimize
impact on the environment.
Mitigation
The contractor(s) will be required to prepare Waste Management Plans, in accordance
with the ECP 1 Waste Management, ECP 2 Fuels and Hazardous Goods and ECP 15
Construction Camp Management before mobilization. There will be a Waste
Management Plan for solid and hazardous wastes and one for wastewater. The plans will
set out the designated waste disposal site(s) and associated management controls. The
Plans will be submitted to ESMU/WEC for their review and approval. Monitoring of the
plan implementation will also be carried out.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-18

8.5.10 Impacts of Emissions of Gasses and Dust on Air Quality

Earth moving activities, batching plant operations, vehicle and generator emissions will
negatively affect air quality and dust levels. These emissions and dust is a nuisance for
people and animals and can form a health hazard. The main effect on air quality during
construction is caused by increased dust and emission levels from construction
machinery, rock blasting, excavation, cement mixing, and road construction. The
construction activities will generate airborne dust as well as CO, NOx, SOx and PM10
however, these emissions will be mainly restricted to the project site.
Exhaust gasses and dust caused by moving vehicles, wind blown sand and dust from
construction activities can be blown in residential areas and grazing areas and will cause
a nuisance to the local population and animals. These negative impacts will mainly be
restricted to the Right Bank Colony which is in close proximity to some of the
construction sites and to areas adjacent to the road, excavated areas, dumping sites, labor
camps and machinery parks.
Mitigation
Guidelines how to prevent and mitigate air quality impacts are given in ECP 8, Air
Quality Management. Important is that the Contractor fits all vehicles and machinery
with proper exhaust systems and emission control devices. Machinery and vehicles
causing excess pollution would be banned from the project. Dust generation from
construction sites would be restricted as much as possible, and water sprinkling would be
carried out as appropriate. Air quality would be properly monitored, especially near the
population centers and WAPDA colonies.
8.5.11 Removal of Natural Vegetation

Trees and bushes will have to be removed from the construction area for the new power
plant, the associated facilities and along the right bank access road. Also the vegetation
of the proposed area of the extended switchyard, which is currently a wetland covered
with low bushes and grasses will have to be removed to create an artificial platform
within the Ghazi-Barotha lake. Some vegetation will have to be removed at sites used for
borrowing materials and for disposal. Uncontrolled movement of heavy machinery used
for setting up labor camps, stockyards, batching plant and other project facilities might
cause considerable damage to natural vegetation. The removal of herbaceous vegetation
and loosening of the top soil generally causes soil erosion. Such impacts will be primarily
confined to the project sites and during initial periods of construction and need to be
minimized by adopting appropriate mitigation measures.
Mitigation
In selecting the location for labor camps, workshops, stores and batching plant areas with
thick and dense vegetation will be avoided as far as possible. A tree plantation plan
would be prepared for compensation of lost trees and beautification of the landscape
around the Dam. Trees would be planted at the end of the construction period. It is
recommended to establish a nursery with selected tree species (a.o. medicinal trees) in the
beginning of the project in order to produce sufficient quantity of 4-5 year old trees with
a girth of 10 cm or more for replanting.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-19

8.6
Impacts during Operation and Maintenance
8.6.1 Potential Impacts on Irrigation Water Releases

The operation of the powerhouse on tunnel 4 will not adversely affect the irrigation
releases from the Tarbela reservoir, since the reservoir will continue to be operated under
its standard operating procedures through which irrigation water demands are met,
depending upon the water availability in the reservoir, by operating a mix of tunnels 1-5
and the two spillways.
8.6.2 Risks of Landslides during Extreme Weather Conditions

Landslides might occur during operation of the project, although these will not be a direct
impact of the project, but caused by extreme weather conditions or exceptional events
such as earthquakes. The location of the power house in a complex geological setting and
below a steep hill consisting of rocks of variable composition requires frequent
monitoring of slope stability, especially during and after extreme or abnormal weather
conditions, such as heavy monsoon rains, droughts, and frost. Also the quality and
adequacy of the measures to stabilize and protect the slope against gravitational gliding,
subsurface flows and erosion would be inspected at regular intervals.
8.6.3 Operational Noise from New Power Station

The new power station will produce noise during operation. However it is expected that
this will be within acceptable limits (far below NEQS and WB standards), since adequate
noise reduction measures have been applied such as: enclosing the powerhouse within a
solid structure; acoustic screening of noisy equipment; and a maintenance program for all
equipment and machinery. Mitigation measures for operational noise impacts on workers
will include standard occupational health and safety practices such as hearing protection.
8.6.4 Bird Collision with Transmission Cables

It is expected that the connection between the new powerhouse and the extended
switchyard will be by 500 kV transmission lines supported by transmission towers
erected within the tailrace of the tunnel outlets. The transmission cables will be hanging
almost perpendicular to the flight direction of migrating bird, but only on the right side of
the valley. Huge flocks of migrating birds follow the Indus valley fly-way twice a year in
autumn and in spring passing the Tarbela Dam. Especially for birds with a large
wingspan such as storks, cranes, herons and birds of prey there is a risk of bird collision
with cables. Although it is expected that most flocks of bird follow the axis of the valley
or pass along the left bank where no obstacles are found (except the high dam), the
situation would be frequently monitored during migration. Mitigation to prevent or
reduce the number of bird fatalities is possible by attaching markers to the cables on
places where many birds are passing through the Indus valley. The proper type of
markers would be determined in consultation with nature conservation organizations like
IUCN or BirdLife International.
8.6.5 Increased Maintenance Activities

Regular maintenance activities will be carried out. It is recommended to restrict these
activities as much as possible to day time.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-20

8.6.6
Reduced Power Generation during Closure of Low Level

Intake Tunnel 3 and 4
The low level intakes of Tunnel 3 and 4 would be retained and operated till it becomes
too risky to operate them any longer. Continued sedimentation might cause blockage of
the tunnel gate. At this point of time in future the lower intake will be taken out of use.
The tunnel part from the low level intake will have to be plugged and for this operation
the tunnel has to be closed. When this operation is scheduled in winter there will be no
impact on irrigation releases, but possibly there will be some impact on total power
generation of the plant.
WAPDA
August 2011
8-21

9 Potential Social Impacts and their Mitigations

9.1
General
With the existing design and the layout of the operations, based on consultations with various
stakeholders, the project is not expected to have direct social safeguard impacts, such as land
acquisition, involuntary resettlement and impacts upon indigenous people. The project will use the
existing reservoir and tunnel. All construction operations will take place within existing fenced
off WAPDA areas. There will be no additional inundation or land acquisition necessary. The
likely social impacts under the project, both positive and negative will all be related to
construction operations. Potential impacts or opportunities for enhancement of consequences of
the project can be found in the following areas:
Employment during construction;
Possible disturbances and inconveniences to local population;
Considerations regarding health, safety and wellbeing of construction workers;
Increased exposure to risks, such as health, safety and security;
Potential opportunities to assist local communities.
Direct adverse social impacts are expected to be marginal given the nature and the design of the
project. Associated social enhancement measures however could increase or distribute the
benefits of the project. These measures are identified in the following sections.
9.2 Summary of Assessed Impacts

1.
The projects potential social impacts and their significance have been assessed using the
methodology described in Section 8.2. A summary of these impacts and their significance is
presented in Table 9.1.
WAPDA
August 2011
9-1

Table 9.1:
Significance of Social Impacts
Impacts
Phase
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Residual
Significance
Enhancement
Social Legacy
Pre-
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Medium
Moderate
Moderate beneficial
construction
Employment generation
Construction
Outstanding cases will be resolved; funds allocated in

the Project cost.
Local priority preference
Workers code of conduct
Negligible
Major
beneficial
Occupational H+S organized and managed to

international standards to address inherent Project risks
and unanticipated emergencies
Monitoring of labor rights, workforce management, and
working and living conditions
Labor grievance mechanism in place
Operation
Safety hazards for public
Construction
Low
Medium
Moderate
Moderate
Low beneficial
Moderate adverse
Adherence to WAPDAs environmental management

and human resource policies and procedures
Good siting of temporary accommodation
Moderate
beneficial
Slight adverse
Traffic management plan addressing general access

and womens mobility
Blasting procedures in place
Safety and security actions and procedures to protect
local community
Procurement strategy in Workers Accommodation Plan
for preventing pressures on local markets for goods and
services required for keeping construction labour force
healthy and well
CLO active and project performance grievance
mechanism in place
Implementation of social assistance program
Resettlement
Construction
No impacts
predicted
Health, Safety and Well-being

of Workers
WAPDA
August 2011
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
Principles and procedures for resettlement planning

identified in SIMF.
Project commitment to workers rights
Negligible
Workers Code of Conduct
9-2

Impacts
Phase
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
to Mitigation and
Residual
Significance
Enhancement
Health and Safety Plan and procedures
and Operation
Workers Accommodation Plan

Training Program
Community health, safety,
security and well-being
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
and Operation
Traffic Management Plan (including provisions for

female mobility)
Low adverse
Equipment and personnel safeguarding activities

(fencing, visitor procedures and registration, signage)
Security staff training
Safeguards and awareness raising against
communicable diseases.
Respect of local cultural norms

and values by work force
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
Awareness raising program for workers
Increased load on local services

and supplies
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
Contractor to procure camp supplies in a manner not

affecting availability of essential commodities.
WAPDA
August 2011
Low adverse
Negligible
9-3

9.3
Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage
9.3.1 Land Impacts

WAPDA owns the land where the Tunnel 4 activities will take place and the
infrastructure built. The land is currently uninhabited and has low productivity value.
The land required for expanding the switchyard and upgrading the access roads is also
unused. No known archaeological or cultural heritage remains exist on the parcels of land
intended for use. No land acquisition and resettlement impacts for the main construction
site are anticipated. Site reviews and discussion within WAPDA also indicate that
WAPDA has plenty of lands of its own available in the immediate and surrounding areas.
These are sufficient to meet the needs of any additional land requirements.
Mitigation/compensation
The project is not expecting to have any land impacts such as land acquisition or lease.
However, given the possibility that the contractors may propose changes in its
construction operation plan, there is a remote possibility that additional lands may be
required outside the control area. In this unlikely event these lands will be purchased or
leased on a normal commercial basis. The SIMF provides a guideline for such planning
efforts.
9.4
Impacts and Opportunities during Construction Stage
9.4.1 Employment Opportunities during Construction

The total work force employed during five years of construction has been estimated at
2500 people. This includes unskilled and skilled labor, technicians and employees. For
operation of the new power plant and associated facilities about 300 permanent
employees will have to be recruited. Employing construction workers and other staff
from the region will offer an opportunity to create local employment, increase the local
skill base and provide a boost to the local economy. Local communities in the region
have requested to provide employment preferences to those already living near the
project. They have high expectations of the employment opportunities generated by the
project. Moreover they expect an important in-migration of people from the region, the
creation of new business opportunities and other economic benefits. In an area with a
relatively high percentage of unemployment the project will certainly attract a number of
job seekers and followers. However, the number of new business opportunities will be
limited since the project area is a restricted area, which is only accessible for employees
of WAPDA and related services and their families.
In order not to advocate too high expectations which could lead to social unrest, it is
important that the project provides adequate and realistic information on the opportunities
the project would offer. This could be done through regular updates in the local
newspapers and other media. For a number of jobs qualified people from other regions of
Pakistan will have to be attracted. Local affected people including women should be
encouraged to take up construction employment. Women can be organized in female
working groups to undertake discrete construction tasks, tree planting, health services and
other supporting services.
WAPDA
August 2011
9-4

Mitigation
The contractors will be responsible for the hiring for the construction needs. WAPDA
has developed a set of principles and requirements for the contractors to follow during
construction. The contractors, as part of the construction operation plan, will develop an
implementation plan for hiring for construction employment, following the abovementioned principles. The plan will detail the steps of laying down employment criteria,
how employment information will be disclosed locally including job descriptions, terms
of employment conditions and benefits, how preference will be given to local population,
pre-job training arrangements, who would be responsible for implementing and
monitoring this plan, consultations with local government and WAPDA over the
implementation of this plan. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA, as part of the
construction operation plan, for review and endorsement.
9.4.2 Construction Workers Rights

The project will provide an opportunity to ensure policy and procedural consistency in
the implementation of the project with international labor standards related to workers
rights and obligations.
Mitigation and enhancement measures
The contractor(s) would observe and apply the following standards and requirements:
Observing statutory requirements relating to minimum age for employment of

children and meeting international standards of not employing any persons under the
age of 16 for general work and no persons under the age of 18 for work involving
hazardous activity; The construction contractor/s would not hire people under the
age of 18 on permanent contracts but would include short training activities for youth
to the extent possible;
Ensuring acceptable conditions of work including by observing national statutory

requirements related to minimum wages and hours of work;
Ensuring no workers are charged fees to gain employment on the Project;
Ensuring rigorous standards for occupational health and safety are in place (see
below);
Having the Contractor establish a labor grievance mechanism and documenting its
use for complaints about unfair treatment or unsafe living or working conditions
without reprisal.
In addition to the above commitments, the Contractors are required to:

Adopt a Human Resource Policy appropriate to the size and workforce which
indicates the approach for management employees (this could be part requested in
the tender process);
Produce job descriptions and provide written contracts and other information that
outline the working conditions and terms of employment, including the full range of
benefits;
Provide health insurance for employees for the duration of their contracts;
Provide insurance for accidents resulting in disabilities or death of employees for the
duration of their contracts
WAPDA
August 2011
9-5

Develop a recruitment process community employees that involves local authorities

in clearly understood procedures;
Employ a community liaison officer (this could be full time or part of another posts
responsibilities);
Raise awareness prior to recruitment, clarifying the local hire policy and procedures,
including identification of opportunities for women to participate in employment and
training;
Report regularly on the labor force profile, including gender, and location source of
workers (for instance from Swabi and Haripur Districts, from KP, from outside the
Province);
Report regularly on labor and working condition key performance indicators, for
instance hours worked (regular and overtime) during period and cumulatively, hours
lost, number and type of accidents, near misses, site audits and meetings; trainings,
and use of labor grievance mechanism;
Hold toolbox talks on workers rights and the labor grievance mechanisms during the
construction phase;
Organize a training program and keep training registers for construction workers;
Establish Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) procedures in the overall

environmental management system which provide workers with a safe and healthy
work environment taking into account the inherent risks for this type of project.
Details are given in ECP 17, Worker Health and Safety.
9.4.3
Prevention of Social Conflicts and Environmental

Degradation: Development of Workers Code of Conduct
The influx of a large construction force may easily lead to social conflicts with the local
population. Workers also might misbehave or get involved in illegal practices, e.g.
poaching or hunting. In order to contribute to a harmonious relationship with local
communities, to reduce behaviors that could lead to social conflict, and to prevent further
environmental degradation a Code of Conduct will be developed for the labor force.
Mitigation
The Code of Conduct recognizes the provision of resources by the employer and shares
responsibilities among the workers for the use of equipment, procedures and training.
Typical issues to be included in a Code of Conduct are the following:
No hunting, poaching or illicit use of local natural resources;
Careful use of local natural resources and project resources, especially water,
transmission line materials, fuel, fuel-wood and electricity;
Restrictions related to consumption of alcohol and drugs;
Safe driving practices;
Respect for the local community and its cultural norms in which laborers are
working.
WAPDA
August 2011
9-6

9.4.4 Increased Health and Safety Risks

The T4HP project is a complicated technical project with a number of risks and hazards.
The construction activities will involve operations of heavy construction machinery,
vehicular traffic, excavation works and backfilling operations. These activities may pose
health and safety hazards to the workers at site during the use of explosives, use of
hazardous substances, lifting and handling of heavy equipment, operating machinery and
electrical equipment, working near water or at height and more. Health and safety aspects
will therefore need to be considered in all project activities in order to reduce the risk of
accidents and illness.
Mitigation
Mitigation measures will include the following:
Provisions to be included in contracts:
Each contractor will establish a comprehensive Health and Safety Plan aimed at
preventing accidents, injuries and work-related diseases. This plan will be submitted
to WAPDA and World Bank for review and approval;
Each contractor will prepare an Emergency Response Plan defining procedures to be

followed during any emergency. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA and World
Bank for review and approval;
All workers must be provided with and use appropriate personal protective
equipment (PPE). First aid must be provided and there would be procedures in place
to access appropriate emergency facilities;
Contractors will be responsible for developing procedures to address the OHS

hazards. Signage related to hazards and risks must be in place at the work sites.
Management procedures to address temperature stress, for instance in relation to
extreme heat will be required;
Health screening of employees would be a Contractor obligation prior to laborers

working on site and living in the temporary accommodation facilities. The health
screening would entail normal review of physical fitness and also include a review of
appropriate vaccinations. Workers would be given vaccinations where required;
Hazards require staff training. All employees need to carry out induction health and
safety training prior to commencement of work. OHS issues would be part of the
employee training plan. Training would include the provision of appropriate written
or visual materials to reinforce learning. Where illiteracy levels are high, OHS
issues need to be covered more frequently than normal in toolbox talks;
An emergency response team and plan must be identified. Training and drills based
on the accident and emergency preparedness and response plan must be carried out
quarterly with workers and local health authorities. Training requirements, including
for emergency preparedness, will need to be updated annually;
Public awareness training and workshops on safety and health risks will be
conducted for local communities prior and during construction operations.
It is essential that all personnel likely to be involved in the Project at the construction site
undergo a basic training program prior to performing assigned work.
WAPDA
August 2011
9-7

Safety Plan
Contractors will prepare safety plan as part of their operational plan. The safety plan will
include at least the following:
Basic OHS awareness training;
Detailed briefing on the main hazards identified above;
Standard operation procedures for handling accidents related to electrocution,

movement of plant equipment; falls from height, falling objects, working in confined
spaces, and dealing with hazardous materials;
Importance of PPE, environmental monitoring requirements, good housekeeping,

and directives for notification of proper authorities in the event of accidents (either
human or release of pollutants);
Familiarization with the fire protection system and emergency response plan (basic
fire fighting training);
Basic first aid, health and safety rules; and,
A regular emergency response drill for the identified hazards.

A Traffic Management Plan will need to be produced. This plan will be submitted to
WAPDA and World Bank for review. Driving behavior, such as adhering to driving and
speeding laws and use of mobile phones, will be addressed in toolbox talks.
9.4.5
Construction Disturbances and Possible Conflicts with

Local Population
The Project construction activities to be carried out near the local communities may cause
disturbance and possible conflicts between the work force and the local population.
Due to increased use of trucks and other vehicles on the narrow roads in the project
area on the access roads to the urban areas elderly people, women and children will
be more exposed to dangerous situations, which may lead to traffic accidents and
unrest;
There might be noise and dust pollution due to blasting, use of heavy machinery and
intensive traffic;
The influx and accommodation of a relatively large work force will result in
increased concerns for the safety of women and children. The mobility of women
might be reduced;
Workers coming from different parts of Pakistan may have different norms and
values in social behavior as compared with the resident population. In addition,
migrant labor force could disturb the privacy of the local population.
Miscommunications between these two groups could easily lead to social unrest.
There could be shortage of supplies in local markets and shops due to the temporary
presence of a large workforce. This could be a hindrance for the local population,
especially for elderly people.
People particularly women and children in the Right Bank Colony will be most affected
and it is a tiny community. They will have limited access to alternative routes unless
WAPDA
August 2011
9-8

provided by the Project. Hence, the impact of the Project on womens mobility is
considered to be an adverse impact.
Mitigation
The Contractor will be required to develop a Traffic Management Plan. It will need to be
developed in consultation with local leaders/elders of the community and include
reference to mobility and access through the construction area in such a way that all
females feel comfortable. Special consideration would be taken to avoid routes used by
women and, if unavoidable, alternate routes would be identified for women.
Blasting is another disturbance which may require attention. Effects may be seasonal and
weather dependent. Nonetheless, the Contractor will need to have a monitoring system in
place and as necessary procedures may be required to limit the time frame and frequency
of blasting to minimize negative effects on community members and their livestock.
Shortage of supplies could be mitigated by requesting Contractor to procure their
supplies in a manner not significantly affecting the availability of essential commodities
in the area for residents.
A Project grievance mechanism will be established. The Contractor will be required to
appoint someone to have community liaison officer (CLO) responsibilities to be a point
of contact for stakeholders. The CLO will be responsible for logging complaints and
comments and ensuring their timely investigation and response.
9.5
Social Assistance Program
The social assistance program includes enhancement activities to address community

development needs and to a limited extent project legacy from previous projects. The
main legacy issues focus on outstanding resettlement claims and although referenced
below, they are addressed separately in a study of the situation and action plan that
remain under consideration.
9.5.1 Community Development Assistance

As a good practice in large infrastructure projects and a continuation of traditional
practice in WAPDA operations, WAPDA has developed an out-reach program to provide
social assistance to the communities in the immediate vicinity of the project construction
areas. These communities have been identified and extensive consultations were carried
out with the community members during the social assessment to understand their views
and recommendations for the project. The consultations also covered peoples
expectations, their community priorities as well as potential schemes that the project may
support.
After screening, the project plans to support the following community schemes from a
long list of requests:
Updating the registration process so that villagers in Khabbal, Ghari Mera and Kukar
Chawa have security passes to facilitate easier access to their homes;
Constructing three basic health units to improve the access of local people to
dispensaries in the villages of Darra Mohat, Ghari Mera and Pontian;
Assigning WAPDA male and female medical officers already working in the
WAPDA hospital to visit bi- weekly the nearby hamlets of Ghazi and Pehur where
dispensaries already exist;
WAPDA
August 2011
9-9

Providing essential medicines to the existing and proposed dispensaries;
Supporting existing schools with furniture, one boys high school at Pehur Hamlet
and other at Girls school at Pehur Hamlet;
Constructing a primary school at Pehur hamlet (it currently is working at the

residence of Government employees);
Providing water treatment or hygienic water drinking schemes in Darra Mohat,

Kukar Chawa, Ghazi Hamlet, and Topi area to minimize water born diseases in the
project area;
Providing sewage schemes for the villages Ghazi Hamlet, Topi area and Pehur
Hamlet;
Rehabilitation of a drainage system in the existing Drain near Topi and Pehur
Hamlet;
Addressing womens concerns including: (i) supply of equipment and teaching staff
in industrial school (already exists at Right Bank Colony); (ii) recruitment of a
gynecologist at Pehur and Ghazi Hamlets; (iii) upgrading of middle school to
secondary level at Pehur Hamlet; (iv) provision of computer equipment for computer
classes; (v) welfare bazaar in schools; (vi) sewing machines; (vii) cooking classes
and English language classes in the evening.
WAPDA is exploring options of its delivering mechanisms, including contracting local

NGOs. These will be further discussed and finalized in consultation with local
communities. The cost of the assistance program is estimated with input from design
engineers and market rates. The total cost is estimated at PKR 104 million (equivalent to
US$ 1.22 million). The cost is still indicative and will be revised with detailed design
information in consultation with local communities. The cost contingency is included in
the overall project budget.
9.5.2 Addressing the Social Legacy of Previous Projects

There is a certain social legacy of two earlier projects: (i) the Tarbela Dam Project (TDP,
implemented 1968-76) and (ii) the Ghazi Barotha Hydro Power project (GBHPP,
implemented in 1995-2005). These projects included a huge resettlement operation
affecting 96,000 people and land acquisition and compensation for the loss of about
27,000 ha of mainly agricultural land. From both projects a number of claims are not yet
solved thus far. From TDP there are still 40 outstanding claims for compensation or
possession of land outstanding in different courts. For GBHPP there are 404 pending
court cases regarding compensation or land possession. Some of these cases are very
complex.
The settlement of outstanding claims has been included as an activity to be implemented
under the T4HP project. An assessment was conducted of the pending claims by the
Design Consultants. It turned out that in a majority of cases the affected people are
willing to resolve these cases out of court. To resolve the outstanding issues an approach
has been worked out to address these claims in a speedier and better manner. A Claim
Negotiation and Settlement Committee will be established with a mandate for eight
months to design and implement an out of court resolution mechanism to negotiate and
resolve the outstanding claims. The total costs of this operation amount to US$ 12.5
million.
WAPDA
August 2011
9-10

10
Cumulative and Induced Impacts
10.1 Cumulative Impact of Investments in the Indus Basin

Water System
In the second half of the twentieth century, Pakistan successfully overcame major water
resources challenges and made great achievements tackling the issues resulting from
the 1947 partition of the sub-continent and division of the Indus waters, as well as from
extensive water logging and salinity. Today Pakistan has the largest contiguous irrigation
system in the world. However, Pakistan once again faces numerous water-related
challenges. These challenges are increasing water stress, with limited additional water
resources that can be mobilized, coupled with the looming threat of climate change.
To meet increasing food production demands, Pakistan has been expanding the surface
water supplies to the Indus Basin Irrigation system over time by capturing more water
from the rivers. Post Tarbela canal diversions reached as high as 129,516 Mm3 (105
MAF). However they have declined now due to reduced storage because of
sedimentation and several other factors such state of the infrastructure and a sequence of
dry years. The 2001-2010 average canal diversions have now been reduced to
116,564 Mm3 (94.5MAF), and the reduction is primarily in the rabi (winter: OctoberMarch) season by about 10,608 Mm3 (8.6 MAF). This is because the diversions are close
to full potential supplies of the rivers and declining water storage capacity in the
reservoirs due to siltation directly affected the flows during Rabi for irrigation. Further
increase is only possible with heavy investment in storage dams on the Indus River, many
of which are very controversial. Also, some believe that, apart from a few years of
extraordinary floods, the rivers do not have surplus water to store after meeting the
ecological requirements of the delta region and coastal zone.
The other source of water Pakistan has tapped is groundwater, which is recharged by the
surface water system. Since the 1980s, the groundwater aquifers have supplied
increasing amount of water for irrigation in areas underlain by the fresh groundwater. In
Punjab, about equal amount of irrigation water comes from the groundwater wells. This
resource is now reaching its limit and further withdrawals are not possible without
serious mining and extraordinary cost of pumping.
10.2 Plans for Storage Reservoirs

Pakistan has raised the level of the Mangla Dam on the Jhelum River. This provides
about 3,269 Mm3 (2.65 MAF) of additional storage, however, this is much less than the
storage lost in sedimentation of the two reservoirs: Mangla and Tarbela. Also the
hydrology of Jhelum River would allow filling of this storage about four out of five
years. Pakistan has been trying to build new storage for years. However, as elsewhere,
building large dams is a very contentious issue in Pakistan. After a heated technical and
political debate over several years, the Government announced in January 2006 that five
dams4 would be constructed by 2015, with first priority given to the Diamer-Basha Dam.
Diamer-Basha, Kalabagh, Akhori dams on the Indus, Munda dam on the Swat river- a tributary of the
Kabul river, and Kurram Tangi dam, on the Kurram river. Pakistan has been trying to build a dam on
the Indus River at Kalabagh (downstream from Tarbela) for quite some time: studies have been
conducted since 1953 and in 1986 the designs were completed.
WAPDA
August 2011
10-1

The construction of Kalabagh Dam, located downstream of Tarbela could not proceed
due to interprovincial water allocation issues, construction could not proceed. At this
stage, Pakistan is focusing on the dams upstream of Tarbela, such as Diamer-Basha. It is
also working on some run of the river hydropower plants upstream of Tarbela such as
Dasu Hydropower Project. The dams upstream would have positive impact on Tarbela as
the upstream dams would trap the sediments thus extending the life of Tarbela Reservoir.
The estimates are that Basha would hold 35 years of sediment in its dead and live storage
before it starts to pass down towards Tarbela. Thus it would extend the life of Tarbela
Project by 35 years, as well as of the Ghazi-Brotha Power plant which relies on water
supplies from Tarbela Dam. Given the construction period for the Diamer-Basha Dam,
and that it has not started yet, the dam with a live storage capacity of 7,894 Mm3 (6.4
MAF) would barely make up for lost reservoir capacity. Thus the increasing average
annual canal water diversions back to 129,516 Mm3 (105 MAF) in the future is unlikely.
10.3 Impact Downstream and on Delta and Coastal Zone

From 1900 onwards, as the development of the Indus Basin Water System (IBWS)
proceeded and extraction from the river started increasing, the delta and coastal zone
have been receiving lower volumes of water, thus changing the characteristics and
ecology of the area. There was a pronounced impact also after the Indus Treaty of 1960
when flood flows of three rivers-- the Ravi, Sutlej and Beas-- that ultimately discharged
in Indus River were lost; these rivers were given for full use of India and there were dams
and link canals built upstream in India to fully utilize this water including the flood flows
(the Treaty had no provision of environmental flows from these rivers).
The Indus River in Sindh, and close to the delta and sea, flows on a ridge, as is the case
of many mature rivers in the world, because of a rise in sediment transport. In the case
of the Indus River, embankments to contain the river were constructed in 1901. These
embankments are placed about 16 km (10 miles) apart, starting from the Gudu Barrage to
the sea. The Indus River meanders in a belt contained by these embankments. The
original delta of the river is on its left side, around which irrigated agriculture is carried
out by diverting water from the last barrage on the Indus River namely the Kotri Barrage.
Thus the Indus Delta has seen a continuous change in its hydrology and ecology over the
past one hundred years or so, but the impacts have become more pronounced as the canal
diversions upstream increased. The interprovincial Water Accord of 1991 has a
provision for ecological flows to be released downstream from Kotri Barrage, but it is not
strictly followed. Water is generally released in years of floods and extraordinary
quantities go down to the sea, whereas in other years flows are close to zero. Average
outflow to the sea from Kotri Barrage has been about 46,626 Mm3 (37.8 MAF) mostly in
summer, while minimum is zero and maximum is 113,480 Mm3 (92 MAF). The erratic
flow instead of regular flow each year is less beneficial for the river and delta below
Kotri Barrage.
10.4 Preparation of a Master Plan for the Left Bank of

Indus, Delta and Coastal Zone
Under the Sindh Water Sector Improvement Project (WSIP), the World Bank is assisting
the Government of Sindh (GoSindh) to prepare a regional master plan for addressing the
flooding issues and providing proper drainage to the area on the left bank of the Indus
River - including the rivers delta and coastal zone - through appropriate structural and
non-structural measures, measures for retention and/or safe disposal of drainage; storm
WAPDA
August 2011
10-2

and flood water; improvement of wetlands in the delta area and in the coastal zone;
recognizing their environmental importance and considerable economic potential for
local communities. These four phased studies are to be carried out in consultation with
the stakeholders starting from the beginning to the end of the process covering the
identification of the issues, and an analysis and design of solutions.
10.5 Sediment Management Plan for the Basin and Tarbela

Under the Water Capacity Building Project (WCAP) the World Bank is also assisting the
Government of Pakistan and WAPDA to understand the sediment management issues for
the basin and at Tarbela Dam. This would also help to develop plans for eventual
movement of sediment downstream once the reservoir is filled. The downstream area is
already seeing the impact of increased sediment flow as the trap efficient of the Tarbela
reservoir is reducing.
10.6 Improving Irrigation Efficiencies

With increasing population and development, water demand is expected to continue to
increase in the Indus Basin, which is the main food machine for Pakistan. As shown
above, Pakistan has been increasing surface water diversion and also tapping
groundwater both of which are reaching their limits. In the future, substantial quantities
of water would only come from cutting down losses in the irrigation system, which offer
a great potential source of water. The irrigation efficiency of surface system is about 3540 percent. A substantial part if the losses are in the watercourse command (over 40
percent) and with flood irrigation in the field. To address these issues, the Bank is
assisting the government to start an irrigated agriculture productivity improvement
program under which watercourse would be improved to reduce the delivery losses, and
high efficiency irrigation system (HEIS) would be introduced such as drip irrigation. The
drip systems have about 90 percent efficiency in delivering water and also the other
nutrients which are washed away or leached down under flood irrigation. The program
would start in Punjab and then be expanded to other provinces. This would start a new
era of water conservation and productivity that would hopefully reduce pressure on
scarce water resources by using the existing resources more efficiently. The estimates of
the water quantity that could become available with 10 percent point increase in water
efficiency in watercourse and commands is more than two dams on the Indus River.
10.7 Role of Project in Cumulative Impacts

No major projects are likely to be undertaken at or around the TDP site concurrent to the
T4HP. Therefore, no construction related cumulative impacts are likely to take place in
the area. WAPDA is planning to undertake other hydroelectric projects on Indus River
upstream of Tarbela, including Dasu and Basha dams. The construction of these projects,
if carried out concurrent to the T4HP, could potentially have the following adverse
cumulative impacts: i) cumulative vehicular traffic on the approach roads; ii) cumulative
demand on construction materials and borrow areas; iii) cumulative demand on
construction labor; and iv) cumulative safety hazards and restricted movement for the
local population. However, none of these impacts are likely to take place since the sites
and approach routes of these future projects are well away from Tarbela, and the country
has enough resources/infrastructure catering to the construction material needs of these
projects.
WAPDA
August 2011
10-3

The project would have no impact on the water releases from Tarbela Dam. As indicated
earlier, the Dam would be operated in irrigation priority under overall instructions of
Indus River System Authority (IRSA). The water which is currently spilled through the
spillway (loses its energy in the structures downstream)5 would be diverted to the Tunnel
4 where it would pass through the three 470 MW turbines and generate electricity which
would be transmitted to the unified common grid. The energy of this water, which is
otherwise wasted in the spillway structure, would now be used for generating clean
electricity (about 4,000 GWhs) without any greenhouse emissions for pollution. So the
project helps make better use of the waters of the Indus Rivers. Any thermal plant, coal,
oil or gas if installed instead of this plant would generate substantial greenhouse gases
and pollution. If upstream dams materialize, the life of the Tarbela would be extended
even more. Downstream, the future is making water use more efficient and timely
delivery of water to maximize crop production. The Tarbela would continue to perform
that role in future by storing water and releasing when it is needed.
10.8 Possible Induced Impact

Analysis of the induced impacts resulting from the project clearly shows minimal impacts
due mainly to the nature and scope of works. Even during the construction stage, flow
regime through Tarbela remains unaffected therefore there will be no change in the river
hydrology and morphology. Some localized impacts, which will be more of social
disturbance nature, arising out of congested roads, localized social unrest or increased
conflicts due to the migrated labor force, spread of congenial diseases including HIV and
AIDS have already been addressed in the Chapter 9 and appropriate mitigation measures
recommended.
Water released from spillway or though power house has same amount of energy. In case of
spillways the structures are designed downstream to dissipate the energy of the water so that it does
not scour the river bed and damage the river and the dam infrastructures. In case of powerhouse
installed on a tunnels the energy is converted to electricity for much better use instead of just
dissipating it unproductively.
WAPDA
August 2011
10-4

11
Environmental and Social Management

Plan
11.1 Introduction
This chapter sets out the Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for the
Project. The ESMP has been prepared to ensure the implementation and monitoring of
the proposed mitigation measures set out in Chapters 8 and 9.
A separate document, the SIMF, has been produced to perform the same function
specifically for the social issues set out in Chapter 9.
11.2 Objectives of ESMP

The basic objective of the ESMP is to manage adverse impacts of project interventions in
a way, which minimizes the adverse impact on the environment and people of the Project
area. The specific objectives of the ESMP are to:
Facilitate the implementation of the mitigation measures identified during the present
ESA and discussed in Chapters 8 and 9.
Maximize potential project benefits and control negative impacts;
Draw responsibilities for project proponent, contractors, consultants, and other

members of the Project team for the environmental and social management of the
Project;
Define a monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters in order to:

o
Ensure the complete implementation of all mitigation measures, and
Ensure the effectiveness of the mitigation measures.
Maintain essential ecological process, preserving biodiversity and where possible

restoring degraded natural resources; and
Assess environmental training requirements for different stakeholders at various

levels.
The ESMP will be managed through a number of tasks and activities and site specific
management plans. One purpose of the ESMP is to record the procedure and
methodology for management of mitigation identified for each negative impacts of the
Project. The management will clearly delineate the responsibility of various participants
and stakeholders involved in planning, implementation and operation of the Project.
11.3 Institutional Arrangements

The following sections outline the institutional arrangements recommended for
implementation of the ESMP.
11.3.1
Inclusion of ESMP in Contract Documents
In order to make contractors fully aware and responsible of the implications of the ESMP
and to ensure its compliance, it will be ensured that environmental measures are treated
appropriately and separately in the tender documentation and that payment milestones are
linked to environmental performance, measured by execution of the prescribed
WAPDA
August 2011
11-1

environmental mitigation measures. Such a procedure would help ensure adequate

assessments of project impacts are carried out during Project construction and operation
phases, where a consistent approach will be expected on behalf of contractors that
warrant data and information collected from monitoring programs are compared to
baseline conditions.
The contractor would be made accountable through contract documents and/or other
agreements of the obligations and importance of the environmental and social
components of the Project. They would be prepared to co-operate with the executing
agency, project management unit, supervising consultants and local population for the
mitigation of adverse impacts. After the ESMPs addition in the contract documents, the
contractor will become bound to implement the ESMP and to hire trained environmental
management staff for implementation and effectiveness of the mitigation measures.
The contractor is to bid for executing the ESMP, including the recommended mitigation
measures and monitoring programs, as part of their Bill of Quantities.
The contractor(s) would be required to prepare the following plans before mobilization
on the basis of the ECPs (Annex C) and IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines (Annex D), and
obtain approval from the Supervision Consultants/ESMU/WEC:
Traffic management plan
Pollution prevention plan
Waste disposal plan
Camp management plan (including drinking water management)
Borrow area and disposal area restoration plan
An emergency response plan,
An occupational health, public health and safety plan.
11.3.2 Implementation Responsibility

It is responsibility of the proponent (WAPDA) to ensure implementation of the ESMP
through consultants and contractor(s). The staff of the proponent, consultants and
contractors who are responsible for ensuring the implementation of the ESMP would
have the capability to handle the complexities and spirit of management strategies.
Training and workshops would be arranged involving proponent, consultants and
contractors to share the issues of environmental and social protection.
11.3.3 Construction: Establishment of Environmental and Social

Management Unit
An Environmental and Social Management Unit (ESMU) will be established, responsible
for implementation of the ESMP and the SIMF. The ESMU will be specially designated
for the Project and will include representative of all actors responsible for ESMP
implementation. Regular environmental, health and safety obligations in the construction
area will also be part of the responsibility of the ESMU.
The following is the list of responsibilities to be performed by the ESMU:
Ensuring effective implementation of the ESMP and SIMF.
Overall supervision, facilitation and coordination with all the stakeholders;
WAPDA
August 2011
11-2

Develop procedures of damages assessment and mode of compensation during

project execution;
Ensure that all contractors follow the PEPA regulations and other requirements
mentioned in the construction contracts concerning dust suppression, solid waste
disposal, municipal wastewater disposal, air pollution, noise and vibration,
biodiversity, transport, storage and use of flammable and explosive materials;
Identify any issues of non-compliance and report these;
Suggest mechanisms to link contractor performance in relation to the ESMP to the

timing of financial payments, incentives or penalties;
Interaction with the stakeholders for their concerns about the construction activities;
and
Implementation of contingency plans.
The ESMU will ultimately be responsible to the WAPDA Environment Cell (WEC),
taking a leadership role in the ESMU, with a senior WEC representative taking
responsibility for the ESMU overall. It is important to have representation from
stakeholders involved in delivering the Project, including those with contractual
responsibilities.
The proposed composition of the ESMU is as follows:
Senior Engineer level WAPDA officer having environmental science background;
Health, Safety, and Environment (HSE) Specialist (to be appointed by WAPDA);
Social Scientist (SS) (to be appointed by WAPDA);
Environment and Social Monitor (ESM) - Representative of Consultant (Design or

Supervision); and
Environment and Social Supervisor (ESS) - Representative of Contractor.
11.3.4 Operation: The WAPDA Environment Cell

The ESMU will play an important role during the construction phase, bringing together
representatives from the organizations that are active on-site. During the operation
period, WEC will be solely responsible for the environmental performance of the
operational hydropower station.
WEC was created in 1989 to take stock of Environmental Aspects of WAPDAs Water
Sector Development Projects. Two pronged objectives were focused at that time.
Strengthening, upgrading and enhancing of technical capability of environmental

capability in WEC; and
Recommendation of an institutional framework and linkages that would enable

effective application of this capability within WAPDA and within the national
framework of environmental institutions.
Since its creation, WEC has carried out scores of IEE, EIA, Environmental Management
Plan (EMP) and assessment of social and environment management of WAPDA Projects.
In addition, WEC was responsible for decade long monitoring of environmental and
social issues of GBHPP, including environmental water flow assessment and evaluation
of various reports.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-3

The charter of WEC was chalked in its infancy to go ahead with the environmental
studies of various project vis--vis:
to carry out various EIA and IEE of Hydropower Projects;
to take stock of implementation of EMP according to EIA;
to help project authorities to monitor the environmental parameters during feasibility

design, construction and operation phase of the Projects;
to help WAPDA Authorities to facilitate in environmental auditing;
to carry out assessment of social and environment management; and
to evaluate and comment on the environmental (EIA) reports prepared by

Consultants and other Agencies.
11.3.5 Consultants Environment and Social Monitor

The Supervision Consultants (SC) will appoint an appropriately qualified specialist as the
Environment and Social Monitor (ESM) at the site on a full time basis. The ESM will be
responsible to ensure effective implementation of ESMP, and will supervise the
contractors for this purpose. The ESM will be a part of the ESMU as described earlier.
11.3.6 Contractors Environment and Social Supervisor(s)

The Contractor(s) will appoint adequate numbers of appropriately qualified specialist(s)
as the Environment and Social Supervisors (ESSs) at the site on a full time basis. The
ESS will be responsible to effectively implement the ESMP during the construction
phase, will supervise the construction activities for the environmental and social aspects,
and will liaise with ESM for this purpose. The ESS will be a part of the ESMU as
described earlier.
11.4 Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening

11.4.1 Training and Awareness
Environmental and social trainings will help to ensure that the requirements of the ESA
and ESMP are clearly understood and followed by all project personnel throughout the
project period. The primary responsibility for providing training to all project personnel
will be that of the ESMU. The environmental and social training program will be
finalized before the commencement of the project, during the detailed design phase. The
trainings will be provided to the WAPDA staff, the construction contractors, and other
staff engaged for the project. Training will cover all staff levels, ranging from the
management and supervisory to the skilled and unskilled categories. The scope of the
training will cover general environmental awareness and the requirements of the ESA and
the ESMP, with special emphasis on sensitizing the project staff to the environmental and
social aspects of the area. Table 11.1 provides a summary of various aspects of the
environmental and social trainings. ESMU may revise the plan during the project
implementation as required.
During the O&M phase of the project, these trainings will continue to be conducted by
WEC for all relevant WAPDA staff.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-4

Table 11.1:
Environmental and Social Trainings

Contents
General
environmental
Participants
and
Design team;
Responsibility
ESMU
Schedule
Prior to the start of the
socioeconomic awareness;
Selected WAPDA
project activities.
Environmental and social sensitivity of
management staff
(To
the project area;
be
repeated
as
needed.)
Key findings of the ESA;

Mitigation measures;
ESMP;
Social and cultural values of the area.
General
environmental
and
All site personnel
ESMU
socioeconomic awareness;
field activities.
Environmental and social sensitivity of
(To
the project area;
needed.)
be
repeated
as
Mitigation measures;
Community issues;
Awareness of transmissible diseases
Social and cultural values.
ESMP;
Construction crew
Contractor (ESS)

Waste disposal
(To
be
repeated
as
needed.)
Road safety;
Drivers
Contractor (ESS)
Before and during the
Defensive driving;
field operations.
Waste disposal;
(To
Cultural values and social sensitivity.
needed.)
Camp operation;
Camp staff
Contractor (ESS)
be
repeated
Before and during the
Waste disposal;
field operations.
Natural resource conservation;
(To
Housekeeping.
needed.)
Restoration requirements;
Restoration teams
Waste disposal
Contractor (ESS)
as
be
repeated
as
Before the start of the

restoration activities.
11.4.2 Strengthening of WEC

In addition to the project-specific capacity building described above, WEC will be
strengthened to actively partake in the environmental and social management of the
WAPDA projects, particularly towards the effective ESMP implementation of the T4HP,
as well as the ESA studies and ESMP implementation of the forthcoming hydropower
projects such as Basha and Dasu dams. This will also enable WEC to be responsible for
the environmental and social management of O&M phase of the T4HP and other
WAPDA projects. A budget of US$ 1.06 million has been included in the Project cost
for this purpose.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-5

11.4.3 Additional Capacity Building

The project also includes building the capacity of WAPDA to effectively implement the
project, O&M of the dams it manages and fully carrying out its mandated functions. This
would include: (i) enhancing WAPDAs capacity in planning and programming,
engineering and O&M of the dams, financial management, procurement, and
management of the environment and social issues; (ii) technical assistance and training in
such areas as designing of dams, river training works, hydraulics, detailed designs of
structures, contract administration and construction supervision, procurement, operations
and management planning, asset management plans, financial management, and legal
issues; and (iii) an independent panel of experts for design and construction quality and
safety enhancement or any other issues that may have to be addressed during project
implementation. An amount of US$ 2 million has been earmarked for this in the Project
cost estimates.
11.5 Panel of Experts

WAPDA will engage an independent panel of environment and social experts to advise
ESMU and other project entities on all environmental and social matters including
effective implementation of ESMP and SIMF, particularly on unanticipated situations,
impacts, and their mitigation. The Panel will review on a regular basis the various
reports and documents produced by EMU, Supervision Consultants and contractors;
periodically visit the site to have first hand information on the environmental and social
impacts and EMSP/SIMP implementation; and provide report to WAPDA on the overall
environmental and social performance of the project. An amount of US$ 0.28 million
has been included in the Project cost for this purpose.
11.6 Communication
A Communication and Information Plan will be developed by WAPDA which will be
based on the development of a communication strategy for different target groups (local
communities, previously affected persons, local and provincial authorities, general public
and press). During the project regular briefings of progress will be organized for public
information and for the media. The Communication and Information Centre will also
have a section where complaints and grievances can be registered and addressed. A
Communication and Information Specialist will be appointed for the project. WAPDA is
engaging consultant experts to develop the Communication and Information Plan. This
plan is expected to be completed by end 2011
For the environmental and social management of the project, WAPDA will establish and
maintain procedures for the following levels of communication:
Internal communication between the various levels and functions of the organization
and between WAPDA, WEC and ESMU (ESMU to be responsible for
communication with consultants and contractors relating to environmental issues);
Receiving, documenting and responding to relevant communication from external

interested parties, in particular a procedure for managing environmental complaints
that are received from the public or government organizations through a grievance
mechanism discussed later in the Chapter; and
All complaints received by the General Plant Management would be handled in a

responsive manner.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-6

11.7 Management and Monitoring Activities

This section introduces the proposed activities for managing and monitoring the potential
environmental effects associated with the Project. The proposed activities are set out in
two plans:
Mitigation Plan Construction Phase (Table 11.2); and
Mitigation Plan Operation Phase (Table 11.3).
The impacts and mitigations identified for the decommissioning phase are considered to
be sufficiently similar to the construction phase to conclude that a separate ESMP for the
Decommissioning Phase is not required at this stage.
11.7.1 Structure of the Mitigation Plans

The Mitigation Plans for the Project are structured around the following components:
Project activities the stage of the Project;
Impacts identified in the environmental assessment (Chapter 8);
Actions - measures to mitigate and manage impacts;
Responsibility the organization(s) responsible for executing the mitigation and

monitoring performance indicators; and
Target completion date / periodicity the timing of when mitigations or monitoring

would be implemented.
Procedures and processes for the above would be set up prior to construction and
operation of the Project. Should any changes to the Project design or methods of
construction and operation take place post this assessment stage, the impacts and
monitoring/mitigation measures discussed may need to be revised to reflect such changes
to allow the environmental and social implications of these changes to be addressed.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-7

Table 11.2:
Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Plan Construction (and Decommissioning)
Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Design / preconstruction
considerations
WAPDA
August 2011
1.1
Slope Instability
1.2
Geology and
seismology
1.3
Disposal of excavated
material
1.4
Surface Water Quality
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Excavated Material Disposal

Plan to include siting and
detailed assessment of the
suitability of the proposed
excavated materials disposal
site
Foundations for infrastructure
would comply with relevant
design standards for structures
in areas at risk of seismic
activity.
Foundation design of the
towers, powerhouse, and other
structures to consider the
probability of earthquake at the
earliest design stage.
Emergency Preparedness Plan
to address the response to a
disaster occurring during each
phase of the Project lifecycle.
Identification of re-use of
excavated material on site, to
reduce off site effects
Design
Consultants,
ESMU
All excavated
materials to be
disposed of in
designated sites.
Before construction:
during detailed
designing of the
Project.
Design
Consultants,
ESMU
Emergency
Preparedness Plan
in place prior to
commencement of
construction.
Before construction
Design
Consultants,
ESMU
All excavated
materials to be
disposed of in
designated sites.
Compliance with
Waste Management
Plans.
Before construction
Select access roads to avoid

run-off to river.
Design
Consultants
ESMU
None proposed.
Before construction
11-8

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
1.5
Groundwater Quality
1.6
Traffic Management
1.7
Construction camp
(and other temporary
facilities) site selection
1.8
Construction camp
management
1.9
Waste management
1.10
Excavated material
management
1.11
Fuels and hazardous

substances
management
Drainage system will be

designed so that all spills will
be drained and collected in a
sump for further appropriate
disposal; and
Oil and chemical storage and
vehicle wash and oil change
facilities will be on an
impermeable surface to avoid
percolation
A Traffic Management Plan
(TMP) will be prepared in
accordance with ECP 13
Site for construction camp will
be selected with approval from
the Supervision Consultants
(SC).
Areas having thick/dense
vegetation will be avoided as
far as possible.
Construction Camp
Management Plan will be
prepared per ECP 14 and
approval obtained from
SC/ESMU.
A Waste Management Plan will
be prepared per ECP 1 and
ESMU/ESM.
An Excavated Material
Management Plan will be
prepared and approval
obtained from SC and
ESMU/ESM.
A fuels and hazardous
substances management plan
will be prepared per ECP 2 and
ESMU/ESM.
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Design
Consultants
ESMU
Monitoring in
accordance with
Ground Water
Monitoring Program.
No breaches of
MDSD for
hazardous
substances.
Before construction
Contractor
ESMU
Approved TMP
Contractor
ESMU
Approval from
ESMU/ESM
Before mobilization
of contractor
commences
Before mobilization
of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization
of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization
of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before commencing
the construction
activities.
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization
of contractor
11-9

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Contractor
Mobilization and
Demobilization
WAPDA
August 2011
1.12
Water resource
management
1.13
Health, safety and

environment (HSE)
management
2.1
Traffic management
2.2
Soil Erosion and

Contamination
2.3
Air Quality
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
A water resource management

plan will be prepared per ECP
3 and approval obtained from
ESMU/ESM.
An HSE management plan will
be prepared per ECP 16 and
EHS Guidelines, and approval
obtained from ESMU/ESM.
The approved TMP will be
followed
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization
of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization
of contractor
Contractor
ESM;
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
During mobilization
Vehicular traffic on unpaved

roads will be avoided as far as
possible. Operation of vehicles
and machinery close to the
water channels, water reservoir
will be minimized.
Vehicles and equipment will not
be repaired in the field. If
unavoidable, impervious
sheathing will be used to avoid
soil and water contamination.
NEQS compliance will be
ensured.
ECP 1 for waste management
will be implemented.
Construction machinery and
vehicles will be kept in good
working condition and properly
tunned, in order to minimize the
exhaust emissions, and in
compliance with the NEQS.
Fugitive dust emissions will be
minimized by appropriate
methods, such as spraying
water on soil, where required
and appropriate.
Project vehicles will avoid
passing through the
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout
contractor
mobilization and
demobilization
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout
contractor
mobilization and
demobilization
11-10

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
2.4
Noise
2.5
Public Safety
communities as far as possible.

If unavoidable, speed will be
reduced to 15 km/h to avoid
excessive dust emissions.
ensured.
ECP 8 for air quality
management will be
implemented.
Vehicles will have exhaust
mufflers (silencers) to minimize
noise generation.
Nighttime traffic will be avoided
near the communities. Local
population will be taken in
confidence if such work is
unavoidable.
Vehicular traffic through the
communities will be avoided as
far as possible. Vehicle
speeds will be kept low, and
horns will not be used while
passing through or near the
communities.
ensured.
ECP-9 will be enforced.
Road signage will be fixed at
appropriate locations to reduce
safety hazard associated with
project-related vehicular traffic.
Project drivers will be trained
on defensive driving.
Vehicle speeds near / within
the communities will be kept
low, to avoid safety hazard and
dust emissions.
ECP-13 and ECP-16 will be
implemented.
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports;

noise measurement
data.
Throughout
contractor
mobilization and
demobilization
Contractor
ESMU

lack of any public
complaints.
Throughout
contractor
mobilization and
demobilization
11-11

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Construction
workers camp:
Construction
and Operation
WAPDA
August 2011
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
2.6
Damage to
Infrastructure
All damaged infrastructure will

be restored to original or better
condition.
Contractor
ESMU
3.1
Soil erosion; soil and

water contamination
Photographs will be taken to

record the site conditions prior
to the establishment of the
camp.
Land clearing, leveling and
grading will be minimized, and
carried out in a manner to
minimize soil erosion.
Vehicular traffic on unpaved
roads will be avoided as far as
possible. Operation of vehicles
close to the water channels,
water reservoirs will be
minimized.
Contractors will prepare a
Waste Management Plan.
For the domestic sewage,
appropriate treatment and
disposal system will be
constructed having adequate
capacity
Waste oils will be collected in
drums and sold to the recycling
contractors.
The inert recyclable waste from
the site (such as cardboard,
drums, and broken/used parts)
will be sold to recycling
contractors. The hazardous
waste will be kept separate and
handled according to the
nature of the waste.
Domestic sold waste from the
camp site will be disposed off
in a manner that does not
Contractor
ESMU

lack of any public
complaints.
Throughout
contractor
mobilization and
demobilization
Before and
throughout the
construction phase
11-12

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
3.2
Air Quality
3.3
Vegetation loss; threat

to wildlife
cause soil contamination.

The camp site area will be
completely restored after
completion of construction
works. All temporary structures
will be demolished,
ensured.
ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-3, and
ECP-14 will be implemented.
Generators and vehicles will be
kept in good working condition
and properly tunned, in order to
minimize the exhaust
emissions.
Fugitive dust emissions will be
minimized by appropriate
methods, such as spraying
water on soil, where required
and appropriate.
ensured.
Clearing natural vegetation will
be avoided as far as possible.
The camp will be established in
a natural clearing, outside
forested areas.
Complete record will be
maintained for any tree cutting.
The camp staff will not indulge
in any animal shooting,
trapping, catching, or killing
activities.
The construction crew will be
provided with LPG as cooking
(and heating, if required) fuel.
Use of fuel wood will not be
allowed.
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Before and
throughout the
construction phase
11-13

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Transportation
of Equipment
and
WAPDA
August 2011
3.4
Noise
3.5
Health and Safety
3.6
Public Safety
3.7
Social and Gender

Issues
4.1
Traffic management
ECP-10, ECP-11, and ECP-12

Generators and vehicles will
have exhaust mufflers
(silencers) to minimize noise
generation.
ensured.
Protective fencing to be
installed around the Camp to
avoid any accidents.
Firefighting equipment will be
made available at the camps.
The camp staff will be provided
fire fighting training.
All safety precautions will be
taken to transport, handle and
store hazardous substances,
such as fuel.
implemented.
Construction camps and site
offices will have first aid kits
Construction crew will be
provided with awareness for
transmissible diseases (HIV,
hepatitis B and C).
Construction crew will avoid
entering the villages
No child labor will be
employed.
Liaison with the community will
be maintained.
The approved TMP will be
followed (ECP-13).
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Before and
throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Before and
throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU

lack of any
complaints
Throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout the
construction phase
11-14

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Construction
Material
4.3
Soil Erosion and

Contamination
Air Quality
4.4
Noise
4.5
Public Safety
4.6
Damaged to
Infrastructure
Changes to
topography
4.2
Construction of
Powerhouse,
Penstock Route
and Intake Area
5.1
5.2
WAPDA
August 2011
Landslide
Same as Section 2.2 of this

table.
table.
table.
table.
table.
Changes to the topography will
only occur in designated areas
to accommodate defined
project features.
Excavation of material will be
kept to a minimum.
Excavated material will be
managed in accordance with
the Excavated Material
Disposal Plan
Method Statements and Risk
Assessments prepared prior to
any excavation activity
Slope protection measures,
such as rock bolts, rock
anchors, safety nets and other
protection measures will have
to be applied including proper
terracing to reduce the risk of
slope failures.
Attention will be paid to the
safety of the existing dam,
tunnels and powerhouse. Use
of heavy machinery, blasting
material and blasting technique
will be carefully considered and
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractors
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor,
ESMU

Volume of spoil
extracted (monitor
against predictions).
All excavated
materials to be
disposed of in
designated sites.
Before construction
Number of blasting
events.
Method Statements
and Risk
Assessments
produced for
construction of each
item of
infrastructure.
All excavated
materials to be
disposed of in
designated sites.
Monitoring of early
warning systems.
Throughout the
construction phase
Before construction
Before construction
Before construction
Throughout the
construction phase
11-15

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
5.3
WAPDA
August 2011
Soil erosion
the methodology will contain a

stability analysis for a suitable
factor of safety (FOS).
During excavations the
concerned slopes will be
stabilized and excavation
started exacted from the top
then gradually working down
the slope. After blasting a
riser, it will be stabilized by predesigned support systems such
as shotcrete, mesh and rock
bolts prior to drilling the next
riser for excavation. Where
there are confinement issues,
cushion blasting will be the
method applied. Extreme care
will be taken in designing the
blasting pattern and blasting
will be controlled so as to avoid
disturbance of nearby slopes
where stability is in a critical
condition.
Emergency Preparedness Plan
and Early Warning System will
set out response actions in the
event of a landslide
Other methods to be
considered as alternatives to
blasting
Areas not used during
operation will be re-vegetated,
particularly slopes
Borrow pits/areas to be
covered
Areas exposed during
construction and not used for
operation will be re-vegetated
(greened) immediately
Adopt measures set out in the
Contractor
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
ESMU
Incidences of borrow
pits not being
covered.
Compliance with the
Tree Plantation
Plan.
All replanting to be
commenced prior to
operation.
Throughout the
construction phase
and prior to
operation
11-16

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
5.4
Soil and water

contamination
5.5
Air Quality
Tree Plantation Plan

Road edge buffer re-planting
Replanting to occur prior to the
commencement of operation,
using fast-growing native
species; and grasses to assist
slope and soil stability.
Construction materials will be
stored, used and handled
appropriately.
Excavated Material Disposal
Plan to include measures to
reduce risk of environmental
pollution.
Reduce risk of a pollution event
through adoption of measures
set out in Solid Waste
Management Plan and
Wastewater Treatment Plan
Hazardous & toxic materials
stored separately
Oil and Chemical Spill
Response Plan.
ensured.
ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-4, ECP-5,
and ECP-7 will be
implemented.
Construction materials will be
stored in designated areas
away from sensitive receptors
and covered to minimize dust
on site from site construction
works
Construction vehicles will be
sprayed with water when
entering and leaving the site,
covered if transporting
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Monthly auditing of
management of
hazardous materials
against Material
Safety Data Sheet
Throughout the
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Number of dustrelated complaints.

Number of air
quality-related
complaints,
Compliance with
Traffic Management
Plan.
Throughout
construction phase
11-17

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
5.6
Health and Safety
5.7
Noise and Vibration
materials, adhere to speed

limits, and engines will be
turned off when idling.
Target zero dust related
complaints
Target zero air quality related
complaints.
ensured.
Provision of respiratory
protective devices for workers
Designate agreed routes for
traffic (set out in the Traffic
Management Plan)
Compliance with Occupational
Health & Safety standards (See
Social Impact Management
Framework)
Provision of insurance-backed
compensation scheme for
major injury or loss of life
reflecting settlement sums that
are consistent with
national/international
benchmarks.
Blasting activity will be
restricted to fixed times;
Communities will be informed
in advance of planned blasting;
Construction plant producing
sound in excess of 85dB will be
fitted with mufflers; Noise
barriers will be provided in
areas where significant noise is
expected (e.g. during blasting).
ensured.
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Number of
respiratory
protective devices
issues to workers.
Monitoring of
compliance with
Health & Safety
standards (including
monthly reporting of
accidents).
Throughout
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Number of blasting
events recorded.
Evidence of
providing advance
warning of blasting
to communities.
Record of
equipment used on
site capable of
producing over 85dB
and whether
equipment has been
Throughout
construction phase
11-18

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
5.8
Irrigation Releases
5.9
Power Generation
5.10
Surface Water Quality
5.11
Landscape and Visual

Intrusion

Connection of the tunnels will
be carried out during the
annual canal closure or periods
of low demand
Increase discharge from other
tunnels to compensate in
reduction of Tunnel 4.
Close coordination will be
maintained with the TDP
operational staff, and tunnel
closure will be planned in
advance in a consultative
manner.
Closure of tunnel 3 will be
planned in advance, in
coordination and consultation
with the TDP Operational staff.
Surface Water Monitoring
Program;
Store and handle all hazardous
substances in accordance with
their Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS);
Select access roads to avoid
run off to river;
Wastewater Treatment Plan
including pre-treated sewage
prior to discharge within the
labor camps
Solid Waste Management Plan
Oil and Chemical Spill
Response Plan.
and ECP-7 will be
implemented.
Preparation of a Landscape
Plan
Adoption of Tree Plantation
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
fitted with mufflers
Duration of works
demonstrated to be
kept to minimum
and demonstrated
efforts to undertake
work during dates of
annual closure.
Irrigation releases to
remain consistent
during period of
tunnel joining
ESMU;
Contractor
ESMU
Joining of new
tunnel to existing
Tunnel 4
ESMU;
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Monitoring in
accordance with
Surface Water
Monitoring Program.
No breaches of
MDSD for
hazardous
substances.
Throughout
construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Compliance with
Tree Plantation Plan
Before the
completion of the
construction phase
Throughout
construction phase
11-19

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
WAPDA
August 2011
5.12
Vegetation loss
5.13
Fauna / Wildlife
5.14
Damage to
infrastructure
5.15
Borrow area and

borrow material
Plan
New planting and landscape
restoration as soon as
practicable at the end of
construction phase
Replanting of flora/vegetation
alongside new access roads
Enhance flora environment by
planting fruit trees and
ornamental shrubs.
Avoid dumping material in
vegetated areas.
Avoid unnecessary loss of
vegetation
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
None proposed.
Throughout
construction phase
Avoid positioning spoil in areas

used by fauna
No hunting or poaching
Provide corridors for animal
movement.
implemented.
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout
construction phase
Any damaged infrastructure

such as roads, bridges and
culverts will be repaired
Reduce the volume of material
requiring disposal as far as
possible. Remaining material
will be disposed in an
environmentally sound manner.
Disposal sites will be properly
filled, shaped and reworked
and where feasible planted with
trees.
Borrow materials would be
obtained (as much as possible)
Contractor
Instances of spoil
being deposited in
non-designated
areas.
Reported incidences
of hunting or
poaching on the
Project site / in land
ownership.
Contractor
11-20

Project
Activities
Environmental
Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility
Execution
Decommissioning
WAPDA
August 2011
6.1
Soil erosion
6.2
Surface Water Quality;

air contamination;
noise; and other
environmental
impacts.
from licensed quarries and

borrow areas. Where
necessary, appropriate
restoration of the borrow area
such as re-contouring would be
carried out, and no deep
ditches would be left behind.
As part of decommissioning, all
disturbed areas would be
contoured and re-vegetated
Disturbed areas will be
contoured and re-vegetated to
minimize the potential for soil
erosion and water quality
related impacts.
ECP-5, ECP-8, ECP-9, ECP10, ECP-11, ECP-12, ECP-13,
ECP-14, ECP-15, and ECP-16
Key Performance
Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Audit areas of site

that were disturbed
and remain without
vegetation.
Audit areas of site
that were disturbed
and remain without
vegetation.
During
decommissioning
Upon completion of
decommissioning
11-21

Table 11.3:
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan Operation

Impact
Project
Action
Responsibility
Indicator
Execution
Pre-operation
Timing
Key Performance
Activities
1.1
Visual amenity
Adoption of Tree Plantation
ESMU,
Plan and Landscape Plan
Contractor
Monitoring
ESMU
Compliance with Tree
Before the completion
Plantation Plan
of the construction
Compliance with
phase
Landscape Plan
2
Operation
2.1
activities
Operation and
3.1
Tunnels 1 to 3 increase their
TDP O&M
the irrigation flow
discharge to compensate for
staff
rate will be reduced
the 5% reduction in irrigation
during period of tunnel
by around 5%.
release from Tunnel 4.
joining
Waste
Adherence to the Waste
TDP O&M
Maintenance
Management Plan and
staff
Activities
measures put in place

3.2
WEC
Irrigation Releases-
Irrigation releases to
During operation
remain consistent
WEC
Compliance with
During operation
Waste Management
Plan
WEC
Noise and Vibration
Compliance with Occupational
TDP O&M
Monitoring of
During operation and
to Occupational
Health & Safety standards
staff
Workers
(See Social Impact
compliance with
Health & Safety
maintenance activities
Management Framework)
standards (including
monthly reporting of
accidents).
WAPDA
August 2011
11-22

11.7.2 Compliance Monitoring

The compliance monitoring of the project activities is principally a tool to ensure that the
environmental and social control measures identified during the ESA are strictly adhered
to during the project execution.
Various aspects of the ESA compliance monitoring will be to:
Systematically observe the activities undertaken by the contractors or any other

persons associated with the project.
Verify that the activities are undertaken in compliance with the ESA and ESMP.
Document and communicate the observations to the concerned person(s) of the

contractors, ESMU and Supervision Consultants, so that any corrective measures, if
required, can be taken in a timely fashion.
Maintain a record of all incidents of environmental and social significance and

related actions and corrective measures.
Maintain contact with the communities, solicit their views and concerns, and discuss
them during the fortnightly meetings.
Prepare periodic reports of the environmental and social performance of project.
The mitigation plan discussed above will be used as a management and monitoring tool
for compliance monitoring. Inspections will be carried out using checklists prepared by
the contractor, on the basis of the Table 11.2, during the construction phase, and by the
O&M staff on the basis of Table 11.3 during the O&M phase.
11.7.3 Monitoring Predicted Effects

The ESA predicts the impacts of the proposed project on the basis of information
available at the time of conducting the assessment and the natural processes that link
various environmental and social parameters. Based on this prediction, mitigation
measures are introduced such that the predicted residual effects do not exceed acceptable
levels. However, there can be an element of uncertainty in such predictions, for example,
due to an insufficient grasp of the processes, limitations in prediction techniques, or
inadequate data on the environment. This is true for the physical, biological, as well as
socioeconomic environment. Consequently, it is possible that even if the mitigation
measures are implemented fully, the negative impacts of the Project could exceed
predicted levels or acceptable limits.
In order to address the above concerns, effects monitoring will be undertaken during the
Project activities, with the overall objective of proper management of environmental and
social risks and uncertainties. Broadly, effects monitoring has the following objectives:
To verify that the impacts of the proposed project are within acceptable limits, thus
establishing credibility (public assurance);
To immediately warn the Project proponents (and the regulatory agencies, if

required) of unanticipated adverse impact or sudden changes in impact trends so that
corrective actions can be undertaken, which may include modifications in the
proposed activities, or the inclusion of modified or additional mitigation measures;
To provide information to plan and control the timing, location, and level of certain
project activities so that the effects are minimized; and
WAPDA
August 2011
11-23

To facilitate research and development by documenting the effects of the proposed

project that can be used to validate impact-prediction techniques and provide a basis
for more accurate predictions of future projects.
The effects monitoring plan is provided in Table 11.4 below. The detailed
methodologies will be developed during the detailed design phase of the Project when the
specific information on field activities will be known. The effects monitoring will
comprise the following:
Soil erosion;
Landslide;
Water quality;
Oil spills;
Waste;
Air quality;
Noise;
Socioeconomic aspects; and
Grievance monitoring.
ESMU may revise the effects monitoring plan during the project implementation as
required.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-24

Table 11.4:
No
Monitoring of Predicted Effects
Monitoring parameter
Monitoring Locations
Frequency
Responsibility
Methodology/
Documentation
Resource Requirement
1
Soil erosion
Construction sites, labor
During routine monitoring
ESMU
campsites, borrow areas,
Visual observation, digital
Record
of
visual
camera
observation/photographs
Numbered, glass strips
Complete record
disposal sites
2
Landslide
Construction sites
Weekly
ESMU
positioned
strategically
across key areas

Borrow areas, disposal
Weekly
ESMU
sites
3
Water quality
At
wells
water
and
surface
bodies
WAPDA
Before mobilization
ESMU
near
colonies
Visual
observations,
Record
of
visual
digital camera
Laboratory
Record of sampling and
analysis/sampling bottles
analysis
Sampling bottles
and
labor campsite
Selected local wells
Monthly
ESMU
analysis
Selected
nearby
locations
surface
at
Monthly
ESMU
Sampling bottles
water

analysis
bodies
4
Damage to groundwater
Construction site
ESMU
wells, watercourse
5
Oil spill
Construction
workshops
site
and
ESMU
oil
Visual
observations,
Solid waste
Construction site, labor
of
visual
Visual
Record
observations,
digital camera
storage areas
6
Record
digital camera
of
visual
observations/
photographs
ESMU
campsite
Visual
observations,
digital camera
Record
of
visual
observations/
photographs
Wastewater
Labor campsite
ESMU
Sampling bottles

analysis
WAPDA
August 2011
11-25

No
Monitoring parameter
Monitoring Locations
Frequency
Responsibility
Documentation
Methodology/
Resource Requirement
Ambient air quality
Before mobilization
ESMU
campsite
Once every two months
ESMU
campsite
9
Exhaust emissions
Construction sites, camp
ESMU
site
Ambient
air
quality
monitoring equipment
analysis
Ambient
air
quality
monitoring equipment
analysis
Visual
Record
observations,
digital camera
of
visual
observations/
photographs
10
Dust emissions
Construction sites, labor
ESMU
camp site, project roads
Visual
observations,
digital camera
Record
of
visual
observations/
photographs
11
Noise
Nearby communities
Fortnightly
or
construction
during
ESMU
Noise meter
activities
measurement
causing noise
12
Public grievance
Nearby communities
Throughout
work
WAPDA
August 2011
construction
Complete record of noise

and
location
ESMU
Complaints register
Complete record of any

complaints
11-26

11.7.4 Internal Audits

Environmental audits of the Project would be arranged once during construction phase
and once at the end of the construction activities. The objective of environmental
management audits is to review the effectiveness of environmental Management.
Environmental auditing is generally done by an unbiased independent organization or a
person having full command on the subject. For the Project, it is proposed that WEC
should carry out these audits on six-monthly basis.
11.7.5 External Audits (Third Party Validation)

As a minimum, throughout the first three
activities, arrangements would be made
specialist to carry out an independent
requirements of the ESMP, on an annual
under the external audit:
years of the construction works and operation

for an industrial environmental management
audit of the existing practices against the
basis. The following aspects will be covered
the ESMP is being adequately implemented,
mitigation measures are being implemented and their effectiveness,
the compliance and effects monitoring are being conducted,
environmental and social trainings are being conducted, and
complete documentation is being maintained.
These audits would be used to re-examine the continued appropriateness of the ESMP
and to provide advice on any up-dates required. Attention would be given to lessons
learnt in the light of experience. In particular, consideration would be given to the
monitoring programs in place to determine whether their purpose has been served and
they can therefore be terminated or reduced in frequency
11.7.6 Management Reviews

WAPDA Management would review the results of internal and external audits and
provide commitment and resources to tackling outstanding issues.
WAPDA Management would support the proposed ESMU in mechanisms to manage
financial payments to contractors based on performance against the items identified in the
ESMP.
11.8 Record Keeping

Proper arrangements are necessary for recording, disseminating and responding to
information which emerges from the various environmental monitoring and management
programs. They are also necessary for rendering the environmental management system
auditable. However, the primary focus must remain on the pragmatic control of
pollution, not the creation of complex bureaucratic procedures.
11.8.1
Monitoring Records
Quantitative Physical Monitoring
The objective of quantitative physical monitoring is to ensure that the mitigation

measures designed to prevent, reduce and where possible offset any significant adverse
impacts on the environment are being implemented throughout the Project lifecycle.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-27

A database would be developed by ESMU, with involvement from WEC for storing the
results of the quantitative monitoring. The facility would be capable of producing
tabulated weekly and monthly reports that provide the following information:
Sampling points;
Dates and times of sample collection;
Test results;
Control limits;
Action limits (circa 80% of the control limits) at which steps must be taken to
prevent the impending breach of the control limit; and
Any breaches of the control limits, including explanations if available.
The monitoring data would be continually processed as it is received, so as to avoid a

build up of data.
General Site Inspections and Monitoring
A Site Inspection Checklist for recording the findings of the general site condition
surveys would be developed by the respective contractors, on the basis of the
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan described in Section 10.3, during the
construction phase. This would cover all the ESMP commitments as provided in Section
10.4. The Site Inspection Checklist would be supported by sketches, as necessary.
11.8.2 Complaints Records

A tabulated standard form would be prepared for recording any environmental
complaints that are received from the public or government organizations by whatever
medium i.e. visits to the Plant, telephone calls or correspondence.
The form would concisely list the following information:
Date of the complaint;
Name and contact address of the complainant;
Brief description of the complaint, with a file reference to any correspondence from
the complainant;
Brief description of the action taken by the Plant Management to investigate the
cause of the complaint and bring about corrective action, if justified; and
Date of reply to the complainant, with a file reference to any correspondence.
All complaints received by the Plant Management would be handled in this way
11.8.3 Information Sources

A complete and up-to-date file of all relevant sources of information should be
maintained by the ESMU. This file would be readily accessible and include, as a
minimum, copies of the following documents:
Current environmental permits and consents;
All relevant Pakistan regulations, international guidelines and codes of practice;
Manufacturers MSDSs for all hazardous substances used on the plant;
Manufacturers operating manuals for all the environmental monitoring equipment;
WAPDA
August 2011
11-28

Current calibration certificates for all the equipment that requires calibration by an
external organization; and
The latest version of this Environmental Management and Monitoring Manual.
11.8.4 Non-Compliance Report

Any breaches of the acceptable standards specified, would be reported to the ESMU /
WEC (dependent on project phase), using a standard form, i.e. a Non-Compliance Report
(NCR).
A copy of each completed NCR would be held on file by the ESMU, to be replaced by
the reply copy when it is received. A record of corrective actions would also be made
and tracked to their completion.
11.8.5 Monthly Internal Reports

The ESMU would prepare a monthly report for issue to the Plant General Manager.
These reports would normally be no more than one or two pages in length, to summarize
the following:
Progress in implementing this ESMP;
Findings of the monitoring programs, with emphasis on any breaches of the control
standards, action levels or standards of general site management;
Any emerging issues where information or data collected is substantially different

from the baseline data reported in the Environmental Assessment;
Outstanding NCRs;
Summary of any complaints by external bodies and actions taken / to be taken; and
Relevant changes or possible changes in legislation, regulations and international

practices.
11.9 Grievance Mechanism

A grievance can be defined as an actual or perceived problem that might give grounds for
complaint. As a general policy, WAPDA will work proactively towards preventing
grievances through the implementation of impact mitigation measures and community
liaison activities that anticipate and address potential issues before they become
grievances. This will be the responsibility of the Project Manager, the Contractors Site
Manager and a person designated to be responsible for stakeholder liaison (for the
purposes of this document called the communication officer (CO)).
Potential impacts and effects that are most likely to give rise to grievances for this Project
are related to:
Distribution of employment opportunities;
Construction noise; and,
Presence of a construction labor force and the effects on neighboring villages, local
services and infrastructure.
Any stakeholder (individual or organization) will be able to submit a grievance to the

Project if they believe a practice is having a detrimental impact on their community, the
WAPDA
August 2011
11-29

environment, or on their quality of life.

suggestions. Grievances could include:
They may also submit comments and
Negative impacts on a person or a community (e.g. financial loss, physical harm,

nuisance);
Dangers to health and safety or the environment;
Failure of WAPDA, its Contractors and their workers or drivers to comply with
standards or legal obligations;
Harassment of any nature;
Criminal activity;
Improper conduct or unethical behavior;
Financial malpractice or impropriety or fraud; and
Attempts to conceal any of the above.
11.9.1 Grievance Logging

The contractor will be required to log grievances are received directly and have a formal
logging system. The CO will prepare a standard form to record complaints that are
received from individuals or organizations by any means including site visits, telephone
calls or written correspondence. In addition to the contact information and complaint
details, the logging system needs to track the action taken by the contractor and Project
staff to investigate the cause of the complaint and bring about corrective action if
justified, as well as the date of reply to the complainant, with a file reference to any
correspondence.
Grievances during construction will be investigated to review validity and responsibility.
In the first instance, grievances will be directed to the CO to classify according to
Table 11.5 below.
Table 11.5:
Grievance
Grievance Classification Criteria

Risk Level
Validity
Response
None or low
Unsubstantiated
CO will conduct investigation, document
Classificatio
n
Low
findings and provide a response

Medium
Possible risk and likely a
Possible substantiation
CO and an appropriate investigation

team will conduct investigation. The Site
one off event
Manager or HS Manager may decide to

stop work during the investigation to
allow the corrective preventive actions to
be determined. The CO will provide a
response.
High
Probable risk
and could reoccur
Probable substantiation
CO will get the contractor to organize a

Major Investigation Team for prompt
investigation and resolution. Work will be
stopped in the affected area. The CO will
provide a response.
WAPDA
August 2011
11-30

The CO will log the receipt of a comment, formally acknowledge it, track progress on its
investigation and resolution, and respond in writing with feedback to the aggrieved party.
A response time of 10 working days, unless there are exceptional circumstances, would
be the aim.
The CO will identify an appropriate investigation team with the correct skills to review
the issue raised and to decide whether it is Project related or whether it is more
appropriately addressed by a relevant authority outside the Project. WAPDA will play a
role in investigating the validity and responsibility for some grievances. Project staff,
and outside authorities as appropriate, will also contribute to investigations as required.
The investigation will aim to identify whether the incident leading to the grievance is a
singular occurrence or likely to reoccur. Identifying and implementing activities,
procedures, equipment and training to address and prevent reoccurrence will be part of
the investigation activities. In some cases it will be appropriate for the CO to follow up
at a later date to see if the person or organization is satisfied with the resolution or
remedial actions.
The CO will explain in writing (or where literacy is an issue, orally) the manner in which
the review was carried out, the results of the review, any changes to activities that will be
undertaken to address the grievance or how the issue is being managed to meet
appropriate environmental and social management systems and requirements.
The CO will summarize grievances in project performance reports, at least bi-annually
during construction and annually during operation.
The Project will aim to protect a persons confidentiality when requested and will
guarantee anonymity in annual reporting. Individuals will be asked permission to
disclose their identity. Investigations will be undertaken in a manner that is respectful of
the aggrieved party and the principle of confidentiality. The aggrieved party will need to
recognize that there may be situations when disclosure of identity is required and the
Project will identify these situations to see whether the aggrieved party wishes to
continue with the investigation and resolution activities.
11.10 Adequacy of Environmental and Social Management

The impact assessment covered under Chapters 8 to 9, and environmental and social
management covered under Chapter 11 adequately address all the potential
environmental and social impacts of the project identified during the scoping stage. In
addition, most of the concerns raised and recommendations forwarded by the
stakeholders consulted during the ESA and discussed in Chapter 5 (Table 5.2) have
been addressed while formulating the environmental and social mitigation and
enhancement measures discussed in Chapters 8 and 9. A summary of these concerns and
recommendations along with the way they have been addressed is given in Table 11.6
below.
Table 11.6: Stakeholders Concerns/Recommendations and their Redressal
Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action
Suggestions from Institutional Stakeholders

1. WAPDA should fulfill the regulatory
requirements of conducting ESA of
proposed project.
WAPDA
August 2011
The present ESA has been conducted,

submitted to KP EPA, and approval obtained
(see Section 2.4.5).
11-31

Recommended Action
2. The project proponents should develop

organizational structure for implementation
of SIMF to handle the environmental and
social issues during the project
implementation.
3. Possible damage to flora and fauna
particularly at proposed site for power house
should be addressed.
ESMU will be established to manage the

environmental and social aspects of the
Project (see Section 11.3.3).
4. Construction related issues like excavated

material, soil erosion and hazards for local
communities and labor force should be
appropriately addressed during the
5. WAPDA will ensure free mobility of
women and children, especially students of
girls and boys schools at WAPDA Right
Bank Colony
Appropriate mitigation measures are included

in the mitigation plan (see Sections 8.5 and
9.4).
6. Safe transportation of construction material
Same as above.
7. Health and safety measures for labor force

in the mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
8. Rights of employment in Tarbela Project for

local community
Appropriate measures are included in the

mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
9. Settlements of pending issues of old affected

persons of Tarbela project
The old resettlement issues pending in the

courts will be settled (see Section 9.5.2).

in the mitigation plan, particularly preparation
and implementation of a tree plantation plan
(see Sections 8.4.2, 8.5.8 and 8.5.11).
Appropriate mitigation measures among

others in the form of preparing and
implementing a traffic management plan are
included in the mitigation plan (Sections 8.5
and 9.4).
Suggestions from Grass-root Stakeholders

10. Pending issues of compensation on Tarbela
and Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project.

11. Lack of health and education facilities in

Ghazi and Pehur Hamlets.
The Social Assistance program under this

project aims to address some of the
community needs of the area (see
Section 9.5.1).
12. Rights of employments in Tarbela project
Appropriate measures are included in the

mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
13. Problems in sewage and solid waste

collection system

Section 9.5.1).
14. Seepage problem due to Ghazi Barrage pond
This aspect has not been addressed in ESA.
15. Polluted drinking water in the hamlets

WAPDA
August 2011
11-32

Recommended Action
Section 9.5.1).
Issues highlighted by the Consultation

Workshop Participants
16. Settlement of compensation issues of old
affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha;

17. Lack of health and educational facilities in

the area, especially in the villages where old
affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha are
residing;

Section 9.5.1).
18. Un employment in the area;
The project will provide employment

opportunities and recommendations have been
included in ESA to give preference to local
population (see Section 9.4).
19. Recruitment in Tarbela and GBHP projects

from other parts of the country;

opportunities for people from other parts of
the country as well (see Section 9.4).
20. Restoration of the source of livelihood of

fishermen;
21. Polluted drinking water;
This aspect has not been addressed in ESA.
22. Solid waste and sewerage disposal

problems;
23. Seepage and high water table at Right Bank
in Topi area;
Same as above.
24. Shortage of water and low water table in the

areas downstream Ghazi barrage;
25. provision of electricity at subsides rates in
the Project area;
26. Fear of road accidents during construction
phase of the project
Same as above
27. Tree management plan.

in the mitigation plan, particularly preparation
and implementation of a tree plantation plan
(see Section 8.4 and 8.5).
Suggestions and Recommendations

forwarded by Workshop Participants
28. WAPDA should fix a quota in employment
for local peoples in TDP and GBHPP;
WAPDA
August 2011

Section 9.5.1).

Section 9.5.1).
It is beyond the jurisdiction of WAPDA.

Appropriate mitigation measures in the form
of preparing and implementing a traffic
management plan are included in the
mitigation plan (see Section 8.5 and 9.4).

opportunities and recommendations have been
11-33

Recommended Action
included in ESA to give preference to local
population (see Section 9.4).
29. Establishment of emergency unit with

ambulance for local communities;

Section 9.5.1).
30. WAPDA should arrange clean drinking

water in Project area;
31. Establishment of vocational training centre
for women;
32. WAPDA should help in the up gradation of
educational and health facilities in the Ghazi
and Topi area;
33. Establishment of a heavy machinery training
centre at Topi;
34. Civil department of WAPDA should work
on proposal for the rehabilitation of drainage
system at Right Bank and replacement of
old water supply pipelines;
35. WAPDA may rehabilitate the old road near
Ghazi and use during construction phase to
avoid traffic hazards to local community;
Same as above.
36. WAPDA may establish recreational parks at

Ghazi and Topi for local peoples;

Section 9.5.1). A public park can be added in
the Social Assistance plan.
37. WAPDA may engage a NGO like GBTI to

work with local communities for the
implementation of the project in
environmentally and socially safe way.
Consultation with Women
This aspect will be considered during the

project implementation.
38. Drinking water is contaminated with other

particles and people have to use this
contaminated water;

Section 9.5.1).
39. Problems of proper disposal of solid waste

and sewage issues at Right Bank Colony;

Section 9.5.1).
40. Needs to introduce computer as a subject in

the schools;
41. Lack of cold drinking water in summer in
the school;
Same as above.
WAPDA
August 2011
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Appropriate mitigation measures in the form

of preparing and implementing a traffic
management plan are included in the
mitigation plan (see Sections 8.4 and 8.5).
Same as above.
11-34

Recommended Action
42. Lack of health facilities, especially for

women in Civil Hospital Topi;
43. Seepage problems in Topi area due to Ghazi
Barrage pond;
44. Inadequate building structure, lack of
furniture, lack of teaching staff in the Girls
Middle School at Pehur Hamlet;
45. Needs of a vocational training centre for
women in the area.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
11.11 Cost Estimates for Environmental Management and

Monitoring
The estimated costs for the environmental management and monitoring activities are set
out in Table 11.7 below.
Table 11.7:
Cost Estimates for Management and Monitoring Activities

Description
Cost
Cost
Million PKR
Million US$
Project
Component
0.29
C2
Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP)

1
Landscaping Plan and Replanting Plan
24.65
Pollution Prevention Plan
*)
Waste Disposal Plan
*)
Drinking Water Management Plan
*)
Borrow Area Restoration Plan
*)
*)
Waste Disposal Plan
*)
Monitoring & Evaluation,

Environmental Management
50.15
0.59
C2
Training and Capacity building
83.30
0.98
C2
10
Strengthening of WEC
90.00
1.06
11
Independent Panel of experts
24.00
0.28
E2
Social Impact Management Framework (SIMF)

12
Land acquisition/ temporary lease of

land
*)
13
Workers health/safety/wellbeing Plan
*)
14
Monitoring & Evaluation workers

health/safety/wellbeing
0.39
C2
15
Workers Accommodation Plan
*)
WAPDA
August 2011
33.15
11-35

Description
Cost
Cost
Million PKR
Million US$
Project
Component
24.65
0.29
C1
16
Information and Communication

Strategy
17
Addressing social legacy TDPGBHPP
1062.50
12.50
C1
18
Implementing Social Assistance

Program
104.4
1.23
C1
1,496.80
17.61
Total ESMP and SIMF
*) in contractors budget
WAPDA
August 2011
11-36

Annex A:
Consultation Details
Table A.8: List of Women Participants in Scoping Consultation

Meeting at Girls High School WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Date: 10th August 2010
Mrs. Atia Begum
Headmistress
Jamila Hassan
School Teacher
Afra Bashra
School Teacher
Ms. Munaza
School Teacher
Summera Iqbal
School Teacher
Wakeela Naz
School Teacher
Kaneez Akhtar
Resident
Alia Zafar
Resident
Salma Shehnaz
Resident
Nobia Naveed
Resident
Summera Ammar
Resident
Zeenat bibi
Resident
Ghazala Naveed
Resident
Shazia
Resident
Shagufta Saeed
Resident
Mrs. Naveed
Resident
Ms. Zahida
Resident
Tayyaba Khan
Resident
Aqeeda Nasreen
Resident
Sadaf Naeem
Resident
Beghum Iqbal
Resident
WAPDA
August 2011
A-1

Shereen Taj
Resident
Sarwat Khan
Resident
Ayesha Hina
Resident
Nazia Gul
Resident
WAPDA
August 2011
A-2

Table A. 9: Participants in WAPDA Consultation Meeting

10 August 2010
Name
Designation
Contact No.
S. Bashir Ahmad
R.E (E)
0342-9184105
Khurshid Khan
OE
0303-5120265
Asif Jan
OE
0334-9304782
Muhammad Farooq
Sr. Engineer
0334-8697544
Abdul Rahim
????
0321-9876393
Ghous Nawaz
PEIE-II
0332-5056159
Irshad Hussain Bangash
SSE
0346-9070696
Iftikhar Ahmad
Sub Engineer
0305-5727502
10
Shoiab Saleem
ASA
0300-5311157
11
Zohaib Hashim
Junior Engineer
0344-9019514
12
Usman Jamil
Junior Engineer
0344-9019514
13
Munir Ahmad
Junior Engineer
0345-5445661
14
Asif Saeed
Junior Engineer
0321-2059427
15
Mazhar Nouman
Lab Assistant
0345-9373301
16
Abdul Majid
Test Inspector
0345-6520280
17
Shamsuddin
Assistant Foreman
0333-7369246
18
Ihsan Ullah
Senior Engineer P&I-I
0344-9212080
19
Ashfaq Ahmad
JP&IE -II
0333-5324581
20
Imtiaz Ahmad
Junior Engineer
0313-9095171
21
Habib-ur-Rehman
Senior Engineer
0306-5510413
22
M. Zafar Khan
Resident Engineer
0312-5033481
23
Javed Akhtar
Senior Engineer
0300-5829739
24
Amin Ullah
JIE
0306-7058881
25
Khalid Khan
P.A to R.E (Mech)
0346-8999760
26
Raj Wali Khan
P.A to R.E (P)
0344-2829678
27
Khurshid Anwar
Project Director
0321-9897172
28
Muhammad Amin Khalid
RE (M)
29
Hameed Ullah
EME (P)-I
WAPDA
August 2011
A-3

Table A.10:
Participants
Initial Awareness Campaign (Scoping Stage) List of
Village/Settlement
1
Pehur Hamlet
(November
2010)
Person Contacted
Muhammad Javed
24,
Bakhat Gul
Jahangeer
Muhammad Waqas
Ijaz Ahmed
Usman Sher
Muddsar Iqbal
Paris Khan
Muhammad Rafique
10
Ghulam Qadir
11
Bahadar Sher
12
Allah Baksh
13
Siddique Ahmed
14
Fida Muhammad
Ghazi Hamlet
(November
2010
Syed Asif Ali Shah
25,
0300-5688606
0300-5394800
Muhammad Ali Shah

Syed Sharaf Ali Shah
Abdul Rasheed
Muhammad Din
Ghazanfar Shah
Shabir Ahmed
Javed Iqbal
Aqil Shah
10
Muhammad Maskeen
WAPDA
August 2011
0300-8585695
(Ex. Nazim Batakha Union Council)
Contact Number
03015037032
0300-5258117
A-4

Table A.11:
Consultation
01
List of Officials Contacted During Institutional
Location
Officials Contacted
Project Office 4th Extension Tarbela
Mr. Khurshed Anwer, Project Director

Office. 0995-662013
Cell. 0321-9897172
Mr. Munsif Shah, PA to Project Dorector
Cell. 0301-5525180
02
Library Tarbela Project Offices
Mr. Rajab Khan
03
Power House Tarbela
Mr. Ahmed Waheed, Chief Engineer

Mr. Muhammad Irfan, Senior Engineer
Mr. Asif Jehan, Senior Engineer
04
05
Office of the XEN(civil) WAPDA
Mr. Sultan Nadeem, XEN (civil)
Colony Right Bank
Cell 0312-9064002
Dispensary ,WAPDA
Dr. Hizbullah, Senior Medical Officer
Colony Right Bank

06
Community Centre, WAPDA
Mr. Niaz Sardar Hussain, Incharge Community
Colony Right Bank
Centre/Dy.Director Admin
Cell. 0301-8883014
Mr. Khalid Saeed, Care Taker
Cell. 0301-8345117
07
Fisheries Department ,Tarbela
Mr. Jan Sher, Assistant Director
O8
Fisheries Department, Haripur
Mr. Muhammad Shafi Marwat, Deputy Director. Cell
(KP)
0346-7868651
Mr. Haydait Shah, Assistant Director
Cell 0300-5996510
09
Forest Department, Haripur(KP)
Mr. Farhad Shah, SDFO

Mr Safdar Rehman, Office Clerk
Phone. 0995611846
10
Wild Life Department, Haripur
Mr. Javed Iqbal, Deputy Range Officer
(KP)
Cell. 0321-4868140
Mr. Abdul Rasheed Tanooli, Deputy Range Officer. Cell.
0346-9595078
11
Forest Department Ghazi (KP)
Mr. Abdul Rasheed, SDFO
12
Tehsil Municipal Administration ,Ghazi
Mr. Sajjad Haider, TMO
WAPDA
August 2011
A-5

Location
Officials Contacted
Cell. 0300-5958563
13
Civil Hospital ,Ghazi
Dr. Qasim Asad, Medical Officer

Cell. 0301-5471320
Ms. Rukhsana Ghous, Senior Nurse
14
Civil Hospital ,Topi
Dr. Arshad ul Islam, Senior M O
15
Girls High School, WAPDA Right Bank
Ms. Atia Beg, Principal
Colony
Mrs. Afia Bashura

Mrs. Jameela Hassan
16
Boys High School, WAPDA Right Bank
Mr. Anwer Ahmed, Headmaster
Colony
Cell. 0314-9898725
Mr. Habib Ullah, Teacher
17
Govt. Girls High School, Pehur Hamlet
Ms. Wakeela Naz, Senior Teacher

Ms. Talat Begham, Teacher
18
Govt. Boys High School, Pehur Hamlet
Mr. Muhammad Javed, Acting Headmaster Cell. 03009082446

Mr. Muhammad Bilal, Teacher
19
Govt. Boys Primary School, Pehur Hamlet
Mr. Iftekhar Ahmed, Headmaster
20
Govt. Dispensary , Pehur Hamlet
Dr. Muhammad Ikram, Incharge
21
Union Councils Office, Topi
Mr. Javed ahmed, Secretary

Mr. Aqeel Ahmed, Supervisor NADRA
Cell. 0336-9410879
22
Ghazi Bortha tarqiati Idara, Hattian
WAPDA
August 2011
Mr. Tasswar Rasheed, Program Coordinator
A-6

Table A.12: List of Persons Contacted During Grass Root Consultation
Village / Settlement
Person Contacted
Contact Number
01
Syed Asif Ali Shah
0300-5394800
02
Muhammad Sarfraz Shah
03
Ghaznfer Shah
04
Shabir Ahmed
05
Javed Iqbal
06
Aqil Shah
07
Alf Din
08
Liaqat Ali
09
Ghazi Hamlet
Syed Shafat Ali shah
12
Muhammad Maskeen
13
Azhar Ali
14
Saeed Shah
15
Muhammad Ali Shah
16
Syed Sharaf Ali Shah
17
Abdul Rasheed
18
Muhammad Din
19
Muhammad Javed
20
Ghulam Qadir
21
Bahadar Sher
22
Taus Khan
23
Usman Sher
24
Allah Baksh
25
Siddique Ahmed
26
Sher Khan
Pehur Hamlet
0300-5258117
Syed Azmat Ali Shah
10
27
0301-5037032
0300-8585695
0300-5688606
Muddsar Iqbal
28
Paris Khan
29
Muhammad Rafique
30
Bakhat Gul
31
Jahangeer
32
Muhammad Waqas
33
Ijaz Ahmed
34
35
WAPDA
August 2011
A-7

Person Contacted
Contact Number
36
Muhammad Javed
0300-9082446
37
Khan Muhammad
38
Allah Baksh
39
Siddique Ahmed
40
Fazal e waliat
41
Kafiat ur Rehman
Boys High School Pehur Hamlet
42
Muntzar Khan
43
Fida Muhammad
44
Muhammad Javed
45
Usman Sher
46
Muhammad Shahzad
47
Iftekhar Ahmed
0344-9215199
48
Khalid Ghafoor
0313-9412721
49
Tanveer Alam
0345-9495220
50
Muhammad Ayub
51
Abdul Hameed
52
Saleem Bahadar
03005523695
0300-9086466
Topi House, Swabi Road Topi

53
Ayub Jan
54
Haji Naiz Muhammad
0300-5689998
55
Yasir Mahmood
0314-9995565
56
Muhammad Abdullah
57
Abdul Haq
58
Anwer Ahmed
033-9136976
59
Gohar Ali
0314-9898725
60
Javed Iqbal
0302-5685033
61
Habib Ullah
0346-5611386
Muhammad Asghar
0300-4875325
Ayaz Awan
034609804212
64
Ali Badsh
0301-5751645
65
Fakher e Alam
0300-9358165
66
Zia ul Haq
0303-5353235
67
Wisal Shah
0345-9491145
68
Waqar Hussan
0302-5470599
69
Umer Khaliq
0300-9712004
Nasar Iqbal
0300-9787113
62
63
70
Boys High School WAPDA Right

Bank Colony
Darra Mohat
71
WAPDA
August 2011
Abdul Sattar
A-8

Person Contacted
Contact Number
72
Sultan Afzal
73
Bashir Khan
74
Jameel Rehman
75
Nazir Hussain
76
Farman Shah
77
Meraj Khan
78
Mohsin Shah
79
Shakir Nawaz
0303-5290611
80
Ashiq Hussain
0302-5306419
81
Khalid Zaman
0332-5727140
82
Sarzameen Khan
83
Rabaz Khan
84
Muhammad Sajjad
0308-8079313
0308-8582757
Kukar Chawa
85
Muslim Khan
86
Rizwan Khan
87
Jalil Rehman
88
Mir Haider
89
Asad Ghani
90
Shahras Khan
91
Mir Muhammad Afzal
92
Aizaz Afzal
93
Muhammad Ajmal
94
Ahmed Nawaz
95
0308-8569281
0306-8168237
0300-5809632
Naeem Khan
Ghari Mera
96
Roshin Din
97
Muqdar Khan
98
Faisal Nawaz
99
Faisal Qadeer
100
Muhammad Naiz
101
Sardar Lal Khan
102
Muhammad Shahzad
0300-5813331
103
Muhammad Adnan
0313-5882582
Umer Khaliq
0300-9712004
104
Sobra City
105
Muhammad Sohail
106
Akhtar Javed
107
Aziz Ullah
WAPDA
August 2011
0301-5751158
0301-8343290
A-9

Person Contacted
Contact Number
108
Fazal-e-Subhan
109
Kareem Khan
0345-2994731
110
Sardar Babar Ali
0343-5257933
111
Bashir ahmed
0300-8306243
112
Muhammad Ilyas
0347-9342694
113
Dr.Ameer Khan
0300-5907301
Syed Niaz Hussain Shah
0300-9139466
115
Nayyar Iqbal
0346-5628747
116
Arsalan Ajmal
0313-5911838
117
Dilfraz Khan
0301-8765881
118
Rab Nawaz
0307-5338729
119
Orengzeb Khan
120
Jalat Khan
121
Tamraz Khan
122
Mukhtar Khan
114
Qazi Pur
123
Khabbal
Bukhtair Khan
124
Ejaz Khan
125
Yasin Khan
126
Khawas Khan
127
Taufail Khan
128
Ikram Ullah
129
Said Akbar
130
Abdul Qadoos
131
Taufail Ahmed
132
Javed Ahmed
0344-4141158
0342-9686533
0300-9343294
0314-9769529
Pontian
133
Waheed Khan
134
Gul Bahadar
135
Yasir Khan
136
Muhammad Idrees
137
Sabaz Ali
WAPDA
August 2011
A-10

Table A.13: List of Participants for Consultation Workshops
1. List of Participants of Stakeholders Consultation Workshop at Ghazi

Date: 24. 02. 2011
Name of Participants
Designation
Department/ Village
1.
Javed Iqbal
PRO (Protocol)
WPADA, Tarbela
2.
Fazli Amin
SE (S & E)
WAPDA, Tarbela
3.
Malik Fazl-i-Karim
G. STPC
Press
4.
Ammad Ali
Affectee
Khalo
5.
Naila Taseen
Sangi Foundation
Khalo Sungi Foundation
6.
Syed Kazim
Dir. Seismology
WAPDA Tarbela
7.
Naseer Iqbal
Ex- Nazim
Umerkhana
8.
Amjad Ali
President
committee
9.
Muhammad Shahbaz
President
Tasbeh Press Club
10
Nasir Mohmmud
Inspector
TDP
11.
Israr Khan
SE (D& S)
WAPDA, TDP
12.
Amin Khan
ASE (D&S)
WAPDA, TDP
13.
Umaer Khaliq
Principal QPS
Ghazi
14.
Assad
Affectee
Dull Dara
15.
Shakir Nawaz
Affectee
Village Kukar Chowa
16.
Abul Kalam
Sr. Engineer
Tarbell 4th HP
17.
Waqas Ahmad
Affectee
Khalo
18.
Bashir Ahmad
Affectee
Village Qazipur
19.
Sajjad Haidar
TMO Ghazi
Local govt. deptt.
20.
Zahoor Ahmad
Teacher
Education Mian Dhari
21.
Syed Farman Shah
Chairman UCC
Mian Dhari
22.
Kamran
Affectee
Village Khbal
23.
Qasim Shah
Affectee
Ummer Khano
24.
Torab Khan
Affectee
Khano
25.
Sardar Shehzad
Affectee
Sobra City
26.
Shabbir Ahmad
Affectee
Ghazi Hamlet
27
Sher Khan
Affectee
Darra Muhat
WAPDA
August 2011
village HADAF
A-11

Name of Participants
Designation
Department/ Village
28
Adeel Khan
ARY Reporter
Ghazi
29
Abdul Rashid
S.D.P.O
Forest Dept
30
M. Afsar
Affectee
Darra Mohat
31
S. Ghazanfar Ali shah
Affecters/NGO
Hamlet Ghazi
32
Mushtaq Malik
Affectees
Ghazi Hamlet
33
Mir Afzal Khan
Ex-chairman
Ghazi/Ghari Meera
34
Rab Nawaz
Affectees
Ghari Meera
35
Abid Ali Khan
Ex-Nazim Ghazi
Ghazi
36
Javed Iqbal
Journalist
Press
37
Hazrat Umar
G. M. Tarbell
WAPDA
38
Syed Munsif Shah
PA T4th Extension
WAPDA, Tarbela
39
Arshad khan
Team leader GBTI
GBTI
40
Adeel Nasir
Piplian
41
Faisal Zaman
Ex MPA
Ghazi
42
Khurshid
Ex Councellor
Ghazi
43
Prof. Khurshid
A.P
Govt. Degree College
44
Shahid Ali
Affectee
Ghazi
45
Rashid Zaman
Student
Khalo
46
Muhammad Idrees
Press/Bureau chief
Khndi
47
Abdul Hafeez
Sr. Sociologist
MMP
2. List for Participants of Stakeholders Consultation Workshop at Topi

Date: 26. 02. 2011
Name
Designation
Department/Village
1.
Tamraiz Khan
Affectee
Village Khabal
2.
Ejaz
Affectee
Village Khabbal
3.
Sarzamin
Affectee
Galla
4.
M. Shareen
Affectee
Galla
5.
Khalid Ghafoor
YADs President
Topi/YAD organization
6.
Asad Aman
Foreseer
Forest Dept Swabi
7.
Mohammad Rafiq
General Librarian
Hamlet
WAPDA
August 2011
A-12

Name
Designation
Department/Village
8.
Javed Khan
Ex-Nazim
Hamlet Pehur
9.
Akmal Zeb
Affectee
Thandkoi
10.
Iftikhar Ahmad
Primary School Teacher Education

Pehur
11.
Yaser Mohammad
Affectee
Topi
12.
Azmat Ali
Journalist
Ashara Azar Swabi Time
13.
Momen Khan
Fisherman
Galla
14.
Saleh Mohammad
Fisherman
Galla
15.
Sardar Shehza
Afectees
Sobra
16.
Taufeeq Zaman
Chief Officer M. C. Topi
Topi Local Govt.
17.
M. Sajjad
In charge Encroachments
Corporation Toll
18.
Syed Anjum Shah
President/social
organization
Tanzeem-e-Naujawanane-Topi
19.
Amjad Ali
Vice president
Press
20.
Niaz Mohammad
Affectee
Topi House, Topi
21.
Mohammad Asfan
Sr. Engineer
Tarbell power house
22.
Muhammad Shafiq
Admin officer
GIK Institute
23.
Javed Zaman
Affectee
Kotha
24.
Hafeez
Affectee
Topi
25.
Tanveer Alam
Politics
Topi
26.
Gul Hayat
Nazim
Union Council Topi
27.
Dr. Fazli Qadir
SMO
Health Dept. Topi
28.
Saryat Khan
Manager Warid
SAD/IDM
29.
Javed Ahmad
Primary School Teacher
Pontian
30.
Ikram-ullah
Pontian
31.
Ahmed Waheed
C.E.(P)Tarbela
WAPDA
32.
Usman Sher
Manager Research
GIKI
33.
Khan Mohammad
School Teacher
Education
34.
Siddiq Ahmed
Education
35.
Abdur Rasheed
Affectee
Pehur Hamlet
36.
Khaista Khan
Affectee
Pehur Hamlet
37.
Jehan Sher khan
WAPDA
August 2011
WAPDA Tarbell\a
A-13

Name
Designation
Department/Village
38.
Abul kalam
Sr. Engineer Tarbell 4th
WAPDA
39.
S. Munsif Shah
PD Tarbela 4th
WAPDA
40.
Khurshid Anwar
Project Director
Tarbell WAPDA
41.
Zafar Mohammad
P.A
Tarbell WAPDA
42.
Arshad
Affectees
Nilab
43.
M. Saeed
President/Social
organization
Islahi Jarga Topi
44.
Sajid Zaman
Fisherman
Batakara
45.
Waqar Ahmad
Social worker
Batakara
46.
Fayyaz Khalid
MFO T4 JVC
T4 Extension Project
47.
Shafqat Ali Malik
DPM
T4 Consultant JV
48.
Niaz Mohammad
Affectee
Khalo
49.
Abdul Hafeez
Sr. Sociologist
MMP
3. List of Participants of Stakeholders Workshop at Islamabad

Date: 17.03.2011
Name
Participants
of Designation
Department/
Organization
Contact No
1.
Dr. M. Mohsin Iqbal
Head Agriculture
Global
Change 051-2077300
Impacts Study Center
Islamabad
2.
Rashiq Ahhmer
A. A. E
Dept. of Archeology
3.
Rana Attia Dastgir
A.D (Ecology)
WAPDA
042Environment
Cell, 35842653
Sunny view Lahore
4.
Khursheed Anwar
PD 4th Extension
WAPDA, Tarbela
0995-662013
5.
Dr. Ashraf Bodla
Chief
Environmentalist
MM Pakistan
03004739866
6.
Azmat Beg
Principal
Environmentalist
MM Pakistan Lahore
03334535623
7.
Prof. Dr. M. I Lone
Dir. Research
PMAS Arid
University
Rawalpindi
8.
Ghazanfar Ali
Head
Sector
WAPDA
August 2011
Water GCISC
051-2202694
Agri. 0333510784
03215573711
A-14

Name
Participants
of Designation
9.
Tanveir
Abbasi
Rizwan Manager
10.
Ashfaq A. Khawar
11.
Waseem
Khan
12.
Dr. Waseem
13.
Ishteqaq
Kokab
14.
Abdul Hafeez
15.
Safeguard Officer
Department/
Organization
Contact No
MM Pakistan
03015452005
ADD / SUO
03215827597
Ahmad Chairman
Pakistan
Wildlife 03335214333
Foundation
Asst. Prof
Federal Directorate of 03335227389

Education
WAPDA
03015710104
Sr. Sociologist
MM Pakistan
03334236494
Saadullah Ayaz
CC Coordinator
IUCN Pakistan
2271027
16.
Numair Aman
HSE
Laraib Energy
03005552418
17.
Asjad Imtiaz Ali
RRC
M/O
Water
Power
and 9244600
18.
Fareed Rokhany
EA ( C)
M/O
Water
Power
and 9244623
19.
Abdul Qadir Rafiq
ACD
Environment
UNDP
8355641
20.
Qudsia Siddiqui
Env. JPSO
UNRCO
8355646
21.
Aneeza Rafique
Student
NUST
03434432841
22.
Dr. M. Anwar Beg
Professor
IESE, NUST
90854308
23.
Mariyam Siddiq
Student
IESE, NUST
24.
Hina Amber Haneef
Student
IESE, NUST
25.
Sameera Zaib
Environmentalist
Project Procurement
26.
P. M. Moshabbir
RSP Water
WRRI,
PARC
27.
Dr. M. Azeem Khan
Director
Social Sciences Inst. / 03009716115

PARC, Islamabad
28.
Tanvir Mohmmud
National
Prog. 7th Floor UNIDO
Coordinator
03335678078
29.
Ayesha Aftab Butt
Programme
Officer
8354814
30.
Iman Malik
Assistant Manager IESCO
31.
Dr. Ahmad Hussain
DPM, MEAs
Ministry
Environment
32.
Ayesha Asghar
NUST Scholar
NUST
WAPDA
August 2011
Ahmad Director (Envir.)
NARC
UNIDO
03459325118
/ 9255074
of 9245605
A-15

Name
Participants
of Designation
Department/
Organization
Contact No
33.
M. Hanif Shareef
Regional Manager
MM Pakistan
03008545493
34.
Zahoor Ahmad
RSA
MM Pakistan
03325513080
35.
Riffat Qamar
DG
W&C
0519250345
36.
Sher Afzal
AD
impact)
37.
M. Omer Khalid
Envr. Specialist
World Bank
03335314736
38.
Col Aqil
Project Manager
MM Pakistan
03335324736
39.
M. Imran
Account Officer
MM Pakistan
03455070837
40.
Naeem-ul-Hassan
Admin Asst.
MMP
03015117949
41.
Ghulam Ali
BD Coordinator
MMP
03335518722
WAPDA
August 2011
(Social IESCO
03212495221
A-16

4. List of Participants of Stakeholders Workshop at Peshawar

30. 03. 2011
Name
Designation
Department/Village
Contact No.
Sher Azam Khan
Dir (M&E)
P & D Deptt.
0333-9061578
Sajjad Ali
DFO (WL)
WLD. KP
0300-5910807
Nawaz Khattak
EDO Agri
Agri . Ext. Deptt
0300-5857393
Uman Ahad
AD (EIA)
EPA
0333-9481997
M. Younas Khan
Monitoring
Inspector
EPA
0308-5875385
Jawad Ali
MI
EPA
0313-5216652
Shahid Hamid
CE TDP
WAPDA
0300-5795242
Ishtiqaq A. Kokab
Director
WAPDA Env. Cell
0301-5710104
Purdil Khan
Advisor
T 4th Extension Project 0308-5220025
10
Rana A. Dastagir
Ecologist
11
Khursheed Anwar
12
Syed Munsif Shah
13
Zahid Abbas
14
Gul Muhammad
15
Muhammad Shafiq
16
WAPDA Env. Cell
042-35842603
WAPDA
0321-9897172
WAPDA
0301-5525180
Assistant PD Irrigation
4th Extension
0333-9055123
PD
Extension
th
Forest Department
0300-5615473
SSRO
Soil Survey of Pak
0333-9327424
Gauher Rehman
PM
MMP
091-5254188
17
M. Nasim Golra
P.D FORD
Irrigation
9213700
18
Jehangir Shah
S. SO
PCSIR, S&T
0300-5884194
19
Inayat-ur-Rehman
SO
PCSIR, Peshawar
0333-9613475
20
Turab Shah
Planning
MMP/Peshawar
Branch
0332-9230940
21
Neelam Asad
E.T
EPA-KPK
9210148
22
Rubina Noor
AD
EPA-KPK
9210148
23
Taj Ali Khan
Prof
UET-Peshawar
0301-8993556
24
Ahmad Nawaz
A. A Eng
Archaeology
Peshawar
0300-5822734
25
Muhammad Ismail Khan
A/C
Archaeology
Peshawar
0300-5951342
WAPDA
August 2011
A-17

Name
Designation
Department/Village
Contact No.
26
Gulshan
Photographer
Roznama Mashriq
0333-9142090
27
Mian Atiq Mahboob
AD(R&S)
EPA (RD Swat)
0333-9399400
28
Abul Kalam
Sr. Engr.
T 4th Ext.
WAPDA
HP, 0345-5999964
29
Prof. Dr. Ikhtiar Khan
Prof
Inst.
of
chemical 0333-9322129
sciences Univ. of
Peshawar
30
Prof Dr. Hasan M. Khan
Prof
Director
31
Shakeel Chander
Advocate
32
Asif Shehzada
DD (P)
EPA .KP. Peshawar
091-9210282
33
Alamgir Sultan
Intern
EPA
0334-9035612
34
Abid Noor Afridi
Chief Water
P&D Department
35
Javed Khattak
SDO
Irrigation
0304-4478228
36
Iftikhar Ahmad
Engineer
NESPAK
0321-9819814
37
Mohsin Ali
GIS analyst
MMP
0345-4199534
38
Abdul Hafeez
Senior
Sociologist
MMP
0333-4236494
39
Abuzar Afghan
Site inspector
MMP
0300-8010479
40
Basharat Ali
Office
Assistant
MMP
0314-9909908
WAPDA
August 2011
& NCE Physical
091-821848
0300-8590241
A-18

Table A.14: List of contacted women during grass root consultation

Participant
Meeting Place
Ghazi Hamlet (left Bank)

1
Sartaj Beghum w/o Mehbob Ali Shah
Riffat Beghum w/o Akbar Khan
Nosheen Imran w/o Imran Khan
Noreen Nisar Ali d/o Nisar Ali
Tehmina Beghum w/o Niaz Muhammad
Fazal Jan w/o Allah Dita
Nasreen Beghum w/o Talib Hussain
Asma Bibi w/o Umer Hayat
Razia Beghum w/oAftab Khan
10
Misbah Khanam w/o Nadeem Iqbal
11
Shaheen Beghum w/o Hassan Zaib
12
Zahida Raheem d/o Raheem Khan
Residence of Nadeem Iqbal
Pehur Hamlet (Right Bank)

13
Talat Beghum w/o v
14
Shabana Beghum w/o Misal Khan
15
Salma Waris d/o Waris Khan
16
Saima Aseem d/o Aseem Khan
17
Shakeela Iqbal w/o Iqbal Khan
18
Taj Bibi w/o Munawar Khan
19
Fehmida Khan w/o Anwar Khan
20
Neelofar Anwar d/o Anwar Khan
21
Shehla Ibrar w/o Ibrar Khan
22
Naheed Gul w/o Muhammad Gul
23
Abida Bibi d/o Fazal dad
24
Rani Sajad w/o Sajad Khan
Residence of Sajjad Khan
Right Bank Colony (Right Bank)

25
Ayesha Naz w/o Sajid Ali
26
Kaneez Akhtar w/o Yousaf Masih
27
Alia Zafar w/o Muhammad Zafar
WAPDA
August 2011
Ladies / Women Club
A-19

Participant
28
Jamila Hassan w/o Muhammad Hassan
29
Salma Shehnaz /o Bashir Ahmad
30
Nobia Naveed w/o Saad Ahmed
31
Summera Ammar d/o Ammar Sher
32
Zeenat bibi w/o Fazal Mabood
33
Ghazala Naveed w/o Naveed Ahmed
34
Shazia w/o Hafeez-ur-rehman
35
Afra Bashra w/o Rana Hameed Ahmed
36
Shagufta Saeed w/o Sohail Azam
Meeting Place
Topi (Right Bank)

37
Sadaf Naeem d/o Sajad Naeem
38
Ayesha Hina d/o Muhammad Saeed
39
Nazia Gul d/o Waris Khan
40
Mariam Hadi Khan w/o Hadi Khan
41
Beghum Iqbal w/o Muhammad Iqbal
42
Aqeeda Nasreen w/o Sikandar Zaib
43
Shereen Taj w/o Momin Khan
44
Wakeela Naz w/o Tariq Akhtar
45
Sarwat Khan w/o Asal Khan
46
Fatima Zafar d/o Muhammad Zafar
47
Summera iqbal d/o Iqbal zafar
48
tayyaba khan w/o muhammad yousaf
Residence of Waris Khan
Darah Mohat (Left Bank)

49
Razia Umar w/o Umar Khitab
50
Sayyeda sattar w/o Sattar Khan
51
Nazreen Nazeer d/o Nazeer Ahmad
52
Shabana bibi w/o Ghulzar Khan
53
Gulmar Jan w/o Nazar Gul
54
Pashmena Jan w/o Mukhiar Khan
55
Absana Wazeer d/o Wazeer Rehman
56
Zeenat Pervaiz w/o Shafqat Khan
57
Zeton Dilwarshah w/o Dilwar shah
WAPDA
August 2011
Residence of Wazeer Rehman
A-20

Participant
58
Dilsana Nisar w/o Nisar Khan
59
Abida Bibi w/o Aslam Hayat
60
Jameela Khantoon w/o Dilafsan
Meeting Place
Qazi pur (Left Bank)

Gulnaz Shafique w/o Muhammad
61
shaafique
62
Tazeem w/o Hidayat Ali Khan
63
Nabeela Azeem w/o Muhammad Azeem
64
Aarzi Irfan w/o Muhammad Irfan
65
Anwar Jan w/o Muhammad Saleem
66
Asmara Khan d/o Muhammad Ajmal
67
Arshia Usman w/o Usman Ali
68
Naheed Bukhshish w/o Bukhshish Ali
69
Aneesa Ali Khan w/o Junaid Ali Khan
Residence of Junaid Ali Khan
Shazia Tabassum w/o Muhammad

70
Naveed
Sobra City (Left Bank)

71
Nasreen Beghum w/o Lal Khan
72
Shazia Babar w/o Sardar Babar Ali
73
Haleema Aleem w/o Muhammad Aleem
74
Rukhsana Naveed w/o Naveed
Residence of Lal Khan
Khabbal (Right Bank)

75
Gul Naseen Khan w/o Fazal Khan
76
Wakhud Bedar d/o Rangzeb Khan
77
Fehmida Jalat Khan w/o Jalat Khan
78
Dilshad Rangzeb w/o Rangzeb Khan
Residence of Jalat khan
Kukar Chawa (Left Bank)

79
Zember Jan w/o Meer Wali
80
Shahida Perveen w/o Muhammad Fazil
81
Husanfia w/o Shah Fazil
82
Zakia Beghum w/o Muhammad Jameel
83
Azra Ashiq w/o Ashiq Hussain
84
Hajrah Beghum w/o Zamzameen
WAPDA
August 2011
Residence of Ashiq Hussain
A-21

Participant
Meeting Place
85
Khber Jan w/o Zeloam Khan
86
Hussan Naz d/o Muhammad Jameel
Pontian (Right Bank)

87
Beena Khan w/o Muhammad Ikram
88
Zar Pari w/o Syed Akbar
89
Shameeda Khan w/o Fida Muhammad
90
Shafa Rehman w/o Ali Rehman
91
Sabeena Ameer w/o Ameer Khan
92
Raheela Naz w/o Abdul Qadoos
93
Asia Khatoon w/o Abdul Qadir
94
Nasreen Afzal w/o Afzaal Khan
95
Gulsana Rafe Ullah w/o Rafe Ullah
96
Zoojan w/o Dilawar Shah
Residence of Syed Akbar
Table A.15: List of Participants of Public Hearing

Venue: Officers Club WAPDA Right Bank Colony, Topi
Date: June 23, 2011
Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
Khursheed Anwar
P. D Tarbela 4th Ext.
0995-662013
Purdil Khan
Advisor WAPDA Tarbela 4th 0308-5220025

Ext
Dr. Amjad Ali Khan
D.D. (EIA) KP-EPA
Muhammad
Khalid
Dr. Hussain Ahmad
Director KP- EPA
Farhea Irshad
Gender Specialist, o/o GM Land 99202735

Acquisition and Resettlement,
WAPDA Lahore
M. Iqbal Shah
Anthropologist o/o GM Land 99202738

Acquisition and Resettlement,
WAPDA Lahore
Maqbool Bangash
Social Development Specialist 042-99202738

o/o GM Land Acquisition and
Resettlement, WAPDA Lahore
Ali Hussain
Assistant Live Stock Specialist
WAPDA
August 2011
Omar Environmental
Islamabad
0333-9322510
Specialist, 0333-5170767
0333-7599914
A-22

Name
Contact. No
10
Kalam
Deputy Director T4th Extension
0345-5999964
11
Munazza Rafique
Agri,.Soil Specialist
0301-7053660
730,G.M (LA&R)
House, Lahore
12
Samimo Panni
WAPDA
Assistant Anthropologist
0345-4013123
LA&R, WAPDA
13
Ahsan Shah
Assistant
M&E
LA&R, WAPDA
14
Malik Waseem Awan
Agronomist LA&R, WAPDA
15
Dr. Aftab Azhar
Irrigation
WAPDA
16
Raheel Mustefa
Assistant Agronomist LA&R
17
Haris Basharat
Assistant
Community 0321-8426969
Development Specialist
18
Ayaz-ul-Haq
Student
Swabi
19
Iftekhar Mali,
MFO
0344-4370080
20
Asif Sahibzada
Kotha Village,Distt. Swabi
0938-271889
21
Zahir Hussain
S.O. Environment Department. 9211406

Peshawar
22
Said Kamal
D.F.O Wildlife Mardan
23
Hazrat Omar
G.M Tarbela
24
Amin-ul-haq
S.E. Tarbela
0345-9694678
25
Mir Farman Khan
S.E (R&L)
0345-9428326
26
Wazir-ur-rehman
Jr. Engineer
0301-9706377
27
Polail Khan
District Officer Social Welfare
0300-9052210
28
Javaid Iqbal
Protocol Officer TDP
0333-5059712
29
Saleem Shahzad
Office Assistant ACE
0300-5813331
30
Javed Ahmed
Primary
Batakara
31
Ikram ullah
Primary School Teacher Pontia
0300-9343294
32
Muqaddam Khan
Dawn Correspondent
0301-8350258
33
Engr.Raz Muhammad
Tehsil
Management 0345-7932460
Administration Swabi
34
Faseer
S.S.G WAPDA
WAPDA
August 2011
Specialist
Specialist 0321-9621432
0321-5119979
LA&R, 0334-9955870
0300-5315110
(Environmentalist), 0301-8990542
School
0937-873606
Teacher
0301-5072019
A-23

Name
Contact. No
35
Mushtaq Chaudhry
Driver
0332-5645874
36
Farman Shah
Mat
0345-9707720
37
Abdul Wahab
Assistant
Ghazi
38
Muhammad Asim
Jr. Clerk
0301-8342582
39
Salim Khan
ATD
0334-9495312
40
Aziz ullah
Head Mali
41
Nisar Ahmad
ACO Swabi
0345-4744721
42
Zafran
Affectee/ Mali
0343-5974095
43
Zard Ali
Forest Guard
0345-59171904
44
Arslan Khan
Affectee/ Mali
45
Mazhar
Jang Newspaper
46
Sareen
Driver
0346-9801669
47
Ahmad Waheed
CECP
0346-5627230
48
S. Bashir Ahmad
RE (E)
0345-9184105
49
Sultan Zeb
Sub. Engineer
50
Rawind Ali
S.S
51
Abid Ahmad
Principal GDC Kotha Swabi
0302-5680813
52
Adeel Khan
ARY one World
0313-5045066
53
Wajid Ali
Old Affectee GHBP
0300-5333306
54
Noor Zaman
Old Affectee TDP
0347-5228818
55
Fareed Khan
Old Affectee GHBP
0300-8585695
56
Muhammad Adu Khan
Peon
0306-8307907
57
Meer Amin
Attendent
58
Zahid Hussain
Carpenter
59
Wajid Hussain
Jr. Engr.
60
Sultan Nadeem
XEN
61
Noor Muhammad
Sr. Photographer
62
M. Shahbaz
Correspondent Nawai Waqt
63
M. Rafiq
Old Affectee GHBP / Topi

Hamlet
64
Taous Khan
Old Affectee GHBP / Topi

Hamlet
WAPDA
August 2011
Education
Officer 0312-9277792
0332-9411768
A-24

Name
Contact. No
65
Gul
Old Affectee TDP/ Topi Hamlet
66
Malik Fazal Karim
G.S Tarbela Press Club Ghazi
67
Haji Jannat
Old Affectee TDP / Pehure

Hamlet
68
Khaista Khan

Hamlet
69
Khursheed

Hamlet
70
Asad
Coli/Old Affectee GHBP
71
Fazal Hussain
Coli/ Old Affectee GHBP
72
Kh. Zahoor Ahmad
Coli/ Old Affectee GHBP
73
Sayed Farman Shah
Chairman U.C Qazipur
74
Gul Badhah
Former/ Affected person
0303-3180790
75
Sajid Ali
Affected person
0302-5137357
76
Mohammad Farooq
Sr. Engineer (SCADA)
0334-8697544
77
Gharis Nawaz
Sr. Engineer
0332-5056159
78
Azeem Khan
Driver/ Affected person
03345-616422
79
Sher Hussain Khan
Divisional Forest Officer Haripur 0346-69222003
0306-5041449
0300-9767063
0995611846
80
Firdoos Khan
Ex. Nazim (Ghazi Hamlet)
0344-9417288
81
M. Usman
Union Vice Chairman
0308-5671073
82
A.Munir
Sub Engineer
0300-5680298
83
Humayun Khan
Sr. Store
person
84
Pervez Shah
Attendant
0345-8985152
85
Abdul Waheed
Affected person
0346-5594233
86
Shah Alam
Sr. Clerk
0334-5608213
87
Fazal Wahab
Affected person
03085597030
88
Aziz-ur-Rehman
Sr. Engineer (M)
0321-5217052
89
Naveed Ahmed
Driver/ Affected person
0345-9500891
90
Milmram Zeb Khan
Student/ Old Affectee TDP
0345-970595955
91
M.Naseem Khan
Sr. Engineer
033-9454331
92
Rehmat Shah
Sr. Engineer
0300-5840871
WAPDA
August 2011
Keeper/
Affected 0345-9691744
A-25

Name
Contact. No
93
Faisal
Student/ Affected person
0345-5950350
94
Javeed Akhter
Sr. Engineer
0300-5829300
95
Ihsan-ulah
Sr. Engineer
0300-5196440
96
Qamar Zaman
Sr. Engineer
0300-5196440
97
Firdous Khan
Ex. Nazim (UC) Ghazi Hemlet.
0344-9417288
98
Sayed Nadeem Shah
Ghazi Hamlet/ Old Affectee TDP 0334-5363583
99
Abdul Rasheed
S.D.F.O Ghazi
0300-8350212
100
Shabir
Press Reporter
0301-5107983
101
Safder Khan
S.C Harripur Forest Division
0300-9195415
102
Naseer Ahmed
A.S.A
0345-6121357
103
Iqbal Shah
Joint Sectary L/Union
0346-9804978
104
Khanzad Shah
Bahria University Islamabad
0334-5524732
105
Naser Iqbal
Ex.Nazim Ghazi
0300-9787113
106
Umer Khalid
Organizer PTI
0300-9712004
WAPDA
August 2011
A-26

Annex B:
Table B.1:
Lists of Flora and Fauna
Medicinal Plants of the Tarbela Area

Species
Acacia modesta Wall.
Fa
Vernacular
mily
Name
Mimosaceae
Phulai
Medicinal Uses
Gum extracted from fruits is used as tonic

and stimulant.
Acacia nilotica (L.) Delile
Mimosaceae
Kikar
Legume is used as tonic, and for treating

dysentery and diabetes. Seeds are also
used for making wine.
Ageratum conyziodes L
Asteraceae
Neel Kanthi
Leaves decoction is used for fever and as

blood purifier.
Albizia lebbeck Benth
Mimosaceae
Sreeia
Seeds are used for curing the severe

kidney infection. Leaves provide shade,
which is considered as sacred for the
treatment of various diseases.
Artemisia scoparia
Asteraceae
Chaho
Papilionaceae
Tindani
Leaves are anthelmintic
Waldst. & Kit.

Astragalus psilocentros
leaves are grind and used for stomach

problems such as ulcer. Dried plant is used
Fisch.
as fuel.
6
Boerhavia procumbens
Nyctaginaceae
It-Sit
Leaves used as tonic.
Papilionaceae
Chachra
Gum is mixed with sugar and milk used as
Banks ex Roxb.
7
Butea monosperma O.
tonic and also given for back ache after
Ktz
birth in women.
8
Buddleja asiatica Lour.
Buddlejaceae
Banna
Leaves, seeds and roots are purgative.

The seeds are used as external application
for skin diseases.
Calotropis procera (Ait.)
Asclepiadaceae
Aq
Whole plant extract is applied on dog bite.

Latex is commonly used for ring worm and
Ait. f.
skin diseases.
10
Carissa opaca Stapf ex
Apocynaceae
Garanda
Haines
11
Cassia occidentalis L.
Leaves are palatable for goat and sheep.

Fruit is edible and blood purifier.
Caesalpiniaceae
Kaswandi
Leaves, seeds and roots are purgative.

The seeds are used as external application
for skin diseases.
12
Dalbergia sissoo Roxb.
Pailionaceae
Shesham
Wood boiled with water is used as blood

purifier, irritation, tumors and pimples and
leprosy. Washing the hair with leaves
increase the length of hairs and make them
healthy.
WAPDA
August 2011
B-1

Species
13
Dodonaea viscosa (L.)
Fa
Vernacular
mily
Name
Sapindaceae
Sanatha
Medicinal Uses
Stem barks are anthelmintic and

astringent. Leaves are used to heal
Jacq.
wounds and cracked skin. Wood oil is used

for toothache
14
Ficus benghalensis L.
Moraceae
Bohar
Latex is highly aphrodisiac.
15
Ficus palmata Forssk.
Moraceae
Phugwara
Fruit is edible and laxative. It soothes the

bee sting by simple rubbing on the skin.
Melia azedarach (L.)
16
Leliaceae
Draik
Pers.
17
Morus alba L.
Leaves and fruit powder are used as blood

purifier, fever and diabetes.
Moraceae
Marrotch
Fresh fruit grind and used as tonic and

throat irritation.
18
Morus nigra L.
Moraceae
Marrotch
Fresh fruit is ground and used as tonic and

for cough and throat irritation.
19
Taraxacum officinalis
Asteraceae
Hund
Root is used is useful for heart disorders.
Rhamnaceae
Sezan
Leaves are used to cure scabies.
Rhamnaceae
Sezan
Leaves and fruit is used in gas trouble.
Webber
Ziziphus nummularia
20
(Burm. f.) Wight & Arn.

21
Ziziphus mauritiana Lam.
Table B.2:
Vegetative Pattern at Different Locations of the Project Area
Location
Vegetation of the powerhouse area (along slopes
from base to 100 m above)
Vegetative Species
Lantana camara, Leucaena leucocephala, Pinus
roxburghii, Dodonaea viscosa, Acacia modesta and
Acacia nilotica, Ficus spp., Morus spp., Dalbergia sissoo,
Carissa opaca, Otostegia limbata, Maytenus royleana and
Ziziphus mauritiana,
Vegetation at the downstream end point (Topi)
Acacia modesta and Dodonaea viscose, Colebrookea

oppositifolia, Justicia adhatoda, Budleja asiatica, Lantana
cammara, Segretia thea, Ageratum conyzoides, Carissa
opaca and Otostegia limbata.
Vegetation of labor area

Upstream: main Tarbela spill way (harbor area)
Parthenium hysterophorus and Lantana camara.

Dodonaea-Acacia, Pinus roxburghii, Malvastrum
coromandelianum, Saccharum benghalensis, Oxalis
corniculata, Buddleja asiatica, Justicia adhatoda,
Themeda anathera, Setaria glauca, Seteria italica,
Heteropogon contortus, Saccharum spontaneum and
Erioscirpus comosus.
WAPDA
August 2011
B-2

Location
Vegetation at upstream end point
Vegetative Species
Buddleja asiatica, Dodonaea viscose, Themeda anathera,
Acacia modesta and Rumex hastatus, Malvastrum
coromandelianum, Oxalis corniculata, Boerhavia
procumbens, Trifolium repens and Micromeria biflora.
Vegetation at borrow area (Gandaf)
Ipomoea carnea, Justicia adhatoda, Grewia villosa,

Broussonetia papyrifera and Melia azedarach.
Vegetation at borrow area (Dara)
Justicia-Themeda-Ziziphus, Acacia-Justicia, Solanum

surretense, Solanum nigrum, Segretia thea, Artemisia
scoparia, Verbascum thapsus, Maytenus royleana, Kikxia
incana, Rumex dentatus, Melia azedarach, Albizia
lebbeck, and Broussonetia papyrifera, Solanum
surratense, Solanum nigrum, Cannabis sativa,
Chenopodium ambrosoides, Cuscuta reflexa, Cynodon
dactylon, Datura innoxia, Xanthium strumarium, Mentha
royleana,
Vegetation along cultivated fields and villages
Zea mays and Triticum aestivum, Capsicum annuum,

Abelmoschus esculentus, Luffa cylindrica, Cucurbita
pepo, Juglans regia, Diospyros lotus, Morus nigra and
Mangifera indica, Broussonetia papyrifera and Melia
azedarach, Cannabis sativa, Urtica dioica, Conyza
Canadensis, Amaranthus viridis, Bidens biternata,
Commelina benghalensis,Fumaria indica, Erodium
cicutarium, Geranium ocillatum.
Vegetation of Haripur
Acacia modesta, Acasia nilotica, Olea ferruginea,

Capparis deciduas Juglans regia, Acacia modesta,
Quercus incana, Dodonaea viscosa, Parrotiopsis
jacquemontiana, Cedrella toona, Ailanthus altissima,
Cotinus coggyria, Myrsine Africana,Lonicera
quinquelocularis,Ficu palmata, Sagretia theezan,
Anagallis arvensis, Acyranthes aspera, Taraxacum
officinale, Oxalis corniculata, Papaver hybridum Trifolium
repens, Solanum nigrum, Silybum marianu, etc.
Vegetation of Swabi
Acacia modesta, Ziziphyus mauritiana, Asparagus

gracilus, Oxalis corniculata, Hypericum oblogifolium,
Woodfordia fruticos, Typha domingensis, Mentha
piperata, Artemisia scoparia
WAPDA
August 2011
B-3

Location
Vegetation of Bellas (islands) downstream of Ghazi
Barrage
Vegetative Species
Trees:
Acacia modesta, Acacia nilotica, Ailanthus
altisissima, Broussonetia papyrifera, Dalbergia sissoo,

Ficus virgata, Morus nigra, Ricinus communis, Tamarix
aphylla, Tamarix indica, Zizyphus mauritiana.
Shrubs: Acacia hydaspica, Anisomeles indica, Calotropis

procera, Dodonea viscose, Lantana camara, Mimosa
rubicaulis, Nerium indicum, Ottostegia limbata,
Seggeretia theezans, Vitex negundo, Withania somnifera,
Xanthium strumarium, Zizyphus nummularia.
Herbs: Asparagus racemosus, Alhaji camelorum,

Amaranthus viridis, Anagalis arvensis, Arenaria
serpyllifolia, Argyrolobium roseum, Astragalus punjabicus,
Astragalus scorpiurus, Blumea membrancea, Campanula
canescens, Cannabis sativa, Carthamus oxycantha,
Chenopodium album, Chenopodium murale, Chrozophora
tinctoria, Commelina benghalnsis, Commelina
benghalnsis, Conyza bonarriensis, Cousinea prolifera,
Crotalarria medicaginea, Cuscuta europea, Cynoglossum
lanceolatum, Diarthron vesiculosum, Erodium cicutarium,
Eryngium coeruleum, Erythraea ramosissima, Euphorbia
pilulifera, Euphorbia prosrtrata, Filago spathulata,
Fumaria parviflora, Gastrocotyle hispida, Gnaphalium
spathulatum, Heliotropium strigosum, Hydrilla verticillata,
Indigofera linifolia, Kickxia rammosissima, Lactuca
scariola, Launnea procumbens, Launnea procumbens,
Linum strictum, Malcolmia cabulica, Malva neglecta,
Mazus japonicus, Medicago ploymorpha, Melilotus alba,
Melilotus indica, Mentha longifolia, Micromeria biflora,
Mimulus strictus, Oxalis corniculatus, Onobrychis
stewartii, Onopordum acanthium, Pentanema vestitum,
Phagnalon spathulatum, Phylla nodiflora, Physalis
minima, Polygala abyssinica, Polygonum barbatum,
Polygonum plebeium, Potamogeton perfoliatus,
Psammogeton biternatum, Ranunculus muricatus,
Rostraria pumila, Rumes dentatus, Salix acmophylla,
Salvia moorcroftiana, Salvia plebeian, Saussurea
candicans, Serratula pellida, Serratula pellida, Solanum
nigrum, Solanum surattense, Sonchus asper, Sonchus
oleraceus, Stellaria media, Taraxacum sp., Trigonella
incise, Verbasscum thapsus, Veronica agrestris, Veronica
beccabunga, Veronica biloba, Vicia sativa, Vicoa vestita.
WAPDA
August 2011
B-4

Table B.3:
List of Cultivated Plants in the Project Area

Species
Family
Habit
Habitat
Dalbergia sissoo Roxb.
Papilionaceae
Tree
Dry conditions
Duranta repens L.
Verbenaceae
Tree
Dry conditions
Eucalyptus sp.
Myrtaceae
Tree
Cool and moist
Jasminum humile, L.
Oleaceae
Shrub
Msic conditions
Lagerstroemia indica L.
Myrtaceae
Tree
Dry places
Leucaena leucocephala
Tree
Dry
Oleaceae
Shrub
Dry places
Pinaceae
Tree
Xeric conditions
Tree
Mesic conditions
(Lam.) R. de Wit.
7
Ligustrum ovalifolium
Mimosaceae
Hassk.
8
Pinus roxburghii Sarg.
Pterospermum acerifolium
L.
Table B.4:
Sterculiaceae
Plants Recommended for Cultivation at Different Locations.
Location
Road sides
Vegetative Species
Jacaranda mimosaefolia D. Don, Bauhinia purpurea
Linn., Cassia fistula Linn. Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf.,
Lagerstroemia flosreginae Retz., Magnolia grandiflora
Linn., Salix babylonica Linn., Mimusops elengi Linn.
and Hibiscus rosa-sinensis,
Hill tops and upper slopes

Lower hill slopes
Spoil deposits
Pinus roxburghii, Grevillea striata, Acacia nilotica

Acacia modesta, Ziziphus mauritiana
Cassia fistula, Alestonia scholaris, Morus alba,
Gravillea robusta, Bohimia variegata
Labor camps
Cestrum noctumum, Ficus elastic, Hibiscus sp. Rosa

rubiginos, Rosa berifolia, Jasmine sp. Cestrum
nocturnum, Lawsonia inermis
Powerhouse area
Cestrum nocturnum, Rosa berifolia,Verticillatasp.

Rosa rubiginos
WAPDA
August 2011
B-5

Table B.5:
Bird Species Observed During Survey

Common Name
Zoological Name
Family
Black Redstart
Phoenicurus ochruros
Muscicapidae
Eurasian Blackbird
Turdus merula
Muscicapidae
Blue-whistling Thrush
Myophonus caeruleus
Muscicapidae
Blue Rock Thrush
Montocola solitaries
Muscicapidae
Desert Wheatear
Oenanthe deserti
Muscicapidae
Plain Martin
Riparia diluta
Hirundinidae
Common Rose Finch
Carpodacus erythrinus
Fringillidae
Common Starling
Sturnus vulgaris
Sturnidae
Common Myna
Acridotheres tristris
Sturnidae
10
Bank Myna
Acridotheres ginginianus
Sturnidae
11
White Wagtail
Motacilla alba
Motacillidae
12
White Browed Wagtail
Motacilla maderaspatensis
Motacillidae
13
Golden Oriole
Oriolus oriolus
Oriolidae
14
Common Babbler
Turdoides caudatus
Sylviidae
15
Jungle Babbler
Turdoides striatus
Sylviidae
16
Common Chiffchaff
Phylloscopus collybita
Phyllooscopidae
17
Greenish Warbler
Phylloscopus trochiloides
Sylviidae
18
Crested Lark
Galerida cristata
Alaudidae
19
House Sparrow
Passer domestica
Passeridae
20
White-throated Kingfisher
Halcyon smyrnensis
Alcedinidae
21
Long Tail Shrike
Lanius schach
Laniidae
22
White-cheeked bulbul
Pycnonotus leucogenys
Pycnonotidae
23
Red-vented Bulbul
Pycnonotus cafer
Pycnonotidae
24
Black Kite
Milvus migrans
Accipitridae
25
Eurasian Sparrowhawk
Accipter nisus
Accipitridae
26
Common Kestrel
Falco tinnunculus
Falconidae
27
Black Francolin
Francolinus francolinus
Phasianidae
28
Grey Francolin
Francolinus pondicerianus
Phasianidae
29
Rock Pigeon
Columba livia
Columbidae
30
Oriental Turtle Dove
Streptopelia orintalis
Columbidae
31
Laughing Dove
Streptopelia senegalensis
Columbidae
32
Eurasian Collared Dove
Streptopelia decaocta
Columbidae
33
Common Sandpiper
Actitis hypoleucos
Scolopacidae
34
Little Stint
Calidris minuta
Scolopacidae
35
Eurasian Cuckoo
Cuculus canorus
Cuculidae
WAPDA
August 2011
B-6

Common Name
Zoological Name
Family
36
Common Hoope
Upupa epops
Upupidae
37
Mallard
Anus Platyrhynchos
Anatidae
38
Common Moorhen
Gallinula Choloropus
Rallidae
39
Common Coot
Fulica atra
Rallidae
40
Little Grebe
Tachybaptus ruficollis
Podicipedidae
41
Little Cormorant
Phalacrocorax niger
Phalacrocoracidae
42
Little Egret
Egretta garzetta
Ardeidae
43
Cattle Egret
Bubulcus ibis
Ardeidae
44
Pond Heron
Ardeola grayii
Ardeidae
45
Common Snipe
Gallinago Gallinago
Scolopacidae
46
Red-wattled Lapwing
Vanellusindicus
Caradriidae
47
Rufous Tree Pie
Dendrocitta vagabunda
Corvidae
48
House Crow
Corvus Splendens
Corvidae
49
Black Drongo
Dicrurus macrocercus
Corvidae
50
Blue Throat
Erithacus svecicus
Muscicapidae
51
Caspian Tern
Sterna caspia
Rallidae
52
Peedy filed Pipet
Anthus rufulus
Motacillidae
Table B.6:
Common Fish Species in the Tarbela Dam Reservoir
Local Name
Scientific Name
Indigenous Species
Seenghara
Mystus seenghala
Seenghara
Mystus aor
Masher
Tor tor, Tor putitora
Mullah
Schizothorax spp.
Goonch
Bagarius bagarius
Sunnee
Cirrhinus reba
Daula
Saul
Mullee
Channa punctatus
Channa marulius
Wallago attu
Talapia
Oreochromis mosombica
Bam
Mastacembelus armatus
Pari
Notopterus notopterus
Sareeha
Kharni
Labeo gonius
Puntius sarana
Cultivated Species
WAPDA
August 2011
B-7

Local Name
Scientific Name
Mori
Cirrhinus mrigala
Rohu
Labeo rohita
Thaila
Catla catla
Grass carp
Ctenophary ngodon idella
Silver carp
Hypophthalmichthys molitrix
Gulfam
Cyprinus carpio
Source WAPDA Fisheries Unit, Tarbela
Table B.7:
Species of Tarbela and Ghazi Barrage Reservoirs

Species
Family
Local Name
Endemic species
1
Notopterus notopterus (Pallas)
Notopteridae
Pari
Salmostoma bacaila (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chilwa
Barilius vagra (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chilwa
Danio devario (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Poongh
Schizothorax labiatus (McClelland)
Cyprinidae
Chun
Schizothoraz esocinus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Swati
Schizothorax plagistomus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Swati
Gara gotyla (Grey)
Cyprinidae
Pathar chatt
Aspidoparia morar (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Goloo
10
Crossochelius latius diplocheilus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Poonngh
11
Labeo dero (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Mori
12
Tor Putitora (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Mahasheer
13
Puntious sophore (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chiddu
14
Punctius ticto (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chiddu
15
Botia dayi (Hora)
Cobitidae
Chipper
16
Nemacheilus choprai (Hora)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
17
Nemacheilus botia (Hamilton)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
18
Nemacheilus alipidotus alipidotus (Mirza &
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
Banarescu)
19
Nemacheilus corica (Hamilton)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
20
Nemacheilus stoliczkai (Steindachner)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
21
Clupisoma murius naziri (Mirza & Awan)
Schilbeidae
22
Glyptothorax punjabiensis (Mirza & Kashmiri)
Sisoridae
Chotat Khagga
23
Glyptothorax platypogonoides (Bleeker)
Sisoridae
Chota Khagga
24
Gagta cenia (Hamilton)
Sisoridae
Peela Kingar
WAPDA
August 2011
B-8

Species
Family
Local Name
25
Mystus tengara (Hamilton)
Bagridae
Kingar
26
Colisia lalius (Hamilton)
Belontidae
Kanghi
27
Mastacembelus armatus (Lecapede)
Mastacemblidae
Sanp Machli
28
Channa punctatus (Bloch)
Channidae
Dola
Channa marulia (Hamilton)
Channidae
Saul
Ctenopharyngodon idella (Valenceinnes)
Cyprinidae
Grass Carp
Hypophthalmichthys molitrix (Valenceinnes)
Cyprinidae
Silver Carp
Cyprinus carpio (Linnaeus)
Cyprinidae
Grass Carp
Oreochromis niloticus (Linnaeus)
Cichlidae
Toffee
Exotic Species
WAPDA
August 2011
B-9

Annex C.
Introduction
The objective of preparation of the Environmental Code of Practices (ECP) is to address

less significant environmental impacts and all general construction related impacts of the
proposed project implementation. The ECPs will provide guidelines for best operating
practices and environmental management guidelines to be followed by the contractors for
sustainable management of all environmental issues. This ECP will be annexed in the
general conditions of all the contracts carried out under the T4HP project.
The list of ECPs prepared for the T4HP is given below:
ECP 1: Waste Management
ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Substances Management
ECP 3: Water Resources Management
ECP 4: Drainage Management
ECP 5: Soil Quality Management
ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control
ECP 7: Borrow Areas Development & Operation
ECP 8: Air Quality Management
ECP 9: Noise and Vibration Management
ECP 10: Protection of Flora
ECP 11: Protection of Fauna
ECP 12: Protection of Fisheries
ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management
ECP 14: Construction Camp Management
ECP 15: Cultural and Religious Issues
ECP 16: Workers Health and Safety
The Contractor can also prepare a Construction Environmental Action Plan (CEAP)
demonstrating the manner in which the Contractor will comply with the requirements of
ECPs and the mitigation measures proposed in the EMMP of the ESA Report. The CEAP
will form the part of the contract documents and will be used as monitoring tool for
compliance. Violation of the compliance requirements will be treated as non-compliance
leading to the corrections or otherwise imposing penalty on the contractors.
WAPDA
August 2011
C-1

ECP 1: Waste Management

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
General Waste
Hazardous
Waste
Environmental
Impacts
Soil and water pollution
from the improper
management of wastes
and excess materials
from the construction
sites.
Health hazards and

environmental impacts
due to improper waste
management practices
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines

The Contractor shall:
- Develop waste management plan for various
specific waste streams (e.g., reusable waste,
flammable waste, construction debris, food waste
etc.) prior to commencing of construction and
submit to WAPDA for approval.
- Organize disposal of all wastes generated during
construction in an environmentally acceptable
manner. This will include consideration of the
nature and location of disposal site, so as to cause
less environmental impact.
- Minimize the production of waste materials by
3R (Reduce, Recycle and Reuse) approach.
- Segregate and reuse or recycle all the wastes,
wherever practical.
- Collect and transport non-hazardous wastes to all
the approved disposal sites.
- Train and instruct all personnel in waste
management practices and procedures as a
component of the environmental induction
process.
- Provide refuse containers at each worksite.
- Request suppliers to minimize packaging where
practicable.
- Place a high emphasis on good housekeeping
practices.
- Maintain all construction sites in a cleaner, tidy
and safe condition and provide and maintain
appropriate facilities as temporary storage of all
wastes before transportation and final disposal.
- Collect chemical wastes in 200 liter drums (or
WAPDA
August 2011
similar sealed container), appropriately labeled for

safe transport to an approved chemical waste
depot.
Store, transport and handle all chemicals avoiding
potential environmental pollution.
Store all hazardous wastes appropriately in
bunded areas away from water courses.
Make available Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) for hazardous materials on-site during
construction.
Collect hydrocarbon wastes, including lube oils,
for safe transport off-site for reuse, recycling,
treatment or disposal at approved locations.
Construct concrete or other impermeable flooring
to prevent seepage in case of spills
C-2

ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Substance Management

Project
Activity/
Impact
Source
Environmental Impacts
Fuels
and Materials used in
hazardous
construction have a
goods.
potential to be a source of
contamination. Improper
storage and handling of
fuels, lubricants,
chemicals and hazardous
goods/materials on-site,
and potential spills from
these goods may harm the
environment or health of
construction workers.
- Prepare spill control procedures and submit the

plan for WAPDA approval.
- Train the relevant construction personnel in

-
WAPDA
August 2011
handling of fuels and spill control procedures.

Store dangerous goods in bunded areas on a top
of a sealed plastic sheet away from watercourses.
Refueling should occur only within bunded
areas.
Make available MSDS for chemicals and
dangerous goods on-site.
Transport waste of dangerous goods, which
cannot be recycled, to a designated disposal site
approved by EPA.
Provide absorbent and containment material
(e.g., absorbent matting) where hazardous
material are used and stored and personnel
trained in the correct use.
Provide protective clothing, safety boots,
helmets, masks, gloves, goggles, to the
construction personnel, appropriate to materials
in use.
Make sure all containers, drums, and tanks that
are used for storage are in good condition and
are labeled with expiry date. Any container,
drum, or tank that is dented, cracked, or rusted
might eventually leak. Check for leakage
regularly to identify potential problems before
they occur.
Store hazardous materials above flood plain
level.
Put containers and drums in temporary storages
in clearly marked areas, where they will not be
run over by vehicles or heavy machinery. The
area should preferably slope or drain to a safe
collection area in the event of a spill.
Put containers and drums in permanent storage
areas on an impermeable floor that slopes to a
safe collection area in the event of a spill or leak.
Take all precautionary measures when handling
and storing fuels and lubricants, avoiding
environmental pollution.
Avoid the use of material with greater potential
for contamination by substituting them with
more environmentally friendly materials.
C-3

ECP 3: Water Resources Management

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Hazardous
Water pollution from the
Material
and storage, handling and
Waste
disposal of hazardous
materials and general
construction waste, and
accidental spillage
Discharge from During construction both

construction
surface and groundwater
sites
quality may be
deteriorated due to
construction activities in
the river, sewerages from
construction sites and
work camps. The
construction works will
modify groundcover and
topography changing the
surface water drainage
patterns, including
infiltration and storage of
storm water. The change
in hydrological regime
leads to increased rate of
runoff and in sediment
and contaminant loading,
increased flooding,
groundwater
contamination, and effect
habitat of fish and other
aquatic biology.
Soil
Erosion Soil erosion and dust
and siltation
from the material
stockpiles will increase
the sediment and
contaminant loading of
surface water bodies.
WAPDA
August 2011

- Follow the management guidelines proposed in

ECPs 1 and 2.
- Minimize the generation of sediment, oil and

grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter,
debris and any form of waste (particularly
petroleum and chemical wastes). These
substances must not enter waterways, storm
water systems or underground water tables
- Install temporary drainage works (channels and

bunds) in areas required for sediment and
erosion control and around storage areas for
construction materials
- Install temporary sediment basins, where
appropriate, to capture sediment-laden run-off
from site
- Divert runoff from undisturbed areas around the
construction site
- Stockpile materials away from drainage lines
- Prevent all solid and liquid wastes entering
waterways by collecting solid waste, oils,
chemicals, bitumen spray waste and
wastewaters from brick, concrete and asphalt
cutting where possible and transport to a
approved waste disposal site or recycling depot
- Wash out ready-mix concrete agitators and
concrete handling equipment at washing
facilities off site or into approved bunded areas
on site. Ensure that tires of construction
vehicles are cleaned in the washing bay
(constructed at the entrance of the construction
site) to remove the mud from the wheels. This
should be done in every exit of each
construction vehicle to ensure the local roads
are kept clean.
- Stabilize the cleared areas not used for

construction activities with vegetation or
appropriate surface water treatments as soon as
practicable following earthwork to minimize
erosion
- Ensure that roads used by construction vehicles
are swept regularly to remove sediment.
- Water the material stockpiles, access roads and
bare soils on an as required basis to minimize
dust. Increase the watering frequency during
C-4

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
Construction works in the
activities
in water bodies will increase
water bodies
sediment and
contaminant loading, and
effect habitat of fish and
other aquatic biology.
Drinking water
Groundwater at shallow
depths might be
contaminated and hence
not suitable for drinking
purposes.

periods of high risk (e.g. high winds)
- Dewater sites by pumping water to a sediment

basin prior to release off site do not pump
directly off site
- Monitor the water quality in the runoff from the
site or areas affected by dredge plumes, and
improve work practices as necessary
- Protect water bodies from sediment loads by silt
screen or bubble curtains or other barriers
- Minimize the generation of sediment, oil and
grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter,
debris and any form of waste (particularly
petroleum and chemical wastes). These
substances must not enter waterways, storm
water systems or underground water tables.
- Use environment friendly and non toxic slurry
during construction of piles to discharge into
the river.
- Reduce infiltration of contaminated drainage
through storm water management design
- Do not discharge cement and water curing used
for cement concrete directly into water courses
and drainage inlets.
- Control the quality of groundwater to be used
Depletion and pollution

of groundwater resources
WAPDA
August 2011
for drinking water on the bases of NEQS and

World Bank standards for drinking water. Safe
and sustainable discharges are to be ascertained
prior to selection of pumps.
Tube wells will be installed with due regard for
the surface environment, protection of
groundwater from surface contaminants, and
protection of aquifer cross contamination
All tube wells, test holes, monitoring wells that
are no longer in use or needed shall be properly
decommissioned
Install monitoring wells both upstream and
downstream areas near construction yards and
construction camps to regularly monitor and
report on the water quality and water levels.
Protect groundwater supplies of adjacent lands
C-5


Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Excavation and
earth
works,
and
construction
yards
Lack of proper drainage

for rainwater/liquid waste
or wastewater owing to
the construction activities
harms environment in
terms of water and soil
contamination, and
mosquito growth.
- Prepare a program for prevent/avoid standing

-
Ponding
water
of Health hazards due to

mosquito breeding
WAPDA
August 2011
waters, which EMSU will verify in advance and

confirm during implementation
Provide alternative drainage for rainwater if the
construction works/earth-fillings cut the
established drainage line
Establish local drainage line with appropriate
silt collector and silt screen for rainwater or
wastewater connecting to the existing
established drainage lines already there.
Rehabilitate road drainage structures
immediately if damaged by contractors road
transports.
Build new drainage lines as appropriate and
required for wastewater from construction yards
connecting to the available nearby recipient
water bodies. Ensure wastewater quality
conforms to the relevant standards provided by
EPA, before it being discharged into recipient
water bodies.
Ensure the internal roads/hard surfaces in the
construction yards/construction camps that
generate has storm water drainage to
accommodate high runoff during downpour and
that there is no stagnant water in the area at the
end of the downpour.
Construct wide drains instead of deep drains to
avoid sand deposition in the drains that require
frequent cleaning.
Provide appropriate silt collector and silt screen
at the inlet and manholes and periodically clean
the drainage system to avoid drainage
congestion
Protect natural slopes of drainage channels to
ensure adequate storm water drains.
Regularly inspect and maintain all drainage
channels to assess and alleviate any drainage
congestion problem.
Reduce infiltration of contaminated drainage
through storm water management design
Do not allow ponding of water especially near
the waste storage areas and construction camps
Discard all the storage containers that are
capable of storing of water, after use or store
them in inverted position
C-6

ECP 5: Soil Quality Management

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Storage
of Spillage of hazardous
hazardous and and toxic chemicals will
toxic chemicals contaminate the soils
Construction
Erosion from
material stock construction material
piles
stockpiles may
contaminate the soils
WAPDA
August 2011

- Strictly manage the wastes management plans

proposed in ECP1 and storage of materials in
ECP2
- Construct appropriate spill contaminant
facilities for all fuel storage areas
- Establish and maintain a hazardous materials
register detailing the location and quantities of
hazardous substances including the storage, use
of disposals
- Train personnel and implement safe work
practices for minimizing the risk of spillage
- Identify the cause of contamination, if it is
reported, and contain the area of contamination.
The impact may be contained by isolating the
source or implementing controls around the
affected site
- Remediate the contaminated land using the most
appropriate available method to achieve required
commercial/industrial guideline validation
results
- Protect the toe of all stockpiles, where erosion is

likely to occur, with silt fences, straw bales or
bunds
C-7

ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Clearing of
construction
sites
Construction
activities and
material
stockpiles
Cleared areas and slopes

are susceptible for erosion
of top soils, that affects
the growth of vegetation
which causes ecological
imbalance.
The impact of soil erosion

are
(i) Increased run off and
sedimentation causing a
greater flood hazard to
the downstream, (ii)
destruction of aquatic
environment in nearby
lakes, streams, and
reservoirs caused by
erosion and/or deposition
of sediment damaging the
spawning grounds of fish,
and
(iii) destruction of
vegetation by burying or
gullying.
WAPDA
August 2011
- Reinstate and protect cleared areas as soon as

possible.
- Mulch to protect batter slopes before planting

- Cover unused area of disturbed or exposed
surfaces immediately with mulch/grass
turfings/tree plantations
- Locate stockpiles away from drainage lines

- Protect the toe of all stockpiles, where erosion
-
is likely to occur, with silt fences, straw bales

or bunds
Remove debris from drainage paths and
sediment control structures
Cover the loose sediments and water them if
required
Divert natural runoff around construction areas
prior to any site disturbance
Install protective measures on site prior to
construction, for example, sediment traps
Control drainage through a site in protected
channels or slope drains
Install cut off drains on large cut/fill batter
slopes to control water runoff speed and hence
erosion
Observe the performance of drainage structures
and erosion controls during rain and modify as
required.
C-8

ECP 7: Borrow Areas Development & Operation

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Development
and operation of
borrow areas
In case, the borrow pits

developed by the
Contractor, there will be
impacts on local
topography, landscaping
and natural drainage.
- Reuse excavated or disposed material available

in the project area to the maximum extent
possible
- Identify borrow pits in consultation with the
local governments and WAPDA.
- Obtain the borrow material from:
- barren land or land without tree cover outside
the road reserve;
- Do not dug the borrow pits within 5m of the
toe of the final section of the road
embankment.
- Dig the borrow pits continuously. Ridges of not
less than 8 m widths shall be left at intervals
not exceeding 300 m and small drains should
be cut through the ridges to facilitate drainage
- Slope the bed level of the borrow pits, as far as
possible, down progressively towards the
nearest cross drain, if any, and do not lower it
than the bed of the cross-drain, to ensure
efficient drainage. .
Follow the below for restoration of borrow areas
are:
- Return stockpiled topsoil to the borrow pit if is

used for agriculture;
- return stockpiled topsoil to the borrow pit and

all worked areas to be stabilized through revegetation using local plants.
- Control at each site by ensuring that base of the
borrow pit drains into a sediment trap prior to
discharging from the site.
WAPDA
August 2011
C-9


Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
vehicular traffic
Construction
machinery
Air quality can be

adversely affected by
vehicle exhaust emissions
and combustion of fuels.
Air quality can be

adversely affected by
emissions from
machinery and
combustion of fuels.
- Fit vehicles with appropriate exhaust systems

and emission control devices, in compliance
with the NEQS. Maintain these devices in good
working condition.
- Operate the vehicles in a fuel efficient manner
- Cover haul vehicles carrying dusty materials
moving outside the construction site
- Impose speed limits on all vehicle movement at
the worksite to reduce dust emissions
- Control the movement of construction traffic
- Water construction materials prior to loading
and transport
- Service all vehicles regularly to minimize
emissions
- Limit the idling time of vehicles not more than
2 minutes
- Fit machinery with appropriate exhaust systems

-
Construction
activities
Dust generation from

construction sites,
material stockpiles and
access roads is a nuisance
in the environment and
can be a health hazard.
WAPDA
August 2011
and emission control devices. Maintain these

devices in good working condition.
Focus special attention on containing the
emissions from generators
Machinery causing excess pollution (e.g. visible
smoke) will be banned from construction sites
Service all equipment regularly to minimize
emissions
Water the material stockpiles, access roads and
bare soils on an as required basis to minimize
the potential for environmental nuisance due to
dust. Increase the watering frequency during
periods of high risk (e.g. high winds)
Minimize the extent and period of exposure of
the bare surfaces
Reschedule earthwork activities or vegetation
clearing activities, where practical, if necessary
to avoid during periods of high wind and if
visible dust is blowing off-site
Restore disturbed areas as soon as practicable
by vegetation/grass-turfing
Store the cement in silos and minimize the
emissions from silos by equipping them with
filters.
C-10


Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
vehicular traffic
Construction
machinery
Construction
activity
WAPDA
August 2011
Noise quality will be

deteriorated due to
vehicular traffic
- Maintain all vehicles in order to keep it in good

working order in accordance with manufactures
maintenance procedures
- Make sure all drivers will comply with the
traffic codes concerning maximum speed limit,
driving hours, etc.
Noise and vibration may

have an impact on people,
- Appropriately site all noise generating activities
property, fauna, livestock
to avoid noise pollution to local residents
and the natural
- Use the quietest available plant and equipment
environment.
- Modify equipment to reduce noise (for
example, noise control kits, lining of truck trays
or pipelines)
- Maintain all equipment in order to keep it in
good working order in accordance with
manufactures maintenance procedures
- Install acoustic enclosures around generators to
reduce noise levels.
- Fit high efficiency mufflers to appropriate
construction equipment
Noise and vibration may
have an impact on people,
- Notify adjacent residents prior to any typical
property, fauna, livestock
noise event outside of daylight hours
and the natural
- Educate the operators of construction
environment.
equipment on potential noise problems and the
techniques to minimize noise emissions
- Employ best available work practices on-site to
minimize occupational noise levels
- Install temporary noise control barriers where
appropriate
- Notify affected people if noisy activities will be
undertaken, e.g. blasting
- Plan activities on site and deliveries to and from
site to minimize impact
- Monitor and analyze noise and vibration results
and adjust construction practices as required.
- Avoid undertaking the noisiest activities, where
possible, when working at night near the
residential areas
C-11

ECP 10: Protection of Flora

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Vegetation
clearance
Local flora are important

to provide shelters for the
birds, offer fruits and/or
timber/fire wood, protect
soil erosion and overall
keep the environment
very friendly to humanliving. As such damage to
flora has wide range of
adverse environmental
impacts.
- Reduce disturbance to surrounding vegetation

- Use appropriate type and minimum size of
-
WAPDA
August 2011
machine to avoid disturbance to adjacent

vegetations.
Get approval from supervision consultant for
clearance of vegetation.
Make selective and careful pruning of trees
where possible to reduce need of tree removal.
Control noxious weeds by disposing of at
designated dump site or burn on site.
Clear only the vegetation that needs to be
cleared in accordance with the plans. These
measures are applicable to both the construction
areas as well as to any associated activities such
as sites for stockpiles, disposal of fill and
construction of diversion roads, etc.
Do not burn off cleared vegetation where
feasible, chip or mulch and reuse it for the
rehabilitation of affected areas, temporary
access tracks or landscaping. Mulch provides a
seed source, can limit embankment erosion,
retains soil moisture and nutrients, and
encourages re-growth and protection from
weeds.
Return topsoil and mulched vegetation (in areas
of native vegetation) to approximately the same
area of the roadside it came from.
Avoid work within the drip-line of trees to
prevent damage to the tree roots and compacting
the soil.
Minimize the length of time the ground is
exposed or excavation left open by clearing and
re-vegetate the area at the earliest practically
possible.
Ensure excavation works occur progressively
and re-vegetation done at the earliest
Provide adequate knowledge to the workers
regarding nature protection and the need of
avoid felling trees during construction
Supply appropriate fuel in the work caps to
prevent fuel wood collection
C-12

ECP 11: Protection of Fauna

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
activities
The location of
construction activities can
result in the loss of wild
life habitat and habitat
quality,.
Impact on migratory
birds, its habitat and its
active nests
- Limit the construction works within the

designated sites allocated to the contractors
- check the site for animals trapped in, or in

danger from site works and use a qualified
person to relocate the animal
- Not be permitted to destruct active nests or

eggs of migratory birds
- Minimize the tree removal during the bird
Vegetation
clearance
Construction
camps
WAPDA
August 2011
Clearance of vegetation
may impact shelter,
feeding and/or breeding
and/or physical
destruction and severing
of habitat areas
Illegal poaching
breeding season. If works must be continued

during the bird breeding season, a nest survey
will be conducted by a qualified biologist prior
to commence of works to identify and located
active nests
- Minimize the release of oil, oil wastes or any
other substances harmful to migratory birds to
any waters or any areas frequented by
migratory birds.
- Restrict the tree removal to the minimum

required.
- Retain tree hollows on site, or relocate hollows,

where appropriate
- Leave dead trees where possible as habitat for
fauna
- Fell the hollow bearing trees in a manner which
reduces the potential for fauna mortality. Felled
trees will be inspected after felling for fauna
and if identified and readily accessible will be
removed and relocated or rendered assistance if
injured. After felling, hollow bearing trees will
remain unmoved overnight to allow animals to
move of their own volition.
- Provide adequate knowledge to the workers
regarding protection of flora and fauna, and
relevant government regulations and
punishments for illegal poaching.
C-13

ECP 12: Protection of Fisheries

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
activities in
River
The main potential

impacts to fisheries are
hydrocarbon spills and
leaks from boats and
disposal of wastes into
the river
Construction
activities on the
land
The main potential

impacts to aquatic flora
and fauna River are
increased suspended
solids from earthworks
erosion, sanitary
discharge from work
camps, and hydrocarbon
spills
WAPDA
August 2011
- Ensure that boats used in the project are well

maintained and do not have oil leakage to
contaminate river water.
- Contain accidental spillage and make an
emergency oil spill containment plan to be
supported with enough equipments, materials
and human resources
- Do not dump wastes, be it hazardous or nonhazardous into the nearby water bodies or in the
river
- follow mitigation measures proposed in ECP 3 :

Water Resources Management and EC4:
Drainage Management
C-14

ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
vehicular traffic
Increased traffic use of

road by construction
vehicles will affect the
movement of normal
road traffics and the
safety of the road-users.
- Prepare and submit a traffic management plan
Accidents and spillage of

fuels and chemicals
WAPDA
August 2011
to WAPDA for their approval at least 30 days

before commencing work on any project
component involved in traffic diversion and
management.
Include in the traffic management plan to ensure
uninterrupted traffic movement during
construction: detailed drawings of traffic
arrangements showing all detours, temporary
road, temporary diversions, necessary
barricades, warning signs/lights, road signs, etc.
Provide signs at strategic locations of the roads
complying with the schedules of signs
contained in the Pakistani Traffic Regulations.
Install and maintain a display board at each
important road intersection on the roads to be
used during construction, which shall clearly
show the following information in Urdu:
Location: chainage and village name
Duration of construction period
Period of proposed detour/alternative route
Suggested detour route map
Name and contact address/telephone number of
the concerned personnel
Name and contact address/telephone number of
the Contractor
Inconvenience is sincerely regretted.
Restrict truck deliveries, where practicable, to
day time working hours.
Restrict the transport of oversize loads.
Operate road traffics/transport vehicles, if
possible, to non-peak periods to minimize
traffic disruptions.
Enforce on-site speed limit
C-15

ECP 14: Construction Camp Management

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Siting and
Location of
construction
camps
Campsites for
construction workers are
the important locations
that have significant
impacts such as health
and safety hazards on
local resources and
infrastructure of nearby
communities.
Construction
Camp Facilities
Lack of proper
infrastructure facilities,
such as housing, water
supply and sanitation
facilities will increase
pressure on the local
services and generate
substandard living
standards and health
hazards.
WAPDA
August 2011

- Locate the construction camps at areas which are

acceptable from environmental, cultural or social
point of view.
- Consider the location of construction camps
away from communities in order to avoid social
conflict in using the natural resources such as
water or to avoid the possible adverse impacts of
the construction camps on the surrounding
communities.
- Submit to the PMU for approval a detailed
layout plan for the development of the
construction camp showing the relative
locations of all temporary buildings and facilities
that are to be constructed together with the
location of site roads, fuel storage areas (for use
in power supply generators), solid waste
management and dumping locations, and
drainage facilities, prior to the development of
the construction camps.
- Local authorities responsible for health, religious
and security shall be duly informed on the set up
of camp facilities so as to maintain effective
surveillance over public health, social and
security matters
Contractor shall provide the following facilities in
the campsites:
- Adequate housing for all workers

- Safe and reliable water supply. Water supply
from tube wells that meets the national standards
- Hygienic sanitary facilities and sewerage
system. The toilets and domestic waste water
will be collected through a common sewerage.
Provide separate latrines and bathing places for
males and females with total isolation by wall or
by location. Female toilets should be clearly
marked in language understood by the persons
using them to avoid miscommunication. The
minimum number of toilet facilities required is
one toilet for every ten persons.
- Treatment facilities for sewerage of toilet and
domestic wastes
- Storm water drainage facilities. Both sides of
roads are to be provided with shallow v drains to
drain off storm water to a silt retention pond
which shall be sized to provide a minimum of 20
minutes retention of storm water flow from the
C-16

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Disposal of
waste
Management of wastes is
crucial to minimize
impacts on the
environment

whole site. Channel all discharge from the silt
retention pond to natural drainage via a grassed
swale at least 20 meters in length with suitable
longitudinal gradient.
- Paved internal roads. Ensure with
grass/vegetation coverage to be made of the use
of top soil that there is no dust generation from
the loose/exposed sandy surface. Pave the
internal roads of at least haring-bond bricks to
suppress dusts and to work against possible
muddy surface during monsoon.
- Provide child crches for women working on the
construction site. The crche should have
facilities for dormitory, kitchen, indoor/outdoor
play area. Schools should be attached to these
crches so that children are not deprived of
education whose mothers are construction
workers
- Provide in-house community/common
entertainment facilities. Dependence of local
entertainment outlets by construction camps to
be discouraged/prohibited to the extent possible.
- Ensure proper collection and disposal of solid

-
WAPDA
August 2011
wastes within the construction camps

Insist waste separation by source; organic wastes
in one pot and inorganic wastes in another pot at
household level.
Store inorganic wastes in a safe place within the
household and clear organic wastes on daily
basis to waste collector. Establish waste
collection, transportation and disposal systems
with the manpower and equipments/vehicles
needed.
Dispose organic wastes in a designated safe
place on daily basis. At the end of the day cover
the organic wastes with a thin layer of sand so
that flies, mosquitoes, dogs, cats, rats, are not
attracted. One may dig a large hole to put
organic wastes in it; take care to protect
groundwater from contamination by leachate
formed due to decomposition. Cover the bed of
the pit with impervious layer of materials
(clayey, thin concrete) to protect groundwater
from contamination.
Locate the garbage pit/waste disposal site min
500 m away from the residence so that peoples
are not disturbed with the odor likely to be
produced from anaerobic decomposition of
wastes at the waste dumping places. Encompass
C-17

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Fuel supplies
for cooking
purposes
Illegal sourcing of fuel

wood by construction
workers will impact the
natural flora and fauna
Health and
Hygiene
There will be a potential

for diseases to be
transmitted including
malaria, exacerbated by
inadequate health and
safety practices. There
will be an increased risk
of work crews spreading
sexually transmitted
infections and
HIV/AIDS.

the waste dumping place by fencing and tree
plantation to prevent children to enter and play
with.
- Do not establish site specific landfill sites. All
solid waste will be collected and removed from
the work camps and disposed in approval waste
disposal sites.
- Provide fuel to the construction camps for their

domestic purpose, in order to discourage them to
use fuel wood or other biomass.
- Make available alternative fuels like natural gas
or kerosene on ration to the workforce to prevent
them using biomass for cooking.
- Conduct awareness campaigns to educate
workers on preserving the protecting of
biodiversity in the project area, and relevant
government regulations and punishments on
wildlife protection.
- Provide adequate health care facilities within

construction sites.
- Provide first aid facility round the clock.

-
WAPDA
August 2011
Maintain stock of medicines in the facility and

appoint fulltime designated first aider or nurse.
Provide ambulance facility for the laborers
during emergency to be transported to nearest
hospitals.
Initial health screening of the laborers coming
from outside areas
Train all construction workers in basic sanitation
and health care issues and safety matters, and on
the specific hazards of their work
Provide HIV awareness programming, including
STI (sexually transmitted infections) and HIV
information, education and communication for
all workers on regular basis
Complement educational interventions with easy
access to condoms at campsites as well as
voluntary 18counseling and testing
Provide adequate drainage facilities throughout
camps to ensure that disease vectors habitats
(stagnant water bodies, puddles) do not form.
Regular mosquito repellant sprays in monsoon.
Carryout short training sessions on best hygiene
practices to be mandatorily participated by all
workers. Place display boards at strategic
locations within the camps containing messages
on best hygienic practices
C-18

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Safety
Site Restoration
In adequate safety
facilities to the
construction camps may
create security problems
and fire hazards
Restoration of the
construction camps to
original condition
requires demolition of
construction camps.

- Provide appropriate security personnel (police /

home guard or private security guards) and
enclosures to prevent unauthorized entry in to
the camp area.
- Maintain register to keep track on a head count
of persons present in the camp at any given time.
- Encourage use of flameproof material for the
construction of labor housing/site office. Ensure
that these houses/rooms are of sound
construction and capable of withstanding
storms/cyclones.
- Provide appropriate type of fire fighting
equipments suitable for the construction camps
- Display emergency contact numbers clearly and
prominently at strategic places in camps.
- Communicate the roles and responsibilities of
laborers in case of emergency in the monthly
meetings with contractors.
- Dismantle and remove from the site all facilities
WAPDA
August 2011
established within the construction camp

including the perimeter fence and lockable gates
at the completion of the construction work.
Dismantle camps in phases as the work
decreases (do not wait for completion of the
entire work.
Give prior notice to the laborers before
demolishing their camps/units
Maintain the noise levels within the national
standards during demolition activities
Different contractors should be hired to
demolish different structures to promote
recycling or reuse of demolished material.
Reuse the demolition debris to a maximum
extent. Dispose remaining debris at the
designated waste disposal site by WAPDA.
Handover the construction camps with all built
facilities as it is if agreement between both
parties (contactor and land-owner) has been
made so.
Restore the site to its original condition or to an
agreed condition with the landowner defined
prior to the commencement of the works (in
writing).
Not make false promises to the laborers for
future employment in O&M of the project.
C-19

ECP 15: Cultural and Religious Issues

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Construction
activities near
religious and
cultural sites
WAPDA
August 2011
Environmental
Impacts
Disturbance from
construction works to
- Communicate to the public through community
the cultural and religious
consultation and newspaper announcements
sites, and contractors
regarding the scope and schedule of construction,
lack of knowledge on
as well as certain construction activities causing
cultural issues cause
disruptions or access restriction.
- Do not block access to cultural and religious
social disturbances.
sites, wherever possible
- Restrict all construction activities within the foot
prints of the construction sites.
- Stop construction works that produce noise
(particularly during prayer time) should there be
any mosque/religious/educational institutions
close to the construction sites and users make
objections.
- Take special care and use appropriate equipment
when working next to a cultural/religious
institution.
- Stop work immediately and notify the site
manager if, during construction, an
archaeological or burial site is discovered. It is an
offence to recommence work in the vicinity of
the site until approval to continue is given by the
PMU
- Provide separate prayer facilities to the
construction workers.
- Show appropriate behavior with all construction
workers especially women and elderly people
- Allow the workers to participate in praying
during construction time
- Resolve cultural issues in consultation with local
leaders and supervision consultants
- Establish a mechanism that allows local people to
raise grievances arising from the construction
process.
- Inform the local authorities responsible for
health, religious and security duly informed
before commencement of civil works so as to
maintain effective surveillance over public
health, social and security matters
C-20

ECP 16: Worker Health and Safety

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
Best practices
Construction works may

pose health and safety
risks to the construction
workers and site visitors
leading to severe injuries
and deaths. The
population in the
proximity of the
construction site and the
construction workers will
be exposed to a number
of (i) biophysical health
risk factors, (e.g. noise,
dust, chemicals,
construction material,
solid waste, waste water,
vector transmitted
diseases etc), (ii) risk
factors resulting from
human behavior (e.g.
STD, HIV etc) and (iii)
road accidents from
construction traffic.
Child and pregnant labor
- Implement suitable safety standards for all

workers and site visitors which should not be
less than those laid down on the international
standards (e.g. International Labor Office
guideline on Safety and Health in
Construction; World Bank Groups
Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines)
and contractors own national standards or
statutory regulations, in addition to complying
with the national acts and rules of the
Government of Pakistan
- Provide the workers with a safe and healthy
work environment, taking into account inherent
risks in its particular construction activity and
specific classes of hazards in the work areas,
- Provide personal protection equipment (PPE)
for workers, such as safety boots, helmets,
masks, gloves, protective clothing, goggles,
full-face eye shields, and ear protection.
Maintain the PPE properly by cleaning dirty
ones and replacing them with the damaged
ones.
- Safety procedures include provision of
information, training and protective clothing to
workers involved in hazardous operations and
proper performance of their job
- Appoint an environment, health and safety
manager to look after the health and safety of
the workers
- Inform the local authorities responsible for
health, religious and security duly informed
before commencement of civil works and
establishment of construction camps so as to
maintain effective surveillance over public
health, social and security matters
- not hire children of less than 14 years of age
Accidents
WAPDA
August 2011
Lack of first aid facilities

and health care facilities
in the immediate vicinity
will aggravate the health
and pregnant women or women who delivered a

child within 8 preceding weeks, in accordance
with the Pakistani Labor Laws and
Employment of Child Act (1977).
- Provide health care facilities and first aid
facilities are readily available. Appropriately
equipped first-aid stations should be easily
accessible throughout the place of work
- Document and report occupational accidents,
C-21

Project
Activity/
Impact Source

diseases, and incidents.
conditions of the victims
- Prevent accidents, injury, and disease arising
Construction
Camps
Lack of proper
infrastructure facilities,
such as housing, water
supply and sanitation
facilities will increase
pressure on the local
services and generate
substandard living
standards and health
hazards.
from, associated with, or occurring in the

course of work by minimizing, so far as
reasonably practicable, the causes of hazards. In
a manner consistent with good international
industry practice.
- Identify potential hazards to workers,
particularly those that may be life-threatening
and provide necessary preventive and protective
measures.
- Provide awareness to the construction drivers to
strictly follow the driving rules
- Provide adequate lighting in the construction
area and along the roads
The Contractor shall provide the following
facilities in the campsites to improve health and
hygienic conditions as mentioned in ECP 14
Construction Camp Management:
- Adequate ventilation facilities

- Safe and reliable water supply. Water supply
-
Water and
sanitation
facilities at the
construction
sites
WAPDA
August 2011
Lack of Water sanitation

facilities at construction
sites cause inconvenience
to the construction
workers and affect their
personal hygiene.
from deep tube wells that meets the national

standards
Hygienic sanitary facilities and sewerage
system. The toilets and domestic waste water
will be collected through a common sewerage.
Treatment facilities for sewerage of toilet and
domestic wastes
Storm water drainage facilities.
Recreational and social facilities
Safe storage facilities for petroleum and other
chemicals in accordance with ECP 2
Solid waste collection and disposal system in
accordance with ECP1.
Arrangement for trainings
Paved internal roads.
Security fence at least two m height.
Sick bay and first aid facilities
The contractor shall provide portable toilets at
the construction sites, if about 25 people are
working the whole day for a month. Location of
portable facilities should be at least six m away
from storm drain system and surface waters.
These portable toilets should be cleaned once a
day and all the sewerage should be pumped
from the collection tank once a day and should
be brought to the common septic tank for
further treatment.
C-22

Project
Activity/
Impact Source
- Contractor should provide bottled drinking

Other ECPs
Potential risks on health

and hygiene of
construction workers and
general public
water facilities to the construction workers at all

the construction sites.
The Contractor shall follow the following ECPs
to reduce health risks to the construction workers
and nearby community:
- ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Goods

Management
ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic
Management
Trainings
WAPDA
August 2011
Lack of awareness and

basic knowledge in health
care among the
construction workforce,
make them susceptible to
potential diseases.
- Train all construction workers in basic

sanitation and health care issues (e.g., how to
avoid malaria and transmission of sexually
transmitted infections (STI) HIV/AIDS.
- Train all construction workers in general health
and safety matters, and on the specific hazards
of their work Training should consist of basic
hazard awareness, site specific hazards, safe
work practices, and emergency procedures for
fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as
appropriate.
- Commence the malaria, HIV/AIDS and STI
education campaign before the start of the
construction phase and complement it with by a
strong condom marketing, increased access to
condoms in the area as well as to voluntary
counseling and testing.
- Implement malaria, HIV/AIDS and STI
education campaign targeting all workers hired,
international and national, female and male,
skilled, semi- and unskilled occupations, at the
time of recruitment and thereafter pursued
throughout the construction phase on ongoing
and regular basis. This should be complemented
by easy access to condoms at the workplace as
well as to voluntary counseling and testing.
C-23

Annex D.
WAPDA
August 2011
IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines
D-1
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Environmental, Health, and Safety

General Guidelines
Introduction
The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are
technical reference documents with general and industry-specific
examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) 1. When
one or more members of the World Bank Group are involved in a
project, these EHS Guidelines are applied as required by their
respective policies and standards. These General EHS Guidelines
are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector
EHS Guidelines which provide guidance to users on EHS issues in
specific industry sectors. For complex projects, use of multiple
industry-sector guidelines may be necessary. A complete list of
industry-sector guidelines can be found at:
www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Content/EnvironmentalGuidelines
The EHS Guidelines contain the performance levels and measures
that are generally considered to be achievable in new facilities by
existing technology at reasonable costs. Application of the EHS
Guidelines to existing facilities may involve the establishment of
site-specific targets, with an appropriate timetable for achieving
them. The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be tailored to
the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of
the results of an environmental assessment2 in which site-specific
variables, such as host country context, assimilative capacity of the
environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The
applicability of specific technical recommendations should be
1 Defined as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that
would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged

in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally.
The circumstances that skilled and experienced professionals may find when
evaluating the range of pollution prevention and control techniques available to a
project may include, but are not limited to, varying levels of environmental
degradation and environmental assimilative capacity as well as varying levels of
financial and technical feasibility.
2 For IFC, such assessment is carried out consistent with Performance Standard 1,
and for the World Bank, with Operational Policy 4.01.
APRIL 30, 2007
based on the professional opinion of qualified and experienced

persons. When host country regulations differ from the levels and
measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects are expected
to achieve whichever is more stringent. If less stringent levels or
measures than those provided in these EHS Guidelines are
appropriate, in view of specific project circumstances, a full and
detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part
of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification
should demonstrate that the choice for any alternate performance
levels is protective of human health and the environment.
The General EHS Guidelines are organized as follows:
1. Environmental
1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality
1.2 Energy Conservation
1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality
1.4 Water Conservation
1.5 Hazardous Materials Management
1.6 Waste Management
1.7 Noise
1.8 Contaminated Land
2. Occupational Health and Safety
2.1 General Facility Design and Operation
2.2 Communication and Training
2.3 Physical Hazards
2.4 Chemical Hazards
2.5 Biological Hazards
2.6 Radiological Hazards
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
2.8 Special Hazard Environments
2.9 Monitoring
3. Community Health and Safety
3.1 Water Quality and Availability
3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS)
3.4 Traffic Safety
3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials
3.6 Disease Prevention
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response
4. Construction and Decommissioning
4.1 Environment
4.2 Occupational Health & Safety
4.3 Community Health & Safety
References and Additional Sources*
3
3
17
24
32
35
45
51
53
59
60
62
64
68
70
72
72
73
74
77
77
78
79
82
82
85
86
89
89
92
94
96
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
General Approach to the Management

of EHS Issues at the Facility or Project
Level
people or to the environmental resources on which they

depend.
achieving an overall reduction of risk to human health and the
Effective management of environmental, health, and safety (EHS)
environment, focusing on the prevention of irreversible and / or
issues entails the inclusion of EHS considerations into corporate-
significant impacts.
and facility-level business processes in an organized, hierarchical

approach that includes the following steps:
or processes that avoid the need for EHS controls.
early as possible in the facility development or project cycle,
When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating
selection process, product design process, engineering
engineering and management controls to reduce or minimize
planning process for capital requests, engineering work
the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for
orders, facility modification authorizations, or layout and
example, with the application of pollution controls to reduce
process change plans.
the levels of emitted contaminants to workers or environments.
Involving EHS professionals, who have the experience,
Preparing workers and nearby communities to respond to
competence, and training necessary to assess and manage
accidents, including providing technical and financial
EHS impacts and risks, and carry out specialized
resources to effectively and safely control such events, and
environmental management functions including the
restoring workplace and community environments to a safe
preparation of project or activity-specific plans and procedures
and healthy condition.
that incorporate the technical recommendations presented in

this document that are relevant to the project.
Favoring strategies that eliminate the cause of the hazard at

its source, for example, by selecting less hazardous materials
Identifying EHS project hazards3 and associated risks4 as

including the incorporation of EHS considerations into the site
Prioritizing risk management strategies with the objective of
Improving EHS performance through a combination of ongoing

monitoring of facility performance and effective accountability.
Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of EHS risks,

based on:
o
The nature of the project activities, such as whether the

project will generate significant quantities of emissions or
effluents, or involve hazardous materials or processes;
The potential consequences to workers, communities, or

the environment if hazards are not adequately managed,
which may depend on the proximity of project activities to
3 Defined as threats to humans and what they value (Kates, et al., 1985).
4 Defined as quantitative measures of hazard consequences, usually expressed as
conditional probabilities of experiencing harm (Kates, et. al., 1985)
APRIL 30, 2007

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.0 Environmental
1.1
Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality

the spatial characteristic of the source including point sources,
Applicability and Approach ...............................................3

Ambient Air Quality ..........................................................4
General Approach....................................................4
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically
Sensitive Areas........................................................5
Point Sources ..................................................................5
Stack Height.............................................................5
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines ....6
Fugitive Sources ..............................................................8
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)........................8
Particulate Matter (PM).............................................8
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) .........................9
Mobile Sources Land-based ..........................................9
Greenhouse Gases (GHGs).............................................9
Monitoring......................................................................10
Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions...11
fugitive sources, and mobile sources and, further, by process,

such as combustion, materials storage, or other industry sectorspecific processes.
Where possible, facilities and projects should avoid, minimize, and
control adverse impacts to human health, safety, and the
environment from emissions to air. Where this is not possible, the
generation and release of emissions of any type should be
managed through a combination of:
Energy use efficiency
Process modification
Selection of fuels or other materials, the processing of which

may result in less polluting emissions
Applicability and Approach
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate
The selected prevention and control techniques may include one
emissions to air at any stage of the project life-cycle. It
or more methods of treatment depending on:
Application of emissions control techniques
complements the industry-specific emissions guidance presented

in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS)
Regulatory requirements
Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for
Significance of the source
emissions management that may be applied to a range of industry
Location of the emitting facility relative to other sources
sectors. This guideline provides an approach to the management
Location of sensitive receptors
of significant sources of emissions, including specific guidance for
Existing ambient air quality, and potential for degradation of
assessment and monitoring of impacts. It is also intended to

provide additional information on approaches to emissions
management in projects located in areas of poor air quality, where
the airshed from a proposed project
Technical feasibility and cost effectiveness of the available

options for prevention, control, and release of emissions
it may be necessary to establish project-specific emissions

standards.
Emissions of air pollutants can occur from a wide variety of
activities during the construction, operation, and decommissioning
phases of a project. These activities can be categorized based on
APRIL 30, 2007

Ambient Air Quality

General Approach
Projects with significant5,6 sources of air emissions, and potential
for significant impacts to ambient air quality, should prevent or
minimize impacts by ensuring that:
WORLD BANK GROUP
additional, future sustainable development in the same

airshed. 12
At facility level, impacts should be estimated through qualitative or
quantitative assessments by the use of baseline air quality
assessments and atmospheric dispersion models to assess
potential ground level concentrations. Local atmospheric, climatic,
Emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach
and air quality data should be applied when modeling dispersion,
or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards9
protection against atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects
by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence,
of the source, nearby13 structures, and terrain features. The
the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines10 (see Table 1.1.1),
dispersion model applied should be internationally recognized, or
or other internationally recognized sources11;
comparable. Examples of acceptable emission estimation and
Emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the
dispersion modeling approaches for point and fugitive sources are
attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines or

standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25
Table 1.1.1: WHO Ambient Air Quality Guidelines 7,8
percent of the applicable air quality standards to allow

Sulfur dioxide (SO2)
5 Significant sources of point and fugitive emissions are considered to be general
sources which, for example, can contribute a net emissions increase of one or
more of the following pollutants within a given airshed: PM10: 50 tons per year
(tpy); NOx: 500 tpy; SO2: 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation;
and combustion sources with an equivalent heat input of 50 MWth or greater. The
significance of emissions of inorganic and organic pollutants should be established
on a project-specific basis taking into account toxic and other properties of the
pollutant.
6 United States Environmental Protection Agency, Prevention of Significant
Deterioration of Air Quality, 40 CFR Ch. 1 Part 52.21. Other references for
establishing significant emissions include the European Commission. 2000.
Guidance Document for EPER implementation.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ; and Australian Government.
2004. National Pollutant Inventory Guide.
http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf
7 World Health Organization (WHO). Air Quality Guidelines Global Update, 2005.
PM 24-hour value is the 99th percentile.
8 Interim targets are provided in recognition of the need for a staged approach to
achieving the recommended guidelines.
9 Ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and
published through national legislative and regulatory processes, and ambient
quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through
clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by
the World Health Organization).
10 Available at World Health Organization (WHO). http://www.who.int/en
11 For example the United States National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS) (http://www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html) and the relevant European Council

Directives (Council Directive 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 / Council Directive
2002/3/EC of February 12 2002).
APRIL 30, 2007
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2)

Particulate Matter
PM10
Averaging
Period
Guideline value in
g/m3
24-hour
125 (Interim target-1)

20 (guideline)
500 (guideline)
40 (guideline)
200 (guideline)
20 (guideline)
10 minute
1-year
1-hour
1-year
24-hour
Particulate Matter
PM2.5
1-year
24-hour
Ozone
8-hour daily
maximum

50 (guideline)
10 (guideline)
37.5 (Interim target-3)
25 (guideline)
100 (guideline)
12 US EPA Prevention of Significant Deterioration Increments Limits applicable to
non-degraded airsheds.

WORLD BANK GROUP
included in Annex 1.1.1. These approaches include screening
Point Sources
models for single source evaluations (SCREEN3 or AIRSCREEN),
Point sources are discrete, stationary, identifiable sources of
as well as more complex and refined models (AERMOD OR
emissions that release pollutants to the atmosphere. They are
ADMS). Model selection is dependent on the complexity and geo-
typically located in manufacturing or production plants. Within a
morphology of the project site (e.g. mountainous terrain, urban or
given point source, there may be several individual emission
rural area).
points that comprise the point source.15
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or

Ecologically Sensitive Areas
Point sources are characterized by the release of air pollutants
Facilities or projects located within poor quality airsheds14, and
nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide
within or next to areas established as ecologically sensitive (e.g.
(CO), and particulate matter (PM), as well as other air pollutants
national parks), should ensure that any increase in pollution levels
including certain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and metals
is as small as feasible, and amounts to a fraction of the applicable
that may also be associated with a wide range of industrial
short-term and annual average air quality guidelines or standards
activities.
as established in the project-specific environmental assessment.

Suitable mitigation measures may also include the relocation of
significant sources of emissions outside the airshed in question,
use of cleaner fuels or technologies, application of comprehensive
pollution control measures, offset activities at installations
controlled by the project sponsor or other facilities within the same
airshed, and buy-down of emissions within the same airshed.
Specific provisions for minimizing emissions and their impacts in
poor air quality or ecologically sensitive airsheds should be
established on a project-by-project or industry-specific basis.
Offset provisions outside the immediate control of the project
sponsor or buy-downs should be monitored and enforced by the
local agency responsible for granting and monitoring emission
permits. Such provisions should be in place prior to final
commissioning of the facility / project.
typically associated with the combustion of fossil fuels, such as
Emissions from point sources should be avoided and controlled

according to good international industry practice (GIIP) applicable
to the relevant industry sector, depending on ambient conditions,
through the combined application of process modifications and
emissions controls, examples of which are provided in Annex
1.1.2. Additional recommendations regarding stack height and
emissions from small combustion facilities are provided below.
Stack Height
The stack height for all point sources of emissions, whether
significant or not, should be designed according to GIIP (see
Annex 1.1.3) to avoid excessive ground level concentrations due
to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects, and to ensure reasonable
diffusion to minimize impacts. For projects where there are
multiple sources of emissions, stack heights should be established
with due consideration to emissions from all other project sources,
both point and fugitive. Non-significant sources of emissions,
13 Nearby generally considers an area within a radius of up to 20 times the stack
height.
14 An airshed should be considered as having poor air quality if nationally
legislated air quality standards or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded
significantly.
APRIL 30, 2007
15 Emission points refer to a specific stack, vent, or other discrete point of pollution
release. This term should not be confused with point source, which is a regulatory
distinction from area and mobile sources. The characterization of point sources
into multiple emissions points is useful for allowing more detailed reporting of
emissions information.

WORLD BANK GROUP
including small combustion sources,16 should also use GIIP in

stack design.
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines

Small combustion processes are systems designed to deliver
electrical or mechanical power, steam, heat, or any combination of
these, regardless of the fuel type, with a total, rated heat input
capacity of between three Megawatt thermal (MWth) and 50
MWth.
The emissions guidelines in Table 1.1.2 are applicable to small
combustion process installations operating more than 500 hours
per year, and those with an annual capacity utilization of more
than 30 percent. Plants firing a mixture of fuels should compare
emissions performance with these guidelines based on the sum of
the relative contribution of each applied fuel17. Lower emission
values may apply if the proposed facility is located in an
ecologically sensitive airshed, or airshed with poor air quality, in
order to address potential cumulative impacts from the installation
of more than one small combustion plant as part of a distributed
generation project.
16 Small combustion sources are those with a total rated heat input capacity of
50MWth or less.
17 The contribution of a fuel is the percentage of heat input (LHV) provided by this
fuel multiplied by its limit value.
APRIL 30, 2007

WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 1.1.2 - Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines (3MWth 50MWth) (in mg/Nm3 or as indicated)
Combustion Technology /
Fuel
Particulate Matter (PM)
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)
Dry Gas, Excess

O2 Content (%)
N/A
N/A
200 (Spark Ignition)

400 (Dual Fuel)
1,600 (Compression Ignition)
15
Engine
Gas
50 or up to 100 if justified by project specific

considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of
using lower ash content fuel, or adding
secondary treatment to meet 50, and
available environmental capacity of the site)
Liquid
Turbine
Natural Gas
=3MWth to < 15MWth
1.5 percent Sulfur or up to 3.0 percent Sulfur if

justified by project specific considerations (e.g.
Economic feasibility of using lower S content fuel,
or adding secondary treatment to meet levels of
using 1.5 percent Sulfur, and available
environmental capacity of the site)
If bore size diameter [mm] < 400: 1460

(or up to 1,600 if justified to maintain high
energy efficiency.)
15
If bore size diameter [mm] > or = 400: 1,850
N/A
N/A
42 ppm (Electric generation)

100 ppm (Mechanical drive)
15
Natural Gas
=15MWth to < 50MWth
N/A
N/A
25 ppm
15
Fuels other than Natural Gas

=3MWth to < 15MWth
N/A
0.5 percent Sulfur or lower percent Sulfur (e.g. 0.2

percent Sulfur) if commercially available without
significant excess fuel cost
96 ppm (Electric generation)

150 ppm (Mechanical drive)
15
Fuels other than Natural Gas

=15MWth to < 50MWth
N/A
0.5% S or lower % S (0.2%S) if commercially

available without significant excess fuel cost
74 ppm
15
N/A
320
2000
460
2000
650
Boiler
Gas
Liquid
Solid
N/A
50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental
assessment
50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental
assessment
Notes: -N/A/ - no emissions guideline; Higher performance levels than these in the Table should be applicable to facilities located in urban / industrial areas with degraded airsheds or close to ecologically sensitive areas where more
stringent emissions controls may be needed.; MWth is heat input on HHV basis; Solid fuels include biomass; Nm 3 is at one atmosphere pressure, 0C.; MWth category is to apply to the entire facility consisting of multiple units that are
reasonably considered to be emitted from a common stack except for NOx and PM limits for turbines and boilers. Guidelines values apply to facilities operating more than 500 hours per year with an annual capacity utilization factor of
more than 30 percent.
APRIL 30, 2007

Fugitive Sources
WORLD BANK GROUP
Implementing a leak detection and repair (LDAR) program

that controls fugitive emissions by regularly monitoring to
Fugitive source air emissions refer to emissions that are
detect leaks, and implementing repairs within a predefined
distributed spatially over a wide area and not confined to a specific
time period.18
discharge point. They originate in operations where exhausts are

not captured and passed through a stack. Fugitive emissions have
the potential for much greater ground-level impacts per unit than
stationary source emissions, since they are discharged and
dispersed close to the ground. The two main types of fugitive
For VOC emissions associated with handling of chemicals in open

vats and mixing processes, the recommended prevention and
control techniques include:
solvents;
emissions are Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) and

particulate matter (PM). Other contaminants (NOx, SO2 and CO)
Substitution of less volatile substances, such as aqueous
Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent
are mainly associated with combustion processes, as described
treatment of gas stream by removing VOCs with control
above. Projects with potentially significant fugitive sources of
devices such as condensers or activated carbon absorption;
emissions should establish the need for ambient quality
Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent

treatment with destructive control devices such as:
assessment and monitoring practices.
Catalytic Incinerators: Used to reduce VOCs from
Open burning of solid wastes, whether hazardous or non-
process exhaust gases exiting paint spray booths,
hazardous, is not considered good practice and should be
ovens, and other process operations
avoided, as the generation of polluting emissions from this type of
source cannot be controlled effectively.
gas stream by passing the stream through a combustion

chamber where the VOCs are burned in air at
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)
temperatures between 700 C to 1,300 C
The most common sources of fugitive VOC emissions are
associated with industrial activities that produce, store, and use
Enclosed Oxidizing Flares: Used to convert VOCs into

CO2 and H2O by way of direct combustion
VOC-containing liquids or gases where the material is under

pressure, exposed to a lower vapor pressure, or displaced from an
Thermal Incinerators: Used to control VOC levels in a
Use of floating roofs on storage tanks to reduce the
enclosed space. Typical sources include equipment leaks, open
opportunity for volatilization by eliminating the headspace
vats and mixing tanks, storage tanks, unit operations in
present in conventional storage tanks.
wastewater treatment systems, and accidental releases.

Equipment leaks include valves, fittings, and elbows which are
subject to leaks under pressure. The recommended prevention
and control techniques for VOC emissions associated with
equipment leaks include:

The most common pollutant involved in fugitive emissions is dust
or particulate matter (PM). This is released during certain
operations, such as transport and open storage of solid materials,
and from exposed soil surfaces, including unpaved roads.
Equipment modifications, examples of which are presented in

Annex 1.1.4;
18 For more information, see Leak Detection and Repair Program (LDAR), at:
http://www.ldar.net
APRIL 30, 2007

WORLD BANK GROUP
Recommended prevention and control of these emissions sources
programs. In the absence of these, the following approach should
include:
be considered:
Use of dust control methods, such as covers, water

suppression, or increased moisture content for open
operators should implement the manufacturer recommended
materials storage piles, or controls, including air extraction
engine maintenance programs;
and treatment through a baghouse or cyclone for material
Regardless of the size or type of vehicle, fleet owners /
Drivers should be instructed on the benefits of driving
handling sources, such as conveyors and bins;
practices that reduce both the risk of accidents and fuel
Use of water suppression for control of loose materials on
consumption, including measured acceleration and driving
paved or unpaved road surfaces. Oil and oil by-products is
within safe speed limits;
not a recommended method to control road dust. Examples
Operators with fleets of 120 or more units of heavy duty
of additional control options for unpaved roads include those
vehicles (buses and trucks), or 540 or more light duty
summarized in Annex 1.1.5.
vehicles21 (cars and light trucks) within an airshed should
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS)

Several chemicals are classified as ozone depleting substances
consider additional ways to reduce potential impacts

including:
o
(ODSs) and are scheduled for phase-out under the Montreal

Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.19 No new
alternatives
o
systems or processes should be installed using CFCs, halons,

1,1,1-trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride, methyl bromide or
regulations.20
Converting high-use vehicles to cleaner fuels, where

feasible
HBFCs. HCFCs should only be considered as interim / bridging

alternatives as determined by the host country commitments and
Replacing older vehicles with newer, more fuel efficient
Installing and maintaining emissions control devices,

such as catalytic converters
Implementing a regular vehicle maintenance and repair

program
Mobile Sources Land-based
Greenhouse Gases (GHGs)
Similar to other combustion processes, emissions from vehicles
Sectors that may have potentially significant emissions of
include CO, NOx, SO2, PM and VOCs. Emissions from on-road
greenhouse gases (GHGs)22 include energy, transport, heavy
and off-road vehicles should comply with national or regional
industry (e.g. cement production, iron / steel manufacturing,

aluminum smelting, petrochemical industries, petroleum refining,
fertilizer manufacturing), agriculture, forestry and waste
19 Examples include: chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); halons; 1,1,1-trichloroethane
(methyl chloroform); carbon tetrachloride; hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs);

hydrobromofluorocarbons (HBFCs); and methyl bromide. They are currently used
in a variety of applications including: domestic, commercial, and process
refrigeration (CFCs and HCFCs); domestic, commercial, and motor vehicle air
conditioning (CFCs and HCFCs); for manufacturing foam products (CFCs); for
solvent cleaning applications (CFCs, HCFCs, methyl chloroform, and carbon
tetrachloride); as aerosol propellants (CFCs); in fire protection systems (halons
and HBFCs); and as crop fumigants (methyl bromide).
20 Additional information is available through the Montreal Protocol Secretariat
web site available at: http://ozone.unep.org/
APRIL 30, 2007
management. GHGs may be generated from direct emissions
21 The selected fleet size thresholds are assumed to represent potentially
significant sources of emissions based on individual vehicles traveling 100,000 km

/ yr using average emission factors.
22 The six greenhouse gases that form part of the Kyoto Protocol to the United
Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change include carbon dioxide (C02);
methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N 2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); perfluorocarbons
(PFCs); and sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6).

WORLD BANK GROUP
from facilities within the physical project boundary and indirect
decisions to be made based on the data and the consequences of
emissions associated with the off-site production of power used by
making an incorrect decision, the time and geographic
the project.
boundaries, and the quality of data needed to make a correct
Recommendations for reduction and control of greenhouse gases
decision.25 The air quality monitoring program should consider

the following elements:
include:
Carbon financing;23
Enhancement of energy efficiency (see section on
should reflect the pollutants of concern associated with

project processes. For combustion processes, indicator
Energy Conservation);
parameters typically include the quality of inputs, such as the
Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of
sulfur content of fuel.
greenhouse gases;
Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture and
Monitoring parameters: The monitoring parameters selected
Baseline calculations: Before a project is developed, baseline
forestry;
air quality monitoring at and in the vicinity of the site should
Promotion, development and increased use of
be undertaken to assess background levels of key pollutants,
renewable forms of energy;
in order to differentiate between existing ambient conditions
Carbon capture and storage technologies;24
and project-related impacts.
Limitation and / or reduction of methane emissions
Monitoring type and frequency: Data on emissions and
through recovery and use in waste management, as well
ambient air quality generated through the monitoring program
as in the production, transport and distribution of energy
should be representative of the emissions discharged by the
(coal, oil, and gas).
project over time. Examples of time-dependent variations in

the manufacturing process include batch process
Monitoring
manufacturing and seasonal process variations. Emissions
Emissions and air quality monitoring programs provide information
from highly variable processes may need to be sampled
that can be used to assess the effectiveness of emissions
more frequently or through composite methods. Emissions
management strategies. A systematic planning process is
monitoring frequency and duration may also range from
recommended to ensure that the data collected are adequate for
continuous for some combustion process operating
their intended purposes (and to avoid collecting unnecessary
parameters or inputs (e.g. the quality of fuel) to less frequent,
data). This process, sometimes referred to as a data quality

objectives process, defines the purpose of collecting the data, the
23 Carbon financing as a carbon emissions reduction strategy may include the host
government-endorsed Clean Development Mechanism or Joint Implementation of

the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change.
24 Carbon dioxide capture and storage (CCS) is a process consisting of the
separation of CO2 from industrial and energy-related sources; transport to a
storage location; and long-term isolation from the atmosphere, for example in
geological formations, in the ocean, or in mineral carbonates (reaction of CO2 with
metal oxides in silicate minerals to produce stable carbonates). It is the object of
intensive research worldwide (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
(IPCC), Special Report, Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage (2006).
APRIL 30, 2007
monthly, quarterly or yearly stack tests.
Monitoring locations: Ambient air quality monitoring may

consists of off-site or fence line monitoring either by the
project sponsor, the competent government agency, or by
collaboration between both. The location of ambient air
25 See, for example, United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance on

Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA/G-4,
EPA/240/B-06/001 February 2006.
10

quality monitoring stations should be established based on
consistently and significantly better than the required
estimate potential impact to the receiving airshed from an
levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can
emissions source taking into consideration such aspects as
be reduced from annual to every two or three years.

o
prevailing wind directions.
Emission Monitoring: None
Boilers with capacities between =20 MWth and < 50 MWth
Sampling and analysis methods: Monitoring programs should
Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For
apply national or international methods for sample collection
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
and analysis, such as those published by the International
calculated based on fuel quality certification (if no SO2
Organization for Standardization,26 the European Committee
control equipment is used)
for Standardization,27 or the U.S. Environmental Protection
Emission Monitoring: SO2. Plants with SO2 control
Agency.28 Sampling should be conducted by, or under, the
equipment: Continuous. NOx: Continuous monitoring of
supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose.
combustion parameters. PM: Continuous monitoring of
Sampling and analysis Quality Assurance / Quality Control
either PM emissions, opacity, or indicative PM
(QA/QC) plans should be applied and documented to ensure
emissions using combustion parameters / visual
that data quality is adequate for the intended data use (e.g.,
monitoring.
method detection limits are below levels of concern).
Monitoring reports should include QA/QC documentation.
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for

turbines:
o
Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions
If Annual Stack Emission Testing demonstrates results
the results of scientific methods and mathematical models to
the location of potentially affected communities and
WORLD BANK GROUP
only for gaseous fuel-fired turbines).
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for boilers:
If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show

constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
Boilers with capacities between =3 MWth and < 20 MWth:

o
Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx and SO2 (NOx
Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For
less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
calculated based on fuel quality certification if no SO2
reduced from annual to every two or three years.
control equipment is used.
Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of

combustion parameters.SO2: Continuous monitoring if
26 An on-line catalogue of ISO standards relating to the environment, health
protection, and safety is available at:

http://www.iso.org/iso/en/CatalogueListPage.CatalogueList?ICS1=13&ICS2=&ICS
3=&scopelist=
27 An on-line catalogue of European Standards is available at:
http://www.cen.eu/catweb/cwen.htm .
28 The National Environmental Methods Index provides a searchable
clearinghouse of U.S. methods and procedures for both regulatory and nonregulatory monitoring purposes for water, sediment, air and tissues, and is
available at http://www.nemi.gov/.
APRIL 30, 2007
SO2 control equipment is used.
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for

engines:
o
Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx ,SO2 and PM (NOx

only for gaseous fuel-fired diesel engines).
11

o
WORLD BANK GROUP
If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show

constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
reduced from annual to every two or three years.
Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of

combustion parameters. SO2: Continuous monitoring if
SO2 control equipment is used. PM: Continuous
monitoring of either PM emissions or indicative PM
emissions using operating parameters.
APRIL 30, 2007
12

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.1 Air Emissions Estimation and Dispersion

Modeling Methods
The following is a partial list of documents to aid in the estimation
of air emissions from various processes and air dispersion
models:
Australian Emission Estimation Technique Manuals
http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/
Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook, UN / ECE / EMEP
and the European Environment Agency
http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm
Emission factors and emission estimation methods, US EPA
Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief
Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised), US Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), 2005
http://www.epa.gov/scram001/guidance/guide/appw_05.pdf
Frequently Asked Questions, Air Quality Modeling and
Assessment Unit (AQMAU), UK Environment Agency
http://www.environmentagency.gov.uk/subjects/airquality/236092/?version=1&lang=_e
OECD Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals
http://www.olis.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf/
APRIL 30, 2007
13

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2 Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies
Principal Sources and Issues
General Prevention / Process

Modification Approach
Control Options
Reduction
Efficiency (%)
Gas
Condition
Comments
Fabric Filters
99 - 99.7%
Dry gas, temp

<400F
Applicability depends on flue gas properties including temperature, chemical

properties, abrasion and load. Typical air to cloth ratio range of 2.0 to 3.5 cfm/ft2

Main sources are the combustion of fossil
fuels and numerous manufacturing processes
that collect PM through air extraction and
ventilation systems. Volcanoes, ocean spray,
forest fires and blowing dust (most prevalent
in dry and semiarid climates) contribute to
background levels.
Fuel switching (e.g. selection of lower sulfur

fuels) or reducing the amount of fine
particulates added to a process.
Achievable outlet concentrations of 23 mg/Nm 3

Electrostatic
Precipitator (ESP)
97 99%
Varies
depending of
particle type
Cyclone
74 95%
None
Most efficient for large particles. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40

mg/Nm 3
Wet Scrubber
93 95%
None
Wet sludge may be a disposal problem depending on local infrastructure.

Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm3
Fuel Switching
>90%
Sorbent Injection
30% - 70%
Calcium or lime is injected into the flue gas and the SO2 is adsorbed onto the
sorbent
Dry Flue Gas

Desulfurization
70%-90%
Can be regenerable or throwaway.
Wet Flue Gas

Desulfurization
>90%
Produces gypsum as a by-product
Precondition gas to remove large particles. Efficiency dependent on resistivity of

particle. Achievable outlet concentration of 23 mg/Nm3
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

Mainly produced by the combustion of fuels
such as oil and coal and as a by-product from
some chemical production or wastewater
treatment processes.
APRIL 30, 2007
Control system selection is heavily

dependent on the inlet concentration. For
SO2 concentrations in excess of 10%, the
stream is passed through an acid plant not
only to lower the SO2 emissions but also to
generate high grade sulfur for sale. Levels
below 10% are not rich enough for this
process and should therefore utilize
absorption or scrubbing, where SO2
molecules are captured into a liquid phase
or adsorption, where SO2 molecules are
captured on the surface of a solid
adsorbent.
Alternate fuels may include low sulfur coal, light diesel or natural gas with
consequent reduction in particulate emissions related to sulfur in the fuel. Fuel
cleaning or beneficiation of fuels prior to combustion is another viable option but
may have economic consequences.
14

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2: Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies (continued)
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
Associated with combustion of fuel.
May occur in several forms of nitrogen
oxide; namely nitric oxide (NO),
nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and nitrous
oxide (N2O), which is also a
greenhouse gas. The term NOx
serves as a composite between NO
and NO2 and emissions are usually
reported as NOx. Here the NO is
multiplied by the ratio of molecular
weights of NO2 to NO and added to
the NO2 emissions.
Means of reducing NOx emissions are
based on the modification of operating
conditions such as minimizing the
resident time at peak temperatures,
reducing the peak temperatures by
increasing heat transfer rates or
minimizing the availability of oxygen.
Percent Reduction by Fuel Type
Comments
Combustion modification
(Illustrative of boilers)
Coal
Oil
Gas
Low-excess-air firing
1030
1030
1030
Staged Combustion
2050
2050
2050
Flue Gas Recirculation
N/A
2050
2050
Water/Steam Injection
N/A
1050
N/A.
Low-NOx Burners
3040
3040
3040
Flue Gas Treatment
Coal
Oil
Gas
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
6090
6090
6090
N/A
3070
3070
Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction

(SNCR)
These modifications are capable of reducing NOx emissions by 50

to 95%. The method of combustion control used depends on the
type of boiler and the method of firing fuel.
Flue gas treatment is more effective in reducing NOx emissions

than are combustion controls. Techniques can be classified as
SCR, SNCR, and adsorption. SCR involves the injection of
ammonia as a reducing agent to convert NOx to nitrogen in the
presence of a catalyst in a converter upstream of the air heater.
Generally, some ammonia slips through and is part of the
emissions. SNCR also involves the injection of ammonia or urea
based products without the presence of a catalyst.
Note: Compiled by IFC based on inputs from technical experts.
APRIL 30, 2007
15

Annex 1.1.3 - Good International Industry Practice (GIIP)
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.4 - Examples of VOC Emissions Controls
Stack Height
(Based on United States 40 CFR, part 51.100 (ii)).
HG = H + 1.5L; where
Equipment Type
Modification
HG = GEP stack height measured from the ground level

elevation at the base of the stack
Approximate
Control
Efficiency
(%)
Seal-less design
10029
Closed-vent system
9030
Dual mechanical seal

with barrier fluid
maintained at a higher
pressure than the
pumped fluid
100
Closed-vent system
90
Dual mechanical seal

with barrier fluid
maintained at a higher
pressure than the
compressed gas
100
H = Height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the

stack.
L = Lesser dimension, height (h) or width (w), of nearby
Pumps
structures
Nearby structures = Structures within/touching a radius
of 5L but less than 800 m.
Projected width (w)
Compressors
Stack
Closed-vent system
Pressure Relief Devices
1.5*L
Rupture disk assembly
100
Valves
Seal-less design
100
Connectors
Weld together
100
Open-ended Lines
Blind, cap, plug, or

second valve
100
Sampling Connections
Closed-loop sampling
100
HG
h
H
Maximum 5*L
Variable31
Note: Examples of technologies are provided for illustrative purposes.

The availability and applicability of any particular technology will vary
depending on manufacturer specifications.
29 Seal-less equipment can be a large source of emissions in the event of

equipment failure.
30 Actual efficiency of a closed-vent system depends on percentage of vapors
collected and efficiency of control device to which the vapors are routed.
31 Control efficiency of closed vent-systems installed on a pressure relief
device may be lower than other closed-vent systems.
APRIL 30, 2007
16

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.5 - Fugitive PM Emissions Controls
Control Type
Control
Efficiency
Chemical Stabilization
0% - 98%
Hygroscopic salts
Bitumens/adhesives
60% - 96%
Surfactants
0% - 68%
Wet Suppression Watering
12% - 98%
Speed Reduction
0% - 80%
Traffic Reduction
Not quantified
Paving (Asphalt / Concrete)
85% - 99%
Covering with Gravel, Slag, or "Road

Carpet"
30% - 50%
Vacuum Sweeping
0% - 58%
Water Flushing/Broom Sweeping
0% - 96%
APRIL 30, 2007
17

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.2 Energy Conservation

should also evaluate energy conservation opportunities arising
Applicability and Approach .............................................18
Energy Management Programs...............................18
Energy Efficiency....................................................18
Process Heating.............................................................19
Heating Load Reduction .........................................19
Heat Distribution Systems.......................................19
Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements20
Process Cooling.............................................................20
Load Reduction......................................................21
Energy Conversion.................................................21
Refrigerant Compression Efficiency ........................23
Refrigeration System Auxiliaries..............................23
Compressed Air Systems...............................................24
Load reduction .......................................................24
Distribution.............................................................24
from manufacturing process modifications.
Energy Management Programs

Energy management programs should include the following
elements:
principal energy flows within a facility at unit process level
Preparation of mass and energy balance;
Definition and regular review of energy performance

targets, which are adjusted to account for changes in major
influencing factors on energy use
taken to reduce energy use
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that consume
appropriate levels
systems and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems

specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines by
providing information about common techniques for energy
conservation that may be applied to a range of industry sectors.
Energy management at the facility level should be viewed in the
context of overall consumption patterns, including those
associated with production processes and supporting utilities, as
Regular review of targets, which may include comparison

with benchmark data, to confirm that targets are set at
systems, such as motors, pumps, and fans; compressed air

(HVAC); and lighting systems. It complements the industry-
Regular comparison and monitoring of energy flows with

performance targets to identify where action should be

energy in process heating and cooling; process and auxiliary
Identification, and regular measurement and reporting of
Energy Efficiency
For any energy-using system, a systematic analysis of energy
efficiency improvements and cost reduction opportunities should
include a hierarchical examination of opportunities to:
Demand/Load Side Management by reducing loads on the

energy system
Supply Side Management by:
well as overall impacts associated with emissions from power
Reduce losses in energy distribution
sources. The following section provides guidance on energy
Improve energy conversion efficiency
management with a focus on common utility systems often
Exploit energy purchasing opportunities
representing technical and financially feasible opportunities for
Use lower-carbon fuels
improvement in energy conservation. However, operations
APRIL 30, 2007
18

ENERGY CONSERVATION
Common opportunities in each of these areas are summarized
WORLD BANK GROUP
Process Heating
Review opportunities to schedule work flow to limit the

need for process reheating between stages
below.32
Operate furnaces/ovens at slight positive pressure, and

maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the heated
Process heating is vital to many manufacturing processes,
system, thereby reducing the energy required to heat
including heating for fluids, calcining, drying, heat treating, metal
unnecessary air to system operating temperature
heating, melting, melting agglomeration, curing, and forming33.
Reduce radiant heat losses by sealing structural openings

and keep viewing ports closed when not in use
In process heating systems, a system heat and mass balance

will show how much of the systems energy input provides true
process heating, and quantify fuel used to satisfy energy losses
caused by excessive parasitic loads, distribution, or conversion
operating capacity
following techniques are often valuable and cost-effective.
Heating Load Reduction
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat losses through

furnace/oven etc. structure
Recover heat from hot process or exhaust streams to

reduce system loads
In intermittently-heated systems, consider use of low
Consider use of high emissivity coatings of high

temperature insulation, and consequent reduction in
losses. Examination of savings opportunities should be directed

by the results of the heat and mass balance, though the
Where possible, use the system for long runs close to or at
process temperature
Near net weight and shape heat designs
Robust Quality assurance on input material
Robust Scheduled maintenance programs
Heat Distribution Systems

Heat distribution in process heating applications typically takes
place through steam, hot water, or thermal fluid systems.
Losses can be reduced through the following actions:
thermal mass insulation to reduce energy required to heat
Promptly repair distribution system leaks
the system structure to operating temperature
Avoid steam leaks despite a perceived need to get steam
Control process temperature and other parameters
through the turbine. Electricity purchase is usually cheaper
accurately to avoid, for example, overheating or overdrying
overall, especially when the cost to treat turbine-quality
Examine opportunities to use low weight and/or low
boiler feed water is included. If the heat-power ratio of the
thermal mass product carriers, such as heated shapers,
distribution process is less than that of power systems,
kiln cars etc.
opportunities should be considered to increase the ratio; for

example, by using low-pressure steam to drive absorption
Additional guidance on energy efficiency is available from sources such as

Natural Resources Canada (NRCAN
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/newbuildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20); the European Union (EUROPA.
http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm ), and United States Department
of Energy (US DOE,
http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html).
cooling systems rather than using electrically-driven vapor-
32
compression systems.
Regularly verify correct operation of steam traps in steam

systems, and ensure that traps are not bypassed. Since
33 US DOE. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html
APRIL 30, 2007
19

ENERGY CONSERVATION
steam traps typically last approximately 5 years, 20%
gases should be no more than 20 K above steam
Insulate distribution system vessels, such as hot wells and
temperature)
from flue gases to pre-heat boiler feed water or combustion
Insulate all steam, condensate, hot water and thermal fluid
air
diameter pipe, in addition to insulating all hot valves and

flanges
Adopt automatic (continuous) boiler blowdown
In steam systems, return condensate to the boiler house
Recover heat from blowdown systems through flash steam
water and valuable beyond its heat content alone
recovery or feed-water preheat
Use flash steam recovery systems to reduce losses due to

evaporation of high-pressure condensate
Do not supply excessive quantities of steam to the deaerator
With fired heaters, consider opportunities to recover heat to
Consider steam expansion through a back-pressure turbine
combustion air through the use of recuperative or
rather than reducing valve stations
regenerative burner systems
Eliminate distribution system losses by adopting point-of-
use heating systems
Energy Conversion System Efficiency

Improvements
The following efficiency opportunities should be examined for
process furnaces or ovens, and utility systems, such as boilers
and fluid heaters:
Consider reverse osmosis or electrodialysis feed water

treatment to minimize the requirement for boiler blowdown
for re-use, since condensate is expensive boiler-quality
In steam boiler systems, use economizers to recover heat
water storage tanks

distribution pipework, down to and including 1 (25 mm)
Maintain clean heat transfer surfaces; in steam boilers, flue
should be replaced or repaired annually

de-aerators, in steam systems and thermal fluid or hot
WORLD BANK GROUP
Regularly monitor CO, oxygen or CO2 content of flue
For systems operating for extended periods (> 6000

hours/year), cogeneration of electrical power, heat and /or
cooling can be cost effective
Oxy Fuel burners
Oxygen enrichment/injection
Use of turbolators in boilers
Sizing design and use of multiple boilers for different load

configurations
Fuel quality control/fuel blending
gases to verify that combustion systems are using the
minimum practical excess air volumes
Process Cooling
Consider combustion automation using oxygen-trim
The general methodology outlined above should be applied to
controls
process cooling systems. Commonly used and cost-effective
Minimize the number of boilers or heaters used to meet
measures to improve process cooling efficiency are described
loads. It is typically more efficient to run one boiler at 90%
below.
of capacity than two at 45%. Minimize the number of

boilers kept at hotstandby
Use flue dampers to eliminate ventilation losses from hot

boilers held at standby
APRIL 30, 2007
20

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Load Reduction
Planting trees as thermal shields around buildings
Installing timers and/or thermostats and/or
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat gains through
enthalpy-based control systems
cooling system structure and to below-ambient temperature

o
refrigerant pipes and vessels
Control process temperature accurately to avoid

overcooling
Operate cooling tunnels at slight positive pressure and

maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the cooled
system, thus reducing the energy required to cool this
unnecessary air to system operating temperature
Examine opportunities to pre-cool using heat recovery to a

process stream requiring heating, or by using a higher
temperature cooling utility
In cold and chill stores, minimize heat gains to the cooled

space by use of air curtains, entrance vestibules, or rapidly
opening/closing doors. Where conveyors carry products
into chilled areas, minimize the area of transfer openings,
for example, by using strip curtains
Energy Conversion
The efficiency of refrigeration service provision is normally
discussed in terms of Coefficient of Performance (COP), which
is the ratio of cooling duty divided by input power. COP is
maximized by effective refrigeration system design and
increased refrigerant compression efficiency, as well as
minimization of the temperature difference through which the
system works and of auxiliary loads (i.e. those in addition to
compressor power demand) used to operate the refrigeration
system.
System Design
provided by cooling towers or dry air coolers, may be
example, those due to evaporator fans, other machinery,
appropriate, perhaps supplemented by refrigeration in
defrost systems and lighting in cooled spaces, circulation

(e.g. chilled water, brines, glycols)
Do not use refrigeration for auxiliary cooling duties, such as

compressor cylinder head or oil cooling
While not a thermal load, ensure there is no gas bypass of

the expansion valve since this imposes compressor load
while providing little effective cooling
If process temperatures are above ambient for all, or part,

of the year, use of ambient cooling systems, such as
Quantify and minimize incidental cooling loads, for
fans in cooling tunnels, or secondary refrigerant pumps
Installing ventilation heat recovery systems34
summer conditions.
Most refrigeration systems are electric-motor driven vapor

compression systems using positive displacement or
centrifugal compressors. The remainder of this guideline
relates primarily to vapor-compression systems. However,
when a cheap or free heat source is available (e.g. waste
heat from an engine-driven generatorlow-pressure steam
In the case of air conditioning applications, energy

efficiency techniques include:
o
Placing air intakes and air-conditioning units in cool,

shaded locations
Improving building insulation including seals, vents,

windows, and doors
APRIL 30, 2007
34 More information on HVAC energy efficiency can be found at the British
Columbia Building Corporation (Woolliams, 2002.

http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategi
es_guide.pdf), NRCANs EnerGuide
(http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N)
and NRCANs Energy Star Programs
(http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&pri
ntview=N#AC ), and the US Energy Star Program
(http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines).
21

ENERGY CONSERVATION
that has passed through a back-pressure turbine),
temperature is indicative of an appropriately sized
absorption refrigeration may be appropriate.
evaporator. When cooling liquids, 2K between leaving
Exploit high cooling temperature range: precooling by
liquid and evaporating temperatures can be achieved,
ambient and/or high temperature refrigeration before final
though a 4K difference is generally indicative of a
cooling can reduce refrigeration capital and running costs.
generously-sized evaporator.
High cooling temperature range also provides an
Keep the evaporator clean. When cooling air, ensure
opportunity for countercurrent (cascade) cooling, which
correct defrost operation. In liquid cooling, monitor
reduces refrigerant flow needs.
refrigerant/process temperature differences and compare
Keep hot and cold fluids separate, for example, do not
with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger
mix water leaving the chiller with water returning from
contamination by scale or oil.
cooling circuits.
WORLD BANK GROUP
Ensure oil is regularly removed from the evaporator, and

that oil additions and removals balance.
In low-temperature systems where high temperature

differences are inevitable, consider two-stage or compound
Avoid the use of back-pressure valves.
compression, or economized screw compressors, rather
Adjust expansion valves to minimize suction superheat
than single-stage compression.

Minimizing Temperature Differences
consistent with avoidance of liquid carry-over to

compressors.
A vapor-compression refrigeration system raises the
Ensure that an appropriate refrigerant charge volume is

present.
temperature of the refrigerant from somewhat below the lowest

process temperature (the evaporating temperature) to provide
Reducing Condensing Temperature
process cooling, to a higher temperature (the condensing
Consider whether to use air-cooled or evaporation-based
temperature), somewhat above ambient, to facilitate heat
cooling (e.g. evaporative or water cooled condensers and
rejection to the air or cooling water systems. Increasing
cooling towers). Air-cooled evaporators usually have
evaporating temperature typically increases compressor cooling
higher condensing temperatures, hence higher compressor
capacity without greatly affecting power consumption. Reducing
energy use, and auxiliary power consumption, especially in
condensing temperature increases evaporator cooling capacity
low humidity climates. If a wet system is used, ensure
and substantially reduces compressor power consumption.
adequate treatment to prevent growth of legionella
Elevating Evaporating Temperature
bacteria.
Whichever basic system is chosen, select a relatively large
Select a large evaporator to permit relatively low
condenser to minimize differences between condensing
temperature differences between process and evaporating
and the heat sink temperatures. Condensing temperatures
temperatures. Ensure that energy use of auxiliaries (e.g.
with air cooled or evaporative condensers should not be
evaporator fans) does not outweigh compression savings.
more than 10K above design ambient condition, and a 4K
In air-cooling applications, a design temperature difference
approach in a liquid-cooled condenser is possible.
of 6-10 K between leaving air temperature and evaporating

APRIL 30, 2007
22

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Avoid accumulation of non-condensable gases in the
Refrigerant Compression Efficiency
condenser system. Consider the installation of refrigerated
Some refrigerant compressors and chillers are more
non-condensable purgers, particularly for systems
efficient than others offered for the same duty. Before
operating below atmospheric pressure.
purchase, identify the operating conditions under which the
Keep condensers clean and free from scale. Monitor
compressor or chiller is likely to operate for substantial
refrigerant/ambient temperature differences and compare
parts of its annual cycle. Check operating efficiency under
with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger
these conditions, and ask for estimates of annual running
contamination.
cost. Note that refrigeration and HVAC systems rarely run
Avoid liquid backup, which restricts heat transfer area in
for extended periods at design conditions, which are
condensers. This can be caused by installation errors such
deliberately extreme. Operational efficiency under the most
as concentric reducers in horizontal liquid refrigerant pipes,
commonly occurring off-design conditions is likely to be
or up and over liquid lines leading from condensers.
most important.
In multiple condenser applications, refrigerant liquid lines
Compressors lose efficiency when unloaded. Avoid
should be connected via drop-leg traps to the main liquid
operation of multiple compressors at part-load conditions.
refrigerant line to ensure that hot gases flow to all
Note that package chillers can gain coefficient of
condensers.
performance (COP) when slightly unloaded, as loss of
Avoid head pressure control to the extent possible. Head
compressor efficiency can be outweighed by the benefits of
pressure control maintains condensing temperature at, or
reduced condensing and elevated evaporating
near, design levels. It therefore prevents reduction in
temperature. However, it is unlikely to be energy efficient
compressor power consumption, which accompanies
to operate a single compressor-chiller at less than 50% of
reduced condensing temperature, by restricting condenser
capacity.
capacity (usually by switching off the condenser, or cooling
Consider turndown efficiency when specifying chillers.
tower fans, or restricting cooling water flow) under
Variable speed control or multiple compressor chillers can
conditions of less severe than design load or ambient
be highly efficient at part loads.
temperature conditions. Head pressure is often kept higher
Use of thermal storage systems (e.g., ice storage) can
than necessary to facilitate hot gas defrost or adequate
avoid the need for close load-tracking and, hence, can
liquid refrigerant circulation. Use of electronic rather than
avoid part-loaded compressor operation.
thermostatic expansion valves, and liquid refrigerant
pumps can permit effective refrigerant circulation at much
Refrigeration System Auxiliaries
reduced condensing temperatures.
Many refrigeration system auxiliaries (e.g. evaporator fans and
Site condensers and cooling towers with adequate spacing
chilled water pumps) contribute to refrigeration system load, so
so as to prevent recirculation of hot air into the tower.
reductions in their energy use have a double benefit. General

energy saving techniques for pumps and fans, listed in the next
section of these guidelines, should be applied to refrigeration
auxiliaries.
APRIL 30, 2007
23

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Additionally, auxiliary use can be reduced by avoidance of part-
Implement systems for systematic identification and

repair of leaks
load operation and in plant selection (e.g. axial fan evaporative

condensers generally use less energy than equivalent
All condensate drain points should be trapped. Do not

leave drain valves continuously cracked open
centrifugal fan towers).

o
Under extreme off-design conditions, reduction in duty of cooling
Train workers never to direct compressed air against

their bodies or clothing to dust or cool themselves
system fans and pumps can be worthwhile, usually when the
down.
lowest possible condensing pressure has been achieved.
Compressed Air Systems

Compressed air is the most commonly found utility service in
industry, yet in many compressed air systems, the energy
contained in compressed air delivered to the user is often 10%
Distribution
Monitor pressure losses in filters and replace as

appropriate
Use adequately sized distribution pipework designed to

minimize pressure losses
or less of energy used in air compression. Savings are often

possible through the following techniques:
Load reduction
Examine each true user of compressed air to identify the

air volume needed and the pressure at which this should
be delivered.
Do not mix high volume low pressure and low volume high
pressure loads. Decentralize low volume high-pressure
applications or provide dedicated low-pressure utilities, for
example, by using fans rather than compressed air.
Review air use reduction opportunities, for example:

o
Use air amplifier nozzles rather than simple open-pipe

compressed air jets
Consider whether compressed air is needed at all
Where air jets are required intermittently (e.g. to

propel product), consider operating the jet via a
process-related solenoid valve, which opens only
when air is required
Use manual or automatically operated valves to

isolate air supply to individual machines or zones that
are not in continuous use
APRIL 30, 2007
24

WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality
Applicability and Approach......................................25

General Liquid Effluent Quality.......................................26
Discharge to Surface Water....................................26
Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems.....................26
Land Application of Treated Effluent........................27
Septic Systems ......................................................27
Wastewater Management...............................................27
Industrial Wastewater .............................................27
Sanitary Wastewater ..............................................29
Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations .30
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations..30
Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater
Treatment Operations.............................................30
Monitoring......................................................................30
Understand the quality, quantity, frequency and sources of

liquid effluents in its installations. This includes knowledge
about the locations, routes and integrity of internal drainage
systems and discharge points
Plan and implement the segregation of liquid effluents

principally along industrial, utility, sanitary, and stormwater
categories, in order to limit the volume of water requiring
specialized treatment. Characteristics of individual streams
may also be used for source segregation.
Identify opportunities to prevent or reduce wastewater

pollution through such measures as recycle/reuse within their
facility, input substitution, or process modification (e.g.
change of technology or operating conditions/modes).
Assess compliance of their wastewater discharges with the
This guideline applies to projects that have either direct or indirect
applicable: (i) discharge standard (if the wastewater is
discharge of process wastewater, wastewater from utility
discharged to a surface water or sewer), and (ii) water quality
operations or stormwater to the environment. These guidelines
standard for a specific reuse (e.g. if the wastewater is reused
are also applicable to industrial discharges to sanitary sewers that
for irrigation).
discharge to the environment without any treatment. Process

wastewater may include contaminated wastewater from utility
Additionally, the generation and discharge of wastewater of any
operations, stormwater, and sanitary sewage. It provides
type should be managed through a combination of:
information on common techniques for wastewater management,

water conservation, and reuse that can be applied to a wide range
of industry sectors. This guideline is meant to be complemented
by the industry-specific effluent guidelines presented in the
generation
wastewater, sanitary (domestic) sewage, or stormwater should

incorporate the necessary precautions to avoid, minimize, and
control adverse impacts to human health, safety, or the
environment.
Process modification, including waste minimization, and

reducing the use of hazardous materials to reduce the load of
Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS)

Guidelines. Projects with the potential to generate process
Water use efficiency to reduce the amount of wastewater
pollutants requiring treatment
If needed, application of wastewater treatment techniques to

further reduce the load of contaminants prior to discharge,
taking into consideration potential impacts of cross-media
transfer of contaminants during treatment (e.g., from water to
air or land)
In the context of their overall ESHS management system, facilities

should:
APRIL 30, 2007
25

WORLD BANK GROUP
When wastewater treatment is required prior to discharge, the
the receiving water into consideration, should also influence the
level of treatment should be based on:
acceptable pollution loadings and effluent discharge quality.

Additional considerations that should be included in the setting of
Whether wastewater is being discharged to a sanitary sewer
project-specific performance levels for wastewater effluents
system, or to surface waters
include:
National and local standards as reflected in permit

requirements and sewer system capacity to convey and treat
Process wastewater treatment standards consistent with
wastewater if discharge is to sanitary sewer
applicable Industry Sector EHS Guidelines. Projects for
Assimilative capacity of the receiving water for the load of
which there are no industry-specific guidelines should
contaminant being discharged wastewater if discharge is to
reference the effluent quality guidelines of an industry sector
surface water
with suitably analogous processes and effluents;
Intended use of the receiving water body (e.g. as a source of
Compliance with national or local standards for sanitary
drinking water, recreation, irrigation, navigation, or other)
wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the indicative
Presence of sensitive receptors (e.g., endangered species)
guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
or habitats
discharges shown in Table 1.3.1 below ;
Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) for the relevant
Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result

in an increase greater than 3C of ambient temperature at
industry sector
the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which
General Liquid Effluent Quality
takes into account ambient water quality, receiving water use

and assimilative capacity among other considerations.
Discharge to Surface Water

Discharges of process wastewater, sanitary wastewater,
Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems
wastewater from utility operations or stormwater to surface water
Discharges of industrial wastewater, sanitary wastewater,
should not result in contaminant concentrations in excess of local
wastewater from utility operations or stormwater into public or
ambient water quality criteria or, in the absence of local criteria,
private wastewater treatment systems should:
other sources of ambient water quality.35 Receiving water use36

and assimilative capacity37, taking other sources of discharges to
Meet the pretreatment and monitoring requirements of the

sewer treatment system into which it discharges.
35 An example is the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria
Not interfere, directly or indirectly, with the operation and
http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/wqcriteria.html
maintenance of the collection and treatment systems, or
36 Examples of receiving water uses as may be designated by local authorities
pose a risk to worker health and safety, or adversely impact
include: drinking water (with some level of treatment), recreation, aquaculture,

irrigation, general aquatic life, ornamental, and navigation. Examples of healthbased guideline values for receiving waters include World Health Organization
(WHO) guidelines for recreational use
(http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/guidelines/en/index.html)
37 The assimilative capacity of the receiving water body depends on numerous
factors including, but not limited to, the total volume of water, flow rate, flushing
rate of the water body and the loading of pollutants from other effluent sources in
APRIL 30, 2007
the area or region. A seasonally representative baseline assessment of ambient

water quality may be required for use with established scientific methods and
mathematical models to estimate potential impact to the receiving water from an
effluent source.
26

characteristics of residuals from wastewater treatment
WORLD BANK GROUP
Properly designed and installed in accordance with local
operations.
regulations and guidance to prevent any hazard to public
Be discharged into municipal or centralized wastewater
health or contamination of land, surface or groundwater.
treatment systems that have adequate capacity to meet local
Well maintained to allow effective operation.
regulatory requirements for treatment of wastewater
Installed in areas with sufficient soil percolation for the design
generated from the project. Pretreatment of wastewater to

meet regulatory requirements before discharge from the
wastewater loading rate.
Installed in areas of stable soils that are nearly level, well
project site is required if the municipal or centralized
drained, and permeable, with enough separation between the
wastewater treatment system receiving wastewater from the
drain field and the groundwater table or other receiving
project does not have adequate capacity to maintain
waters.
regulatory compliance.
Wastewater Management
Land Application of Treated Effluent
Wastewater management includes water conservation,
The quality of treated process wastewater, wastewater from utility
wastewater treatment, stormwater management, and wastewater
operations or stormwater discharged on land, including wetlands,
and water quality monitoring.
should be established based on local regulatory requirements. .

Where land is used as part of the treatment system and the
Industrial Wastewater
ultimate receptor is surface water, water quality guidelines for
Industrial wastewater generated from industrial operations
surface water discharges specific to the industry sector process
includes process wastewater, wastewater from utility operations,,
should
apply.38
Potential impact on soil, groundwater, and surface
runoff from process and materials staging areas, and
water, in the context of protection, conservation and long term
miscellaneous activities including wastewater from laboratories,
sustainability of water and land resources should be assessed
equipment maintenance shops, etc.. The pollutants in an industrial
when land is used as part of any wastewater treatment system.
wastewater may include acids or bases (exhibited as low or high

pH), soluble organic chemicals causing depletion of dissolved
Septic Systems
oxygen, suspended solids, nutrients (phosphorus, nitrogen),
Septic systems are commonly used for treatment and disposal of
heavy metals (e.g. cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury,
domestic sanitary sewage in areas with no sewerage collection
nickel, zinc), cyanide, toxic organic chemicals, oily materials, and
networks, Septic systems should only be used for treatment of
volatile materials. , as well as from thermal characteristics of the
sanitary sewage, and unsuitable for industrial wastewater
discharge (e.g., elevated temperature). Transfer of pollutants to
treatment. When septic systems are the selected form of
another phase, such as air, soil, or the sub-surface, should be
wastewater disposal and treatment, they should be:
minimized through process and engineering controls.
38 Additional guidance on water quality considerations for land application is
Process Wastewater Examples of treatment approaches
available in the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and
Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html
typically used in the treatment of industrial wastewater are
APRIL 30, 2007
summarized in Annex 1.3.1. While the choice of treatment

27

WORLD BANK GROUP
technology is driven by wastewater characteristics, the actual
account ambient water quality, receiving water use, potential
performance of this technology depends largely on the adequacy
receptors and assimilative capacity among other
of its design, equipment selection, as well as operation and
considerations;
maintenance of its installed facilities. Adequate resources are
Minimizing use of antifouling and corrosion inhibiting
required for proper operation and maintenance of a treatment
chemicals by ensuring appropriate depth of water intake and
facility, and performance is strongly dependent on the technical
use of screens. Least hazardous alternatives should be used
ability and training of its operational staff. One or more treatment
with regards to toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and
technologies may be used to achieve the desired discharge
bioaccumulation potential. Dose applied should accord with
quality and to maintain consistent compliance with regulatory
local regulatory requirements and manufacturer
requirements. The design and operation of the selected
recommendations;
wastewater treatment technologies should avoid uncontrolled air
Testing for residual biocides and other pollutants of concern
emissions of volatile chemicals from wastewaters. Residuals from
should be conducted to determine the need for dose
industrial wastewater treatment operations should be disposed in
adjustments or treatment of cooling water prior to discharge.
compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of

which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health
Stormwater Management - Stormwater includes any surface
and safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water
runoff and flows resulting from precipitation, drainage or other
and land resources.
sources. Typically stormwater runoff contains suspended

sediments, metals, petroleum hydrocarbons, Polycyclic Aromatic
Wastewater from Utilities Operations - Utility operations such
Hydrocarbons (PAHs), coliform, etc. Rapid runoff, even of
as cooling towers and demineralization systems may result in high
uncontaminated stormwater, also degrades the quality of the
rates of water consumption, as well as the potential release of
receiving water by eroding stream beds and banks. In order to
high temperature water containing high dissolved solids, residues
reduce the need for stormwater treatment, the following principles
of biocides, residues of other cooling system anti-fouling agents,
should be applied:
etc. Recommended water management strategies for utility

operations include:
Stormwater should be separated from process and sanitary

wastewater streams in order to reduce the volume of
Adoption of water conservation opportunities for facility

cooling systems as provided in the Water Conservation
wastewater to be treated prior to discharge
section below;
Use of heat recovery methods (also energy efficiency
Surface runoff from process areas or potential sources of

contamination should be prevented
Where this approach is not practical, runoff from process and
improvements) or other cooling methods to reduce the
storage areas should be segregated from potentially less
temperature of heated water prior to discharge to ensure the
contaminated runoff
discharge water temperature does not result in an increase
Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination
greater than 3C of ambient temperature at the edge of a
should be minimized (e.g. by minimizing the area of
scientifically established mixing zone which takes into
impermeable surfaces) and the peak discharge rate should
APRIL 30, 2007
28

WORLD BANK GROUP
be reduced (e.g. by using vegetated swales and retention
medical infirmaries, water softening etc. may also be discharged
ponds);
to the sanitary wastewater treatment system. Recommended
Where stormwater treatment is deemed necessary to protect
sanitary wastewater management strategies include:
the quality of receiving water bodies, priority should be given

to managing and treating the first flush of stormwater runoff
with selected treatment option (e.g. septic system which can
where the majority of potential contaminants tend to be
only accept domestic sewage);
present;
When water quality criteria allow, stormwater should be
sewer systems;
for meeting water needs at the facility;

Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed
for sanitary wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the
workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment
indicative guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
areas.
Sludge from stormwater catchments or collection and
treatment systems may contain elevated levels of pollutants
discharges shown in Table 1.3.1;
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to

either a septic system, or where land is used as part of the
and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
treatment system, treatment to meet applicable national or
requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be
local standards for sanitary wastewater discharges is
consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
required.
conservation and long term sustainability of water and land

resources.
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to

surface water, treatment to meet national or local standards
and maintained as appropriate at refueling facilities,
Segregation and pretreatment of oil and grease containing

effluents (e.g. use of a grease trap) prior to discharge into
managed as a resource, either for groundwater recharge or
Segregation of wastewater streams to ensure compatibility
Sludge from sanitary wastewater treatment systems should

be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
Sanitary Wastewater
requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be
Sanitary wastewater from industrial facilities may include effluents
consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
from domestic sewage, food service, and laundry facilities serving
conservation and long term sustainability of water and land
site employees. Miscellaneous wastewater from laboratories,
resources.
APRIL 30, 2007
29

WORLD BANK GROUP
or a non-hazardous waste and managed accordingly as described
Table 1.3.1 Indicative Values for Treated

Sanitary Sewage Discharges a
Pollutants
in the Waste Management section of this document.
Occupational Health and Safety Issues in

Wastewater Treatment Operations
Units
Guideline Value
pH
pH
6 9
BOD
mg/l
30
COD
mg/l
125
Total nitrogen
mg/l
10
managed. Examples of these hazards include the potential for
Total phosphorus
mg/l
trips and falls into tanks, confined space entries for maintenance
Oil and grease
mg/l
10
operations, and inhalation of VOCs, bioaerosols, and methane,
Total suspended solids
mg/l
50
Total coliform bacteria
MPN b / 100 ml
400a
Notes:
a Not applicable to centralized, municipal, wastewater treatment systems
which are included in EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation.
b MPN = Most Probable Number
Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations
Wastewater treatment facility operators may be exposed to

physical, chemical, and biological hazards depending on the
design of the facilities and the types of wastewater effluents
contact with pathogens and vectors, and use of potentially

hazardous chemicals, including chlorine, sodium and calcium
hypochlorite, and ammonia. Detailed recommendations for the
management of occupational health and safety issues are
presented in the relevant section of this document. Additional
guidance specifically applicable to wastewater treatment systems
is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation.
Air emissions from wastewater treatment operations may include

hydrogen sulfide, methane, ozone (in the case of ozone
Monitoring
disinfection), volatile organic compounds (e.g., chloroform
A wastewater and water quality monitoring program with adequate
generated from chlorination activities and other volatile organic
resources and management oversight should be developed and
compounds (VOCs) from industrial wastewater), gaseous or
implemented to meet the objective(s) of the monitoring program.
volatile chemicals used for disinfection processes (e.g., chlorine
The wastewater and water quality monitoring program should
and ammonia), and bioaerosols. Odors from treatment facilities
consider the following elements:
can also be a nuisance to workers and the surrounding

community. Recommendations for the management of emissions
Monitoring parameters: The parameters selected for
are presented in the Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality
monitoring should be indicative of the pollutants of concern
section of this document and in the EHS Guidelines for Water and
from the process, and should include parameters that are
Sanitation.
regulated under compliance requirements;
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations
Monitoring type and frequency: Wastewater monitoring
Sludge from a waste treatment plant needs to be evaluated on a
should take into consideration the discharge characteristics
case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous
from the process over time. Monitoring of discharges from

processes with batch manufacturing or seasonal process
variations should take into consideration of time-dependent
APRIL 30, 2007
30

WORLD BANK GROUP
variations in discharges and, therefore, is more complex than

monitoring of continuous discharges. Effluents from highly
variable processes may need to be sampled more frequently
or through composite methods. Grab samples or, if
automated equipment permits, composite samples may offer
more insight on average concentrations of pollutants over a
24-hour period. Composite samplers may not be appropriate
where analytes of concern are short-lived (e.g., quickly
degraded or volatile).
Monitoring locations: The monitoring location should be

selected with the objective of providing representative
monitoring data. Effluent sampling stations may be located
at the final discharge, as well as at strategic upstream points
prior to merging of different discharges. Process discharges
should not be diluted prior or after treatment with the
objective of meeting the discharge or ambient water quality
standards.
Data quality: Monitoring programs should apply

internationally approved methods for sample collection,
preservation and analysis. Sampling should be conducted by
or under the supervision of trained individuals. Analysis
should be conducted by entities permitted or certified for this
purpose. Sampling and Analysis Quality Assurance/Quality
Control (QA/QC) plans should be prepared and,
implemented. QA/QC documentation should be included in
monitoring reports.
APRIL 30, 2007
31

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.3.1 - Examples of Industrial Wastewater Treatment Approaches
pH
Pollutant/Parameter
Control Options / Principle

Chemical, Equalization
Common End of Pipe Control Technology

Acid/Base addition, Flow equalization
Oil and Grease / TPH
Phase separation
Dissolved Air Floatation, oil water separator, grease trap
TSS - Settleable
Settling, Size Exclusion
Sedimentation basin, clarifier, centrifuge, screens
TSS - Non-Settleable
Floatation, Filtration - traditional and

tangential
Dissolved air floatation, Multimedia filter, sand filter, fabric filter,

ultrafiltration, microfiltration
Hi - BOD (> 2 Kg/m3)
Biological - Anaerobic
Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
Lo - BOD (< 2 Kg/m3)
Biological - Aerobic, Facultative
Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
COD - Non-Biodegradable
Oxidation, Adsorption, Size

Exclusion
Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Membranes
Metals - Particulate and

Soluble
Coagulation, flocculation,
precipitation, size exclusion
Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential
Inorganics / Non-metals
Coagulation, flocculation,
precipitation, size exclusion,
Oxidation, Adsorption
Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential, Chemical

oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Reverse Osmosis,
Evaporation
Organics - VOCs and SVOCs
Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic,

Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation
Biological : Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid; Chemical

oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon
Biological : Attached growth; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation,
Activated Carbon
Aerobic/Anoxic biological treatment, chemical hydrolysis and air
stripping, chlorination, ion exchange
Temperature
Capture Active or Passive;

Biological; Adsorption, Oxidation
Biological Nutrient Removal,
Chemical, Physical, Adsorption
Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic,
Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation
Evaporative Cooling
TDS
Concentration, Size Exclusion
Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
Active Ingredients/Emerging
Contaminants
Adsorption, Oxidation, Size

Exclusion, Concentration
Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Ion

Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization
Emissions Odors and

VOCs
Nutrients
Color
Radionuclides
Pathogens
Toxicity
APRIL 30, 2007
Adsorption,Size Exclusion,
Concentration
Disinfection, Sterilization
Adsorption, Oxidation, Size
Exclusion, Concentration
Biological Aerobic, Chemical oxidation, Activated Carbon

Surface Aerators, Flow Equalization
Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization

Chlorine, Ozone, Peroxide, UV, Thermal
Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Evaporation,
crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
32

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.4 Water Conservation

Water Monitoring and Management................................33
Process Water Reuse and Recycling..............................33
Building Facility Operations ............................................34
Cooling Systems............................................................34
Heating Systems............................................................34
Water Monitoring and Management

The essential elements of a water management program
involve:
Identification, regular measurement, and recording of

principal flows within a facility;
Definition and regular review of performance targets, which
Water conservation programs should be implemented
are adjusted to account for changes in major factors
commensurate with the magnitude and cost of water use.
affecting water use (e.g. industrial production rate);
These programs should promote the continuous reduction in

water consumption and achieve savings in the water
targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce
pumping, treatment and disposal costs. Water conservation

measures may include water monitoring/management
Regular comparison of water flows with performance

water use.
Water measurement (metering) should emphasize areas of
techniques; process and cooling/heating water recycling,
greatest water use. Based on review of metering data,
reuse, and other techniques; and sanitary water conservation
unaccounted useindicating major leaks at industrial facilities
techniques.
could be identified.
General recommendations include:
Process Water Reuse and Recycling
Storm/Rainwater harvesting and use
Opportunities for water savings in industrial processes are
Zero discharge design/Use of treated waste water to be
highly industry-specific. However, the following techniques have
included in project design processes
all been used successfully, and should be considered in
Use of localized recirculation systems in
conjunction with the development of the metering system
plant/facility/shops (as opposed to centralized
described above.
recirculation system), with provision only for makeup

water
Use of dry process technologies e.g. dry quenching
Process water system pressure management
Project design to have measures for adequate water
Washing Machines: Many washing machines use large

quantities of hot water. Use can increase as nozzles
become enlarged due to repeated cleaning and /or wear.
Monitor machine water use, compare with specification,
and replace nozzles when water and heat use reaches
collection, spill control and leakage control system
levels warranting such work.
Water reuse: Common water reuse applications include

countercurrent rinsing, for example in multi-stage washing
APRIL 30, 2007
33

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
and rinsing processes, or reusing waste water from one
the facility, whether sanitary or including other activities
process for another with less exacting water
such as showering or catering
requirements. For example, using bleaching rinse water
Regularly maintain plumbing, and identify and repair leaks
for textile washing, or bottle-washer rinse water for
Shut off water to unused areas
bottle crate washing, or even washing the floor. More
Install self-closing taps, automatic shut-off valves, spray
sophisticated reuse projects requiring treatment of water
nozzles, pressure reducing valves, and water conserving
before reuse are also sometimes practical.
fixtures (e.g. low flow shower heads, faucets, toilets,
Water jets/sprays: If processes use water jets or sprays
urinals; and spring loaded or sensored faucets)
(e.g. to keep conveyors clean or to cool product) review
when needed
the accuracy of the spray pattern to prevent

unnecessary water loss.
Flow control optimization: Industrial processes

sometimes require the use of tanks, which are refilled to
control losses. It is often possible to reduce the rate of
water supply to such tanks, and sometimes to reduce
tank levels to reduce spillage. If the process uses water
Operate dishwashers and laundries on full loads, and only
Install water-saving equipment in lavatories, such as lowflow toilets
Cooling Systems
Water conservation opportunities in cooling systems include:
towers rather than once-through cooling systems
cooling sprays, it may be possible to reduce flow while

maintaining cooling performance. Testing can
If hoses are used in cleaning, use flow controls to

restrict wasteful water flow
of water sprayed from hosepipes

o
Using flow timers and limit switches to control

water use
Using clean-up practices rather than hosing down
Building Facility Operations

Consumption of building and sanitary water is typically less
than that used in industrial processes. However, savings can
readily be identified, as outlined below:
accumulation of dissolved solids
Use of air cooling rather than evaporative cooling,

although this may increase electricity use in the
Consider the use of high pressure, low volume

cleaning systems rather than using large volumes
Limiting condenser or cooling tower blowdown to the

minimum required to prevent unacceptable
determine the optimum balance.

o
Use of closed circuit cooling systems with cooling
cooling system
Use of treated waste water for cooling towers
Reusing/recycling cooling tower blowdown
Heating Systems
Heating systems based on the circulation of low or medium
pressure hot water (which do not consume water) should be
closed. If they do consume water, regular maintenance should
be conducted to check for leaks. However, large quantities of
water may be used by steam systems, and this can be reduced
by the following measures:
Compare daily water use per employee to existing

benchmarks taking into consideration the primary use at
APRIL 30, 2007
34

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Repair of steam and condensate leaks, and repair

of all failed steam traps
Return of condensate to the boilerhouse, and use

of heat exchangers (with condensate return) rather
than direct steam injection where process permits
Flash steam recovery
Minimizing boiler blowdown consistent with

maintaining acceptably low dissolved solids in
boiler water. Use of reverse osmosis boiler feed
water treatment substantially reduces the need for
boiler blowdown
Minimizing deaerator heating
APRIL 30, 2007
35

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.5 Hazardous Materials Management

When a hazardous material is no longer usable for its original
General Hazardous Materials Management....................37
Hazard Assessment ...............................................37
Management Actions..............................................37
Release Prevention and Control Planning ............38
Occupational Health and Safety ...........................38
Process Knowledge and Documentation ..............39
Preventive Measures..............................................39
Hazardous Materials Transfer..............................39
Overfill Protection................................................39
Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention.............40
Control Measures...................................................40
Secondary Containment (Liquids) ........................40
Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection..............41
Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) ....................41
Management of Major Hazards.......................................42
Management Actions..............................................42
Preventive Measures..............................................43
Emergency Preparedness and Response ...............44
Community Involvement and Awareness.................44
purpose and is intended for disposal, but still has hazardous

properties, it is considered a hazardous waste (see Section 1.4).
This guidance is intended to be applied in conjunction with
traditional occupational health and safety and emergency
preparedness programs which are included in Section 2.0 on
Occupational Health and Safety Management, and Section 3.7 on
Emergency Preparedness and Response. Guidance on the
Transport of Hazardous Materials is provided in Section 3.5.
This section is divided into two main subsections:
General Hazardous Materials Management: Guidance applicable
to all projects or facilities that handle or store any quantity of
hazardous materials.
Management of Major Hazards: Additional guidance for projects or

These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any
quantity of hazardous materials (Hazmats), defined as materials
facilities that store or handle hazardous materials at, or above,

threshold quantities39, and thus require special treatment to
prevent accidents such as fire, explosions, leaks or spills, and to
prepare and respond to emergencies.
that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment

due to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be
The overall objective of hazardous materials management is to
classified according to the hazard as explosives; compressed
avoid or, when avoidance is not feasible, minimize uncontrolled
gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids;
releases of hazardous materials or accidents (including explosion
flammable solids; oxidizing substances; toxic materials;
and fire) during their production, handling, storage and use. This
radioactive material; and corrosive substances. Guidance on the
objective can be achieved by:
transport of hazardous materials is covered in Section 3 of this

document.
39 For examples, threshold quantities should be those established for emergency
planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency.

Protection of Environment (Title Threshold quantities are provided in the US
Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts
68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007
36

Establishing hazardous materials management priorities
WORLD BANK GROUP
The types and amounts of hazardous materials present in the
based on hazard analysis of risky operations identified
project. This information should be recorded and should
through Social and Environmental Assessment;
include a summary table with the following information:
Where practicable, avoiding or minimizing the use of
hazardous materials. For example, non-hazardous materials
the Hazmat
have been found to substitute asbestos in building materials,
PCBs in electrical equipment, persistent organic pollutants

o
substances in refrigeration systems;
fire or explosion;
Using engineering controls (containment, automatic alarms,
and shut-off systems) commensurate with the nature of
Implementing management controls (procedures,
inspections, communications, training, and drills) to address
residual risks that have not been prevented or controlled
through engineering measures.
General Hazardous Materials Management

Projects which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous
Quantity of Hazmat used per month
Characteristic(s) that make(s) the Hazmat hazardous

(e.g. flammability, toxicity)
Analysis of potential spill and release scenarios using

available industry statistics on spills and accidents where
hazard;
Internationally accepted regulatory reporting threshold

quantity or national equivalent40 of the Hazmat
Preventing uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials to

the environment or uncontrolled reactions that might result in
Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the

Hazmat
(POPs) in pesticides formulations, and ozone depleting
Name and description (e.g. composition of a mixture) of
available
Analysis of the potential for uncontrolled reactions such as

fire and explosions
Analysis of potential consequences based on the physicalgeographical characteristics of the project site, including
aspects such as its distance to settlements, water resources,
and other environmentally sensitive areas
materials should establish management programs that are
Hazard assessment should be performed by specialized
commensurate with the potential risks present. The main
professionals using internationally-accepted methodologies such
objectives of projects involving hazardous materials should be the
as Hazardous Operations Analysis (HAZOP), Failure Mode and
protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of
Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Hazard Identification (HAZID).
releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed

by integrating prevention and control measures, management
actions, and procedures into day-to-day business activities.
Potentially applicable elements of a management program include
the following:
Management Actions
The management actions to be included in a Hazardous Materials
Management Plan should be commensurate with the level of
Hazard Assessment
The level of risk should be established through an on-going
assessment process based on:
APRIL 30, 2007
40 Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency.
Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
37

WORLD BANK GROUP
potential risks associated with the production, handling, storage,
external resources for equipment and personnel, if
and use of hazardous materials.
necessary, to supplement internal resources
Description of response activities in the event of a spill,
Release Prevention and Control Planning
release, or other chemical emergency including:
Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials,
Internal and external notification procedures
facilities should prepare a spill control, prevention, and
Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups
countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency
Decision process for assessing severity of the release,
Preparedness and Response Plan (described in more detail in
and determining appropriate actions
Section 3.7). The plan should be tailored to the hazards
Facility evacuation routes
associated with the project, and include:
Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal,
incident investigation, employee re-entry, and
Training of operators on release prevention, including drills
restoration of spill response equipment.
specific to hazardous materials as part of emergency

preparedness response training
Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the

mechanical integrity and operability of pressure vessels,
tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems,
containment infrastructure, emergency shutdown systems,
controls and pumps, and associated process equipment
Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should address

applicable, essential elements of occupational health and safety
management as described in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health
and Safety, including:
Job safety analysis to identify specific potential occupational
(SOPs) for filling USTs, ASTs or other containers or
hazards and industrial hygiene surveys, as appropriate, to
equipment as well as for transfer operations by personnel
monitor and verify chemical exposure levels, and compare
trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous
with applicable occupational exposure standards41
material, and in spill prevention and response
Occupational Health and Safety
Hazard communication and training programs to prepare
SOPs for the management of secondary containment
workers to recognize and respond to workplace chemical
structures, specifically the removal of any accumulated fluid,
hazards. Programs should include aspects of hazard
such as rainfall, to ensure that the intent of the system is not
identification, safe operating and materials handling
accidentally or willfully defeated
procedures, safe work practices, basic emergency
Identification of locations of hazardous materials and
procedures, and special hazards unique to their jobs.
associated activities on an emergency plan site map
Documentation of availability of specific personal protective

equipment and training needed to respond to an emergency
Documentation of availability of spill response equipment

sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a spill and a list of
APRIL 30, 2007
41 Including: Threshold Limit Value (TLV) occupational exposure guidelines and
Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs), American Conference of Governmental

Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), http://www.acgih.org/TLV/; U.S. National Institute
for Occupational Health and Safety (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/npg/;
Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), U.S. Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA),
http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARD
S&p_id=9992; Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values, European Union,
http://europe.osha.eu.int/good_practice/risks/ds/oel/; and other similar sources.
38

Training should incorporate information from Material Safety
Data
Sheets42
(MSDSs) for hazardous materials being
handled. MSDSs should be readily accessible to employees

in their local language.
Preventive Measures
Hazardous Materials Transfer
Uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials may result from
small cumulative events, or from more significant equipment
Definition and implementation of permitted maintenance
failure associated with events such as manual or mechanical
activities, such as hot work or confined space entries
transfer between storage systems or process equipment.
Provision of suitable personal protection equipment (PPE)
Recommended practices to prevent hazardous material releases
(footwear, masks, protective clothing and goggles in
from processes include:
appropriate areas), emergency eyewash and shower

stations, ventilation systems, and sanitary facilities
WORLD BANK GROUP
materials in tanks (e.g., all acids use one type of connection,
Monitoring and record-keeping activities, including audit
all caustics use another), and maintaining procedures to
procedures designed to verify and record the effectiveness of

prevention and control of exposure to occupational hazards,
and maintaining accident and incident investigation reports
prevent addition of hazardous materials to incorrect tanks
to ensure safe transfer
materials containers at connection points or other possible
Written process safety parameters (i.e., hazards of the
overflow points.
chemical substances, safety equipment specifications, safe

operation ranges for temperature, pressure, and other
applicable parameters, evaluation of the consequences of
Provision of secondary containment, drip trays or other

overflow and drip containment measures, for hazardous
facility ES/OHS MS and include:
Regular inspection, maintenance and repair of fittings, pipes

and hoses
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be

incorporated into, and consistent with, the other elements of the
Use of transfer equipment that is compatible and suitable for

the characteristics of the materials transferred and designed
on file for a period of at least five years
Process Knowledge and Documentation
Use of dedicated fittings, pipes, and hoses specific to
Overfill Protection
Overfills of vessels and tanks should be prevented as they are
deviations, etc.)
among the most common causes of spills resulting in soil and
Written operating procedures
water contamination, and among the easiest to prevent.
Compliance audit procedures
Recommended overfill protection measures include:
Prepare written procedures for transfer operations that

includes a checklist of measures to follow during filling
operations and the use of filling operators trained in these
procedures
42 MSDSs are produced by the manufacturer, but might not be prepared for
chemical intermediates that are not distributed in commerce. In these cases,

employers still need to provide workers with equivalent information.
APRIL 30, 2007
Installation of gauges on tanks to measure volume inside
Use of dripless hose connections for vehicle tank and fixed

connections with storage tanks
39

Provision of automatic fill shutoff valves on storage tanks to
WORLD BANK GROUP
Prohibition of all sources of ignition from areas near

flammable storage tanks
prevent overfilling
Use of a catch basin around the fill pipe to collect spills
Use of piping connections with automatic overfill protection
Control Measures
(float valve)
Secondary Containment (Liquids)
Pumping less volume than available capacity into the tank or
A critical aspect for controlling accidental releases of liquid
vessel by ordering less material than its available capacity
hazardous materials during storage and transfer is the provision of
Provision of overfill or over pressure vents that allow
secondary containment. It is not necessary for secondary
controlled release to a capture point
containment methods to meet long term material compatibility as
with primary storage and piping, but their design and construction
Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention
should hold released materials effectively until they can be
Reactive, flammable, and explosive materials should also be
detected and safely recovered. Appropriate secondary
managed to avoid uncontrolled reactions or conditions resulting in
containment structures consist of berms, dikes, or walls capable of
fire or explosion. Recommended prevention practices include:
containing the larger of 110 percent of the largest tank or 25%
percent of the combined tank volumes in areas with above-ground
Storage of incompatible materials (acids, bases, flammables,

oxidizers, reactive chemicals) in separate areas, and with
containment facilities separating material storage areas
Provision of material-specific storage for extremely

hazardous or reactive materials
Use of flame arresting devices on vents from flammable
and will be made of impervious, chemically resistant material.

Secondary containment design should also consider means to
prevent contact between incompatible materials in the event of a
release.
storage containers
Other secondary containment measures that should be applied
Provision of grounding and lightning protection for tank
depending on site-specific conditions include:
farms, transfer stations, and other equipment that handles

flammable materials
tanks with a total storage volume equal or greater than 1,000 liters
in areas with surfaces sufficiently impervious to avoid loss to
Selection of materials of construction compatible with
the environment and sloped to a collection or a containment
products stored for all parts of storage and delivery systems,
structure not connected to municipal wastewater/stormwater
and avoiding reuse of tanks for different products without

checking material compatibility
Storage of hazardous materials in an area of the facility

separated from the main production works. Where proximity
is unavoidable, physical separation should be provided using
structures designed to prevent fire, explosion, spill, and other
emergency situations from affecting facility operations
Transfer of hazardous materials from vehicle tanks to storage
collection system
Where it is not practical to provide permanent, dedicated

containment structures for transfer operations, one or more
alternative forms of spill containment should be provided,
such as portable drain covers (which can be deployed for the
duration of the operations), automatic shut-off valves on
storm water basins, or shut off valves in drainage or sewer
facilities, combined with oil-water separators
APRIL 30, 2007
40

Storage of drummed hazardous materials with a total volume
Underground Storage Tanks (USTs)45
equal or greater than 1,000 liters in areas with impervious
Although there are many environmental and safety advantages of
surfaces that are sloped or bermed to contain a minimum of
underground storage of hazardous materials, including reduced
25 percent of the total storage volume
risk of fire or explosion, and lower vapor losses into the
Provision of secondary containment for components (tanks,
atmosphere, leaks of hazardous materials can go undetected for
pipes) of the hazardous material storage system, to the
long periods of time with potential for soil and groundwater
extent feasible
contamination. Examples of techniques to manage these risks
Conducting periodic (e.g. daily or weekly) reconciliation of
include:
tank contents, and inspection of visible portions of tanks and

piping for leaks;
WORLD BANK GROUP
Use of double-walled, composite, or specially coated storage

and piping systems particularly in the use of underground
materials
detecting leaks between the two walls.
for steel tanks
containment, particularly in high-risk locations43. Leak detection is

especially important in situations where secondary containment is
not feasible or practicable, such as in long pipe runs. Acceptable
lines that direct any leaked product to monitoring ports at the

lowest point of the liner or structure
Use of automatic pressure loss detectors on pressurized or

long distance piping
Use of approved or certified integrity testing methods on
Considering the use of SCADA 44 if financially feasible
Reconciling tank contents by measuring the volume in store

with the expected volume, given the stored quantity at last
stocking, and deliveries to and withdrawals from the store
Testing integrity by volumetric, vacuum, acoustic, tracers, or

other means on all tanks at regular intervals
piping or tank systems, at regular intervals
Monitoring the surface above any tank for indications of soil

movement
leak detection methods include:
For new installations, installing impermeable liners or

structures (e.g., concrete vaults) under and around tanks and
Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection

Leak detection may be used in conjunction with secondary
Assessing local soil corrosion potential, and installing and

maintaining cathodic protection (or equivalent rust protection)
storage tanks (USTs) and underground piping. If doublewalled systems are used, they should provide a means of
Avoiding use of USTs for storage of highly soluble organic
Considering the monitoring groundwater of quality down

gradient of locations where multiple USTs are in use
Evaluating the risk of existing UST in newly acquired facilities

to determine if upgrades are required for USTs that will be
continued to be used, including replacement with new
43
High-risk locations are places where the release of product from the storage
system could result in the contamination of drinking water source or those located
in water resource protection areas as designated by local authorities.
systems or permanent closure of abandoned USTs.

Ensuring that new USTs are sited away from wells,
44 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

45 Additional details on the management of USTs is provided in the EHS
Guidelines for Retail Petroleum Stations.
APRIL 30, 2007
41

WORLD BANK GROUP
reservoirs and other source water protection areas and
the prevention measures (see below) should be conducted at
floodplains, and maintained so as to prevent corrosion.
least every three years and should include:
Management of Major Hazards
Preparation of a report of the findings
Determination and documentation of the appropriate
In addition to the application of the above-referenced guidance on
response to each finding
prevention and control of releases of hazardous materials,

projects involving production, handling, and storage of hazardous
materials at or above threshold limits46 should prepare a
Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable

information about site hazards and the steps needed to
Hazardous Materials Risk Management Plan, in the context of its
prevent accidental releases. An incident investigation
overall ES/OHS MS, containing all of the elements presented
mechanism should include procedures for:
below.47 The objective of this guidance is the prevention and

control of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or
Initiation of the investigation promptly
explosive chemicals that may result in toxic, fire, or explosion
Summarizing the investigation in a report
hazards.48
Addressing the report findings and recommendations
A review of the report with staff and contractors
Management Actions
prevention of accidents.
The technical basis for changes in processes and

operations
Employee Participation: A written plan of action should

describe an active employee participation program for the
Management of Change: These procedures should address:

o
Contractors: There should be a mechanism for contractor
The impact of changes on health and safety
control which should include a requirement for them to
Modification to operating procedures
develop hazard materials management procedures that meet
Authorization requirements
the requirements of the hazardous materials management
Employees affected
plan. Their procedures should be consistent with those of
Training needs
the contracting company and the contractor workforce should
Compliance Audit: A compliance audit is a way to evaluate
undergo the same training. Additionally, procedures should
compliance with the prevention program requirements for
require that contractors are:
each process. A compliance audit covering each element of
Provided with safety performance procedures and safety

and hazard information
46 Threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning
purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection

of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 300-399 and 700 to 789).
47 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Risk Management Manual. Washington,

D.C. December 2000.
48 The approach to the management of major hazards is largely based on an
approach to Process Safety Management developed by the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007
Observe safety practices
Act responsibly
Have access to appropriate training for their employees
Ensure that their employees know process hazards and

applicable emergency actions
42

Prepare and submit training records for their employees
initial startup, normal operations, temporary operations,
to the contracting company
emergency shutdown, emergency operations, normal
Inform their employees about the hazards presented by
shutdown, and start-up following a normal or emergency
their work
shutdown or major change). These SOPs should include
Assess trends of repeated similar incidents
special considerations for Mazmats used in the process or
Develop and implement procedures to manage repeated
operations (e.g. temperature control to prevent emissions of
similar incidents
a volatile hazardous chemical; diversion of gaseous
Training: Project employees should be provided training on

Hazmat management. The training program should include:
discharges of hazardous pollutants from the process to a

temporary storage tank in case of emergency).
A list of employees to be trained
Other procedures to be developed include impacts of
Specific training objectives
deviations, steps to avoid deviations, prevention of chemical
Mechanisms to achieve the objectives (i.e., hands-on
exposure, exposure control measures, and equipment
workshops, videos, etc.)
inspections.
The means to determine whether the training program is

effective
Training procedures for new hires and refresher courses

for existing employees
Preventive Measures
The purpose of preventive measures is to ensure that safetyrelated aspects of the process and equipment are considered,
limits to be placed on the operations are well known, and
accepted standards and codes are adopted, where they apply.
WORLD BANK GROUP
Mechanical Integrity of process equipment, piping and

instrumentation: Inspection and maintenance procedures
should be developed and documented to ensure mechanical
integrity of equipment, piping, and instrumentation and
prevent uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials from
the project. These procedures should be included as part of
the project SOPs. The specific process components of major
interest include pressure vessels and storage tanks, piping
systems, relief and vent systems and devices, emergency
shutdown systems, controls, and pumps. Recommended
Process Safety Information: Procedures should be prepared
aspects of the inspection and maintenance program include:
for each hazardous materials and include:
Developing inspection and maintenance procedures
Establishing a quality assurance plan for equipment,
Compilation of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Identification of maximum intended inventories and safe

upper/lower parameters
maintenance materials, and spare parts

o
Documentation of equipment specifications and of

codes and standards used to design, build and operate
maintenance procedures
o
Operating Procedures: SOPs should be prepared for each
Conducting equipment, piping, and instrumentation

inspections and maintenance
the process
Conducting employee training on the inspection and
Identifying and correcting identified deficiencies
step of all processes or operations within the project (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007
43

o
Evaluating the inspection and maintenance results and,
incorporated into and consistent with, the facilitys overall ES/OHS
if necessary, updating the inspection and maintenance
MS, should be prepared to cover the following:49
procedures
o
WORLD BANK GROUP
Reporting the results to management.
Informing the public and emergency response agencies
Hot Work Permit: Hot work operations such as brazing,
Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
torch-cutting, grinding, soldering, and welding are
Taking emergency response actions
associated with potential health, safety, and property hazards
Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan

to reflect changes, and ensuring that employees are
resulting from the fumes, gases, sparks, and hot metal and
informed of such changes
radiant energy produced during hot work. Hot work permit is

required for any operation involving open flames or producing
Emergency Equipment: Procedures should be prepared for
heat and/or sparks. The section of SOPs on hot work should
using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining the emergency
include the responsibility for hot work permitting, personal
response equipment.
protection equipment (PPE), hot work procedures, personnel

training, and recordkeeping.
Planning Coordination: Procedures should be prepared for:
Training: Employees and contractors should be trained on

emergency response procedures.
Pre-Start Review: Procedures should be prepared to carry

out pre-start reviews when a modification is significant
Community Involvement and Awareness
enough to require a change in safety information under the
When hazardous materials are in use above threshold quantities,
management of change procedure. The procedures should:
the management plan should include a system for community
Confirm that the new or modified construction and/or
awareness, notification and involvement that should be
equipment meet design specifications
commensurate with the potential risks identified for the project
Ensure that procedures for safety, operation,
during the hazard assessment studies. This should include
maintenance, and emergency are adequate
mechanisms for sharing the results of hazard and risk assessment
Include a process hazard assessment, and resolve or
studies in a timely, understandable and culturally sensitive manner
implement recommendations for new process
with potentially affected communities that provides a means for
Ensure that training for all affected employees is being
public feedback. Community involvement activities should include:
conducted
Emergency Preparedness and Response

When handling hazardous materials, procedures and practices
should be developed allowing for quick and efficient responses to
Availability of general information to the potentially affected

community on the nature and extent of project operations,
and the prevention and control measures in place to ensure
no effects to human health
accidents that could result in human injury or damage to the

environment. An Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan,
APRIL 30, 2007
49 For a comprehensive treatment of the development of emergency response
plans in conjunction with communities refer to the Awareness and Preparedness

for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at:
http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
44

WORLD BANK GROUP
The potential for off-site effects to human health or the

environment following an accident at planned or existing
hazardous installations
Specific and timely information on appropriate behavior and

safety measures to be adopted in the event of an accident
including practice drills in locations with higher risks
Access to information necessary to understand the nature of

the possible effect of an accident and an opportunity to
contribute effectively, as appropriate, to decisions concerning
hazardous installations and the development of community
emergency preparedness plans.
APRIL 30, 2007
45

WASTE MANAGEMENT
1.6 Waste Management

General Waste Management..........................................47
Waste Management Planning .................................47
Waste Prevention...................................................47
Recycling and Reuse..............................................48
Treatment and Disposal..........................................48
Hazardous Waste Management......................................48
Waste Storage .......................................................48
Transportation........................................................49
Treatment and Disposal..........................................49
Commercial or Government Waste Contractors....49
Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste ..................50
Monitoring..............................................................50
WORLD BANK GROUP
residual waste from industrial operations, such as boiler slag,

clinker, and fly ash.
Hazardous waste shares the properties of a hazardous
material (e.g. ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity), or
other physical, chemical, or biological characteristics that
may pose a potential risk to human health or the environment
if improperly managed. Wastes may also be defined as
hazardous by local regulations or international conventions,
based on the origin of the waste and its inclusion on
hazardous waste lists, or based on its characteristics.
Sludge from a waste treatment plant, water supply treatment
plant, or air pollution control facility, and other discarded

These guidelines apply to projects that generate, store, or
handle any quantity of waste across a range of industry
sectors. It is not intended to apply to projects or facilities
material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained

gaseous material resulting from industrial operations needs
to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis to establish whether
it constitutes a hazardous or a non-hazardous waste.
where the primary business is the collection, transportation,
Facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the
treatment, or disposal of wastes. Specific guidance for these
following:
types of facilities is presented in the Environmental Health

and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste Management
Establishing waste management priorities at the outset

of activities based on an understanding of potential
Facilities.
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and
A waste is any solid, liquid, or contained gaseous material
impacts and considering waste generation and its
that is being discarded by disposal, recycling, burning or
consequences
incineration. It can be byproduct of a manufacturing process
Establishing a waste management hierarchy that
or an obsolete commercial product that can no longer be
considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery,
used for intended purpose and requires disposal.
recycling, removal and finally disposal of wastes.
Solid (non-hazardous) wastes generally include any garbage,

refuse. Examples of such waste include domestic trash and
garbage; inert construction / demolition materials; refuse,
Avoiding or minimizing the generation waste materials,

as far as practicable
Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has

been minimized, recovering and reusing waste
such as metal scrap and empty containers (except those

previously used to contain hazardous materials which should,
in principle, be managed as a hazardous waste); and
APRIL 30, 2007
46

WASTE MANAGEMENT
Where waste can not be recovered or reused, treating,
WORLD BANK GROUP
site storage
destroying, and disposing of it in an environmentally

sound manner
Definition of procedures and operational controls for on-
Definition of options / procedures / operational controls

for treatment and final disposal
General Waste Management

The following guidance applies to the management of non-
Waste Prevention
hazardous and hazardous waste. Additional guidance
Processes should be designed and operated to prevent, or
specifically applicable to hazardous wastes is presented
minimize, the quantities of wastes generated and hazards
below. Waste management should be addressed through a
associated with the wastes generated in accordance with the
Waste management system that addresses issues linked to
following strategy:
waste minimization, generation, transport, disposal, and

monitoring.
Waste Management Planning

Facilities that generate waste should characterize their waste
or toxic materials, or with those where processing

generates lower waste volumes
including modification of design of the production
generation rates, or according to local regulatory

waste management strategies should include:
Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices,

including inventory control to reduce the amount of
waste resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off-
and design activities, including during equipment
specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to
modifications and process alterations, to identify
plant needs
opportunities, and necessary treatment, storage, and
Instituting procurement measures that recognize

opportunities to return usable materials such as
disposal infrastructure
containers and which prevents the over ordering of
Collection of data and information about the process
materials
and waste streams in existing facilities, including

characterization of waste streams by type, quantities,
process, operating conditions, and process controls50
Review of new waste sources during planning, siting,
expected waste generation, pollution prevention
Applying manufacturing process that convert materials

efficiently, providing higher product output yields,
according to composition, source, types of wastes produced,

requirements. Effective planning and implementation of
Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous
Minimizing hazardous waste generation by

implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the
and potential use/disposition
commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to
Establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that
be managed
takes into account the potential EHS risks during the

waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to
manage the waste in an environmentally sound manner
Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well

as reuse and recycling
APRIL 30, 2007
50 Examples of waste prevention strategies include the concept of Lean
Manufacturing found at
http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/minimize/lean.htm
47

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Recycling and Reuse
wastes; properly designed, permitted and operated
In addition to the implementation of waste prevention
landfills or incinerators designed for the respective type
strategies, the total amount of waste may be significantly
of waste; or other methods known to be effective in the
reduced through the implementation of recycling plans, which
safe, final disposal of waste materials such as
should consider the following elements:
bioremediation.
Evaluation of waste production processes and

identification of potentially recyclable materials
Identification and recycling of products that can be

reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industry
activity at the site
Hazardous wastes should always be segregated from nonhazardous wastes. If generation of hazardous waste can not
be prevented through the implementation of the above
general waste management practices, its management
Investigation of external markets for recycling by other
should focus on the prevention of harm to health, safety, and
industrial processing operations located in the
the environment, according to the following additional
neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste
principles:
exchange)
Hazardous Waste Management
Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of
with the management of any generated hazardous
waste generation and recycling rates
Providing training and incentives to employees in order

to meet objectives
Understanding potential impacts and risks associated

waste during its complete life cycle
Ensuring that contractors handling, treating, and

disposing of hazardous waste are reputable and
Treatment and Disposal
legitimate enterprises, licensed by the relevant
If waste materials are still generated after the implementation
regulatory agencies and following good international
of feasible waste prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery and
industry practice for the waste being handled
recycling measures, waste materials should be treated and

disposed of and all measures should be taken to avoid
potential impacts to human health and the environment.
Selected management approaches should be consistent with
Ensuring compliance with applicable local and

international regulations51
Waste Storage
the characteristics of the waste and local regulations, and
Hazardous waste should be stored so as to prevent or
may include one or more of the following:
control accidental releases to air, soil, and water resources in
area location where:

On-site or off-site biological, chemical, or physical
treatment of the waste material to render it nonhazardous prior to final disposal
Treatment or disposal at permitted facilities specially

designed to receive the waste. Examples include:
51 International requirements may include host-country commitments
under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
Hazardous Waste and their disposal (http://www.basel.int/) and Rotterdam

Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous
Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade (http://www.pic.int/)
composting operations for organic non-hazardous

APRIL 30, 2007
48

WASTE MANAGEMENT
Waste is stored in a manner that prevents the
WORLD BANK GROUP
commingling or contact between incompatible wastes,
emergency plans to address their accidental release
and allows for inspection between containers to monitor
(additional information on Emergency Plans in provided
leaks or spills. Examples include sufficient space
in Section 3 of this document)
between incompatibles or physical separation such as
walls or containment curbs
Transportation
Secondary containment systems should be constructed
On-site and Off-site transportation of waste should be
with materials appropriate for the wastes being
conducted so as to prevent or minimize spills, releases, and
contained and adequate to prevent loss to the
exposures to employees and the public. All waste
environment
containers designated for off-site shipment should be
Secondary containment is included wherever liquid
secured and labeled with the contents and associated
wastes are stored in volumes greater than 220 liters.
hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles before
The available volume of secondary containment should
leaving the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper
be at least 110 percent of the largest storage container,
(i.e., manifest) that describes the load and its associated
or 25 percent of the total storage capacity (whichever is
hazards, consistent with the guidance provided in Section 3.4
greater), in that specific location
on the Transport of Hazardous Materials.
Provide adequate ventilation where volatile wastes are
special management actions, conducted by employees who

have received specific training in handling and storage of
hazardous wastes:
Provision of readily available information on chemical
compatibility to employees, including labeling each
container to identify its contents
Limiting access to hazardous waste storage areas to
employees who have received proper training
Treatment and Disposal

In addition to the recommendations for treatment and
disposal applicable to general wastes, the following issues
specific to hazardous wastes should be considered:
Commercial or Government Waste Contractors

In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned
waste vendors (taking into consideration proximity and
transportation requirements), facilities generating waste
should consider using:
Have the technical capability to manage the waste in a
Clearly identifying (label) and demarcating the area,
manner that reduces immediate and future impact to the
including documentation of its location on a facility map
environment
or site plan
piping of hazardous waste
wind and rain
Hazardous waste storage activities should also be subject to
Avoiding underground storage tanks and underground
Store in closed containers away from direct sunlight,
stored.
Preparing and implementing spill response and
Conducting periodic inspections of waste storage areas
Have all required permits, certifications, and approvals,

of applicable government authorities
and documenting the findings

APRIL 30, 2007
49

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Have been secured through the use of formal
are generated and stored on site, monitoring activities
procurement agreements
should include:
o
In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned
indications of loss
waste disposal operators (taking into consideration proximity

o
and transportation requirements), project sponsors should
Installing on-site waste treatment or recycling
required and employing the practice of keeping
As a final option, constructing facilities that will provide
locks and safety equipment in standby position
for the environmental sound long-term storage of
when the area is not occupied)
wastes on-site (as described elsewhere in the General

EHS Guidelines) or at an alternative appropriate
Checking the operability of emergency systems
Documenting results of testing for integrity,
location up until external commercial options become
emissions, or monitoring stations (air, soil vapor, or
available
groundwater)
o
Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste
materials in storage
quantities by many projects through a variety of activities
Tracking of waste generation trends by type and amount

of waste generated, preferably by facility departments
lubricating oil; used batteries (such as nickel-cadmium or

lead acid); and lighting equipment, such as lamps or lamp
Regular audits of waste segregation and collection

practices
Examples of these types of wastes include: spent solvents

and oily rags, empty paint cans, chemical containers; used
Documenting any changes to the storage facility,

and any significant changes in the quantity of
Hazardous waste materials are frequently generated in small

such as equipment and building maintenance activities.
Verification of locks, emergency valves, and other

safety devices for easy operation (lubricating if
processes
Identification of cracks, corrosion, or damage to

tanks, protective equipment, or floors
consider using:
Inspection of vessels for leaks, drips or other
Characterizing waste at the beginning of generation of a
ballasts. These wastes should be managed following the
new waste stream, and periodically documenting the
guidance provided in the above sections.
characteristics and proper management of the waste,

especially hazardous wastes
Monitoring
amount of waste generated and its destination
Monitoring activities associated with the management of

hazardous and non-hazardous waste should include:
Regular visual inspection of all waste storage collection

and storage areas for evidence of accidental releases
and to verify that wastes are properly labeled and
stored. When significant quantities of hazardous wastes
APRIL 30, 2007
Keeping manifests or other records that document the
Periodic auditing of third party treatment, and disposal

services including re-use and recycling facilities when
significant quantities of hazardous wastes are managed
by third parties. Whenever possible, audits should
include site visits to the treatment storage and disposal
location
50

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Regular monitoring of groundwater quality in cases of

Hazardous Waste on site storage and/or pretreatment
and disposal
Monitoring records for hazardous waste collected,

stored, or shipped should include:
o
Name and identification number of the material(s)

composing the hazardous waste
Physical state (i.e., solid, liquid, gaseous or a

combination of one, or more, of these)
Quantity (e.g., kilograms or liters, number of

containers)
Waste shipment tracking documentation to include,

quantity and type, date dispatched, date
transported and date received, record of the
originator, the receiver and the transporter
Method and date of storing, repacking, treating, or

disposing at the facility, cross-referenced to
specific manifest document numbers applicable to
the hazardous waste
Location of each hazardous waste within the

facility, and the quantity at each location
APRIL 30, 2007
51

NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the
1.7 Noise
source or to the receptor location to be effective
Applicability
Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment
This section addresses impacts of noise beyond the property
Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of
boundary of the facilities. Worker exposure to noise is
equipment or operations, especially mobile sources
covered in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety.
operating through community areas
Prevention and Control

Noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied
advantage of distance and shielding
where predicted or measured noise impacts from a project

facility or operations exceed the applicable noise level
Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels
Installing silencers for fans
Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and

compressor components
Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing

radiating noise
Reducing project traffic routing through community

areas wherever possible
emissions depend on the source and proximity of receptors.

Noise reduction options that should be considered include:
Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise

buffer during facility design
sources is to implement noise control measures at source.53

Methods for prevention and control of sources of noise
Siting permanent facilities away from community areas if

possible
guideline at the most sensitive point of reception.52 The

preferred method for controlling noise from stationary
Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take
Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft

(airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas
Developing a mechanism to record and respond to

complaints
Noise Level Guidelines

Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in
Table 1.7.1, or result in a maximum increase in background
levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site.
Improving the acoustic performance of constructed

buildings, apply sound insulation
Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a

continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in
order to minimize the transmission of sound through the
52 A point of reception or receptor may be defined as any point on the
premises occupied by persons where extraneous noise and/or vibration are

received. Examples of receptor locations may include: permanent or
seasonal residences; hotels / motels; schools and daycares; hospitals and
nursing homes; places of worship; and parks and campgrounds.
53 At the design stage of a project, equipment manufacturers should provide
design or construction specifications in the form of Insertion Loss

Performance for silencers and mufflers, and Transmission Loss
Performance for acoustic enclosures and upgraded building construction.
APRIL 30, 2007
52

NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise
Table 1.7.1- Noise Level
Guidelines 54
level limit is represented by the background or ambient noise
One Hour L Aeq (dBA)
Receptor
Daytime
07:00 - 22:00
Nighttime
22:00 - 07:00
Residential; institutional;
educational55
55
45
Industrial; commercial
70
70
levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or

noise source(s) under investigation.
Highly intrusive noises, such as noise from aircraft flyovers

and passing trains, should not be included when establishing
background noise levels.
Monitoring
Noise monitoring56 may be carried out for the purposes of
establishing the existing ambient noise levels in the area of
the proposed or existing facility, or for verifying operational
phase noise levels.
Noise monitoring programs should be designed and
conducted by trained specialists. Typical monitoring periods
should be sufficient for statistical analysis and may last 48
hours with the use of noise monitors that should be capable
of logging data continuously over this time period, or hourly,
or more frequently, as appropriate (or else cover differing
time periods within several days, including weekday and
weekend workdays). The type of acoustic indices recorded
depends on the type of noise being monitored, as
established by a noise expert. Monitors should be located
approximately 1.5 m above the ground and no closer than 3
54 Guidelines values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source:
Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999.

55 For acceptable indoor noise levels for residential, institutional, and
educational settings refer to WHO (1999).
56 Noise monitoring should be carried out using a Type 1 or 2 sound level
meter meeting all appropriate IEC standards.
APRIL 30, 2007
53

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.8 Contaminated Land
The liability that it may pose to the polluter/business

owners (e.g., cost of remediation, damage of business

Risk Screening ..............................................................55
Interim Risk Management ..............................................56
Detailed Risk Assessment..............................................56
Permanent Risk Reduction Measures.............................57
Occupational Health and Safety Considerations..............59
reputation and/or business-community relations) or

affected parties (e.g. workers at the site, nearby property
owners).
Contamination of land should be avoided by preventing or

This section provides a summary of management
approaches for land contamination due to anthropogenic
releases of hazardous materials, wastes, or oil, including
naturally occurring substances. Releases of these materials
controlling the release of hazardous materials, hazardous

wastes, or oil to the environment. When contamination of land is
suspected or confirmed during any project phase, the cause of
the uncontrolled release should be identified and corrected to
avoid further releases and associated adverse impacts.
may be the result of historic or current site activities,
Contaminated lands should be managed to avoid the risk to
including, but not limited to, accidents during their handling
human health and ecological receptors. The preferred strategy
and storage, or due to their poor management or disposal.
for land decontamination is to reduce the level of contamination
Land is considered contaminated when it contains hazardous

materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally
occurring levels.
Contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface
soils that, through leaching and transport, may affect
groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites. Where
subsurface contaminant sources include volatile substances,
soil vapor may also become a transport and exposure
medium, and create potential for contaminant infiltration of
at the site while preventing the human exposure to

contamination.
To determine whether risk management actions are warranted,
the following assessment approach should be applied to
establish whether the three risk factors of Contaminants,
Receptors, and Exposure Pathways co-exist, or are likely to
co-exist, at the project site under current or possible future land
use:
Contaminant(s): Presence of hazardous materials, waste,

or oil in any environmental media at potentially hazardous
indoor air spaces of buildings.
concentrations
Contaminated land is a concern because of:
plants, and other living organisms with the contaminants of
The potential risks to human health and ecology (e.g.

risk of cancer or other human health effects, loss of
ecology);
Receptor(s): Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife,

concern
Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of

migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g.,
leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes
APRIL 30, 2007
54

CONTAMINATED LAND
(e.g., ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would
WORLD BANK GROUP
Identification of the location of suspected highest level of
allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with
contamination through a combination of visual and
contaminants
historical operational information;
Sampling and testing of the contaminated media (soils or

water) according to established technical methods
applicable to suspected type of contaminant57,58;
Evaluation of the analytical results against the local and

national contaminated sites regulations. In the absence of
such regulations or environmental standards, other sources
of risk-based standards or guidelines should be consulted
to obtain comprehensive criteria for screening soil
concentrations of pollutants.59
Verification of the potential human and/or ecological

receptors and exposure pathways relevant to the site in
question
FIGURE 1.8.1: Inter-Relationship of Contaminant

Risk Factors
The outcome of risk-screening may reveal that there is no

overlap between the three risk-factors as the contaminant levels
identified are below those considered to pose a risk to human
When the three risk factors are considered to be present (in
health or the environment. Alternatively, interim or permanent
spite of limited data) under current or foreseeable future

conditions, the following steps should be followed (as
described in the remaining parts of this section):
1)
Risk screening;
2)
Interim risk management;
3)
Detailed quantitative risk assessment; and
4)
Permanent risk reduction measures.
Risk Screening
This step is also known as problem formulation for
environmental risk assessment. Where there is potential
evidence of contamination at a site, the following steps are
recommended:
APRIL 30, 2007
57 BC MOE. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance
58 Massachusetts Department of Environment.
http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup
59 These may include the USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs).
http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. These RBCs are

considered acceptable for specific land use and contaminant exposure
scenarios as they have been developed by governments using risk assessment
techniques for use as general targets in the site remediation. Separate PRGs
have been developed or adopted for soil, sediment or groundwater, and often a
distinction is made between land uses (as noted earlier) because of the need for
more stringent guidelines for residential and agricultural versus
commercial/industrial landuse. The RBC Tables contains Reference Doses
(RfDs) and Cancer Slope Factors (CSFs) for about 400 chemicals. These
toxicity factors have been combined with standard exposure scenarios to
calculate RBCs--chemical concentrations corresponding to fixed levels of risk
(i.e., a Hazard Quotient (HQ) of 1, or lifetime cancer risk of 1E-6, whichever
occurs at a lower concentration) in water, air, fish tissue, and soil for individual
chemical substances. The primary use of RBCs is for chemical screening during
baseline risk assessment (see EPA Regional Guidance EPA/903/R-93-001,
Selecting Exposure Routes and Contaminants of Concern by Risk-Based
Screening). Additional useful soil quality guidelines can also be obtained from
Lijzen et al. 2001.
55

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
risk reduction measures may need to be taken with, or
strategies that yield acceptable health risks, while achieving low
without, more detailed risk assessment activities, as
level contamination on-site. An assessment of contaminant
described below.
risks needs to be considered in the context of current and future

land use, and development scenarios (e.g., residential,
Interim Risk Management
commercial, industrial, and urban parkland or wilderness use).
Interim risk management actions should be implemented at
A detailed quantitative risk assessment builds on risk screening
any phase of the project life cycle if the presence of land
(problem formulation). It involves first, a detailed site
contamination poses an imminent hazard, i.e., representing
investigation to identify the scope of contamination.61 Site
an immediate risk to human health and the environment if
investigation programs should apply quality assurance/quality
contamination were allowed to continue, even a short period
control (QA/QC) measures to ensure that data quality is
of time. Examples of situations considered to involve
adequate for the intended data use (e.g., method detection
imminent hazards include, but are not restricted to:
limits are below levels of concern). The site investigation in turn
Presence of an explosive atmosphere caused by
should be used to develop a conceptual site model of how and
contaminated land
where contaminants exist, how they are transported, and where
Accessible and excessive contamination for which short-
routes of exposure occur to organisms and humans. The risk
term exposure and potency of contaminants could result
factors and conceptual site model provide a framework for
in acute toxicity, irreversible long term effects,
assessing contaminant risks.
sensitization, or accumulation of persistent

biocumulative and toxic substances
Concentrations of pollutants at concentrations above the

Risk Based Concentrations (RBCs60) or drinking water
standards in potable water at the point of abstraction
Appropriate risk reduction should be implemented as soon as

practicable to remove the condition posing the imminent
Human or ecological risk assessments facilitate risk

management decisions at contaminated sites. Specific risk
assessment objectives include:
(e.g., children, adults, fish, wildlife)
As an alternative to complying with numerical standards or

preliminary remediation goals, and depending on local
regulatory requirements, a detailed site-specific,
environmental risk assessment may be used to develop
60 For example, USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs).
http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm.
APRIL 30, 2007
Determining if contaminants are present at levels that pose

potential human health and/or ecological concerns (e.g.,
hazard.
Detailed Risk Assessment
Identifying relevant human and ecological receptors
levels above applicable regulatory criteria based on health

or environmental risk considerations)
Determining how human or ecological receptors are

exposed to the contaminants (e.g., ingestions of soil,
dermal contact, inhalation of dust)
61 Examples include processes defined by the American Society of Testing and
Materials (ASTM) Phase II ESA Process; the British Columbia Ministry of

Environment Canada (BC MOE)
http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance); and the
Massachusetts Department of Environment http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup.
56

CONTAMINATED LAND
Identifying the types of adverse effects that might result
Identifying the preferred technologies (including
from exposure to the contaminants (e.g., effect on target
engineering controls) needed to implement the conceptual
organ, cancer, impaired growth or reproduction) in the
risk reduction measures
absence of regulatory standards
WORLD BANK GROUP
reduction measures are effective
Quantifying the magnitude of health risks to human and

ecological receptors based on a quantitative analysis of
Developing a monitoring plan to ascertain whether risk
Considering the need and appropriateness for institutional
contaminant exposure and toxicity (e.g. calculate
controls (e.g. deed restriction, land use restrictions) as part
lifetime cancer risk or ratios of estimated exposure rates
of a comprehensive approach
compared to safe exposure rates)
Determining how current and proposed future land use
Permanent Risk Reduction Measures
influence the predicted risks (e.g. change of land use
The risk factors and conceptual site model within the
from industrial to residential with more sensitive
contaminant risk approach described also provide a basis to
receptors such as children)
manage and mitigate environmental contaminant health risks.
Quantifying the potential environmental and/or human
The underlying principle is to reduce, eliminate, or control any or
health risks from off-site contaminant migration (e.g.,
all of the three risk factors illustrated in Figure 1.8.1. A short list
consider if leaching and groundwater transport, or
of examples of risk mitigation strategies is provided below,
surface water transport results in exposure at adjacent
although actual strategies should be developed based on site-
lands/receptors)
specific conditions, and the practicality of prevailing factors and
Determining if the risk is likely to remain stable,
site constraints. Regardless of the management options
increase, or decrease with time in the absence of any
selected, the action plan should include, whenever possible,
remediation (e.g., consider if the contaminant is
contaminant source reduction (i.e., net improvement of the site)
reasonably degradable and likely to remain in place, or
as part of the overall strategy towards managing health risks at
be transported to other media)62
contaminated sites, as this alone provides for improved
Addressing these objectives provides a basis to develop and
environmental quality.
implement risk reduction measures (e.g., clean-up, on-site
Figure 1.8.2 presents a schematic of the inter-relationship of risk
controls) at the site. If such a need exists, the following
factors and example strategies to mitigate contaminant health
additional objectives become relevant:
risk by modifying the conditions of one or more risk factors to
Determining where, and in what conceptual manner, risk
ultimately reduce contaminant exposure to the receptor. The
reduction measures should be implemented
selected approach should take into consideration the technical

and financial feasibility (e.g. operability of a selected technology
given the local availability of technical expertise and equipment
62 An example of a simplified quantitative risk assessment method is the
ASTM E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action

Applied at Petroleum Release Sites and the ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1
Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites).
APRIL 30, 2007
and its associated costs).

Example risk mitigation strategies for contaminant source and
exposure concentrations include:
57

CONTAMINATED LAND
Soil, sediment, and sludge:
Installation (during building construction) of an
In situ biological treatment (aerobic or anaerobic)
impermeable barrier below the building and/or an
In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., soil vapor
alternative flow pathway for soil vapor beneath
extraction with off-gas treatment, chemical
building foundations (e.g., porous media and
oxidation)
ventilation to shunt vapors away from building)
In situ thermal treatment (e.g., steam injection, 6-
Example risk mitigation strategies for receptors include:
phase heating)
Limiting or preventing access to contaminant by receptors
Ex situ biological treatment (e.g., excavation and
(actions targeted at the receptor may include signage with
composting)
instructions, fencing, or site security)
Ex situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g.,
Imposing health advisory or prohibiting certain practices
excavation and stabilization)
leading to exposure such as fishing, crab trapping, shellfish
Ex situ thermal treatment (e.g., excavation and
collection
thermal desorption or incineration)
Educating receptors (people) to modify behavior in order to
Containment (e.g. landfill)
reduce exposure (e.g., improved work practices, and use of
Natural attenuation
protective clothing and equipment)
Other treatment processes
Groundwater, surface water, and leachate:

o
In situ biological treatment (aerobic and/or aerobic)
In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., air

sparging, zero-valent iron permeable reactive
barrier)
treatment)
o
Containment (e.g., slurry wall or sheet pile barrier)
Natural attenuation
Other treatment processes
Soil vapor intrusion:

o
Example risk mitigation strategies for exposure pathways

include:
Providing an alternative water supply to replace, for

example, a contaminated groundwater supply well
Capping contaminated soil with at least 1m of clean soil to

prevent human contact, as well as plant root or small
Ex situ biological, physical, and or chemical

treatment (i.e., groundwater extraction and
WORLD BANK GROUP
mammal penetration into contaminated soils
Paving over contaminated soil as an interim measure to

negate the pathway of direct contact or dust generation
and inhalation
Using an interception trench and pump, and treat

technologies to prevent contaminated groundwater from
discharging into fish streams
Soil vapor extraction to reduce VOC contaminant
The above-reference containment measures should also be
source in soil
considered for immediate implementation in situations where
Installation of a sub-slab depressurization system
source reduction measures are expected to take time.
to prevent migration of soil vapor into the building

o
Creating a positive pressure condition in buildings
APRIL 30, 2007
58

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
Occupational Health and Safety

Considerations
Investigation and remediation of contaminated lands requires
that workers be mindful of the occupational exposures that
could arise from working in close contact with contaminated
soil or other environmental media (e.g., groundwater,
wastewater, sediments, and soil vapor). Occupational health
and safety precautions should be exercised to minimize
exposure, as described in Section 2 on Occupational Health
and Safety. In addition, workers on contaminated sites
should receive special health and safety training specific to
contaminated site investigation and remediation activities.63
FIGURE 1.8.2: Inter-Relationship of Risk Factors

and Management Options
63 For example, US Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA)
regulations found at 40 CFR 1910.120.

http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STAN
DARDS&p_id=9765
APRIL 30, 2007
59

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
2.0 Occupational Health and Safety

2.1 General Facility Design and Operation......................61
Integrity of Workplace Structures..........................61
Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown ................61
Workspace and Exit.............................................61
Fire Precautions ..................................................62
Lavatories and Showers.......................................62
Potable Water Supply ..........................................62
Clean Eating Area ...............................................62
Lighting...............................................................62
Safe Access........................................................62
First Aid...............................................................63
Air Supply............................................................63
Work Environment Temperature...........................63
2.2 Communication and Training....................................63
OHS Training ......................................................63
Visitor Orientation................................................63
New Task Employee and Contractor Training.......63
Basic OHS Training .............................................64
Area Signage ......................................................64
Labeling of Equipment.........................................64
Communicate Hazard Codes ...............................64
2.3 Physical Hazards .....................................................64
Rotating and Moving Equipment...........................65
Noise ..................................................................65
Vibration..............................................................65
Electrical .............................................................66
Eye Hazards........................................................67
Welding / Hot Work..............................................67
Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic..............67
Working Environment Temperature......................68
Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling.68
Working at Heights ..............................................68
Illumination..........................................................69
2.4 Chemical Hazards....................................................69
Air Quality ...........................................................70
Fire and Explosions .............................................70
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals.........71
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)..................71
2.5 Biological Hazards....................................................71
2.6 Radiological Hazards................................................73
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................73
2.8 Special Hazard Environments...................................74
Confined Space...................................................74
Lone and Isolated Workers ..................................75
2.9 Monitoring................................................................75
Accidents and Diseases monitoring......................76

Employers and supervisors are obliged to implement all
reasonable precautions to protect the health and safety of
workers. This section provides guidance and examples of
reasonable precautions to implement in managing principal risks
to occupational health and safety. Although the focus is placed on
the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also
applies to construction and decommissioning activities.
Companies should hire contractors that have the technical
capability to manage the occupational health and safety issues of
their employees, extending the application of the hazard
management activities through formal procurement agreements.
Preventive and protective measures should be introduced
according to the following order of priority:
Eliminating the hazard by removing the activity from the work

process. Examples include substitution with less hazardous
chemicals, using different manufacturing processes, etc;
Controlling the hazard at its source through use of

engineering controls. Examples include local exhaust
ventilation, isolation rooms, machine guarding, acoustic
insulating, etc;
Minimizing the hazard through design of safe work systems

and administrative or institutional control measures.
Examples include job rotation, training safe work procedures,
lock-out and tag-out, workplace monitoring, limiting exposure
or work duration, etc.
Providing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in

conjunction with training, use, and maintenance of the PPE.
The application of prevention and control measures to

occupational hazards should be based on comprehensive job
APRIL 30, 2007
60

WORLD BANK GROUP
safety or job hazard analyses. The results of these analyses
Table 2.1.1. Risk Ranking Table to Classify Worker

Scenarios Based on Likelihood and Consequence
should be prioritized as part of an action plan based on the

likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the
identified hazards. An example of a qualitative risk ranking or
Consequences
analysis matrix to help identify priorities is described in Table

2.1.1.
Likelihood
2.1 General Facility Design and

Operation
A. Almost
certain
Integrity of Workplace Structures
B. Likely
Permanent and recurrent places of work should be designed and
Insignificant
CatasMinor Moderate Major trophic
equipped to protect OHS:
C.
Moderate
Surfaces, structures and installations should be easy to clean

and maintain, and not allow for accumulation of hazardous
D. Unlikely
compounds.
Buildings should be structurally safe, provide appropriate
E. Rare
protection against the climate, and have acceptable light and

noise conditions.
Legend
Fire resistant, noise-absorbing materials should, to the extent
E: extreme risk; immediate action required
feasible, be used for cladding on ceilings and walls.
H: high risk; senior management attention needed
Floors should be level, even, and non-skid.
M: moderate risk; management responsibility should be specified
Heavy oscillating, rotating or alternating equipment should be
L: low risk; manage by routine procedures
located in dedicated buildings or structurally isolated

sections.
Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown
area designated for safe refuge, if appropriate.

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be developed
for project or process shut-down, including an evacuation
plan. Drills to practice the procedure and plan should also be
undertaken annually.
APRIL 30, 2007
The space provided for each worker, and in total, should be

adequate for safe execution of all activities, including
Work place structures should be designed and constructed to

withstand the expected elements for the region and have an
Workspace and Exit
transport and interim storage of materials and products.
Passages to emergency exits should be unobstructed at all

times. Exits should be clearly marked to be visible in total
darkness. The number and capacity of emergency exits
should be sufficient for safe and orderly evacuation of the
greatest number of people present at any time, and there
should be a minimum two exits from any work area.
61

WORLD BANK GROUP
Facilities also should be designed and built taking into
Potable Water Supply
account the needs of disabled persons.
provided from a fountain with an upward jet or with a sanitary
Fire Precautions
The workplace should be designed to prevent the start of fires
through the implementation of fire codes applicable to industrial
means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking
Equipping facilities with fire detectors, alarm systems, and
meet drinking water quality standards
fire-fighting equipment. The equipment should be maintained
Clean Eating Area
in good working order and be readily accessible. It should be
poisonous by ingestion, suitable arrangements are to be
equipment installed, physical and chemical properties of
made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are
substances present, and the maximum number of people
not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances
Provision of manual firefighting equipment that is easily
Lighting
accessible and simple to use
light and be supplemented with sufficient artificial illumination
visible
to promote workers safety and health, and enable safe

equipment operation. Supplemental task lighting may be
required where specific visual acuity requirements should be
accessible to the public (See Section 3.3).
Lavatories and Showers
met.
artificial light source to ensure safe shut-down, evacuation,

etc.
work in the facility and allowances made for segregated

facilities, or for indicating whether the toilet facility is In Use
or Vacant. Toilet facilities should also be provided with
adequate supplies of hot and cold running water, soap, and
Safe Access
ingestion and skin contamination may occur, facilities for
and appropriate access
Equipment and installations requiring servicing, inspection,

and/or cleaning should have unobstructed, unrestricted, and
showering and changing into and out of street and work

clothes should be provided.
Passageways for pedestrians and vehicles within and outside

buildings should be segregated and provide for easy, safe,
hand drying devices.

Where workers may be exposed to substances poisonous by
Emergency lighting of adequate intensity should be installed

and automatically activated upon failure of the principal
Adequate lavatory facilities (toilets and washing areas)

should be provided for the number of people expected to
Workplaces should, to the degree feasible, receive natural
Fire and emergency alarm systems that are both audible and
The IFC Life and Fire Safety Guideline should apply to buildings
Where there is potential for exposure to substances
adequate for the dimensions and use of the premises,
present.
Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the

purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) should
settings. Other essential measures include:
Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be
ready access
Hand, knee and foot railings should be installed on stairs,

fixed ladders, platforms, permanent and interim floor
openings, loading bays, ramps, etc.
APRIL 30, 2007
62

WORLD BANK GROUP
Openings should be sealed by gates or removable chains
microorganisms. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning
Covers should, if feasible, be installed to protect against
(HVAC) and industrial evaporative cooling systems should be
falling items
equipped, maintained and operated so as to prevent growth
Measures to prevent unauthorized access to dangerous
and spreading of disease agents (e.g. Legionnella
areas should be in place
pneumophilia) or breeding of vectors (e.g. mosquitoes and
flies) of public health concern.
First Aid
The employer should ensure that qualified first-aid can be
Work Environment Temperature
provided at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations
should be easily accessible throughout the place of work
facilities should, during service hours, be maintained at a
Eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be
level appropriate for the purpose of the facility.
provided close to all workstations where immediate flushing

with water is the recommended first-aid response
Where the scale of work or the type of activity being carried

out so requires, dedicated and appropriately equipped firstaid room(s) should be provided. First aid stations and rooms
2.2 Communication and Training

OHS Training
the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal
protection against direct contact with blood and other body

fluids
Remote sites should have written emergency procedures in
protection and preventing injury to fellow employees.
procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as
the point at which patient care can be transferred to an
appropriate. Any site-specific hazard or color coding in use
appropriate medical facility.
Sufficient fresh air should be supplied for indoor and confined

work spaces. Factors to be considered in ventilation design
should be thoroughly reviewed as part of orientation training.
Visitor Orientation
orientation and control program should be established to
related emissions. Air distribution systems should be
ensure visitors do not enter hazard areas unescorted.
designed so as not to expose workers to draughts

Mechanical ventilation systems should be maintained in good
working order. Point-source exhaust systems required for
maintaining a safe ambient environment should have local
indicators of correct functioning.
If visitors to the site can gain access to areas where

hazardous conditions or substances may be present, a visitor
include physical activity, substances in use, and process-
Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, sitespecific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency
place for dealing with cases of trauma or serious illness up to
Air Supply
Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation

training to all new employees to ensure they are apprised of
should be equipped with gloves, gowns, and masks for
The temperature in work, rest room and other welfare
New Task Employee and Contractor Training
The employer should ensure that workers and contractors,

prior to commencement of new assignments, have received
adequate training and information enabling them to
Re-circulation of contaminated air is not acceptable. Air inlet

filters should be kept clean and free of dust and
APRIL 30, 2007
63

WORLD BANK GROUP
understand work hazards and to protect their health from
Signage should be in accordance with international
hazardous ambient factors that may be present.
standards and be well known to, and easily understood by
The training should adequately cover:
workers, visitors and the general public as appropriate.
Knowledge of materials, equipment, and tools
Known hazards in the operations and how they are

controlled
Labeling of Equipment
All vessels that may contain substances that are hazardous
Potential risks to health
as a result of chemical or toxicological properties, or
Precautions to prevent exposure
temperature or pressure, should be labeled as to the
Hygiene requirements
contents and hazard, or appropriately color coded.
Wearing and use of protective equipment and clothing
Appropriate response to operation extremes, incidents
should be labeled with the direction of flow and contents of
and accidents
the pipe, or color coded whenever the pipe passing through a
Similarly, piping systems that contain hazardous substances
wall or floor is interrupted by a valve or junction device.
Basic OHS Training
A basic occupational training program and specialty courses
Communicate Hazard Codes
should be provided, as needed, to ensure that workers are
oriented to the specific hazards of individual work
outside the facility at emergency entrance doors and fire
assignments. Training should generally be provided to
emergency connection systems where they are likely to
management, supervisors, workers, and occasional visitors
come to the attention of emergency services personnel.
to areas of risks and hazards.
Information regarding the types of hazardous materials
Workers with rescue and first-aid duties should receive
stored, handled or used at the facility, including typical
dedicated training so as not to inadvertently aggravate
maximum inventories and storage locations, should be
exposures and health hazards to themselves or their co-
shared proactively with emergency services and security
workers. Training would include the risks of becoming
personnel to expedite emergency response when needed.
infected with bloodborne pathogens through contact with
Copies of the hazard coding system should be posted
Representatives of local emergency and security services
bodily fluids and tissue.
should be invited to participate in periodic (annual)
Through appropriate contract specifications and monitoring,
orientation tours and site inspections to ensure familiarity
the employer should ensure that service providers, as well as
with potential hazards present.
contracted and subcontracted labor, are trained adequately

before assignments begin.
2.3 Physical Hazards

Physical hazards represent potential for accident or injury or
Area Signage
illness due to repetitive exposure to mechanical action or work
Hazardous areas (electrical rooms, compressor rooms, etc),
activity. Single exposure to physical hazards may result in a wide
installations, materials, safety measures, and emergency
range of injuries, from minor and medical aid only, to disabling,
exits, etc. should be marked appropriately.
catastrophic, and/or fatal. Multiple exposures over prolonged
APRIL 30, 2007
64

WORLD BANK GROUP
periods can result in disabling injuries of comparable significance
Noise
and consequence.
Noise limits for different working environments are provided in
Rotating and Moving Equipment

Injury or death can occur from being trapped, entangled, or struck
Table 2.3.1.
85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without
by machinery parts due to unexpected starting of equipment or
hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be
unobvious movement during operations. Recommended
exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of
protective measures include:
more than 140 dB(C).

Designing machines to eliminate trap hazards and ensuring
that extremities are kept out of harms way under normal
dB(A), the peak sound levels reach 140 dB(C), or the
considerations include two-hand operated machines to
average maximum sound level reaches 110dB(A). Hearing
prevent amputations or the availability of emergency stops
protective devices provided should be capable of reducing
dedicated to the machine and placed in strategic locations.

Where a machine or equipment has an exposed moving part
or exposed pinch point that may endanger the safety of any
sound levels at the ear to at least 85 dB(A).
protection can be obtained, but less easily managed, by
and protected by, a guard or other device that prevents
limiting the duration of noise exposure. For every 3 dB(A)
access to the moving part or pinch point. Guards should be
increase in sound levels, the allowed exposure period or
designed and installed in conformance with appropriate

machine safety
Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing
duration should be reduced by 50 percent.65
isolation of the noise source, and other engineering controls
guarded moving parts, or in which energy can be stored (e.g.

maintenance, in conformance with a standard such as CSA
Z460 Lockout or equivalent ISO or ANSI standard
Prior to the issuance of hearing protective devices as the

final control mechanism, use of acoustic insulating materials,
(Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or

compressed air, electrical components) during servicing or
Although hearing protection is preferred for any period of

noise exposure in excess of 85 dB(A), an equivalent level of
worker, the machine or equipment should be equipped with,
standards.64
The use of hearing protection should be enforced actively

when the equivalent sound level over 8 hours reaches 85
operating conditions. Examples of proper design
No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than
should be investigated and implemented, where feasible
Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on

workers exposed to high noise levels
Designing and installing equipment, where feasible, to enable
Vibration
routine service, such as lubrication, without removal of the
Exposure to hand-arm vibration from equipment such as hand and
guarding devices or mechanisms
power tools, or whole-body vibrations from surfaces on which the

worker stands or sits, should be controlled through choice of
equipment, installation of vibration dampening pads or devices,
and limiting the duration of exposure. Limits for vibration and
64 For example: CSA Z432.04 Safe Guarding of Machinery, CSA Z434 Robot
Safety, ISO 11161 Safety of Machinery Integrated Manufacturing Systems or

ISO 14121 Safety of Machinery Principals of Risk Management or equivalent
ANSI standard.
APRIL 30, 2007
65 The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006
65

WORLD BANK GROUP
action values, (i.e. the level of exposure at which remediation
warning signs
should be initiated) are provided by the ACGIH 66. Exposure levels

should be checked on the basis of daily exposure time and data
Marking all energized electrical devices and lines with
Locking out (de-charging and leaving open with a controlled

locking device) and tagging-out (warning sign placed on the
provided by equipment manufacturers.
lock) devices during service or maintenance
Electrical
Exposed or faulty electrical devices, such as circuit breakers,
Checking all electrical cords, cables, and hand power tools

for frayed or exposed cords and following manufacturer
recommendations for maximum permitted operating voltage
Table 2.3.1. Noise Limits for Various Working

Environments
of the portable hand tools
Double insulating / grounding all electrical equipment used in

environments that are, or may become, wet; using equipment
Location
/activity
Equivalent level
LAeq,8h
Maximum
LAmax,fast
with ground fault interrupter (GFI) protected circuits
Heavy Industry (no

demand for oral
communication)
85 dB(A)
110 dB(A)
Protecting power cords and extension cords against damage

from traffic by shielding or suspending above traffic areas
Appropriate labeling of service rooms housing high voltage

equipment (electrical hazard) and where entry is controlled
Light industry
(decreasing
demand for oral
communication)
50-65 dB(A)
Open offices,
control rooms,
service counters or
similar
45-50 dB(A)
Individual offices
(no disturbing
noise)
40-45 dB(A)
Classrooms,
lecture halls
35-40 dB(A)
Hospitals
30-35 dB(A)
40 dB(A)
110 dB(A)
or prohibited (see also Section 3 on Planning, Siting, and

Design);
Establishing No Approach zones around or under high

voltage power lines in conformance with Table 2.3.2
Rubber tired construction or other vehicles that come into

direct contact with, or arcing between, high voltage wires
may need to be taken out of service for periods of 48 hours

and have the tires replaced to prevent catastrophic tire and
wheel assembly failure, potentially causing serious injury or
panels, cables, cords and hand tools, can pose a serious risk to
workers. Overhead wires can be struck by metal devices, such as
death;
Conducting detailed identification and marking of all buried

electrical wiring prior to any excavation work
poles or ladders, and by vehicles with metal booms. Vehicles or

grounded metal objects brought into close proximity with overhead
wires can result in arcing between the wires and the object,
without actual contact. Recommended actions include:
66 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
66

WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 2.3.2. No Approach Zones for

High Voltage Power Lines
Nominal phase-to-phase voltage rating
750 or more volts, but no more than 150,000 volts
Minimum
distance
3 meters
Provisions should be made for persons who have to wear

prescription glasses either through the use overglasses or
prescription hardened glasses.
Welding / Hot Work

Welding creates an extremely bright and intense light that may
More than 150,000 volts, but no more than 250,000 4.5 meters
volts
seriously injur a workers eyesight. In extreme cases, blindness
More than 250,000 volts
which prolonged exposure can cause serious chronic diseases.
6 meters
may result. Additionally, welding may produce noxious fumes to

Recommended measures include:
Eye Hazards
Provision of proper eye protection such as welder goggles
Solid particles from a wide variety of industrial operations, and / or
and/or a full-face eye shield for all personnel involved in, or
a liquid chemical spray may strike a worker in the eye causing an
assisting, welding operations. Additional methods may
eye injury or permanent blindness. Recommended measures
include the use of welding barrier screens around the specific
include:
work station (a solid piece of light metal, canvas, or plywood
designed to block welding light from others). Devices to
Use of machine guards or splash shields and/or face and eye
extract and remove noxious fumes at the source may also be
protection devices, such as safety glasses with side shields,

goggles, and/or a full face shield. Specific Safe Operating
Procedures (SOPs) may be required for use of sanding and
grinding tools and/or when working around liquid chemicals.
Frequent checks of these types of equipment prior to use to
ensure mechanical integrity is also good practice. Machine
and equipment guarding should conform to standards
published by organizations such as CSA, ANSI and ISO (see
also Section 2.3 on Rotating and Moving Equipment and 2.7
on Personal Protective Equipment).
Moving areas where the discharge of solid fragments, liquid,

or gaseous emissions can reasonably be predicted (e.g.
discharge of sparks from a metal cutting station, pressure
relief valve discharge) away from places expected to be
occupied or transited by workers or visitors. Where machine
or work fragments could present a hazard to transient
workers or passers-by, extra area guarding or proximity
restricting systems should be implemented, or PPE required
for transients and visitors.
APRIL 30, 2007
required.
Special hot work and fire prevention precautions and

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be
implemented if welding or hot cutting is undertaken outside
established welding work stations, including Hot Work
Permits, stand-by fire extinguishers, stand-by fire watch, and
maintaining the fire watch for up to one hour after welding or
hot cutting has terminated. Special procedures are required
for hotwork on tanks or vessels that have contained
flammable materials.
Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic

Poorly trained or inexperienced industrial vehicle drivers have
increased risk of accident with other vehicles, pedestrians, and
equipment. Industrial vehicles and delivery vehicles, as well as
private vehicles on-site, also represent potential collision
scenarios. Industrial vehicle driving and site traffic safety
practices include:
67

WORLD BANK GROUP
Training and licensing industrial vehicle operators in the safe
Use of protective clothing
operation of specialized vehicles such as forklifts, including
Providing easy access to adequate hydration such as
safe loading/unloading, load limits
drinking water or electrolyte drinks, and avoiding
Ensuring drivers undergo medical surveillance
consumption of alcoholic beverages
Ensuring moving equipment with restricted rear visibility is
outfitted with audible back-up alarms
Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling
Establishing rights-of-way, site speed limits, vehicle
Injuries due to ergonomic factors, such as repetitive motion, over-
inspection requirements, operating rules and procedures
exertion, and manual handling, take prolonged and repeated
(e.g. prohibiting operation of forklifts with forks in down
exposures to develop, and typically require periods of weeks to
position), and control of traffic patterns or direction
months for recovery. These OHS problems should be minimized
Restricting the circulation of delivery and private vehicles to
or eliminated to maintain a productive workplace. Controls may
defined routes and areas, giving preference to one-way
include:
circulation, where appropriate
Working Environment Temperature

Exposure to hot or cold working conditions in indoor or outdoor
operational and maintenance workers in mind
against other occupational hazards can accentuate and aggravate

heat-related illnesses. Extreme temperatures in permanent work
environments should be avoided through implementation of
engineering controls and ventilation. Where this is not possible,
such as during short-term outdoor work, temperature-related
stress management procedures should be implemented which
include:
Monitoring weather forecasts for outdoor work to provide
Use of mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions

required to lift materials, hold tools and work objects, and
environments can result temperature stress-related injury or

death. Use of personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect
Facility and workstation design with 5th to 95th percentile
requiring multi-person lifts if weights exceed thresholds
Selecting and designing tools that reduce force requirements

and holding times, and improve postures
Providing user adjustable work stations
Incorporating rest and stretch breaks into work processes,

and conducting job rotation
Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that

reduce unnecessary forces and exertions
Taking into consideration additional special conditions such

as left handed persons
advance warning of extreme weather and scheduling work
accordingly
Working at Heights
Adjustment of work and rest periods according to
Fall prevention and protection measures should be implemented
temperature stress management procedures provided by
whenever a worker is exposed to the hazard of falling more than
ACGIH 67, depending on the temperature and workloads
two meters; into operating machinery; into water or other liquid;
Providing temporary shelters to protect against the elements
into hazardous substances; or through an opening in a work
during working activities or for use as rest areas
surface. Fall prevention / protection measures may also be

warranted on a case-specific basis when there are risks of falling
67 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
from lesser heights. Fall prevention may include:
68

WORLD BANK GROUP
Installation of guardrails with mid-rails and toe boards at the
supplemented with dedicated work station illumination, as needed.
edge of any fall hazard area
The minimum limits for illumination intensity for a range of
Proper use of ladders and scaffolds by trained employees
locations/activities appear in Table 2.3.3.
Use of fall prevention devices, including safety belt and
Controls should include:
lanyard travel limiting devices to prevent access to fall hazard

area, or fall protection devices such as full body harnesses
used in conjunction with shock absorbing lanyards or selfretracting inertial fall arrest devices attached to fixed anchor
emission
Appropriate training in use, serviceability, and integrity of the
IR radiation and high intensity visible light should also be
Inclusion of rescue and/or recovery plans, and equipment to

respond to workers after an arrested fall
Taking precautions to minimize and control optical radiation

including direct sunlight. Exposure to high intensity UV and
necessary PPE
Undertaking measures to eliminate glare / reflections and

flickering of lights
point or horizontal life-lines
Use of energy efficient light sources with minimum heat
controlled
Controlling laser hazards in accordance with equipment
Illumination
specifications, certifications, and recognized safety
Work area light intensity should be adequate for the general
standards. The lowest feasible class Laser should be applied
purpose of the location and type of activity, and should be
to minimize risks.
2.4 Chemical Hazards

Table 2.3.3. Minimum Limits For Workplace
Illumination Intensity
Location / Activity
Chemical hazards represent potential for illness or injury due to

single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure to toxic,
Light Intensity
corrosive, sensitizing or oxidative substances. They also
Emergency light
10 lux
represent a risk of uncontrolled reaction, including the risk of fire
Outdoor non working areas
20 lux
Simple orientation and temporary visits (machine

storage, garage, warehouse)
50 lux
Workspace with occasional visual tasks only

100 lux
(corridors, stairways, lobby, elevator, auditorium, etc.)
Medium precision work (simple assembly, rough
machine works, welding, packing, etc.)
200 lux
Precision work (reading, moderately difficult

assembly, sorting, checking, medium bench and
machine works, etc.), offices.
500 lux
High precision work (difficult assembly, sewing, color 1,000 3,000

inspection, fine sorting etc.)
lux
APRIL 30, 2007
and explosion, if incompatible chemicals are inadvertently mixed.

Chemical hazards can most effectively be prevented through a
hierarchical approach that includes:
Replacement of the hazardous substance with a less

hazardous substitute
Implementation of engineering and administrative control

measures to avoid or minimize the release of hazardous
substances into the work environment keeping the level of
exposure below internationally established or recognized
limits
Keeping the number of employees exposed, or likely to

become exposed, to a minimum
69

WORLD BANK GROUP
Communicating chemical hazards to workers through
Where ambient air contains several materials that have
labeling and marking according to national and internationally
similar effects on the same body organs (additive effects),
recognized requirements and standards, including the
taking into account combined exposures using calculations
International Chemical Safety Cards (ICSC), Materials Safety
recommended by the ACGIH 69
Data Sheets (MSDS), or equivalent. Any means of written
Where work shifts extend beyond eight (8) hours, calculating
communication should be in an easily understood language
adjusted workplace exposure criteria recommended by the
and be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid
ACGIH 70
personnel
Training workers in the use of the available information (such
Fire and Explosions
as MSDSs), safe work practices, and appropriate use of PPE
Fires and or explosions resulting from ignition of flammable
Air Quality
Poor air quality due to the release of contaminants into the work
place can result in possible respiratory irritation, discomfort, or
illness to workers. Employers should take appropriate measures
materials or gases can lead to loss of property as well as possible

injury or fatalities to project workers. Prevention and control
strategies include:
materials. Further, flammables storage area should be:
to maintain air quality in the work area. These include:
Storing flammables away from ignition sources and oxidizing
Remote from entry and exit points into buildings
Maintaining levels of contaminant dusts, vapors and gases in
Away from facility ventilation intakes or vents
the work environment at concentrations below those
Have natural or passive floor and ceiling level ventilation
recommended by the ACGIH 68 as TWA-TLVs (threshold limit
and explosion venting
value)concentrations to which most workers can be
Use spark-proof fixtures
exposed repeatedly (8 hours/day, 40 hrs/week, week-after-
Be equipped with fire extinguishing devices and self-
week), without sustaining adverse health effects.
closing doors, and constructed of materials made to
Developing and implementing work practices to minimize
withstand flame impingement for a moderate period of
release of contaminants into the work environment including:
time
Direct piping of liquid and gaseous materials
Minimized handling of dry powdered materials;
containers and additional mechanical floor level ventilation if
Enclosed operations
materials are being, or could be, dispensed in the storage
Local exhaust ventilation at emission / release points
area
Vacuum transfer of dry material rather than mechanical

or pneumatic conveyance
Indoor secure storage, and sealed containers rather
Providing bonding and grounding of, and between,
Where the flammable material is mainly comprised of dust,

providing electrical grounding, spark detection, and, if
needed, quenching systems
than loose storage
69 ACGIH, 2005.
68 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
70 ACGIH, 2005.
70

WORLD BANK GROUP
Defining and labeling fire hazards areas to warn of special
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)
rules (e.g. prohibition in use of smoking materials, cellular
The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) should be
phones, or other potential spark generating equipment)
avoided in new buildings or as a new material in remodeling or
Providing specific worker training in handling of flammable
renovation activities. Existing facilities with ACM should develop
materials, and in fire prevention or suppression
an asbestos management plan which clearly identifies the
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals
locations where the ACM is present, its condition (e.g. whether it

is in friable form with the potential to release fibers), procedures
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals present similar
for monitoring its condition, procedures to access the locations
hazards and require similar control measures as flammable
where ACM is present to avoid damage, and training of staff who
materials. However, the added hazard of these chemicals is that
can potentially come into contact with the material to avoid
inadvertent mixing or intermixing may cause serious adverse
damage and prevent exposure. The plan should be made
reactions. This can lead to the release of flammable or toxic
available to all persons involved in operations and maintenance
materials and gases, and may lead directly to fires and
activities. Repair or removal and disposal of existing ACM in
explosions. These types of substances have the additional hazard
buildings should only be performed by specially trained
of causing significant personal injury upon direct contact,
personnel71 following host country requirements, or in their
regardless of any intermixing issues. The following controls

should be observed in the work environment when handling such
absence, internationally recognized procedures.72
chemicals:
2.5 Biological Hazards
Corrosive, oxidizing and reactive chemicals should be
Biological agents represent potential for illness or injury due to
segregated from flammable materials and from other
single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure. Biological
chemicals of incompatible class (acids vs. bases, oxidizers
hazards can be prevented most effectively by implementing the
vs. reducers, water sensitive vs. water based, etc.), stored in
following measures:
ventilated areas and in containers with appropriate

secondary containment to minimize intermixing during spills
Workers who are required to handle corrosive, oxidizing, or

reactive chemicals should be provided with specialized
training and provided with, and wear, appropriate PPE
(gloves, apron, splash suits, face shield or goggles, etc).
Where corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals are used,

handled, or stored, qualified first-aid should be ensured at all
times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be
easily accessible throughout the place of work, and eye-wash
stations and/or emergency showers should be provided close
to all workstations where the recommended first-aid
response is immediate flushing with water
APRIL 30, 2007
If the nature of the activity permits, use of any harmful

biological agents should be avoided and replaced with an
agent that, under normal conditions of use, is not dangerous
or less dangerous to workers. If use of harmful agents can
not be avoided, precautions should be taken to keep the risk
of exposure as low as possible and maintained below
internationally established and recognized exposure limits.
71 Training of specialized personnel and the maintenance and removal methods
applied should be equivalent to those required under applicable regulations in the

United States and Europe (examples of North American training standards are
available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/asbestos/training.html)
72 Examples include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E
1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects; E
2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys; and E
2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed
Asbestos Cement Products.
71

WORLD BANK GROUP
Work processes, engineering, and administrative controls
The employer should at all times encourage and enforce the
should be designed, maintained, and operated to avoid or
highest level of hygiene and personal protection, especially for
minimize release of biological agents into the working
activities employing biological agents of Groups 3 and 4 above.
environment. The number of employees exposed or likely to
Work involving agents in Groups 3 and 4 should be restricted only
become exposed should be kept at a minimum.
to those persons who have received specific verifiable training in
The employer should review and assess known and
working with and controlling such materials.
suspected presence of biological agents at the place of work
and implement appropriate safety measures, monitoring,
Areas used for the handling of Groups 3 and 4 biological agents
training, and training verification programs.
should be designed to enable their full segregation and isolation in
Measures to eliminate and control hazards from known and
emergency circumstances, include independent ventilation
suspected biological agents at the place of work should be
systems, and be subject to SOPs requiring routine disinfection
designed, implemented and maintained in close co-operation
and sterilization of the work surfaces.
with the local health authorities and according to recognized

HVAC systems serving areas handling Groups 3 and 4 biological
international standards.
agents should be equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air

Biological agents should be classified into four
groups73:
(HEPA) filtration systems. Equipment should readily enable their
Group 1: Biological agents unlikely to cause human disease,
disinfection and sterilization, and maintained and operated so as
and consequently only require controls similar to those
to prevent growth and spreading of disease agents, amplification
required for hazardous or reactive chemical substances;
of the biological agents, or breeding of vectors e.g. mosquitoes
Group 2: Biological agents that can cause human disease
and flies of public health concern.
and are thereby likely to require additional controls, but are

unlikely to spread to the community;
Group 3: Biological agents that can cause severe human

disease, present a serious hazard to workers, and may
present a risk of spreading to the community, for which there
usually is effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are
thereby likely to require extensive additional controls;
Group 4: Biological agents that can cause severe human

disease, are a serious hazard to workers, and present a high
risk of spreading to the community, for which there is usually
no effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are
thereby likely to require very extensive additional controls.
73 World Health Organization (WHO) Classification of Infective Microorganisms by
Risk Group (2004).
APRIL 30, 2007
72

WORLD BANK GROUP
2.6 Radiological Hazards
preferred method for controlling exposure is shielding and
Radiation exposure can lead to potential discomfort, injury or
limiting the radiation source. Personal protective equipment
serious illness to workers. Prevention and control strategies
is supplemental only or for emergency use. Personal
include:
In the case of both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, the
protective equipment for near-infrared, visible and ultraviolet
Places of work involving occupational and/or natural
range radiation can include appropriate sun block creams,
exposure to ionizing radiation should be established and
with or without appropriate screening clothing.
operated in accordance with recognized international safety

standards and guidelines.74 The acceptable effective dose
limits appear Table 2.6.1.
Exposure to non-ionizing radiation (including static magnetic

fields; sub-radio frequency magnetic fields; static electric
fields; radio frequency and microwave radiation; light and
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment

(PPE)
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional
protection to workers exposed to workplace hazards in
conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems.
near-infrared radiation; and ultraviolet radiation) should be

controlled to internationally recommended limits75.
PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the

other facility controls and provides the worker with an extra level
of personal protection. Table 2.7.1 presents general examples of
Table 2.6.1. Acceptable Effective Dose Limits for

Workplace Radiological Hazards
Exposure
Workers
(min.19 years of
age)
Five consecutive year average

effective dose
20 mSv/year
Single year exposure

effective dose
50 mSv/year
Equivalent dose to the lens of

the eye
Equivalent dose to the
extremities (hands, feet) or the
skin
Apprentices
and
students
(16-18 years
of age)
occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different

purposes. Recommended measures for use of PPE in the
workplace include:
Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or

procedures cannot eliminate, or sufficiently reduce, a hazard
or exposure
Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers

adequate protection to the worker, co-workers, and
6 mSv/year
occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary

inconvenience to the individual
150 mSv/year
50 mSv/year
500 mSv/year
150
mSv/year
Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty

and replacement when damaged or worn out. Proper use of
PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for
employees
74 International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and
for the Safety of Radiation Sources and its three interrelated Safety Guides.
IAEA. http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160
75 For example ACGIH (2005) and International Commission for Non-Ionizing
Radiation (ICNIRP).
APRIL 30, 2007
73

WORLD BANK GROUP
by recognized organizations76.
Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk

ranking described earlier in this section, and selected
according to criteria on performance and testing established
2.8 Special Hazard Environments

Special hazard environments are work situations where all of the
Table 2.7.1. Summary of Recommended Personal

Protective Equipment
According to Hazard
Objective
Workplace Hazards
Suggested PPE
previously described hazards may exist under unique or especially

hazardous circumstances. Accordingly, extra precautions or rigor
in application of precautions is required.
Confined Space
A confined space is defined as a wholly or partially enclosed
Eye and
face
protection
Flying particles, molten

metal, liquid chemicals,
gases or vapors, light
radiation.
Safety Glasses with side-shields,

protective shades, etc.
Head
protection
Falling objects, inadequate

height clearance, and
overhead power cords.
Plastic Helmets with top and side

impact protection.
Hearing
protection
Noise, ultra-sound.
Hearing protectors (ear plugs or

ear muffs).
hazards that could trap or engulf the person.77
Foot
protection
Falling or rolling objects,

pointed objects. Corrosive
or hot liquids.
Safety shoes and boots for

protection against moving &
falling objects, liquids and
chemicals.
Confined spaces can occur in enclosed or open structures or
from a confined space. Recommended management approaches
which a hazardous atmosphere could develop as a result of the
Hazardous materials, cuts

or lacerations, vibrations,
extreme temperatures.
Gloves made of rubber or

synthetic materials (Neoprene),
leather, steel, insulating
materials, etc.
Respiratory
protection
Dust, fogs, fumes, mists,

gases, smokes, vapors.
Facemasks with appropriate

filters for dust removal and air
purification (chemicals, mists,
vapors and gases). Single or
multi-gas personal monitors, if
available.
Body/leg
protection
Extreme temperatures,
hazardous materials,
biological agents, cutting
and laceration.
contents, location or construction of the confined space or due to

work done in or around the confined space. A permit-required
confined space is one that also contains physical or atmospheric
Hand
protection
Oxygen deficiency
space not designed or intended for human occupancy and in
locations. Serious injury or fatality can result from inadequate

preparation to enter a confined space or in attempting a rescue
include:
Engineering measures should be implemented to eliminate,

to the degree feasible, the existence and adverse character
of confined spaces.
Permit-required confined spaces should be provided with

permanent safety measures for venting, monitoring, and
Portable or supplied air (fixed

lines).
On-site rescue equipment.
rescue operations, to the extent possible. The area adjoining

an access to a confined space should provide ample room
Insulating clothing, body suits,

aprons etc. of appropriate
materials.
for emergency and rescue operations.

Examples include the American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
http://www.ansi.org/; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health76
(NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html; Canadian Standards
Association76 (CSA), http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english; Mine
Safety and Health Administration76 (MSHA), http://www.msha.gov.
76
77 US OSHA CFR 1910.146
APRIL 30, 2007
74

WORLD BANK GROUP
Access hatches should accommodate 90% of the worker
persons capable of providing aid and assistance, for continuous
population with adjustments for tools and protective clothing.
periods exceeding one hour. The worker is therefore at increased
The most current ISO and EN standards should be consulted
risk should an accident or injury occur.
for design specifications;
Prior to entry into a permit-required confined space:

o
or isolated circumstances, Standard Operating Procedures
Process or feed lines into the space should be
(SOPs) should be developed and implemented to ensure all
disconnected or drained, and blanked and locked-out.
PPE and safety measures are in place before the worker
Mechanical equipment in the space should be
starts work. SOPs should establish, at a minimum, verbal
disconnected, de-energized, locked-out, and braced, as
contact with the worker at least once every hour, and ensure
appropriate.
the worker has a capability for summoning emergency aid.
The atmosphere within the confined space should be
If the worker is potentially exposed to highly toxic or corrosive
tested to assure the oxygen content is between 19.5
chemicals, emergency eye-wash and shower facilities should
percent and 23 percent, and that the presence of any
be equipped with audible and visible alarms to summon aid
flammable gas or vapor does not exceed 25 percent of
whenever the eye-wash or shower is activated by the worker
its respective Lower Explosive Limit (LEL).
and without intervention by the worker.
If the atmospheric conditions are not met, the confined

space should be ventilated until the target safe
2.9 Monitoring
atmosphere is achieved, or entry is only to be
Occupational health and safety monitoring programs should verify
undertaken with appropriate and additional PPE.
the effectiveness of prevention and control strategies. The

selected indicators should be representative of the most
Safety precautions should include Self Contained Breathing

Apparatus (SCBA), life lines, and safety watch workers
stationed outside the confined space, with rescue and first
aid equipment readily available.
Where workers may be required to perform work under lone
Before workers are required to enter a permit-required
significant occupational, health, and safety hazards, and the

implementation of prevention and control strategies. The
occupational health and safety monitoring program should include:
Safety inspection, testing and calibration: This should include

regular inspection and testing of all safety features and
confined space, adequate and appropriate training in
hazard control measures focusing on engineering and
confined space hazard control, atmospheric testing, use of
personal protective features, work procedures, places of
the necessary PPE, as well as the serviceability and integrity
work, installations, equipment, and tools used. The
of the PPE should be verified. Further, adequate and
inspection should verify that issued PPE continues to provide
appropriate rescue and / or recovery plans and equipment

should be in place before the worker enters the confined
adequate protection and is being worn as required. All
space.
instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of

working environment parameters should be regularly tested
and calibrated, and the respective records maintained.
Lone and Isolated Workers

A lone and isolated worker is a worker out of verbal and line of
sight communication with a supervisor, other workers, or other
APRIL 30, 2007
Surveillance of the working environment: Employers should

document compliance using an appropriate combination of
75

WORLD BANK GROUP
portable and stationary sampling and monitoring instruments.
Monitoring and analyses should be conducted according to
encourage workers to report to management all:
internationally recognized methods and standards.
Occupational injuries and near misses
Monitoring methodology, locations, frequencies, and
Suspected cases of occupational disease
parameters should be established individually for each
Dangerous occurrences and incidents
project following a review of the hazards. Generally,

monitoring should be performed during commissioning of
misses should be investigated with the assistance of a
liability period, and otherwise repeated according to the
person knowledgeable/competent in occupational safety. The
monitoring plan.
investigation should:
Surveillance of workers health: When extraordinary

protective measures are required (for example, against
Establish what happened
biological agents Groups 3 and 4, and/or hazardous
Determine the cause of what happened
compounds), workers should be provided appropriate and
Identify measures necessary to prevent a recurrence
relevant health surveillance prior to first exposure, and at
All reported occupational accidents, occupational diseases,

dangerous occurrences, and incidents together with near
facilities or equipment and at the end of the defect and
The systems and the employer should further enable and
Occupational accidents and diseases should, at a minimum,
regular intervals thereafter. The surveillance should, if
be classified according to Table 2.10.1. Distinction is made
deemed necessary, be continued after termination of the
between fatal and non-fatal injuries. The two main categories
employment.
are divided into three sub-categories according to time of
Training: Training activities for employees and visitors should
death or duration of the incapacity to work. The total work
be adequately monitored and documented (curriculum,
hours during the specified reporting period should be
duration, and participants). Emergency exercises, including
reported to the appropriate regulatory agency.
fire drills, should be documented adequately. Service
Table 2.9.1. Occupational Accident Reporting
providers and contractors should be contractually required to

submit to the employer adequate training documentation
before start of their assignment.
Accidents and Diseases monitoring
a. Fatalities
(number)
a.1 Immediate
The employer should establish procedures and systems for
a.2 Within a month
reporting and recording:
a.3 Within a year
Occupational accidents and diseases
Dangerous occurrences and incidents
b. Non-fatal
injuries
(number) 78
b.1 Less than one
c. Total time lost

non-fatal injuries
(days)
day
b.2 Up to 3 days
b.3 More than 3
days
c.1 Category b.2

c.2 Category b.3
These systems should enable workers to report immediately

to their immediate supervisor any situation they believe
presents a serious danger to life or health.
78 The day on which an incident occurs is not included in b.2 and b.3.
APRIL 30, 2007
76

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
3.0 Community Health and Safety

3.1 Water Quality and Availability ...................................77
Water Quality.........................................................77
Water Availability....................................................77
3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure ..................78
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) ......................................79
Specific Requirements for New Buildings................79
L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval.................80
Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings ...........81
Other Hazards........................................................81
3.4 Traffic Safety............................................................81
3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials .............................82
General Hazardous Materials Transport..................82
Major Transportation Hazards.................................83
3.6 Disease Prevention..................................................85
Communicable Diseases........................................85
Vector-Borne Diseases...........................................85
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response .................86
Communication Systems ........................................86
Emergency Resources ...........................................87
Training and Updating ............................................87
Business Continuity and Contingency .....................88
impoundment should prevent adverse impacts to the quality and

availability of groundwater and surface water resources.
Water Quality
Drinking water sources, whether public or private, should at all
times be protected so that they meet or exceed applicable national
acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of
WHO Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Air emissions,
wastewater effluents, oil and hazardous materials, and wastes
should be managed according to the guidance provided in the
respective sections of the General EHS Guidelines with the
objective of protecting soil and water resources.
Where the project includes the delivery of water to the community
or to users of facility infrastructure (such as hotel hosts and
hospital patients), where water may be used for drinking, cooking,
washing, and bathing, water quality should comply with national
acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of
with WHO Drinking Water Guidelines. Water quality for more
This section complements the guidance provided in the preceding

environmental and occupational health and safety sections,
specifically addressing some aspects of project activities taking
place outside of the traditional project boundaries, but nonetheless
related to the project operations, as may be applicable on a
project basis. These issues may arise at any stage of a project life
cycle and can have an impact beyond the life of the project.
3.1 Water Quality and Availability

Groundwater and surface water represent essential sources of
drinking and irrigation water in developing countries, particularly in
rural areas where piped water supply may be limited or
unavailable and where available resources are collected by the
sensitive well-being-related demands such as water used in health

care facilities or food production may require more stringent,
industry-specific guidelines or standards, as applicable. Any
dependency factors associated with the deliver of water to the
local community should be planned for and managed to ensure
the sustainability of the water supply by involving the community in
its management to minimize the dependency in the long-term.
Water Availability
The potential effect of groundwater or surface water abstraction
for project activities should be properly assessed through a
combination of field testing and modeling techniques, accounting
for seasonal variability and projected changes in demand in the
project area.
consumer with little or no treatment. Project activities involving

wastewater discharges, water extraction, diversion or
APRIL 30, 2007
77

WORLD BANK GROUP
Project activities should not compromise the availability of water
project structures should be designed in accordance with
for personal hygiene needs and should take account of potential
engineering and design criteria mandated by site-specific
future increases in demand. The overall target should be the
risks, including but not limited to seismic activity, slope
availability of 100 liters per person per day although lower levels
stability, wind loading, and other dynamic loads
may be used to meet basic health requirements.79 Water volume
Application of locally regulated or internationally recognized
requirements for well-being-related demands such as water use in
building codes80 to ensure structures are designed and
health care facilities may need to be higher.
constructed in accordance with sound architectural and
3.2 Structural Safety of Project

Infrastructure
Hazards posed to the public while accessing project facilities may
engineering practice, including aspects of fire prevention and

response
Engineers and architects responsible for designing and

constructing facilities, building, plants and other structures
include:
should certify the applicability and appropriateness of the
Physical trauma associated with failure of building structures
structural criteria employed.
Burns and smoke inhalation from fires
International codes, such as those compiled by the International
Injuries suffered as a consequence of falls or contact with
Code Council (ICC) 81, are intended to regulate the design,
heavy equipment
construction, and maintenance of a built environment and contain
Respiratory distress from dust, fumes, or noxious odors
detailed guidance on all aspects of building safety, encompassing
Exposure to hazardous materials
methodology, best practices, and documenting compliance.
Reduction of potential hazards is best accomplished during the
Depending on the nature of a project, guidance provided in the
design phase when the structural design, layout and site
ICC or comparable codes should be followed, as appropriate, with
modifications can be adapted more easily. The following issues
respect to:
should be considered and incorporated as appropriate into the
Existing structures
Soils and foundations
Inclusion of buffer strips or other methods of physical
Site grading
separation around project sites to protect the public from
Structural design
major hazards associated with hazardous materials incidents
Specific requirements based on intended use and occupancy
or process failure, as well as nuisance issues related to
Accessibility and means of egress
noise, odors, or other emissions
Types of construction
Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to
Roof design and construction
prevent failures due to natural risks posed by earthquakes,
Fire-resistant construction
tsunamis, wind, flooding, landslides and fire. To this end, all
Flood-resistant construction
planning, siting, and design phases of a project:
79 World Health Organization (WHO) defines 100 liters/capita/day as the amount
required to meet all consumption and hygiene needs. Additional information on

lower service levels and potential impacts on health are described in Domestic
Water Quantity, Service Level and Health 2003.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/diseases/wsh0302/en/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007
80 ILO-OSH, 2001. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/
safework/cops/english/download/e000013.pdf
81
ICC, 2006.
78

WORLD BANK GROUP
Construction materials
codes, local fire department regulations, local legal/insurance
Interior environment
requirements, and in accordance with an internationally accepted
Mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems
life and fire safety (L&FS) standard. The Life Safety Code82, which
Elevators and conveying systems
provides extensive documentation on life and fire safety
Fire safety systems
provisions, is one example of an internationally accepted standard
Safeguards during construction
and may be used to document compliance with the Life and Fire
Encroachments into public right-of-way
Safety objectives outlined in these guidelines. With regard to
Although major design changes may not be feasible during the

operation phase of a project, hazard analysis can be undertaken
these objectives:
Project sponsors architects and professional consulting
to identify opportunities to reduce the consequences of a failure or
engineers should demonstrate that affected buildings meet
accident. Illustrative management actions, applicable to
these life and fire safety objectives.
hazardous materials storage and use, include:
designed and installed using appropriate prescriptive
inventory management and process changes to greatly
standards and/or performance based design, and sound
reduce or eliminate the potential off-site consequences of a
engineering practices.
Life and fire safety design criteria for all existing buildings
should incorporate all local building codes and fire
potential consequences of an accidental off-site release
department regulations.
Improving shut-down and secondary containment to reduce

reduce the release duration
Modifying process or storage conditions to reduce the
the amount of material escaping from containment and to
Life and fire safety systems and equipment should be
Reducing inventories of hazardous materials through
release
These guidelines apply to buildings that are accessible to the

public. Examples of such buildings include:
Reducing the probability that releases will occur through
Health and education facilities
improved site operations and control, and through
Hotels, convention centers, and leisure facilities
improvements in maintenance and inspection
Retail and commercial facilities
Reducing off-site impacts of releases through measures
Airports, other public transport terminals, transfer facilities
intended to contain explosions and fires, alert the public,

provide for evacuation of surrounding areas, establish safety
Specific Requirements for New Buildings
zones around a site, and ensure the provision of emergency
The nature and extent of life and fire safety systems required will
medical services to the public
depend on the building type, structure, construction, occupancy,

and exposures. Sponsors should prepare a Life and Fire Safety
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS)

All new buildings accessible to the public should be designed,
constructed, and operated in full compliance with local building
APRIL 30, 2007
Master Plan identifying major fire risks, applicable codes,

standards and regulations, and mitigation measures. The Master
82 US NFPA.
http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target%
5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search
79

WORLD BANK GROUP
Plan should be prepared by a suitably qualified professional, and
Compartmentation
adequately cover, but not be limited to, the issues addressed
Compartmentation involves all measures to prevent or slow the
briefly in the following points. The suitably qualified professional
spread of fire and smoke, including:
selected to prepare the Master Plan is responsible for a detailed
Separations
Fire walls
Floors
Fire Prevention
Doors
Fire prevention addresses the identification of fire risks and
Dampers
ignition sources, and measures needed to limit fast fire and smoke
Smoke control systems
treatment of the following illustrative, and all other required,

issues.
development. These issues include:
Fire Suppression and Control
Fuel load and control of combustibles
Ignition sources
Interior finish flame spread characteristics
Interior finish smoke production characteristics
Automatic sprinkler systems
Human acts, and housekeeping and maintenance
Manual portable extinguishers
Fire hose reels
Means of Egress
Fire suppression and control includes all automatic and manual

fire protection installations, such as:
Means of Egress includes all design measures that facilitate a
Emergency Response Plan
safe evacuation by residents and/or occupants in case of fire or
An Emergency Response Plan is a set of scenariobased
other emergency, such as:
procedures to assist staff and emergency response teams during

real life emergency and training exercises. This chapter of the Fire
Clear, unimpeded escape routes
Accessibility to the impaired/handicapped
Marking and signing
Emergency lighting
Detection and Alarm Systems
and Life Safety Master Plan should include an assessment of local

fire prevention and suppression capabilities.
Operation and Maintenance

Operation and Maintenance involves preparing schedules for
mandatory regular maintenance and testing of life and fire safety
These systems encompass all measures, including
features to ensure that mechanical, electrical, and civil structures
communication and public address systems needed to detect a
and systems are at all times in conformance with life and fire
fire and alert:
safety design criteria and required operational readiness.
Building staff
Emergency response teams
L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval
Occupants
Civil defense
A suitably qualified professional prepares and submits a Life

and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan, including preliminary
drawings and specifications, and certifies that the design
APRIL 30, 2007
80

WORLD BANK GROUP
meets the requirements of these L&FS guidelines. The
earthquakes, tsunamis, floods, windstorms, and fires from
findings and recommendations of the review are then used to
surrounding areas).
establish the conditions of a Corrective Action Plan and a
the criteria mandated by situation-, climatic-, and geology-
The suitably qualified professional conducts a review as part
specific location risks (e.g. seismic activity, wind loading, and
of the project completion test at the time of life and fire safety
other dynamic loads).
Structural engineers and architects responsible for facilities,
construction of these systems has been carried out in
buildings, plants and structures should certify the applicability
accordance with the accepted design. The findings and
and appropriateness of the design criteria employed.
recommendations of the review are used as the basis for
National or regional building regulations typically contain fire
establishing project completion or to establish the conditions
safety codes and standards83 or these standards are found in
of a Pre-Completion Corrective Action Plan and a time frame
separate Fire Codes.84,85 Generally, such codes and
for implementing the changes.
regulations incorporate further compliance requirements with
Specific Requirements for Existing

Buildings
All life and fire safety guideline requirements for new
buildings apply to existing buildings programmed for
renovation. A suitably qualified professional conducts a
complete life and fire safety review of existing buildings
slated for renovation. The findings and recommendations of
the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of
work of a Corrective Action Plan and a time frame for
implementing the changes.
All such structures should be designed in accordance with
time frame for implementing the changes.
systems testing and commissioning, and certifies that
If it becomes apparent that life and fire safety conditions are

deficient in an existing building that is not part of the project
or that has not been programmed for renovation, a life and
fire safety review of the building may be conducted by a
suitably qualified professional. The findings and
respect to methodology, practice, testing, and other codes

and standards86. Such nationally referenced material
constitutes the acceptable fire life safety code.
3.4 Traffic Safety

Traffic accidents have become one of the most significant causes
of injuries and fatalities among members of the public worldwide.
Traffic safety should be promoted by all project personnel during
displacement to and from the workplace, and during operation of
project equipment on private or public roads. Prevention and
control of traffic related injuries and fatalities should include the
adoption of safety measures that are protective of project workers
and of road users, including those who are most vulnerable to
road traffic accidents87. Road safety initiatives proportional to the
scope and nature of project activities should include:
recommendations of the review are used as the basis to

establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a
83 For example, Australia, Canada, South Africa, United Kingdom
time frame for implementing the changes.
84 Rglementation Incendie [des ERP]
Other Hazards
Facilities, buildings, plants, and structures should be situated

to minimize potential risks from forces of nature (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007
85 USA NFPA, 2006.

86 Prepared by National Institutes and Authorities such as American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS), German Institute of

Standardization (DIN), and French Standards (NF)
87 Additional information on vulnerable users of public roads in developing
countries is provided by Peden et al., 2004.
81

WORLD BANK GROUP
Adoption of best transport safety practices across all aspects
of project operations with the goal of preventing traffic
Employing safe traffic control measures, including road signs

and flag persons to warn of dangerous conditions
accidents and minimizing injuries suffered by project

personnel and the public. Measures should include:
o
Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers
Improving driving skills and requiring licensing of drivers
Adopting limits for trip duration and arranging driver
3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials

General Hazardous Materials Transport
compliance with local laws and international requirements
rosters to avoid overtiredness

o
Projects should have procedures in place that ensure

applicable to the transport of hazardous materials, including:
Avoiding dangerous routes and times of day to reduce

the risk of accidents
IATA requirements89 for air transport
Use of speed control devices (governors) on trucks, and
IMDG Code90 sea transport
remote monitoring of driver actions
UN Model Regulations91 of other international standards

as well as local requirements for land transport
Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer

o
approved parts to minimize potentially serious accidents
Host-country commitments under the Basel Convention

on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure.
Hazardous Waste and their disposal and Rotterdam
Where the project may contribute to a significant increase in traffic
Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for
along existing roads, or where road transport is a significant
Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in
component of a project, recommended measures include:
International Trade, if applicable to the project activities
Minimizing pedestrian interaction with construction vehicles
Collaboration with local communities and responsible
(Hazmats) should include:
authorities to improve signage, visibility and overall safety of
The procedures for transportation of hazardous materials
Proper labeling of containers, including the identify and
roads, particularly along stretches located near schools or
quantity of the contents, hazards, and shipper contact
other locations where children may be present. Collaborating
information
with local communities on education about traffic and
Providing a shipping document (e.g. shipping manifest)
pedestrian safety (e.g. school education campaigns)88
that describes the contents of the load and its
Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that
associated hazards in addition to the labeling of the
appropriate first aid is provided in the event of accidents
containers. The shipping document should establish a
Using locally sourced materials, whenever possible, to
chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies to show
minimize transport distances. Locating associated facilities
that the waste was properly shipped, transported and
such as worker camps close to project sites and arranging
received by the recycling or treatment/disposal facility
worker bus transport to minimizing external traffic

89 IATA, 2005. www.iata.org
90 IMO. www.imo.org/safety
88Additional sources of information for implementation of road safety measures is
available at WHO, 1989, Ross et al., 1991, Tsunokawa and Hoban, 1997, and
OECD, 1999
APRIL 30, 2007
91 United Nations. Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations. 14th
Revised Edition. Geneva 2005.

http://www.unece.org/trans/danger/publi/unrec/rev14/14files_e.html
82

WORLD BANK GROUP
Ensuring that the volume, nature, integrity and
materials, including environmental management systems
transport are appropriate for the type and quantity of
used by the company and its contractors
Ensuring adequate transport vehicle specifications
Training employees involved in the transportation of

hazardous materials regarding proper shipping
procedures and emergency procedures
The existing criteria for the safe transportation of hazardous
protection of packaging and containers used for

hazardous material and modes of transport involved
This review should cover the management actions, preventive

measures and emergency response procedures described below.
The hazard assessment helps to determine what additional
measures may be required to complete the plan.
Using labeling and placarding (external signs on
Management Actions
transport vehicles), as required
Providing the necessary means for emergency response
Management of Change: These procedures should address:

o
on call 24 hours/day
The technical basis for changes in hazardous materials

offered for transportation, routes and/or procedures
Major Transportation Hazards
The potential impact of changes on health and safety
Guidance related to major transportation hazards should be
Modification required to operating procedures
implemented in addition to measures presented in the preceding
Authorization requirements
section for preventing or minimizing the consequences of
Employees affected
catastrophic releases of hazardous materials, which may result in
Training needs
toxic, fire, explosion, or other hazards during transportation.
Compliance Audit: A compliance audit evaluates compliance

with prevention requirements for each transportation route or
In addition to these aforementioned procedures, projects which
for each hazardous material, as appropriate. A compliance
transport hazardous materials at or above the threshold
audit covering each element of the prevention measures (see
quantities92 should prepare a Hazardous Materials Transportation
below) should be conducted at least every three years. The
Plan containing all of the elements presented below93.
audit program should include:
Hazard Assessment
Preparation of a report of the findings
The hazard assessment should identify the potential hazard
Determination and documentation of the appropriate

response to each finding
involved in the transportation of hazardous materials by reviewing:

o
The hazard characteristics of the substances identified during

the screening stage
The history of accidents, both by the company and its

contractors, involving hazardous materials transportation
92 Threshold quantities for the transport of hazardous materials are found in the UN
Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations cited above.
93
For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance

Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Transportation Manual. Washington,
D.C. December 2000.
APRIL 30, 2007
Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected.
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable

information about transportation hazards and the steps
needed to prevent accidental releases. The implementation
of incident investigation procedures should ensure that:
o
Investigations are initiated promptly
Summaries of investigations are included in a report
Report findings and recommendations are addressed

83

WORLD BANK GROUP
Reports are reviewed with staff and contractors
Employee Participation: There should be a written plan of
The plan should include procedures to implement preventive
action regarding the implementation of active employee
measures specific to each hazardous material offered for
participation in the prevention of accidents.
transportation, including:
Contractors: The plan should include procedures to ensure

that:
o
The contractor is provided with safety performance

procedures and safety and hazard information
Preventive Measures
Contractors observe safety practices
Verify that the contractor acts responsibly
Classification and segregation of hazardous materials in

warehouses and transport units
Packaging and packaging testing
Marking and labeling of packages containing hazardous

materials
Handling and securing packages containing hazardous

materials in transport units
The plan should also include additional procedures to ensure
Marking and placarding of transport units
the contractors will:
Documentation (e.g. bills of lading)
Application of special provisions, as appropriate
Ensure appropriate training for their employees
Ensure their employees know process hazards and

applicable emergency actions
Emergency Preparedness and Response
Prepare and submit training records
It is important to develop procedures and practices for the
Inform employees about the hazards presented by their
handling of hazardous materials that allow for quick and efficient
work
responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental
Training: Good training programs on operating procedures

will provide the employees with the necessary information to
understand how to operate safely and why safe operations
damage. The sponsor should prepare an Emergency

Preparedness and Response Plan that should cover:
are needed. The training program should include:
Planning Coordination: This should include procedures for:

o
Informing the public and emergency response agencies
The list of employees to be trained
Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
Specific training objectives
Taking emergency response actions
Mechanisms to achieve objectives (i.e. hands-on
Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan
workshops, videos, etc.)
to reflect changes and ensuring that the employees are
Means to determine the effectiveness of the training
informed of such changes
program
o
Training procedures for new hires and refresher
Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures

for using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining emergency
programs
response equipment.
Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant

procedures
APRIL 30, 2007
84

WORLD BANK GROUP
access to medical treatment, confidentiality and appropriate
3.6 Disease Prevention

Communicable Diseases
care, particularly with respect to migrant workers
Promoting collaboration with local authorities to enhance
Communicable diseases pose a significant public health threat
access of workers families and the community to public
worldwide. Health hazards typically associated with large
health services and promote immunization
development projects are those relating to poor sanitation and

living conditions, sexual transmission and vector-borne infections.
Vector-Borne Diseases
Communicable diseases of most concern during the construction
Reducing the impact of vector-borne disease on the long-term
phase due to labor mobility are sexually-transmitted diseases
health of workers is best accomplished through implementation of
(STDs), such as HIV/AIDS. Recognizing that no single measure
diverse interventions aimed at eliminating the factors that lead to
is likely to be effective in the long term, successful initiatives
disease. Project sponsors, in close collaboration with community
typically involve a combination of behavioral and environmental
health authorities, can implement an integrated control strategy for
modifications.
mosquito and other arthropod-borne diseases that might involve:
Recommended interventions at the project level include94:
improvements and elimination of breeding habitats close to
Providing surveillance and active screening and treatment of
human settlements
workers
Elimination of unusable impounded water
Preventing illness among workers in local communities by:
Increase in water velocity in natural and artificial channels
Considering the application of residual insecticide to
Undertaking health awareness and education initiatives,

for example, by implementing an information strategy to
dormitory walls
reinforce person-to-person counseling addressing
Implementation of integrated vector control programs
systemic factors that can influence individual behavior
Promoting use of repellents, clothing, netting, and other
as well as promoting individual protection, and

protecting others from infection, by encouraging condom
barriers to prevent insect bites
Use of chemoprophylaxis drugs by non-immune workers and
use
collaborating with public health officials to help eradicate
Training health workers in disease treatment
disease reservoirs
Conducting immunization programs for workers in local

communities to improve health and guard against
infection
Prevention of larval and adult propagation through sanitary
populations to prevent disease reservoir spread
Providing health services
Collaboration and exchange of in-kind services with other

control programs in the project area to maximize beneficial
Providing treatment through standard case management in

on-site or community health care facilities. Ensuring ready
Monitoring and treatment of circulating and migrating
effects
Educating project personnel and area residents on risks,

prevention, and available treatment
Additional sources of information on disease prevention include IFC, 2006;

UNDP, 2000, 2003; Walley et al., 2000; Kindhauser, 2003; Heymann, 2004.
94
APRIL 30, 2007
Monitoring communities during high-risk seasons to detect

and treat cases
85

WORLD BANK GROUP
Distributing appropriate education materials
Alarm bells, visual alarms, or other forms of communication
Following safety guidelines for the storage, transport, and
should be used to reliably alert workers to an emergency. Related
distribution of pesticides to minimize the potential for misuse,
measures include:
spills, and accidental human exposure
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and

Response
Testing warning systems at least annually (fire alarms

monthly), and more frequently if required by local regulations,
equipment, or other considerations
Installing a back-up system for communications on-site with
An emergency is an unplanned event when a project operation
off-site resources, such as fire departments, in the event that
loses control, or could lose control, of a situation that may result in
normal communication methods may be inoperable during an
risks to human health, property, or the environment, either within
emergency
the facility or in the local community. Emergencies do not

normally include safe work practices for frequent upsets or events
Community Notification
that are covered by occupational health and safety.
If a local community may be at risk from a potential emergency
All projects should have an Emergency Preparedness and

Response Plan that is commensurate with the risks of the facility
arising at the facility, the company should implement

communication measures to alert the community, such as:
and that includes the following basic elements:
Audible alarms, such as fire bells or sirens
Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions, etc)
Fan out telephone call lists
Organization of emergency areas (command centers,
Vehicle mounted speakers
medical stations, etc)
Communicating details of the nature of the emergency
Roles and responsibilities
Communicating protection options (evacuation, quarantine)
Communication systems
Providing advise on selecting an appropriate protection
Emergency response procedures
Emergency resources
Training and updating
Checklists (role and action list and equipment checklist)
Business Continuity and Contingency
option
Media and Agency Relations

Emergency information should be communicated to the media
through:
A trained, local spokesperson able to interact with relevant
Additional information is provided for key components of the
stakeholders, and offer guidance to the company for
emergency plan, as follows below.
speaking to the media, government, and other agencies
Communication Systems
Worker notification and communication
APRIL 30, 2007
Written press releases with accurate information, appropriate

level of detail for the emergency, and for which accuracy can
be guaranteed
86

WORLD BANK GROUP
Emergency Resources
limitations, and cost of these resources, for both site-specific
Finance and Emergency Funds
A mechanism should be provided for funding emergency
emergencies, and community or regional emergencies
activities.
additional resources may need to be maintained on-site
The company should consider the level of local fire fighting
Mutual Aid
capacity and whether equipment is available for use at the
Mutual aid agreements decrease administrative confusion and
facility in the event of a major emergency or natural disaster.
provide a clear basis for response by mutual aid providers.
If insufficient capacity is available, fire fighting capacity

should be acquired that may include pumps, water supplies,
Medical Services
The company should provide first aid attendants for the
facility as well as medical equipment suitable for the
personnel and specialized equipment.
Contact List
should include the name, description, location, and contact
likely to be required prior to transportation to hospital.
details (telephone, email) for each of the resources, and be

maintained annually.
Availability of Resources
case of an emergency include:
The emergency preparedness facilities and emergency response

plans require maintenance, review, and updating to account for
funding, expert knowledge, and materials that may be
changes in equipment, personnel, and facilities. Training
required to respond to emergencies. The list should include
programs and practice exercises provide for testing systems to
personnel with specialized expertise for spill clean-up, flood
ensure an adequate level of emergency preparedness. Programs
control, engineering, water treatment, environmental science,
should:
to the identified emergency
Tracking and managing the costs associated with emergency

resources
APRIL 30, 2007
Identify training needs based on the roles and

responsibilities, capabilities and requirements of personnel
Providing personnel who can readily call up resources, as

required
Training and Updating
Maintaining a list of external equipment, personnel, facilities,
etc., or any of the functions required to adequately respond
The company should develop a list of contact information for

all internal and external resources and personnel. The list
personnel, type of operation, and the degree of treatment
Appropriate measures for managing the availability of resources in
Where appropriate, mutual aid agreements should be

maintained with other organizations to allow for sharing of
trucks, and training for personnel.
Considering if external resources are unable to provide

sufficient capacity during a regional emergency and whether
Fire Services
Considering the quantity, response time, capability,
in an emergency
Develop a training plan to address needs, particularly for fire

fighting, spill response, and evacuation
87

WORLD BANK GROUP
Conduct annual training, at least, and perhaps more frequent

training when the response includes specialized equipment,
procedures, or hazards, or when otherwise mandated
Provide training exercises to allow personnel the opportunity

to test emergency preparedness, including:
o
Desk top exercises with only a few personnel, where the

contact lists are tested and the facilities and
communication assessed
Response exercises, typically involving drills that allow

for testing of equipment and logistics
Debrief upon completion of a training exercise to assess

what worked well and what aspects require improvement
Update the plan, as required, after each exercise. Elements

of the plan subject to significant change (such as contact
lists) should be replaced
Record training activities and the outcomes of the training
Business Continuity and Contingency

Measures to address business continuity and contingency include:
Identifying replacement supplies or facilities to allow business

continuity following an emergency. For example, alternate
sources of water, electricity, and fuel are commonly sought.
Using redundant or duplicate supply systems as part of

facility operations to increase the likelihood of business
continuity.
Maintaining back-ups of critical information in a secure

location to expedite the return to normal operations following
an emergency.
APRIL 30, 2007
88

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
4.0 Construction and Decommissioning

4.1 Environment.............................................................89
Noise and Vibration ................................................89
Soil Erosion............................................................89
Air Quality..............................................................90
Solid Waste............................................................90
Hazardous Materials...............................................91
Wastewater Discharges..........................................91
Contaminated Land ................................................91
4.2 Occupational Health and Safety................................92
4.3 Community Health and Safety ..................................94
General Site Hazards .............................................94
Disease Prevention ................................................94
Traffic Safety..........................................................95
planned during periods of the day that will result in least

disturbance
Using noise control devices, such as temporary noise

barriers and deflectors for impact and blasting activities, and
exhaust muffling devices for combustion engines.
Avoiding or minimizing project transportation through

community areas
Soil Erosion
Soil erosion may be caused by exposure of soil surfaces to rain
and wind during site clearing, earth moving, and excavation
activities. The mobilization and transport of soil particles may, in

This section provides additional, specific guidance on prevention
and control of community health and safety impacts that may
occur during new project development, at the end of the project
life-cycle, or due to expansion or modification of existing project
facilities. Cross referencing is made to various other sections of
the General EHS Guidelines.
turn, result in sedimentation of surface drainage networks, which

may result in impacts to the quality of natural water systems and
ultimately the biological systems that use these waters.
Recommended soil erosion and water system management
approaches include:
Sediment mobilization and transport
4.1 Environment{ TC "4.1

Environment" \f C \l "2" }
Reducing or preventing erosion by:

o
Scheduling to avoid heavy rainfall periods (i.e., during

the dry season) to the extent practical
Noise and Vibration
Contouring and minimizing length and steepness of

slopes
During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and
Mulching to stabilize exposed areas
vibration may be caused by the operation of pile drivers, earth
Re-vegetating areas promptly
moving and excavation equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and
Designing channels and ditches for post-construction

flows
the transportation of equipment, materials and people. Some

recommended noise reduction and control strategies to consider
in areas close to community areas include:
Lining steep channel and slopes (e.g. use jute matting)
Reducing or preventing off-site sediment transport through
Planning activities in consultation with local communities so
use of settlement ponds, silt fences, and water treatment,
that activities with the greatest potential to generate noise are
and modifying or suspending activities during extreme rainfall

and high winds to the extent practical.
APRIL 30, 2007
89

WORLD BANK GROUP
Clean runoff management
Air Quality
Segregating or diverting clean water runoff to prevent it
Construction and decommissioning activities may generate
mixing with water containing a high solids content, to
emission of fugitive dust caused by a combination of on-site
minimize the volume of water to be treated prior to release
excavation and movement of earth materials, contact of

construction machinery with bare soil, and exposure of bare soil
Road design
and soil piles to wind. A secondary source of emissions may
Limiting access road gradients to reduce runoff-induced
include exhaust from diesel engines of earth moving equipment,
erosion
as well as from open burning of solid waste on-site. Techniques to
Providing adequate road drainage based on road width,
consider for the reduction and control of air emissions from
surface material, compaction, and maintenance
construction and decommissioning sites include:
Disturbance to water bodies
watercourse crossings
equipment (water suppression, bag house, or cyclone)
cycles of valued flora and fauna (e.g., migration, spawning,
enclosures and covers, and increasing the moisture content
For in-stream works, using isolation techniques such as

berming or diversion during construction to limit the exposure
of disturbed sediments to moving water
Consider using trenchless technology for pipeline crossings

(e.g., suspended crossings) or installation by directional
drilling
Structural (slope) stability
Providing effective short term measures for slope

stabilization, sediment control and subsidence control until
long term measures for the operational phase can be
implemented
Providing adequate drainage systems to minimize and

control infiltration
Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such

as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
etc.)
Minimizing dust from open area sources, including storage

piles, by using control measures such as installing
Restricting the duration and timing of in-stream activities to

lower low periods, and avoiding periods critical to biological
Minimizing dust from material handling sources, such as

conveyors and bins, by using covers and/or control
Depending on the potential for adverse impacts, installing

free-spanning structures (e.g., single span bridges) for road
from vehicle movements
Selectively removing potential hazardous air pollutants, such

as asbestos, from existing infrastructure prior to demolition
Managing emissions from mobile sources according to

Section 1.1
Avoiding open burning of solid (refer to solid waste

management guidance in Section 1.6)
Solid Waste
Non-hazardous solid waste generated at construction and
decommissioning sites includes excess fill materials from grading
and excavation activities, scrap wood and metals, and small
concrete spills. Other non-hazardous solid wastes include office,
kitchen, and dormitory wastes when these types of operations are
part of construction project activities. Hazardous solid waste
includes contaminated soils, which could potentially be
encountered on-site due to previous land use activities, or small
APRIL 30, 2007
90

WORLD BANK GROUP
amounts of machinery maintenance materials, such as oily rags,
Wastewater Discharges
used oil filters, and used oil, as well as spill cleanup materials from
Construction and decommissioning activities may include the
oil and fuel spills. Techniques for preventing and controlling non-
generation of sanitary wastewater discharges in varying quantities
hazardous and hazardous construction site solid waste include
depending on the number of workers involved. Adequate portable
those already discussed in Section 1.6.
or permanent sanitation facilities serving all workers should be
Hazardous Materials
Construction and decommissioning activities may pose the
provided at all construction sites. Sanitary wastewater in

construction and other sites should be managed as described in
Section 1.3.
potential for release of petroleum based products, such as

lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or fuels during their storage, transfer,
Contaminated Land
or use in equipment. These materials may also be encountered
Land contamination may be encountered in sites under
during decommissioning activities in building components or
construction or decommissioning due to known or unknown
industrial process equipment. Techniques for prevention,
historical releases of hazardous materials or oil, or due to the
minimization, and control of these impacts include:
presence of abandoned infrastructure formerly used to store or
Providing adequate secondary containment for fuel storage
handle these materials, including underground storage tanks.
tanks and for the temporary storage of other fluids such as
Actions necessary to manage the risk from contaminated land will
lubricating oils and hydraulic fluids,
depend on factors such as the level and location of contamination,
Using impervious surfaces for refueling areas and other fluid
the type and risks of the contaminated media, and the intended
transfer areas
land use. However, a basic management strategy should include:
Training workers on the correct transfer and handling of fuels
and chemicals and the response to spills
protecting the safety and health of occupants of the site, the
Providing portable spill containment and cleanup equipment
surrounding community, and the environment post
on site and training in the equipment deployment
construction or post decommissioning
Assessing the contents of hazardous materials and
Understanding the historical use of the land with regard to
petroleum-based products in building systems (e.g. PCB
the potential presence of hazardous materials or oil prior to
containing electrical equipment, asbestos-containing building
initiation of construction or decommissioning activities
materials) and process equipment and removing them prior
Preparing plans and procedures to respond to the discovery
to initiation of decommissioning activities, and managing their
of contaminated media to minimize or reduce the risk to
treatment and disposal according to Sections 1.5 and 1.6 on
health, safety, and the environment consistent with the
Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Waste Management,
approach for Contaminated Land in Section 1.6
respectively
Managing contaminated media with the objective of
Preparation of a management plan to manage obsolete,
Assessing the presence of hazardous substances in or on
abandoned, hazardous materials or oil consistent with the
building materials (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos-
approach to hazardous waste management described in
containing flooring or insulation) and decontaminating or
Section 1.6.
properly managing contaminated building materials
APRIL 30, 2007
91

WORLD BANK GROUP
Successful implementation of any management strategy may
Implementing good house-keeping practices, such as the
require identification and cooperation with whoever is responsible
sorting and placing loose construction materials or demolition
and liable for the contamination.
debris in established areas away from foot paths
4.2 Occupational Health and Safety{

TC "4.2 Occupational Health and
Safety" \f C \l "2" }
Over-exertion
Over-exertion, and ergonomic injuries and illnesses, such as
repetitive motion, over-exertion, and manual handling, are among
the most common causes of injuries in construction and
decommissioning sites. Recommendations for their prevention
and control include:
Training of workers in lifting and materials handling

techniques in construction and decommissioning projects,
including the placement of weight limits above which
Cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills regularly
Locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and

marked corridors
Work in Heights
Falls from elevation associated with working with ladders,
scaffolding, and partially built or demolished structures are among
the most common cause of fatal or permanent disabling injury at
construction or decommissioning sites. If fall hazards exist, a fall
protection plan should be in place which includes one or more of
the following aspects, depending on the nature of the fall hazard95:
pounds, when working at heights equal or greater than two
Planning work site layout to minimize the need for manual
meters or at any height if the risk includes falling into
transfer of heavy loads
operating machinery, into water or other liquid, into
Selecting tools and designing work stations that reduce force
hazardous substances, or through an opening in a work
requirements and holding times, and which promote

improved postures, including, where applicable, user
adjustable work stations
surface
support 5000 pounds (also described in this section in
such as job rotations and rest or stretch breaks
Working at Heights above), as well as fall rescue procedures

to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully
Slips and Falls
arrested. The tie in point of the fall arresting system should
Slips and falls on the same elevation associated with poor

materials, liquid spills, and uncontrolled use of electrical cords and
ropes on the ground, are also among the most frequent cause of
Training and use of personal fall arrest systems, such as full

body harnesses and energy absorbing lanyards able to
Implementing administrative controls into work processes,
housekeeping, such as excessive waste debris, loose construction
Training and use of temporary fall prevention devices, such

as rails or other barriers able to support a weight of 200
mechanical assists or two-person lifts are necessary
Use of slip retardant footwear
also be able to support 5000 pounds
Use of control zones and safety monitoring systems to warn

workers of their proximity to fall hazard zones, as well as
lost time accidents at construction and decommissioning sites.

Recommended methods for the prevention of slips and falls from,
95 Additional information on identification of fall hazards and design of protection
or on, the same elevation include:
systems can be found in the United States Occupational Health and Safety
Administrations (US OSHA) web site:
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/fallprotection/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007
92

WORLD BANK GROUP
securing, marking, and labeling covers for openings in floors,
a turn while moving. Techniques for the prevention and control of
roofs, or walking surfaces
these impacts include:
Struck By Objects
machine operation, and walking areas, and controlling
Construction and demolition activities may pose significant
vehicle traffic through the use of one-way traffic routes,
hazards related to the potential fall of materials or tools, as well as
establishment of speed limits, and on-site trained flag-people
ejection of solid particles from abrasive or other types of power
wearing high-visibility vests or outer clothing covering to
tools which can result in injury to the head, eyes, and extremities.
Techniques for the prevention and control of these hazards
include:
direct traffic
Ensuring the visibility of personnel through their use of high

visibility vests when working in or walking through heavy
Using a designated and restricted waste drop or discharge
equipment operating areas, and training of workers to verify
zones, and/or a chute for safe movement of wastes from
eye contact with equipment operators before approaching the
upper to lower levels
operating vehicle
Conducting sawing, cutting, grinding, sanding, chipping or
chiseling with proper guards and anchoring as applicable
Planning and segregating the location of vehicle traffic,
Maintaining clear traffic ways to avoid driving of heavy
Ensuring moving equipment is outfitted with audible back-up

alarms
Using inspected and well-maintained lifting devices that are
equipment over loose scrap
appropriate for the load, such as cranes, and securing loads
Use of temporary fall protection measures in scaffolds and
when lifting them to higher job-site elevations.
out edges of elevated work surfaces, such as hand rails and
toe boards to prevent materials from being dislodged
Dust
Evacuating work areas during blasting operations, and using
blast mats or other means of deflection to minimize fly rock or
as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
ejection of demolition debris if work is conducted in proximity
from vehicle movements
to people or structures
Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such
Wearing appropriate PPE, such as safety glasses with side
PPE, such as dusk masks, should be used where dust levels

are excessive
shields, face shields, hard hats, and safety shoes
Confined Spaces and Excavations

Moving Machinery
Examples of confined spaces that may be present in construction
Vehicle traffic and use of lifting equipment in the movement of
or demolition sites include: silos, vats, hoppers, utility vaults,
machinery and materials on a construction site may pose
tanks, sewers, pipes, and access shafts. Ditches and trenches
temporary hazards, such as physical contact, spills, dust,
may also be considered a confined space when access or egress
emissions, and noise. Heavy equipment operators have limited
is limited. In addition to the guidance provided in Section 2.8 the
fields of view close to their equipment and may not see
occupational hazards associated with confined spaces and
pedestrians close to the vehicle. Center-articulated vehicles create
excavations in construction and decommissioning sites should be
a significant impact or crush hazard zone on the outboard side of
prevented according to the following recommendations:
APRIL 30, 2007
93

WORLD BANK GROUP
Controlling site-specific factors which may contribute to
respirators, clothing/protective suits, gloves and eye
excavation slope instability including, for example, the use of
protection
excavation dewatering, side-walls support, and slope

gradient adjustments that eliminate or minimize the risk of
collapse, entrapment, or drowning
Providing safe means of access and egress from

excavations, such as graded slopes, graded access route, or
stairs and ladders
Avoiding the operation of combustion equipment for

prolonged periods inside excavations areas where other
workers are required to enter unless the area is actively
ventilated
Other Site Hazards

Construction and decommissioning sites may pose a risk of
exposure to dust, chemicals, hazardous or flammable materials,
and wastes in a combination of liquid, solid, or gaseous forms,
which should be prevented through the implementation of project-
4.3 Community Health and Safety{ TC

"4.3 Community Health and Safety" \f
C \l "2" }
General Site Hazards
Projects should implement risk management strategies to protect
the community from physical, chemical, or other hazards
associated with sites under construction and decommissioning.
Risks may arise from inadvertent or intentional trespassing,
including potential contact with hazardous materials, contaminated
soils and other environmental media, buildings that are vacant or
under construction, or excavations and structures which may pose
falling and entrapment hazards. Risk management strategies may
include:
Restricting access to the site, through a combination of
specific plans and other applicable management practices,
institutional and administrative controls, with a focus on high
including:
risk structures or areas depending on site-specific situations,
waste materials from tanks, vessels, processing equipment

or contaminated land as a first step in decommissioning
activities to allow for safe excavation, construction,
dismantling or demolition
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and selectively

remove potentially hazardous materials in building elements
prior to dismantling or demolition including, for example,
insulation or structural elements containing asbestos and
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), electrical components
containing mercury96
including fencing, signage, and communication of risks to the
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and remove
local community
Removing hazardous conditions on construction sites that

cannot be controlled affectively with site access restrictions,
such as covering openings to small confined spaces,
ensuring means of escape for larger openings such as
trenches or excavations, or locked storage of hazardous
materials
Disease Prevention
Increased incidence of communicable and vector-borne diseases
attributable to construction activities represents a potentially
Use of waste-specific PPE based on the results of an
serious health threat to project personnel and residents of local
occupational health and safety assessment, including
communities. Recommendations for the prevention and control of
96 Additional information on the management and removal of asbestos containing
communicable and vector-borne diseases also applicable to
building materials can be found in ASTM Standard E2356 and E1368
APRIL 30, 2007
94

WORLD BANK GROUP
construction phase activities are provided in Section 3.6 (Disease

Prevention).
Traffic Safety
Construction activities may result in a significant increase in
movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of construction
materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related
accidents and injuries to workers and local communities. The
incidence of road accidents involving project vehicles during
construction should be minimized through a combination of
education and awareness-raising, and the adoption of procedures
described in Section 3.4 (Traffic Safety).
APRIL 30, 2007
95

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
References and Additional Sources

ATSDR (Agency for Toxic Substance and Disease Registry). Quick Reference
Pocket Guide for Toxicological Profiles. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxguides/
(accessed May 19, 2006).
Chavasse, D.C. and H.H. Yap, eds. 1997. Chemical Methods for the Control of
Vectors and Pests of Public Health Importance. Geneva, Switzerland: World
Health Organization.
ATSDR. 2005. Top 20 Hazardous Substances 2005.

http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/cxcx3.html (accessed May 19, 2006).
Dockrill, Paul and Frank Friedrich. 2001. Boilers and Heaters: Improving Energy
Efficiency. NRCAN.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/boilersheaters.pdf
Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA). 2000. Air Pollution Engineering
Manual, Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, NY.
ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). 2005.
Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment.
Cincinnati:ACGIH.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Homepage. http://www.ansi.org/
ADB. 2003. Road Safety Audit for Road Projects: An Operational Tool. Asian
Development Bank, Manila.
Environment Canada, 2005. Hazardous Waste.

http://www.atl.ec.gc.ca/pollution/hazardouswaste.html (accessed May 19, 2006).
European Commission. 2000. Guidance Document for EPER implementation.
Directorate-General for Environment.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm
European Council Directive 91/271 of 21 May 1991 concerning urban wastewater
treatment (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/waterurbanwaste/info/docs_en.htm)
American Petroleum Institute, Management of Process Hazards (R.P. 750).
EPER (European Pollutant Emission Register). Homepage.

http://www.eper.cec.eu.int/eper/default.asp (accessed May 19, 2006).
Assum, T. 1998. Road Safety in Africa: Appraisal of Road Safety Initiatives in

Five African Countries. Working Paper No. 33. The World Bank and United
Nations Economic Commission for Africa.
EREC (European Renewable Energy Council). 2006. Renewable Energy Sources.

http://www.erec-renewables.org/sources/default.htm (accessed April 24, 2006).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1739-95(2002) Standard

Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites
ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at
chemical release sites).
ASTM E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement
Projects
ASTM E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys
ASTM E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of
Installed Asbestos Cement Products.
Australian Government. NPI Industry Reporting. Department of the Environment
and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/
Australian Government. 2004. National Pollutant Inventory Guide. Department
Of Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf
Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines
available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
Bringezu, Stefan and Helmut Schutz. 2001. Material use indicators for the
European Union, 1980-1997 Economy-side material flow accounts and balances
and derived indicators of resource use. European Commission.
http://www.belspo.be/platformisd/Library/Material%20use%20Bringezu.PDF
BC MOE (BC Ministry of Environment). Guidance on Contaminated Sites.
http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance/ (accessed May 18,
2006)
CIWMB (California Integrated Waste Management Board). Sustainable Materials.
State Training Manual.
http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/GreenBuilding/Training/StateManual/Materials.doc
(accessed May 18, 2006)
CCPS (Center for Chemical Process Safety). Homepage. American Institute of
Chemical Engineers. www.aiche.org/ccps (accessed May 18, 2006)
CCPS. 1992. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of
Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007
EUROPA. Summaries of Legislation: Air Pollution.

http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm (accessed March 25, 2006)
Fairman, Robyn, Carl D.Mead, and W. Peter Williams. 1999. Environmental Risk
Assessment - Approaches, Experiences and Information Sources. London:
Monitoring and Assessment Research Centre, King's College,.
http://reports.eea.eu.int/GH-07-97-595-EN-C2/en
FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization). 1995. Guidelines on Good Labeling
Practices for Pesticides. Rome: FAO.
http://ecoport.org/Resources/Refs/Pesticid/Guides/guides.htm
FAO. 1985. Guidelines for the Packaging and Storage of Pesticides. Rome:
FAO http://www.fao.org/ag/AGP/AGPP/Pesticid/Code/Download/pacstor.doc
Francey, R., J. Pickford and R. Reed. 1992. A Guide to the Development of Onsite Sanitation. Geneva: World Health Organization.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/hygiene/envsan/onsitesan/en/print.html
GVRD (Greater Vancouver Regional District). 1999. Caring for our Waterways:
Liquid Waste Management Plan Stage 2, Discussion Document. 136 pp.
GVRD. 2001. Liquid Waste Management Plan. Greater Vancouver: Stormwater
Management Technical Advisory Task Group.
http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/sewerage/lwmp_feb2001/lwmp_plan_feb2001.pdf
IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America). Homepage.
http://www.iesna.org/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
Industry Canada. Eco-efficiency. http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/internet/ineeee.nsf/en/Home (accessed May 18, 2006)
IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). National Greenhouse Gas
Inventories Program. http://www.ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
ILO-OSH (International Labour Organization Occupational Safety and Health).
2001. Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems.
Geneva: International Labour
Office. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/cops/english/download
/e000013.pdf
ICC (International Code Council). 2006. International Building Code. Falls
Church, Virginia: ICC.
96

WORLD BANK GROUP
IATA (International Air Transport Association). 2005. Dangerous Goods

Regulations Manual. Geneva: IATA. http://www.iata.org/ps/publications/9065.htm
IAEA (International Atomic Energy Agency). International Basic Safety Standard
for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources
http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 (accessed May
19, 2006).
IHS 1996. ISO 9613 Acoustics Attenuation of sound during propagation
outdoors Part 2: General method of calculation.
http://engineers.ihs.com/document/abstract/XVNLCAAAAAAAAAAA (accessed
May 19, 2006).
IMO (International Maritime Organization). International Maritime Dangerous
Goods Code. http://www.imo.org/Safety/mainframe.asp?topic_id=158 (accessed
May 18, 2006)
ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Quality and Environmental
Management. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html (accessed May
18, 2006)
IOMC (Inter-Organization Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals.
2001. The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and
Guidelines to Classification 2000-2002. International Program on Chemical
Safety. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2002/a76526.pdf
Kates, R., Hohenemser, C., and J. Kasperson, Editors. 1985. Perilous Progress:
Management the Hazards of Technology. Westview Press, London.
Knowlton, R. Ellis. 1992. A Manual of Hazard & Operability Studies. Chemetics
International.
LDAR (Leak Detection and Repair Professionals). http://www.ldar.net/ (accessed
May 18, 2006).
Lijzen, J.P.A., A.J. Baars, P.F. Otte, M.G.J. Rikken, F.A. Swartjes, E.M.J.
Verbruggen and A.P. van Wezel. 2001. Technical evaluation of the Intervention
Values for Soil/sediment and Groundwater - Human and ecotoxicological risk
assessment and derivation of risk limits for soil, aquatic sediment and
groundwater. RIVM report 711701 023. Netherlands National Institute of Public
Health and the Environment.
http://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/711701023.pdf
NRCAN. 2004. EnerGuide for Industry: Your guide to selecting energy-efficient

industrial equipment. Office of Energy Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/Energuide-industry/EGIbrochure-e.cfm
NRCAN. Energy Star - Heating, Cooling and Ventilation. Office of Energy
Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&printvie
w=N#AC (accessed April 9, 2006)
NRCAN. Technical Factsheet CanMOST Canadian Motor Selection Tool. Office
of Energy Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/canadian-motor/index.cfm
NRCAN. 2005a. Team up for Energy Savings - Compressed Air. Office of Energy
Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/compressed-air.pdf
NRCAN. 2005b. Team up for Energy Savings Lighting. Office of Energy
Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/light.pdf
NRCAN. 2006a. Model National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB) for the
Commercial Building Incentive Program.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/newbuildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20 (accessed March 24, 2006)
NRCAN. 2006b. Office of Energy Efficiency General Database.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/infosource/PDFs (accessed March 24, 2006)
NRCAN. 2006c. Office of Energy Efficiency Industry Projects Database.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/home/index.cfm?act=category&cate
gory=07&PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006)
NRCAN. 2006d. Energy Efficiency Regulations and Standards for Industry
Canadas Energy Efficiency Regulations.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/industrial/regulations-standards/index.cfm?attr=24
(accessed April 24, 2006)
New Zealand Ministry of the Environment. 2004. Contaminated Land
Management Guidelines No.5: Site Investigation and Analysis of Soils. Federal
Government of New Zealand.
http://www.mfe.govt.nz/publications/hazardous/contaminated-land-mgmtguidelines-no5/index.html
Massachusetts Department of Environment. Cleanup Sites and Spills.

http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup (accessed May 19, 2006).
North American Energy Working Group. North American Energy Efficiency

Standards and Labeling.
MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration). Homepage. http://www.msha.gov/

Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Database on

Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals. http://appli1.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf
NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health). Center for Disease
Control and Prevention Department of Health and Human Services.
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html (accessed May 18, 2006)
OECD. 1999. Safety Strategies for Rural Roads. Organization for Economic
Cooperation and Development, Paris. www.oecd.org/dataoecd/59/2/2351720.pdf
National Research Council of Canada, 2005. Building Codes. http://www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/doingbusiness/codes_e.html (accessed May 18, 2006).
NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). Electric Motors Factsheet 6. Office of
Energy Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/regulations/html/Factsheet6.cfm?text=N&printview=N
NRCAN. Energy-Efficient Motor Systems Assessment Guide. Office of Energy
Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/cipec/ieep/newscentre/motor_system/introduction.cfm?text=
N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006)
NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). EnerGuide Program. Office of Energy
Efficiency.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N
(accessed March 24, 2006)
APRIL 30, 2007
OHSAS. 2000. OHSAS 18002:2000. Occupational Health and Safety

Management Systems - Guidelines for the Implementation of OHSAS 18001.
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). Emergency Standards.
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/evacuation/standards_card.html (accessed May
18, 2006)
OSHA. Safety and Health Topics - Toxic Metals.
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/metalsheavy/ (accessed May 19, 2006)
Peden, Margie, David Sleet, Adnan Hyder and Colin Mathers, eds. 2004. World
Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention. Geneva: World Health Organization.
http://www.who.int/world-health-day/2004/infomaterials/world_report/en/
PDEP (Pennsylvania Department of Environment Protection). Official Recycled
Product Guide. http://www.dep.state.pa.us/wm_apps/recycledproducts/ (accessed
May 18, 2006)
97

WORLD BANK GROUP
PTCL (Physical and Theoretical Chemistry Lab). Safety (MSDS) data for
benzo(a)pyrene. http://www.physchem.ox.ac.uk/MSDS/BE/benzo(a)pyrene.html
(US DOE). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers Combustion.

http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/combustion.html#opp1 (accessed
April 30, 2006).
Prokop, Gundula. 2002. Second Technical Workshop on Contaminated Sites Workshop Proceedings and Follow-up. European Environment Agency.
http://reports.eea.europa.eu/technical_report_2002_76/en/Tech76.pdf
US DOE (US Department of Energy). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers

Process Heating Systems.
http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html (accessed April 30,
2006).
Ritter, L., K.R. Solomon, J. Forget, M. Stemeroff and C.OLeary. An Assessment

Report on: DDT-Aldrin-Dieldrin-Endrin-Chlordane, Heptachlor-Hexachlorobenzene,
Mirex-Toxaphene, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Dioxins and Furans. International
Programme on Chemical Safety.
http://www.pops.int/documents/background/assessreport/en/ritteren.pdf (accessed
May 18, 2006)
Ross A, Baguley C, Hills B, McDonald M, Solcock D.1991. Towards Safer Roads
in Developing Countries: A Guide for Planners and Engineers. Berkshire:
Transport and Road Research Laboratory.
US DOE. Industry Plant Managers and Engineers Steam Boilers.

http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/steam.html (accessed April 30,
2006).
US DOE. Industrial Technologies Program Best Practices.
http://www1.eere.energy.gov/industry/bestpractices/ (accessed April 30, 2006)
US DOE. The Big Picture on Process Heating. Industrial Technologies Program
Best Practices.
http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/em_proheat_bigpict.pdf
(accessed April 30, 2006).
Rushbrook, P. and M. Pugh. 1998. Solid Waste Landfills in Middle- and LowerIncome Countries: A Technical Guide to Planning, Design, and Operation. World
Bank. http://wwwwds.worldbank.org/external/default/WDSContentServer/IW3P/IB/2002/12/06/0000
94946_02112104104987/Rendered/PDF/multi0page.pdf
US DOE. 2005. Improve Motor System Efficiency for a Broader Range of Motors
with MotorMaster+ International. Industrial Technologies Program.
http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/mmplus_international.pdf
SCPOP (Stockholm Convention on POPs). Guidance Documents.

http://www.pops.int/documents/guidance/ (accessed May 19, 2006)
US DOT (US Department of Transportation). HAZMATS Regulations.

http://hazmat.dot.gov/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
Tsunokawa, Koji and Christopher Hoban, eds. 1997. Roads and the
Environment: A Handbook. Washington, D.C.: World Bank.
http://www.worldbank.org/transport/publicat/reh/toc.htm
US Energy Star Program. Guidelines for Energy Management.

http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines (accessed
April 24, 2006)
UK Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. http://www.defra.gov.uk/

US Energy Star Program. Tools and Resources.

http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=tools_resources.bus_energy_management
_tools_resources (accessed April 9, 2006)
UK Environment Agency. Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA).

http://www.environmentagency.gov.uk/subjects/landquality/113813/672771/?version=1&lang=_e
US EPA (US Environmental Protection Agency). Air Compliance Advisor.

http://www.epa.gov/ttn/ecas/ACA.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
UN/ECE (United Nations/Economic Commission for Europe). United Nations

Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations.
http://www.unece.org/trans/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
UN/ECE. The Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook.
http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm (accessed May 18, 2006).
UNEP (United Nation Environment Program). Secretariat of the Basel Convention
on Hazardous Waste Management. http://www.basel.int/index.html (accessed
May 18, 2006)
UNEP. Persistant Organic Pollutants. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/ (accessed
May 18, 2006)
US EPA. Ambient Air Monitoring QA Program.

http://www.epa.gov/airprogm/oar/oaqps/qa/index.html#guidance (accessed May
19, 2006).
US EPA. Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines Product Fact Sheets.
http://www.epa.gov/cpg/factshts.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
US EPA. EPA Guidance. Environmentally Preferable Purchasing.
http://www.epa.gov/oppt/epp/pubs/guidance/guidancepage.htm (accessed May
18, 2006)
US EPA. Hazardous Waste. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/hazwaste.htm
US EPA. Hazardous Waste Identification.
http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/id/id.htm#id (accessed May 19, 2006).
UNEP. Country contributions: Information on the regulatory status of POPs; bans,

restrictions, and/or other legal permitted uses.
http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/POPs_Inc/INC_3/inf-english/inf3-9/sect5.pdf
US EPA. Major Environmental Laws. Laws and Regulations.

http://www.epa.gov/epahome/laws.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
UNEP. 1993. Cleaner Production Worldwide Volume 1.

http://www.uneptie.org/PC/cp/library/catalogue/regional_reports.htm .
US EPA. Performance Track Assistance. National Environmental Performance

Track. http://www.epa.gov/performancetrack/ptrackassist.htm (accessed May 18,
2006)
UNEP. 1997. The Environmental Management of Industrial Estates. Industry and

Environment, United Nations Environment Programme.
US EPA 40 CFR Part 133, Secondary Treatment Regulation

(http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_02/40cfr133_02.html)
US DOE. Building Toolbox Boilers. Building Technologies Program.

http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/components/hvac/boilers.html
(accessed April 30, 2006)
US EPA. Persistant Organic Pollutants (POPs).

http://www.epa.gov/oppfead1/international/pops.htm (accessed May 19, 2006)
US DOE. 2002. Heating and Cooling Equipment Selection. Office of Building

Technology, State and Community Programs Energy Efficiency and Renewable
Energy. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/documents/pdfs/26459.pdf
APRIL 30, 2007
US EPA. Pollution Prevention Highlights. http://www.epa.gov/p2/ (accessed May

18, 2006)
98

WORLD BANK GROUP
US EPA. Region 9 Preliminary Remediation Goals.

http://www.epa.gov/region9/waste/sfund/prg/ (accessed May 19, 2006).
US EPA. Technology Transfer Network Clearinghouse for Inventories and
Emissions Factors. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/
US EPA. Waste Minimization. http://www.epa.gov/wastemin/ (accessed May 19,
2006).
US EPA. 1991. Technical support document for water quality-based toxic control.
Washington, DC.: Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Office of Water
Regulations and Standards.
WHO. 2000a. Guidelines for the Purchase of Public Health Pesticides.

WHO/CDS/WHOPES/2000.1. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and
Eradication, World Health Organization.
WHO. 2000b. Air Quality Guidelines for Europe. Geneva:WHO.
http://www.euro.who.int/document/e71922.pdf
WHO. 2000. Towards an Assessment of the Socioeconomic Impact of Arsenic
Poisoning in Bangladesh. WHO/SDE/WSH/00.4. World Health Organization.
WHO. 2001. Chemistry and Specifications of Pesticides. Technical Report Series
899. Geneva: WHO.
US EPA. 2004. National Recommended Water Quality Criteria. Washington. DC:

United States Office of Water. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Science
and Technology (4304T).
WHO. 2003. Draft Guidelines for the Management of Public Health Pesticides.
Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health
Organization. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2003/WHO_CDS_WHOPES_2003.7.pdf
US EPA. 2005. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA). Pesticides Re-registration.

http://www.epa.gov/oppad001/reregistration/cca/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
WHO. 2004. Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality - Volume 1 Recommendations.

Geneva: WHO.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/GDWQ2004web.pdf
US EPA. 2006. 40CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, section 302.4, Designation of

Hazardous Substances. http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/textidx?c=ecfr&sid=a1d39cb9632558b450b2d09e45b5ca78&rgn=div8&view=text&nod
e=40:27.0.1.1.2.0.1.4&idno=40
USGS (US Geological Survey). 2000. Recycled AggregatesProfitable Resource
Conservation. USGS Fact Sheet FS18199. http://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs-018199/fs-0181-99so.pdf
US NFPA (US National Fire Protection Association). 2006. 101- Life Safety Code
Handbook.
http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target%
5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search (accessed May 19, 2006).
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1910.119 App
A, Threshold Quantities.
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29CFR Part 1910.120,
Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard.
WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume
2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html
WHO. 2005. Guidelines for drinking-water quality.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3/en/ (accessed May 18,
2006)
Woolliams, J. 2002. Planning, Design and Construction Strategies for Green
Buildings. Eco-City Planning Company.
http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategies_g
uide.pdf
Yassi, A. et al. 1998. Basic Environmental Health. WHO/EHG/98.19. Office of
Global and Integrated Environmental Health, World Health Organization, Geneva.
Zaim, M. 2002. Global Insecticide Use for Vector-Borne Disease Control.
WHO/CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2002.2. Communicable Disease Control,
Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization.
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1910.119.

WHO. 1987. Technology for Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing
Countries. Technical Report Series No. 742. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1989. New Approaches to Improve Road Safety. Technical Report 781b.
World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1993. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 1:
Recommendations. 2nd Edition. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1994. Operation and Maintenance of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation
Systems: A Guide for Managers. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1996. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 2: Health Criteria and
Other Supporting Information. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1997. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 3: Surveillance and
Control of Community Supplies. World Health Organization, Geneva.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq2v1/en/index2.html
WHO. 1999. Draft Specifications for Bacterial Larvicides for Public Health Use.
WHO/CDS/CPC/WHOPES/99.2. Communicable Diseases Prevention and
Control, WHO Pesticide Evaluation Scheme, World Health Organization.
WHO. 1999. Prevention and Control of Dengue and Dengue Haemorrhagic
Fever: Comprehensive Guidelines. WHO Regional Publication, SEARO No. 29.
Regional Office for South-East Asia, World Health Organization, New Delhi.
WHO. 1999. Safety of Pyrethroid-Treated Mosquito Nets.
WHO/CDS/CPE/WHOPES/99.5. World Health Organization, Geneva.
APRIL 30, 2007
99

Tarbelaassessment PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Tarbelaassessment PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

TARBELA 4TH EXTENSION

Prepared by Independent Consultants

Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1

Background ................................................................................................ 1-1

The Proposed Project .................................................................................. 1-1

The Environmental and Social Assessment ................................................. 1-3

Composition of Study Team ....................................................................... 1-5

Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework................................................... 2-1

General ....................................................................................................... 2-1

Pakistan ...................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 2-1

World Bank .............................................................................................. 2-10

2.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 2-10

Tarbela Dam Project Overview ................................................................... 3-1

Objectives of 4th Extension Project ............................................................ 3-1

Salient Features .......................................................................................... 3-1

Project Components.................................................................................... 3-1

3.4.1 Intake Arrangement......................................................................... 3-4

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

3.5.3 Waste Generation and Disposal ..................................................... 3-13

3.6.1 Construction Method of Tunnel 4 Raised Intake ............................ 3-14

Need for Project and Analysis of Alternatives................................................... 4-1

Need for Project ......................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-9

Introduction ................................................................................................ 5-1

Objectives .................................................................................................. 5-1

Identification of Stakeholders ..................................................................... 5-1

5.3.1 Primary Stakeholders ...................................................................... 5-2

5.4.1 Stakeholder Consultation during the Scoping Phase ........................ 5-3

Consultations during Project Execution ...................................................... 5-8

Information Disclosure ............................................................................... 5-8

Environmental and Social Baseline.................................................................... 6-1

Overview .................................................................................................... 6-1

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

Physical Environment ................................................................................. 6-1

6.2.1 Physiography .................................................................................. 6-1

6.3.1 Wetlands and biodiversity ............................................................. 6-20

Overview ...................................................................................... 6-27

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

6.4.9 Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Social

Risk of Earthquakes .................................................................................... 7-1

Risk of Flooding ......................................................................................... 7-1

Climate Change .......................................................................................... 7-2

General ....................................................................................................... 8-1

Assessment of Effects and Significance ...................................................... 8-1

8.2.1 Magnitude ....................................................................................... 8-1

Impacts during Pre-construction Stage ...................................................... 8-10

8.4.1 Land Use Change .......................................................................... 8-10

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

Impacts during Operation and Maintenance .............................................. 8-20

Potential Impacts on Irrigation Water Releases ............................. 8-20

General ....................................................................................................... 9-1

Summary of Assessed Impacts.................................................................... 9-1

Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage ....................................................... 9-4

9.3.1 Land Impacts .................................................................................. 9-4

9.4.1 Employment Opportunities during Construction.............................. 9-4

9.5.1 Community Development Assistance .............................................. 9-9

Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project

11.3.1 Inclusion of ESMP in Contract Documents ................................... 11-1

List of Flora and Fauna